manualshive.com logo in svg

NEC Univerge SV8100, Features And Specifications Manual

Share
Download
NEC Univerge SV8100 Features And Specifications Manual Download Page 1189

UNIVERGE SV8100

Issue 13.0

Music on Hold

2 - 1155

10-04-02

Music on Hold Setup – Music on 
Hold Tone Selection

When Program 10-04-01 is set to 
Internal MOH, define the music 
that is played for Music on Hold.

[When Item 1 is 0]
1 = Download File1
2 = Download File2
3 = Download File3
[When Item 1 is 1, 2, or 
3]
1~100 = VRS Message 
Number
(default not assigned)

10-04-03

Music on Hold Setup – Audio 
Gain Setup

Set the Music on Hold audio gain 
(1~63).

1~63 (-15.5 +15.5dB)
[default = 32 (0dB)]

10-21-04

CD-CP00-US Hardware Setup – 
External Source I/O Selection on 
CD-CP00-US

Define how the I/O ports on the 
CD-CP00-US are used.

0 = External MOH 
(CN8)/ External 
Speaker(CN9)
1 = BGM source 
(CN8)/ External 
Speaker (CN9)
2 = External MOH 
(CN8)/BGM source 
(CN9)

Relationship 
between CN 
number and 
Relay number are 
as follows:

CN8 = Relay2 
CN9 = Relay1

(default = 1)

14-08-01

Music on Hold Source for Trunks 
– MOH Type

Set the Music on Hold source for 
each trunk.

0 = Internal/External 
MOH
1 = Customer Provided 
Source Connected to 
BGM Port
2 = Customer Provided 
Source Connected to 
ACI Port
(default = 0)

14-08-02

Music on Hold Source Port 
Number – Source Port Number

If the MOH type is 2 in Program 
14-08-01, for each trunk enter the 
ACI source port number (1~96).

Source port 0-96 
(default = 0)

20-06-01

Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a Class of Service (1~15) 
to an extension.

Day Night/Mode:  1~8
Class of Service of 
Extensions (1~15)
Default:
Extension port 101 = 
Class 15
All other extension port 
= Class 1

Program 

Number

Program Name

Description/Comments

Assigned Data

Level

1

2

3

Summary of Contents for Univerge SV8100

Page 1: ...Features and Specifications Manual INT 2067 UNIV Issue 13 0 Version 9500 ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ... LLC Pentium is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries AutoTalk is a trademark of Uniden America Corporation ViewCall and ViewMail are registered trademarks of Active Voice LLC Adobe Flash and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries The Google Chrome bro...

Page 4: ......

Page 5: ...bution The UNIVERGE SV8100 system meets the customer needs today and as business expands the system can be expanded to grow as well The UNIVERGE SV8100 system has a set of manuals that provide all the information necessary to install and support the system This preface describes these manuals SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS UNIVERGE SV8100 General Description Manual This Manual provides general information a...

Page 6: ...UNIVERGE SV8100 Programming Manual This manual provides instructions for programming the UNIVERGE SV8100 system using a multiline terminal or PC ...

Page 7: ...his Chapter 2 1 Section 2 Important Notes 2 2 Section 3 IPK II to UNIVERGE SV8100 Feature Comparison List 2 2 Section 4 Features 2 11 Account Code Forced Verified Unverified 2 13 Account Code Entry 2 21 Alarm 2 27 Alarm Reports 2 31 Alphanumeric Display 2 45 Analog Communications Interface ACI 2 49 Ancillary Device Connection 2 57 Answer Hold 2 61 Answer Key 2 65 Attendant Call Queuing 2 69 Automa...

Page 8: ... with Follow Me 2 189 Call Forwarding Off Premise 2 193 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override 2 209 Call Monitoring 2 213 Call Redirect 2 221 Call Waiting Camp On 2 225 Callback 2 231 Caller ID Call Return 2 235 Caller ID 2 239 Memo Display Function 2 244 Caller ID Flexible Ringing 2 257 Central Office Calls Answering 2 265 Central Office Calls Placing 2 277 Class of Service 2 289 Clock Calendar...

Page 9: ...Number Preview 2 425 Digital Trunk Clocking 2 429 Direct Inward Dialing DID 2 435 Direct Inward Line DIL 2 457 Direct Inward System Access DISA 2 463 Direct Station Selection DSS Console 2 481 Directed Call Pickup 2 491 Directory Dialing 2 495 Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns 2 499 Do Not Disturb 2 511 Door Box 2 517 Drop Key 2 525 Dterm Cordless II Terminal 2 529 Dterm Cordless Lite I...

Page 10: ...753 Howler Tone Service 2 759 Instant Access Application IAA 2 761 Intercom 2 765 IP Multiline Station SIP 2 773 NAPT Traversal 2 781 IP Multiline Station SIP ML440 Cordless 2 797 IP Multiline Station SIP ML440 G566 G266 with AP400 AP300 2 813 IP Single Line Telephone SIP 2 833 STD SIP Transfer Unattended 2 844 IP Single Line Telephone SIP NAT Mode 2 859 IP Trunk SIP Session Initiation Protocol 2 ...

Page 11: ...5 Last Number Redial 2 1003 Licensing 2 1007 Temporary License 2 1013 Line Preference 2 1023 Long Conversation Cutoff 2 1029 Loop Keys 2 1033 Maintenance 2 1039 Meet Me Conference 2 1041 Meet Me Paging 2 1045 Meet Me Paging Transfer 2 1051 Memo Dial 2 1057 Message Waiting 2 1061 MH240 Wireless IP Telephone 2 1069 Microphone Cutoff 2 1105 Mobile Extension 2 1109 Callback to Cell Phone 2 1117 Multip...

Page 12: ...er 2 1265 Prime Line Selection 2 1269 Private Line 2 1275 Programmable Function Keys 2 1281 Programming from a Multiline Terminal 2 1287 Pulse to Tone Conversion 2 1291 Redial Function 2 1295 Remote System Upgrade 2 1299 Repeat Redial 2 1303 Resident System Program 2 1307 Reverse Voice Over 2 1309 Ring Groups 2 1313 Ringdown Extension Internal External 2 1319 Room Monitor 2 1323 Save Number Dialed...

Page 13: ...al System Group Station 2 1471 Speed Dial Telephone Book 2 1491 Station Hunt 2 1499 Station Message Detail Recording 2 1503 Station Name Assignment User Programmable 2 1529 Station Relocation 2 1533 SV8100 Internal Router 2 1537 SV8100 NetLink 2 1541 NetLink Multi SIP Carrier 2 1547 SV8100 PoE Gigabit Switch 2 1559 SV8100 UC Desktop Suite Applications 2 1567 SV8100 SV8300 Terminals 2 1593 Synchron...

Page 14: ...iform Numbering Network 2 1805 Universal Slots 2 1813 User Programming Ability 2 1829 Virtual Extensions 2 1831 VM8000 InMail 2 1843 VM8000 InMail Park and Page 2 1893 VM8000 InMail Upload Download Audio 2 1901 VM8000 InMail Automatic Access to VM by Caller ID 2 1911 VM8000 InMail Cascade Message Notification 2 1919 VM8000 InMail Email Notification 2 1945 VM8000 InMail Find Me Follow Me 2 1955 VM8...

Page 15: ...Voice Response System VRS Call Forwarding Park and Page 2 2077 Volume Controls 2 2083 Warning Tone for Long Conversation 2 2087 Wireless DECT SIP 2 2091 Off Hook Signaling 2 2102 Caller ID Display After a Call Transfer 2 2103 Out of Range Call Warning Notification 2 2104 Chapter 3 Codes Tables Section 1 About This Chapter 3 1 Section 2 Simplifying Multiline Terminal Operations with One Touch Key O...

Page 16: ...___________________________________________________________ x Table of Contents ___________________________________________________________________________________ Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 17: ...xample 2 2 431 Figure 2 6 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 3 2 431 Figure 2 7 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 4 2 431 Figure 2 8 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 5 2 432 Figure 2 9 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 6 2 432 Figure 2 10 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 7 2 432 Figure 2 11 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 8 2 433 Figure 2 12 Trunk Distinctive Ringing Flow Chart 2 501 Figure 2 13 ICM Distinctive ...

Page 18: ...1 Example Callback to Cell Phone 2 1117 Figure 2 32 PC Programming Overview 2 1246 Figure 2 33 PCPro Connection Dialog 2 1247 Figure 2 34 WebPro Login Screen 2 1248 Figure 2 35 WebPro Home Page 2 1248 Figure 2 36 Maintenance Debug Screen 2 1249 Figure 2 37 WebPro End User Screen 2 1250 Figure 2 38 Idle Terminal Display 2 1351 Figure 2 39 Confirm Ring Time DIsplay 2 1351 Figure 2 40 No Answer Displ...

Page 19: ... 2 1461 Figure 2 59 Editing a NEC Meeting 2 1462 Figure 2 60 NEC Meeting Delete 2 1463 Figure 2 61 NEC Meeting Delete Confirmation 2 1463 Figure 2 62 Delete NEC Meeting 2 1463 Figure 2 63 NEC Meeting Delete Confirmation 2 1464 Figure 2 64 Email and iCalendar for Recurring Meeting 2 1464 Figure 2 65 Conference Scheduled from Web UI 2 1465 Figure 2 66 Meeting Scheduled Example 2 1465 Figure 2 67 Can...

Page 20: ...9 Figure 2 87 Uniform Call Distribution UCD Priority Call Routing 2 1797 Figure 2 88 Uniform Call Distribution UCD Circular Routing 2 1798 Figure 2 89 VM8000 InMail User Pro Login Diagram 2 1902 Figure 2 90 Example User Access to Voice Mail 2 1911 Figure 2 91 Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart 1 2 1922 Figure 2 92 Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart 2 2 1923 Figure 2 93 Cascade Message No...

Page 21: ...___ ___________________________________________________________________________________ Figure 2 102 Program 25 06 VRS DISA 1 digit Code Attendant Setup Example 4 2 2062 Figure 2 103 VRS User Pro Login Diagram 2 2070 Figure 2 104 IP DECT 2nd Indication 2 2102 Figure 2 105 IP DECT Caller ID Display 2 2103 Figure 2 106 Out of Range Example 2 2104 ...

Page 22: ...___________________________________________________________ xvi List of Figures ___________________________________________________________________________________ Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 23: ...or Entering Names 2 252 Table 2 9 Caller ID Matching Rule 2 259 Table 2 10 Dial Tone Detection Program Interaction 2 424 Table 2 11 Example 2 Manual Change 2 440 Table 2 12 Example 1 Monday Friday 2 442 Table 2 13 Example 2 Saturday 2 442 Table 2 14 Example 3 Sunday 2 442 Table 2 15 LED Flash Patterns 2 455 Table 2 16 Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns 2 499 Table 2 17 Basic Tone Table T...

Page 24: ... Service Tone Setup Program 80 01 02 2 709 Table 2 35 Migration Supported Blades 2 741 Table 2 36 Valid Room Status Changes when Program 42 01 06 is set to 1 Enabled 2 741 Table 2 37 Valid Room Status Changes when Program 42 01 06 is set to 0 Disabled 2 742 Table 2 38 Extension Busy Setup 2 758 Table 2 39 DT700 Series Supported Features IAA 2 762 Table 2 40 Default Incoming Ringing Tone 2 770 Tabl...

Page 25: ...d in Slot 6 2 987 Table 2 60 CD PVAA Blade Installed in Slot 4 and Slot 6 2 987 Table 2 61 Minimum Bandwidth Required 2 988 Table 2 62 Migration Supported Blades 2 992 Table 2 63 License Information 2 1016 Table 2 64 Supported Features 2 1073 Table 2 65 Program 15 07 Function Codes Service Code 751 2 1082 Table 2 66 Program 15 07 Function Codes Service Code 752 2 1085 Table 2 67 Program 11 10 Serv...

Page 26: ...re Licenses 2 1383 Table 2 86 Port Licenses 2 1384 Table 2 87 Network Interface Trapset and Trap 2 1384 Table 2 88 IPL Information Using VOIP 2 1385 Table 2 89 20 Common 2 1385 Table 2 90 Communications Analyst Support 2 1422 Table 2 91 Migration Supported Blades 2 1439 Table 2 92 Keys for Entering Names 2 1485 Table 2 93 SMDR Report Definitions 2 1510 Table 2 94 SMDR Report Format with Program 35...

Page 27: ...1601 Table 2 113 Terminal and Ten Key Kit Compatibility 2 1602 Table 2 114 Adapter Compatibility 2 1603 Table 2 115 IPLA DSP Usage 2 1604 Table 2 116 IPLB DSP Usage 2 1605 Table 2 117 TAPI Commands 2 1650 Table 2 118 SV8100 Configuration 2 1698 Table 2 119 Feature Support Table for System Devices 2 1756 Table 2 120 Mobile Device Requirements 2 1779 Table 2 121 Feature Support Table 2 1780 Table 2 ...

Page 28: ...l Account Information 2 1946 Table 2 140 Typical SMS Notification No Wav File 2 1947 Table 2 141 Common Email Notification SMTP Server Settings 2 1948 Table 2 142 Some Common Mobile Telephone Service Provider SMS Portals 2 1949 Table 2 143 Turn Email Notification On or Off 2 1953 Table 2 144 Language Setting Operation 2 1969 Table 2 145 IP Recorder Basic Licenses 2 1979 Table 2 146 SV8100 CPU Lice...

Page 29: ...e 2 157 Default Incoming Ringing Tone 2 2071 Table 2 158 Error Messages and Causes 2 2074 Table 2 159 Supported Wireless DECT SIP Features 2 2091 Table 3 1 Post Dialing Service Codes Single Digit Post Dialing Codes 3 2 Table 3 2 Service Codes by Number 3 3 Table 3 3 Service Codes by Feature 3 14 Table 3 4 Function Key Codes by Feature 3 26 Table 3 5 Function Key Codes by Number 3 35 Table 4 1 Feat...

Page 30: ...___________________________________________________________ xxiv List of Tables ___________________________________________________________________________________ Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 31: ... Display LCD on the display provides call status data and programming information Terminal line sizes include 2 6 12 24 and 32 IP Terminals are available in 2 6 12 24 and 32 Speakerphone with full handsfree operation and headset jack is standard Only the DT330 series terminals are compatible with APR L adapters An Attendant Add On DCL 60 1 Console is available with 60 stations and or outside line ...

Page 32: ...minals provides call status data and programming information Terminal line sizes include 8 line 16 line and 32 line An Attendant Add On DCL 60 1 Console is available with 60 stations and or outside line assignments If the page switching key on the DCL 60 1 Console is used there is a maximum of 120 keys Two pages of 54 programmable keys and six fixed keys Figure 1 1 SV8100 Key Assignment Example So...

Page 33: ...tion DSS BLF and Speed Dial Single On Off Keys Line keys may also be assigned as Single On Off keys in System Programming to toggle a feature on off This assignment has no impact on the Feature Access keys but the assigned features are very specific Scrolling CID and headset are examples of features available for Single On Off keys One Touch Keys One Touch keys can perform the same function as Fea...

Page 34: ... AD A R is also available The Electra Elite IPK Single Line Terminals are offered in two variations DTR 1 1 DTR 1HM 1 and DTH 1 1 Both terminals come in black or white Both have DTMF and Pulse Dialing compatibility and offer Flash and Redial key functionality The UNIVERGE SV8100 Single Line Terminals come standard with a Message Waiting Indicator that also functions as an Incoming Call Indication ...

Page 35: ...t Settings indicates the factory default setting if any System Availability describes multiline terminals that can be used with this feature and lists any additional equipment such as adapters or blades that must be installed for this feature to operate Programming lists the memory blocks that support the feature Related Features lists features that are associated with the feature being described ...

Page 36: ...eature for more information Using Handsfree The manual assumes each extension has Automatic Handsfree This lets a user just press a line key or Speaker key to answer or place a call For extensions without Automatic Handsfree the user must Lift the handset or press Speaker for Intercom dial tone Lift the handset or press Speaker then press a line key for trunk dial tone Port Assignments Port Calcul...

Page 37: ...mory Battery Backup System Power Battery Backup System Power Call Appearance CAP Keys Call Appearance CAP Keys Call Arrival CAR Keys Call Arrival CAR Keys Call Duration Timer Call Duration Timer Call Forwarding Centrex Call Forwarding Centrex Call Forwarding Park and Page Voice Response System VRS Call Forwarding Park and Page Call Forwarding Call Forwarding Call Forwarding with Follow Me Call For...

Page 38: ...rivacy Release Continued Dialing Continued Dialing Not Supported Cordless DECT Terminals Cordless Telephone Connection Cordless Telephone Connection Data Line Security Data Line Security Delayed Ringing Delayed Ringing Department Calling Department Calling Department Step Calling Department Step Calling Dial Pad Confirmation Tone Dial Pad Confirmation Tone Dial Tone Detection Dial Tone Detection D...

Page 39: ...tibility E911 Compatibility Electra Elite IPK Terminals Electra Elite IPK Terminals Electra Elite Terminal Migration IPK IPK II Migration EliteApps Interactive Voice Response IVR Appointment Reminder Server Not Supported IVR Broadcast Server Elite CallAnalyst SMB8000 Communications Analyst Facsimile CO Branch Connection Facsimile CO Branch Connection Flash Flash Flexible System Numbering Flexible ...

Page 40: ...P ML440 Cordless Not Supported IP Multiline Station SIP ML440 G566 G266 with AP400 AP300 IP Station SIP MG16 IP Single Line Telephone SIP Not Supported IP Single Line Telephone SIP NAT Mode IP Trunk SIP Session Initiation Protocol IP Trunk SIP Session Initiation Protocol IP Trunk H 323 Protocol IP Trunk H 323 IP Trunk SIP MG16 IP Trunk SIP Session Initiation Protocol IPK II PC Assistant SV8100 UC ...

Page 41: ...Waiting Message Waiting Not Supported MH240 Wireless IP Telephone Microphone Cutoff Microphone Cutoff Not Supported Mobile Extension Multiline Conference Bridge SMB8000 Conference Bridge Multimedia Conference Bridge SMB8000 Conference Bridge Multiple Trunk Types Multiple Trunk Types Music on Hold Music on Hold Name Storing Name Storing Not Supported NEC Meeting Center NMC Night Service Night Servi...

Page 42: ...0 InMail Redial Key Redial Function Remote System Upgrade Remote System Upgrade Repeat Redial Repeat Redial Resident System Program Resident System Program Reverse Voice Over Reverse Voice Over Ring Groups Ring Groups Ringdown Extension Internal External Ringdown Extension Internal External Room Monitor Room Monitor Save Number Dialed Save Number Dialed Secondary Incoming Extension Secondary Incom...

Page 43: ...User Programmable Station Name Assignment User Programmable Station Relocation Station Relocation Not Supported SV8100 Internal Router Not Supported SV8100 NetLink Synchronous Ringing Synchronous Ringing T1 Trunking with ANI DNIS Compatibility T1 Trunking with ANI DNIS Compatibility Tandem Ringing Tandem Ringing Tandem Trunking Unsupervised Conference Tandem Trunking Unsupervised Conference TAPI C...

Page 44: ...ported VM8000 InMail Email Notification Not Supported VM8000 InMail Find Me Follow Me Not Supported VM8000 InMail Language Setting Not Supported Voice Call Recording Voice Mail Integration Analog Voice Mail Integration Analog Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys Voice Over Voice Over Voice Over Internet Protocol VoIP Not Supported Voice Response Sys...

Page 45: ...UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 13 0 Features and Specifications Manual 2 11 SECTION 4 FEATURES The remainder of this document provides the features for the UNIVERGE SV8100 system ...

Page 46: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 12 Features THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 47: ...calls or only long distance calls Forced Account Codes for Toll Calls restricts calls according to the following chart Verified Account Codes With Verified Account Codes the system compares the Account Code the user dials to a list of up to 2000 programmed codes If the Account Code is in the list the call goes through If the code dialed is not in the list the system prevents the call Verified Acco...

Page 48: ...ay Account Code Capacity Account Codes print along with the other call data on the SMDR record after the call completes Account Codes can have 1 16 digits using 0 9 and Verified Account Codes can have 3 16 digits Redialed Numbers Do Not Contain Account Codes When using the Last Number Redial Save or Repeat Dial features the system does not retain Account Code information For any number redialed wi...

Page 49: ...red to enter an account code When Account Codes are enabled in a Class of Service extensions in that Class of Service no longer follow the Maximum Dialing Digit setting in the ARS F Routes Verified Account Codes for Toll Calls across a CCIS network are not restricted when a trunk access code is added to the number allowing ARS routing through another K CCIS T1 IP networked site This access code ty...

Page 50: ...programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 14 01 11 Basic Trunk Data Setup Account Code Required Enable Disable Account Codes for each trunk 0 Disable 1 Enable default 1 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a function key as an Account Code key c...

Page 51: ...l Call Setup Enable Account Codes for all calls or just toll calls for mode 2 or 3 in Program 35 05 01 0 Account Codes for toll and local calls All 1 Account Codes just for toll calls STD default 0 35 05 03 Account Code Setup Account Codes for Incoming Calls For each Class of Service 1 15 enter 1 in this option to Enable Account Codes for incoming calls Enter 0 to Disable Account Codes for incomin...

Page 52: ... Account Code before dialing the outside number If your system has Forced or Verified Account Codes you may use this procedure instead of letting the system prompt you for your Account Code You may also use this procedure if your system has Optional Account Codes If your system has Verified Account Codes enabled be sure to choose a code programmed in your Verified Account Code list 1 Access trunk ...

Page 53: ...you want to call 2 Wait for your call to go through OR 3 If you hear Please enter an Account Code depending on system programming and your display shows ENTER ACCOUNT CODE Dial OR Press your Account Code key Program 15 07 01 or SC 751 code 50 Dial your Account Code 3 16 digits using 0 9 and If Account Codes are hidden each digit you dial shows on the telephone display Dial OR Press your Account Co...

Page 54: ...single line telephone 1 Access trunk for outside call Dial a code to access a trunk Refer to Central Office Calls Placing for more information With Forced Account Codes you hear Please enter an Account Code depending on programming 2 Dial 3 Enter Account Code 3 16 digits 4 Dial 5 Dial number you want to call ...

Page 55: ...ount Code by watching the display When hidden the Account Code digits show on the telephone display Account Code Capacity Account Codes print along with the other call data on the SMDR record after the call completes Account Codes can have 1 16 digits using 0 9 and Redialed Numbers Do Not Contain Account Codes When using the Last Number Redial Save or Repeat Dial features the system does not retai...

Page 56: ...ount Codes are enabled the user must press the three times before the character is passed to the telco The system recognizes the initial as the beginning of an Account Code entry the second as the end of an Account Code entry and the third is passed to telco Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Automatic Route Selection On...

Page 57: ...es for each trunk 0 Disable 1 Enable default 1 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a function key as an Account Code key code 50 Use this key instead of the dial pad to enter the before and after the Account Code Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 752 by default 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service...

Page 58: ...Setup Account Codes for Incoming Calls For each Class of Service 1 15 enter 1 in this option to Enable Account Codes for incoming calls Enter 0 to Disable Account Codes for incoming calls If disabled any codes you enter dial out on the connected trunk 0 Account Codes for incoming calls disabled No 1 Account codes for incoming calls Yes default 0 35 05 04 Account Code Setup Hiding Account Codes For...

Page 59: ... Central Office Calls Placing on page 2 277 for more information 2 Dial OR Press your Account Code key Program 15 07 or SC 751 code 50 3 Dial your Account Code 1 16 digits using 0 9 and If you make an incorrect entry your system may automatically alert the operator If Account Codes are hidden each digit you dial shows on the telephone display 4 Dial OR Press your Account Code key Program 15 07 or ...

Page 60: ... To enter an Account Code at a single line telephone 1 Access trunk for outside call Dial a code to access a trunk Refer to Central Office Calls Placing for more information 2 Dial 3 Enter Account Code 1 16 digits 4 Dial 5 Dial number you want to call ...

Page 61: ...are two types of Alarms Alarm 1 sounds only once at the preset time Alarm 2 sounds every day at the preset time Conditions Single line telephones ring and Music on Hold is heard when the Alarm sounds Only a multiline terminal user can view what time the Alarm is currently set for Default Settings Enabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features None ...

Page 62: ...g knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Operation To set the alarm 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 727 3 Dial alarm type 1 or 2 Alarm 1 sounds only once Alarm 2 sounds each day at the preset time 4 Dial the alarm time 24 hour clock For example for 1 15 PM dial 1315 A confirmation tone is heard if the alarm has been set If ...

Page 63: ...s lifted To check the programmed alarm time at a multiline terminal 1 Press Help 2 Dial 727 3 Dial alarm type 1 or 2 The programmed time displays 4 Press Exit To cancel an alarm 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 727 3 Dial alarm type 1 or 2 4 Dial 9999 5 At a multiline terminal press Speaker to hang up OR At the single line telephone ...

Page 64: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 30 Alarm THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 65: ...essage on the multiline terminal and can generate an alarm via the Alarm Report system software Version 3000 or higher required With Version 5000 or higher CPU software the Alarm Reports feature has been enhanced to include an alarm for IP duplication With Version 4000 or lower CPU software the SV8100 had no alarm function for an IP address duplication With this enhancement the SV8100 is able to d...

Page 66: ...16 06 14 33 NTCPU LAN Link none 00 00 MAJ 0014 REC 05 16 06 14 35 NTCPU LAN Link none 00 00 MIN 0002 ERR 05 16 06 14 36 PKG Installation CTP 08 00 MIN 0002 REC 05 16 06 14 37 PKG Installation VMS 08 00 MIN 0002 ERR 05 16 06 14 38 PKG Installation VMS 08 00 MIN 0002 REC 05 16 06 14 40 PKG Installation PRT 07 00 MIN 0002 ERR 05 16 06 14 40 PKG Installation PRT 07 00 MAJ 0006 ERR 05 16 06 14 41 Block...

Page 67: ...umber PARAMETER Related Information Table 2 4 Alarm Report Item Definitions Item Name Definition PKG Installation Blade is removed or inserted ISDN Link ISDN Line failure is detected CD CP00 US LAN Link CD CP00 US Lan connection failure is detected Blocking Terminal Failure may have occurred because terminal blocking is detected Terminal is unplugged or wire is disconnected System Data Change Syst...

Page 68: ...006 11 02 slot location type assign port condition note 1 1 1 DLC 1 16 Running Connect 2 1 2 PRT 1 23 Running 3 1 3 COT 25 28 Running 4 1 4 none none Not Install 5 1 5 DLC 33 40 Not Install Connect 6 1 6 LCA 17 24 Running 7 1 7 PRT 29 51 Not Install 8 1 8 VM00 25 32 Running 9 2 1 none Not Install 10 2 2 none Not Install 11 2 3 none Not Install 12 2 4 none Not Install 13 2 5 none Not Install 14 2 6...

Page 69: ...frame The report indicates both Major and Minor Alarms System Information Reports cannot be set to output at a scheduled time When using the email functionality of reports the email address in Program 90 11 10 From Address must be set for the email feature to work After a new alarm is output it cannot be output a second time New alarms must be generated before Program 90 12 04 can be performed a s...

Page 70: ...50 US and USB memory stick are mounted on the CCPU The DIMLast and DIMDump files are not sent via email when Program 90 03 01 is used to manually generate a data dump They are only saved on the USB attached to the CCPU The PZ ME50 must be mounted to the CCPU for the 47 18 xx program settings to work Once successfully sent the DIMLast and DIMDump files are deleted from the system If the email retry...

Page 71: ...erminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s When using the Version 7 00 feature to email DIMLast and DIMDump files the following components are required USB memory stick PZ ME50 US V7000 Enhancement License 0036 Maintenance License 0043 Related Features None ...

Page 72: ...r alarm status to the LAN link This program also assigns whether or not the alarm is displayed to a key telephone and whether or not the alarm information is reported to the predefined destination Alarm 57 IP Duplication Alarm Assign a Major or MInor alarm status to the IP Duplication Alarm Alarm 60 SIP Registration Error Notification Assign a Major or Minor alarm status to the SIP Registration Er...

Page 73: ...el 1 2 3 90 12 01 System Alarm Output Output Port Type Indicate the type of connection used for the System Alarms The baud rate for the COM port should be set in Program 10 21 02 0 No Setting 1 3 Reserved 4 CTA CTU 5 USB Memory default 0 Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 90 13 01 System Information Output Output Port Type Indicate the type of connection sys...

Page 74: ... 192 0 0 223 255 255 The setting of Subnet Mask is invalid 128 0 0 0 192 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 240 0 0 0 248 0 0 0 252 0 0 0 254 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 255 128 0 0 255 192 0 0 255 224 0 0 255 248 0 0 255 252 0 0 255 254 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 128 0 255 255 192 0 255 255 224 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248...

Page 75: ...sent Up to 255 characters default not assigned 90 11 09 System Alarm Report Reply Address When Alarm Reports are to be emailed set the email address where replies should be emailed Up to 255 characters default not assigned 90 11 10 System Alarm Report From Address When Alarm Reports are to be emailed set this email address for the station sending the report Up to 255 characters default not assigne...

Page 76: ...ture for the system 0 Off 1 On default 0 47 18 02 VM8000 InMail Setup Server Name Sets the SMTP server name If the DNS server setting is not assigned in Program 90 11 11 the IP Address must be used instead of the name Up to 48 characters default No Setting 47 18 03 VM8000 InMail Setup SMTP Port Sets the SMTP server port 0 65535 default 25 47 18 04 VM8000 InMail Setup Encryption Enable SSL Encrypti...

Page 77: ...0 InMail POP3 Setup Server Name Set the POP3 server name If the DNS server setting is not assigned in Program 90 11 11 the IP Address must be used instead of the name Up to 48 characters default No Setting 47 19 02 VM8000 InMail POP3 Setup POP3 Port Set the POP3 server port 0 65535 default 110 47 19 03 VM8000 InMail POP3 Setup SSL Encryption Enable SSL encryption 0 Off 1 On default 0 47 19 04 VM80...

Page 78: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 44 Alarm Reports THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 79: ...messages These messages help the display telephone user process calls identify callers and customize features Conditions The contrast is not adjustable when the telephone has background music enabled Default Settings Enabled for all display telephones System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals with Display Required Component s None Related Features Clock Calendar Display Selectable Disp...

Page 80: ...f needed redefine the service code used to select the language for display multiline terminals MLT default 678 15 02 01 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Display Language Selection To select options 8 10 press either 8 or Recall then press line keys 1 3 Key 1 is option 8 Key 2 is option 9 and Key 3 is option 10 Select the language to be displayed on a multiline terminal display 0 Japanese 1 Eng...

Page 81: ...UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 13 0 Alphanumeric Display 2 47 Operation Operation is automatic if enabled in programming ...

Page 82: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 48 Alphanumeric Display THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 83: ...if desired Extension users can dial the ACI analog port extension number and listen to the connected music source The PGD 2 U10 ADP relay associated with the port closes when the call goes through For Music on Hold connect the music source to the PGD 2 U10 ADP module Connect the music source control leads to the CTL control relay jack Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 System Hardware Manual for additio...

Page 84: ... ACI Call Recording ACI Call Recording allows you to use a recording device connected to a PGD 2 U10 ADP to automatically record calls The recording device is typically a customer provided tape recorder You can set up ACI Call Recording to output to a single ACI port recording device or to a pool of ACI ports devices With a single device all calls are stored in a centralized location With a pool o...

Page 85: ... that correspond to the software port Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 System Hardware Manual for installation details Conditions ACD agents who are logged on can be recorded When ACI software ports are set to be a Background Music source it only plays to a speaker not a multiline telephone An extension cannot have Hotline keys for ACI software ports Music on Hold ACI software ports can be Music on Ho...

Page 86: ... Availability Terminals None Required Component s PGD 2 U10 ADP Related Features Automatic Call Distribution ACD Background Music Hotline One Touch Calling Paging External Maximum Input 0 4Vrms or 1 0Vp p Audio Paging Output Output Impedance 600 Ohms 1 K Hz Maximum Output 3 dBm PGD 2 U10 ADP ACI Interface Specifications ...

Page 87: ...sign or display the current terminal type assigned to B Channel 1 for each port on the DLCA 0 Not set 1 Multiline Terminal 2 SLT Adapter 3 Bluetooth Cordless Handset 6 PGD Paging 7 PGD Tone Ringer 8 PGD Doorbox 9 PGD ACI 10 DSS Console 11 Not Used default 0 10 03 06 ETU Setup DLCA PKG Setup Terminal Type B2 Assign or display the current terminal type assigned to B Channel 2 for each port on the ES...

Page 88: ... 0 99 Normal Function Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 752 by default 15 12 01 Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions ACI Recording Destination Extension Number Assign the ACI Call Recording destination per extension The destination can be an ACI port extension number assigned in Program 11 06 or an ACI Department Group pilot number assigned in Program 11 ...

Page 89: ...sic OR If the port is set for output Program 33 01 01 2 and External Paging is connected you can page into the external zone OR If the port is set for output Program 33 01 01 2 and a loud ringer is connected you activate the loud ringer 33 02 01 ACI Department Calling Group Group Number Assign ACI software ports to ACI Department Groups This lets ACI callers connect to ACI software ports by dialin...

Page 90: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 56 Analog Communications Interface ACI THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 91: ...al device fits underneath the terminal A single line telephone connected to an AP R R Unit or AP A R Unit cannot perform Trunk to Trunk Transfer and does not support a conference with itself and two outside parties A single line telephone connected to an AP R R Unit or AP A R Unit does not support Message Waiting Indication or Caller ID Indication An AP R R Unit analog port adapter with ringer can...

Page 92: ...ON ADA Connection for Sending Recorded Calls to the Telephone Dip switches 2 3 5 7 and 8 are OFF Switches 1 4 and 6 are ON Dip switches 2 3 5 7 and 8 are OFF Switches 1 4 and 6 are ON Dip switches 2 3 5 7 and 8 are OFF Switches 1 4 and 6 are ON To Send and Receive to the Terminal Not supported Dip switches 1 2 3 5 7 and 8 are OFF Switches 4 and 6 are ON Dip switches 1 2 3 5 7 and 8 are OFF Switche...

Page 93: ...re most commonly used These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro wizards for feature programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Na...

Page 94: ...or 500 2500 type single line telephones 1 63 15 5 15 5dB default 32 0dB 15 03 01 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup SLT Signaling Type Tell the system the type of dialing the connected telephone uses 0 DP 1 DTMF default 1 15 03 04 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Flashing Enable Disable Flash for single line 500 2500 type telephones 0 No 1 Yes default 1 Program Number Program Name Descri...

Page 95: ... 02 06 Normal Common Exclusive Hold to set the type of Hold key to be used Default Normal Common For calls placed in a Park Group the LED blinks fast green For calls placed in a Park Group by another user the LED blinks slow red The Answer Hold Feature is not available for Virtual Extensions The Answer Hold feature does not function for incoming internal calls CO PBX incoming calls not assigned to...

Page 96: ...re not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 12 32 Service Code Setup for Service Access Answer for Park Hold Assign a key on the multiline terminal or single line telephone for park hold MLT SLT default 6 15 02 06 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Hold Key ...

Page 97: ...e available 20 09 01 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Second Call for DID DISA DIL E M Override Turn Off or On the extension ability to receive a second call from a DID DISA DIL or tie line caller With this option set to 1 the destination extension must be busy for a second DNIS caller to ring through If the destination extension does not have a trunk or CAP key available for the sec...

Page 98: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 64 Answer Hold THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 99: ...unanswered call is answered Press the Answer Key during a call to hold the current call and allow the next call to be answered Conditions The Answer LED functions for incoming CO PBX calls CO PBX transfer camp on calls and transfer camp on Tie DID calls Incoming calls answered by Answer are handled first in first out An Internal call internal transfer camp on call CAR SIE VE calls do not activate ...

Page 100: ...gn the incoming trunk type for each trunk Incoming Type for Day Night Mode 1 8 0 Normal 1 VRS second dial tone if no VRS installed 2 DISA 3 DID 4 DIL 5 E M Tie line 6 Delayed VRS 7 ANI DNIS 8 DID DDI Mode Switching default 0 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Assign extensions up to 32 to Ring Groups Calls ring extensions according to Ring Group programming There are 100 available r...

Page 101: ...d press Answer to place the current call on hold and connect the multiline terminal user to the next call 22 07 01 DIL Assignment Assign the destination extension or Department Group Pilot Number for each DIL Incoming trunk Number of Transferring Destinations for Day Night Modes 1 8 Extension Number maximum eight digits Pilot Number default not assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comm...

Page 102: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 68 Answer Key THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 103: ...tercom DISA DID DIL Tie Line and transferred calls If the attendant does not have an appearance for the queued call it waits in line to be answered If the attendant has more than 32 calls queued an extension can transfer a call to the attendant only if they have Busy Transfer enabled Attendant Call Queuing is a permanent non programmable system feature Conditions Forwarding when unanswered or busy...

Page 104: ... an extension user must dial to access other extensions and features such as service codes and trunk codes If the default numbering plan does not meet the site requirements use this program to tailor the system numbering to the site Refer to System Numbering Default Settings table in the UNIVERGE SV8100 Programming Manual for a list of default settings 20 01 01 System Options Operator Access Mode ...

Page 105: ...UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 13 0 Attendant Call Queuing 2 71 Operation None ...

Page 106: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 72 Attendant Call Queuing THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 107: ...nd are routed accordingly Although the master number can be any valid extension number you should choose a number that is out of the normal extension range Automatic Call Distribution operation is further enhanced by ACD Call Queuing When all agents in an ACD Group are unavailable an incoming call queues and causes the Queue Status Display to occur on the ACD Group Supervisor display The display h...

Page 108: ...f 1st Announcement 2nd Announcement and overflow methods You can have for example a Technical Service group that plays only the 2nd Announcement to callers and then immediately overflows to Voice Mail At the same time you can have a Customer Service group that plays both announcements and does not overflow You can assign an ACD Group to play the Queue Depth only when using the VRS for message The ...

Page 109: ... example ACD works as follows Example 1 Log In with AIC 789 During Mode Pattern 1 ACD agents belong to ACD groups 1 2 and 16 at the same time During Mode Pattern 2 ACD agents belong to only ACD group 1 During Mode Pattern 3 8 ACD agents do not belong to any ACD group and the ACD extensions work as normal extensions Example 2 Log In with AIC 567 During Mode Patterns 1 8 ACD agents belong to only AC...

Page 110: ...etting of Program 41 02 01 for the extension Multiple extensions up to the maximum capacity of the extension can log in with one AIC For example even if ACD agent A logs in extension 350 with AIC 789 ACD agent B can also log in to extension 351 with the same AIC 789 at the same time A supervisor cannot log out an agent logged in by an AIC code Emergency Call If an ACD Agent needs assistance with a...

Page 111: ...Agent with a headset can have Automatic Answer This allows an agent busy on a call to automatically connect to the next waiting call when they hang up Incoming Call Routing Incoming trunk calls can automatically route to specific ACD Groups These types of calls ring directly into the ACD Group without being transferred by a co worker or the Automated Attendant Rest Mode Rest Mode temporarily logs ...

Page 112: ... Group Supervisor s extension can receive only ACD Group calls during overflow conditions Supervisor s extension receives calls just like any other ACD Group agent An ACD Group can have only one supervisor An extension can be a supervisor for only one ACD Group Supervisor ACD System You can designate an extension as an ACD System Supervisor Once assigned as an ACD System Supervisor the user can Ta...

Page 113: ...e terminal user one button calling and Transfer to another extension the Hotline partner Hotline helps co workers that work closely together The Hotline partners can call or Transfer calls to each other just by pressing a single key Enhanced for ACD applications Hotline provides a unique Busy Lamp Field for ACD agents as well as a BLF for co workers that are not ACD agents The charts below show bo...

Page 114: ...OL and VOL scroll through the Queue Status Displays of all the ACD Groups The Queue Status Displays shows see the Queue Status Display illustration below The number of calls queued The trunk that has been waiting the longest and how long it has been waiting For each ACD Group you can set the following conditions The number of trunks that can wait in queue before the Queue Status Display occurs How...

Page 115: ...n the Queue Status Display is displayed due to an alarm If the Queue Status display and alarm are active and the queued called is answered disconnected the display and alarm continue until the times in Program 41 20 02 and Program 41 20 05 expire When an overflowed call is in queue the call is included in its original ACD group queue and not in the group queue to which it overflowed The Queue Stat...

Page 116: ...rred becomes available both the extension and the overflow ACD group ring ACD Skill Based Routing Version 5000 or higher is required With Version 5000 or higher CPU Software the system can receive and distribute ACD calls based on the Agent s skill level There are seven priority levels that the Agents can be set to for each ACD Queue Each queue can have a different priority level This works for bo...

Page 117: ...peech paths are available when using the DSP with VRS installed on the CD CP00 US for messages When the PGD 2 U10 ADP is providing the 1st Delay Announcements it continues to play until the call is answered abandoned or the time in 41 10 04 expires and starts to play the 2nd Delay Announcement The 2nd Delay Announcement continues to play until the call is answered abandoned or the time in 41 10 05...

Page 118: ...nts the caller has been in queue and heard both the first and second delay announcements If an ACD Agent places an ACD call on hold to answer an incoming non ACD call Trunk or Station the system will offer another ACD call to the Agent when the non ACD call terminates To prevent the second ACD call from being sent it is recommended the Agent go into the break or wrap mode before finishing the non ...

Page 119: ...CD MIS 1 5 0 0 or higher is required A new report Abandoned Call Detail by Queue has been built and will display the Caller ID for each abandoned call ACD MIS 1 5 0 0 or higher is required Default Setting Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 ACD Manual for more details System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s ACD Software License PZ VM21 Unit VM8000 InMail Compact Flash VM8000 InMa...

Page 120: ...T SLT default 5 11 13 02 Service Code Setup for ACD ACD Log Out for SLT Assign for single line telephones SLT default 655 11 13 03 Service Code Setup for ACD Set ACD Wrap Up Time for SLT Assign for single line telephones SLT default 656 11 13 04 Service Code Setup for ACD Cancel ACD Wrap Up Time for SLT Assign for single line telephones SLT default 657 11 13 05 Service Code Setup for ACD Set ACD O...

Page 121: ...ion Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 752 by default 15 08 01 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup When an extension or a virtual extension is assigned to the function key on the key telephone select the ring tone when receiving a call on that key For ACD CAR keys only tone pattern 1 entry 0 can be used The remaining patterns are not checked with this feature 0 ...

Page 122: ...ally 0 or Automatically 1 receive off hook signals 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 01 15 20 13 33 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service ACD Supervisor s Position Enhancement Set this option to On for the operator to use service codes in Program 11 13 10 11 13 13 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 01 15 20 13 39 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service ACD Queue Status Display Turn Off or On ...

Page 123: ...System Options for ACD Login ID Code Digit Define the number of digits for agent login ID code 0 20 0 No Login ID default 0 41 01 03 System Options for ACD ACD MIS Connection Ports Define what port is used for ACD MIS connection Currently only LAN is supported 0 None 3 LAN CD CP00 US default 0 41 01 04 System Options for ACD ACD MIS Command Notification when a BT Message is returned ACD MIS Comman...

Page 124: ... Set up the Work Schedules for ACD Agents and Groups For each ACD Work Schedule 1 4 designate the start and stop times for each of the eight Work Periods After the schedules are set up in this program assign them to days of the week in Program 41 07 This is the same program used by the Trunk Work Schedules After the schedules are set up in this program assign them to days of the week in Program 41...

Page 125: ...ult 0 7 Saturday 0 4 0 No ACD default 0 41 08 01 ACD Overflow Options Overflow Operation Mode Assign the overflow mode 0 9 destination and announcement message types Delay Announcement functions are not available for ACD pilot number calls Each ACD Group can have unique overflow options 0 No overflow None 1 Overflow with No Announcement 2 No Overflow with First Announcement Only 3 No Overflow with...

Page 126: ...me before ACD overflow occurs Each ACD Group can have unique overflow options 0 64800 seconds default 30 41 08 05 ACD Overflow Options System Speed Dial Bin Assign the speed dial bin to be used as the ACD overflow destination Using a speed dial bin for ACD Overflow is supported only for off premise calls 0 1999 Used when 41 08 02 is set to 67 default 1999 41 08 06 ACD Overflow Options Incoming Rin...

Page 127: ...fore the 1st Delay Message Starts 0 64800 seconds default 0 41 11 02 VRS Delay Announcement 1st Delay Message Number Assign the VRS message number to be used as the message source for the 1st and 2nd Delay Announcement Messages Refer to Program 41 08 for more on setting up the ACD overflow options This program is activated when the delay announcement source and options are assigned as VRS in Progr...

Page 128: ...rogram 41 12 01 is set to 0 ACI Night announcement availability depends on the setting in Program 41 03 02 0 64800 seconds default 30 41 13 01 VRS Message Number for Night Announcement VRS Message Number Define the VRS message number to be used as the night announcement This program is activated when the night announcement source is assigned as VRS in Program 41 12 01 0 100 0 No Message default 0 ...

Page 129: ...y for SLT Enable 1 Disable 0 Automatic Off Duty rest mode for agents with single line telephones 0 No change to off duty mode 1 Change to off duty mode automatically Skip default 0 41 14 08 ACD Options Setup ACD Off Duty Mode Enable 1 Disable 0 the agent s ability to receive internal calls in ACD Off Duty Mode 0 Cannot receive internal call 1 Can receive internal call default 0 41 14 09 ACD Option...

Page 130: ...h ACD Queue 1 64 assign if the One Digit Dial Out option can 1 Yes or cannot 0 No be pressed during the Delay Announcements 0 Does not detect during message 1 Detect during message default 1 41 14 15 ACD Options Setup DTMF Detect Time after Delay Announcement Message Set various options for ACD Groups When an option is set for an ACD Group the setting is in force if applicable for all agents in th...

Page 131: ...fault 0 41 18 03 ACD Agent Identity Code Setup ACD Group Number in Mode 1 For each AIC table define the ACD group AIC Agents are in during mode 1 0 64 0 No Setting default 0 41 18 04 ACD Agent Identity Code Setup ACD Group Number in Mode 2 For each AIC table define the ACD group AIC Agents are in during mode 2 0 64 0 No Setting default 0 41 18 05 ACD Agent Identity Code Setup ACD Group Number in M...

Page 132: ...ge Dial up to eight digits default not assigned 41 19 05 ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement 2nd Delay Message Sending Count Assign the 2nd Delay Message Sending Count This entry must be set to 1 or higher for the message to play 0 No message is played 1 255 default 0 41 19 06 ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement Wait Tone Type at Message Interval Assign what the caller hears between the messages 0 Rin...

Page 133: ...le Off 1 Enable On default 0 41 20 05 ACD Queue Display Settings ACD Call Waiting Alarm Hold Time Program 41 15 can also provide a queue alarm to the agents The options in Program 41 20 should not be used if 41 15 is set Assign the time the Call Waiting Alarm should sound 0 64800 seconds default 0 41 21 01 ACD Login ID Setup Login ID Code Input the Login IDs that will be used Version 5000 or highe...

Page 134: ...artment Group master pilot number associated with the Master Mailbox you are programming Digits eight maximum using 0 9 No Setting entered by pressing Hold default not assigned 47 03 03 SV8100 InMail Group Mailbox Options Mailbox Type Set the Group Mailbox type 0 None 1 Subscriber 2 Call Routing default 1 47 07 02 SV8100 InMail Routing Mailbox Options Routing Mailbox Type Set the Routing Mailbox t...

Page 135: ... group A Supervisor can monitor an ACD call 1 When an ACD agent is on an outside call the supervisor presses the MONITOR key Program 15 07 01 or SC 752 15 The supervisor can hear but cannot participate in the call If participation is required use the Barge In feature instead 2 To cancel the call monitoring press the MONITOR key again AIC Agent Log In To Log In Multiline Terminal 1 Press the ACD LO...

Page 136: ...t the handset 2 Dial the AIC Log Out service code Program 11 13 08 OR 1 To log out of an ACD group without using AIC lift the handset 2 Dial the ACD Log Out service code 655 Program 11 13 02 Multiple Agent Log In To Log In Multiline Terminal After already being logged in 1 Press the ACD LOG IN LOG OUT key Program 15 07 01 or SC 752 10 2 Dial 0 to cancel the log out option 3 Dial the Agent Identity...

Page 137: ...us Display Programmable Function Key Code 19 The display indicates the number of calls in queue the trunk name and the time the call has been waiting When the Queue Status Display key is pressed the queue status of the extension group is displayed When the extension is not in an ACD group the Queue Status of group 1 is displayed instead When an agent logs in using an AIC code the Queue Status of t...

Page 138: ... up This operation is not available for the System Supervisor Single Line Telephone 1 Lift the handset and dial 658 A fast busy is heard To set Pre Rest Mode while on a call press the hookflash and then dial 658 Press the Hookflash again to return to the outside party Rest Mode begins once the call is completed 2 Hang up To Cancel The Manual Rest Mode Multiline Terminal 1 Press the ACD Rest Mode k...

Page 139: ...ease on ISDN trunks is provided by the protocol When an outside line is accessed using a dedicated line key the LED associated with the line key goes off when Automatic Release occurs This feature functions while a call is in progress on hold or in a conference This feature applies to all ICM type calls in progress holding or parked When Automatic Release occurs and the telephone is in handsfree m...

Page 140: ...hese programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 14 02 09 Analog Trunk Data Setup Busy Tone Detection Enable Disable Busy Tone Detection 0 Disable No 1 Enable Yes default 0 14 02 14 Analog Trunk Data Setup Loop Start Ground Start Identify the analog tru...

Page 141: ...0 04 03 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup S N Ratio Set the Signal to Noise ratio 0 4 0dB 20dB Default Type 1 DT 4 20dB Type 2 BT 4 20dB Type 3 RBT 4 20dB Type 4 0 Type 5 0 80 04 04 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup No Tone Time Set No Tone Time 0 255 30 30 7680ms The formula is 30 30N When set to N 1 it means 30 30 1 60 When set to N 255 it means 30 30 255 7680 0 not detect default Type 1 DT 132 ...

Page 142: ...one Detector Setup ON Maximum Time Set the maximum On time 0 255 30 30 7680ms default Type 1 DT 0 Type 2 BT 20 630ms ET Type 3 RBT 40 1230ms Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 08 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup OFF Minimum Time Set the minimum Off time 1 255 30 30 7680ms default Type 1 DT 1 60ms Type 2 BT 12 390ms Type 3 RBT 83 2520ms Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 09 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup OFF Maximum Tim...

Page 143: ...UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 13 0 Automatic Release 2 109 Operation None ...

Page 144: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 110 Automatic Release THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 145: ... be called by a system number and a user extension number just an extension number or by using a trunk access code ARS Feature Summary ARS provides Call Routing ARS can apply up to 24 digit analysis to every number dialed For programming ARS provides separate 8 digit and 24 digit tables Each table can have up to 250 numbers Dialing Translation Special Dialing Instructions ARS can automatically exe...

Page 146: ...of 800 Selection Numbers to the call The Selection Number chosen depends on which digits the user dialed ARS then checks the time of day the day of week and the extension ARS Class of Service Based on these call routing options ARS selects a trunk group for the call and imposes the Dial Treatment instructions if any Class of Service Option Allows Outgoing Calls to Not Follow Access Map Using this ...

Page 147: ...xtension 402 would not be able to dial out as the COS is lower Program 26 02 for Dial Analysis Table for ARS set as Table No Program 26 02 01 Dial Program 26 02 02 Service Type Program 26 02 03 Add Data Program26 02 04 ARS COS 1 203 1 Route to trunk group 3 Group 3 5 2 214 1 Route to trunk group 1 Group 1 4 197 1 Route to trunk group 2 Group 2 4 198 1 Route to trunk group 3 Group 3 3 199 1 Route t...

Page 148: ...e Dial Analysis Tables have expanded from 400 to 800 tables ARS is intended for areas that use the North American Number Plan NANP Line keys Call Appearance CAP Keys outgoing trunk group keys dialing 704 trunk group dialing trunk number and speed dial numbers assigned to a certain trunk group can all be used to by pass ARS If no PBX access code is entered in the Dial Treatment the system can still...

Page 149: ...ard Off Premise will not complete For a virtual to Call Forward Off Premise Program 26 01 03 must be set to Route to trunk group and the call will follow the trunk group settings of the trunk assigned in Program 21 03 When using ARS Class of Service with Program 26 01 03 set to 1 Play Warning Tone a CCIS trunk pointed or transferred to a virtual that is call forwarded off premise will always follo...

Page 150: ... enabled This feature is only supported on DT700 and softphones Default Setting None System Availability Terminals DT700 Required Component s Version 7000 or higher system software Refer to the SV8100 NetLink Feature for Required Component s Related Features Central Office Calls Placing Code Restriction Dial Tone Detection E911 Compatibility Speed Dial System Group Station SV8100 NetLink Trunk Gro...

Page 151: ...ension user must dial to access other extensions and features such as service codes and trunk codes If the default numbering plan does not meet the site requirements use this program to tailor the system numbering to the site Refer to SV8100 Programming Manual for a detailed description of this program 11 09 01 Trunk Access Code Specify the digit or digits to be used to access ARS normally 9 Dial ...

Page 152: ...ing Each Mode Group has 10 patterns These patterns are used in Programs 12 03 and 12 04 The daily pattern consists of 20 timer settings This option defines the ending time 0000 2359 Refer to the SV8100 Programming Manual for defaults 12 02 03 Automatic Night Service Patterns Operation Mode Define the daily pattern of the Automatic Mode Switching Each Mode Group has 10 patterns These patterns are u...

Page 153: ...Switching Define a yearly schedule of holiday night switch settings This schedule is used for setting special days when the company is expected to be closed such as national holidays Days and Months 0101 1231 e g 0101 Jan 1 1231 Dec 31 Time Pattern Number 0 10 0 No Setting default not assigned 12 05 01 Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions Assign Day Night Mode Group for each extension Night ...

Page 154: ...g Mode 2 Night Mode 3 Midnight Mode 4 Rest Mode 5 Day2 Mode 6 Night2 Mode 7 Midnight2 Mode 8 Rest2 12 08 01 Night Mode Service Range Define the changing range of toggle key for each Day Night Mode Night Mode Service Group Number 01 32 Range 2 8 default 2 14 05 01 Trunk Group Trunk Group Number Program trunks of the same carrier type in the same trunk group Trunks 1 200 Trunk Group 1 100 Priority 1...

Page 155: ... incoming and outgoing access and access when trunk is on Hold 15 06 01 Trunk Access Map for Extensions Assign Trunk Access Maps to extensions Trunk Access Maps 1 200 default 1 20 03 04 System Options for Single Line Telephones Dial Sending Start Time for SLT or ARS When ARS or an analog extension user accesses a trunk and dials an outside call the system waits this time before outdialing the firs...

Page 156: ... disabled and Site B is using F Route for outbound dialing this timer should be programmed for 30 at Site A 0 64800 seconds default 30 26 01 03 Automatic Route Selection Service ARS Misdialed Number Handling If a user dials a number not programmed in ARS determine if the system should Route over trunk group 1 0 or Play error tone 1 0 Route to Trunk Group 1 1 Play Warning Tone to Dialer default 0 2...

Page 157: ...example if 268 269 and 270 are local exchanges these would be the first three table entries which route according to the settings made in Program 26 02 02 and Program 26 02 03 for each of the table entries If the next entry is 2 the system checks no further in this program and routes all other 2xx numbers according to the entries made in Program 26 02 02 and Program 26 02 03 for this table entry D...

Page 158: ...umber Refer to Program 44 04 ARS F Route Selection for Time Schedule default 0 26 02 04 Dial Analysis Table for ARS ARS Class of Service For each Dial Analysis Table 1 800 set the Automatic Route Selection ARS Class of Service 0 16 0 16 default 0 26 02 05 Dial Analysis Table for ARS Dial Treatment for ARS For each Dial Analysis Table 1 800 set the Automatic Route Selection ARS Dial Treatment 0 15 ...

Page 159: ...code that follows For example D041234 out dials 124 Valid entries are 0 9 Wnn wait nn seconds and P pause Each digits code counts as a digit So for example if a P was added for a pause the entry would look like D05P1234 This Dial Treatment can only be added from telephone programming Wnn Wait nn seconds P Pause in analog trunk R Redial the initially dialed number including any modifications E End ...

Page 160: ...am 44 09 and time setting in Program 44 08 are used 0 Not Used 1 Used default 0 44 02 01 Dial Analysis Table for ARS F Route Access Dial Set the Dial digits for the Pre Transaction Table for selecting ARS F Route eight digits max 1 9 0 To enter a wild card don t care digit press Line Key 1 to enter an symbol Up to eight digits Use line key 1 for a Don t Care digit default not assigned 44 02 02 Dia...

Page 161: ...r wild character default not assigned 44 03 02 Dial Analysis Extension Table ARS F Route Select Table Number 1 250 When dialed digits match the setting in Program 44 03 01 select the ARS R Route table number 0 500 to be used for the Dial Extension Analysis Table 0 500 ARS F Route Table Number With Program 44 01 set to 0 Program 44 05 is checked With Program 44 01 set to 1 Program 44 04 is checked ...

Page 162: ...ber 1 4 Select whether or not a beep is heard if a lower priority trunk group is used 0 Off No Beep 1 On Beep s default 0 44 05 05 ARS F Route Table Gain Table Number for Internal Call For each ARS F Route table 1 500 assign a priority number 1 4 Select the gain table number to be used for internal calls 0 500 0 500 0 No Setting default 0 44 05 06 ARS F Route Table Gain Table Number for Tandem Con...

Page 163: ...ial Gain Table follows Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive settings If the incoming call is transferred to another line using ARS F Route The Tandem Gain Table is activated which is assigned in Program 44 05 The Tandem Gain Table follows the Incoming transmit and Incoming receive settings for incoming line and Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive settings for the outgoing line For ARS F Route...

Page 164: ... Holiday Schedule for ARS F Route Define a yearly schedule for ARS F Route This schedule is used for setting special days such as national holidays pattern numbers 1 10 The pattern number is defined in Program 44 08 01 Date 0101 1231 Schedule Pattern Number 0 10 0 No Setting default 0 80 03 01 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Detect Level Use Items 11 32 to set the criteria for dial tone detection for out...

Page 165: ...to 45dBm 15 detect level 5 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 6 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 7 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 8 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 9 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 10 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 11 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 12 70dBm 0 to 85dBm 15 detect level 13 75dBm 0 to 90dBm 15 detect level 14 80dBm 0 to 95dBm 15 detect level 15 85dBm 0 to 100dBm...

Page 166: ... level 4 20dBm 0 to 35dBm 15 detect level 5 25dBm 0 to 40dBm 15 detect level 6 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 7 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 8 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 9 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 10 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 11 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 12 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 13 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 14 70dBm 0 to 85dBm 15 detect level 15 ...

Page 167: ...r 0 9 1dB 10dB default Type 1 0 1dBm Type 2 0 1dBm Type 3 0 1dBm Type 4 0 1dBm Type 5 0 1dBm 80 03 07 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup ON Detect Time Define the On detection time for DTMF Tone Receiver 1 255 15 15ms 3825ms default Type 1 1 30ms Type 2 1 30ms Type 3 1 30ms Type 4 1 30ms Type 5 1 30ms 80 03 08 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup OFF Detect Time Define the Off detection time for DTMF Tone Receiver 1 25...

Page 168: ...1 06 Automatic Route Selection Service Class of Service Match Access With the ARS Class of Service Match Access feature you can determine whether or not the system should allow a call based on the COS assigned to the Dial Analysis Table Program 26 02 This change can be used to create a tenant like application It then uses the trunk group set in the Additional Entry in Program 26 02 03 to place the...

Page 169: ...able entries which route according to the settings made in Program 26 02 02 and Program 26 02 03 for each of the table entries If the next entry is 2 the system checks no further in this program and routes all other 2xx numbers according to the entries made in Program 26 02 02 and Program 26 02 03 for this table entry Dial Digits 16 digits maximum 1 9 0 or for wild character Press line key 1 defau...

Page 170: ...umber Refer to Program 44 04 ARS F Route Selection for Time Schedule default 0 26 02 04 Dial Analysis Table for ARS ARS Class of Service For each Dial Analysis Table 1 800 set the Automatic Route Selection ARS Class of Service 0 16 0 16 default 0 26 02 05 Dial Analysis Table for ARS Dial Treatment for ARS For each Dial Analysis Table 1 800 set the Automatic Route Selection ARS Dial Treatment 0 15 ...

Page 171: ...code that follows For example D041234 out dials 124 Valid entries are 0 9 Wnn wait nn seconds and P pause Each digits code counts as a digit So for example if a P was added for a pause the entry would look like D05P1234 This Dial Treatment can only be added from telephone programming Wnn Wait nn seconds P Pause in analog trunk R Redial the initially dialed number including any modifications E End ...

Page 172: ...r each ARS F Route table 1 500 assign a priority number 1 4 Select whether or not a beep is heard if a lower priority trunk group is used 0 Off No Beep 1 On Beep s default 0 44 05 05 ARS F Route Table Gain Table Number for Internal Call For each ARS F Route table 1 500 assign a priority number 1 4 Select the gain table number to be used for internal calls 0 500 0 500 0 No Setting default 0 44 05 0...

Page 173: ...ssign the priority 1 4 Assign the Network Specified Parameter Table 0 16 0 16 default 0 51 01 01 NetLink System Property Setting NetLink System ID This is the ID of each NetLink system Set to insure that no overlap occurs between nodes 0 50 0 No operation default 0 51 03 01 NetLink Internet Protocol Address List Setting Internet Protocol Address List The system seeks the Primary system based on th...

Page 174: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 140 Automatic Route Selection THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 175: ...OH and BGM sources are required Background Music stops while the multiline terminal is in use Originating a call answering a voice announcement a ringing call or internal paging interrupts Background Music Background Music is not available on single line telephones Default Settings Background Music BGM is allowed System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s Locally pr...

Page 176: ... 2 3 10 24 01 Daylight Savings Setup Daylight Savings Mode Enable Disable the system ability to adjust the time for daylight savings standard time 0 Disable 1 Enable default 1 10 38 01 BGM Resource Setup BGM Resource Type Configure the Background Music Source input 0 for CD CP00 US or 1 for ACI Port 0 CD CP00 US MOH IN 1 ACI Port default 0 10 38 02 BGM Resource Setup ACI Port Number for BGM Source...

Page 177: ...UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 13 0 Background Music 2 143 Operation To turn Background Music on or off 1 Press idle Speaker 2 Dial 725 3 Press Speaker to hang up ...

Page 178: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 144 Background Music THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 179: ...e call Both the outside caller and the extension that barged into the call are placed on hold With Program 20 13 10 set to 1 a call which is barged into can be placed on Park by the originator of the outside call but only the outside caller is placed in Park The extension which barged into the call is dropped When Program 20 13 10 is set to 1 Monitor only one party can barge into the call Privacy ...

Page 180: ...n pressed it will Barge In to that Extension when pressed it will Barge In to the Extension that Call Forward Both Ring is set to If no Forward Both Ring is set it will ask as though no additional data is set Basic Barge In Functionality When using Barge In the maximum number of conference ports supported is 32 two original participants and a maximum of 30 Barge In participants Default Setting Dis...

Page 181: ...mine what the service code should be for an internal party to use the Barge In feature MLT SLT default 710 11 16 02 Single Digit Service Code Setup Barge In Set up Item 02 for single digit Barge In For example you can assign Item 02 to use digit 5 for Barge In This allows you to program a function key with an extension number plus the Barge In code i e 5 This allows one touch access to the Barge I...

Page 182: ... Off or On the Barge In Intrusion Tone If disabled this also turns off the Barge In display at the called extension 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 32 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Deny Multiple Barge Ins Allow 1 Deny 0 an extension user ability to have multiple users Barge In to their conversation 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 14 11 Class of Service Options for DIS...

Page 183: ...ess Speaker and dial the service code default 710 If the telephone does not have the proper COS a warning tone is sent After the user hangs up the system automatically places a callback to the extension 2 Dial the extension number or press a DSS key of a telephone in a conference call When a new call is added to the conference an intrusion tone is heard by all parties in the Conference depending o...

Page 184: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 150 Barge In THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 185: ...P00 US should be removed during long term storage but must be installed protection against loss of power just before blade installation to provide battery backup for System Memory When fully charged the battery retains System Memory for approximately three years You should replace the CD CP00 US battery every three years During normal operation the battery is continually recharged using a built in...

Page 186: ...re programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Operation None Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 90 03 01 Save Data...

Page 187: ...ds on system configuration traffic conditions and the capacity of the batteries Conditions During normal operation the batteries are continually recharged by a built in charging circuit The CD CP00 US is equipped with batteries for system battery backup An External Battery Pack can be connected to the system to provide extended time during a commercial power outage Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 Sys...

Page 188: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 154 Battery Backup System Power Programming None Operation None ...

Page 189: ... Conditions A trunk call that is originated or answered at a multiline terminal must appear on a line key The line key can be assigned as the Trunk Key or as a Call Appearance Key A CAP is dynamic because it is used for any trunk call An 8 button multiline terminal can have eight CAP keys that allow the telephone to process all trunks eight trunks at a time Multiline terminals can be assigned to t...

Page 190: ...a DSS Console as the system does not allow entry of the additional data required If you have both trunk line keys and Call Appearance CAP Keys the line key has priority An incoming call rings the trunk line key and when answered the trunk line keys lights not the CAP Key When you access the trunk for an outgoing call the Trunk line key lights not the Call Appearance CAP Key With Version 4000 or hi...

Page 191: ...s 2 157 Related Features Automatic Route Selection Call Arrival CAR Keys Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing Off Hook Signaling Programmable Function Keys Secondary Incoming Extension User Programming Ability Virtual Extensions ...

Page 192: ...ne terminal line keys Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 752 by default 08 XXXX CAP key where XXXX is the CAP orbit number 0001 9999 20 02 23 System Options for Multiline Telephones UX5000 Phone Operation Mode Selects the Loop Key operation like the UX5000 terminal or the CAP Key operation like the SV8100 terminal 0 Original Operation...

Page 193: ...all rings an extension for this time If not picked up the call goes back on System Hold 0 64800 seconds default 30 24 01 05 System Options for Hold Forced Release of Held Call Depending on the setting of Program 14 01 16 the system disconnects calls on Hold longer than this time 0 64800 seconds default 1800 24 01 06 System Options for Hold Park Hold Time Normal Set the Park Hold Time A call that i...

Page 194: ... outside party the Call Appearance key lights Begin your conversation 4 Press Hold the Call Appearance key flashes 5 Press the flashing Call Appearance key to retrieve the call To receive an incoming call put it on hold and then retrieve it using a multiline terminal 1 Receive CO PBX incoming ring 2 Go off hook using the handset or press Speaker the Call Appearance key lights Talk with outside par...

Page 195: ...R key assigned Up to 32 incoming calls can be queued to busy CAR key If multiple CAR SIE VE keys are ringing on a station at the same time the CAR SIE VE key on the lowest Line Key is answered first In Version 3000 or higher software the system can be programmed to blink the page number of a DT300 DT700 DESI Less terminal when it receives an incoming call or switch to the page of the incoming call...

Page 196: ...st commonly used These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro wizards for feature programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name De...

Page 197: ... Virtual Extension Access Mode when idle Virtual Extension key pressed Determine whether a Virtual Extension Call Arrival Key CAR should function as a DSS key a Virtual Extension or a CAR key When DSS 0 is selected the key functions as a DSS key to the extension and for incoming calls to that extension When Outgoing 1 is selected the key functions as a virtual extension and can be used for incomin...

Page 198: ... are set on a function key on the telephone and the tone pattern by which the sound of each extension differs the priority of ring sound is set up 0 Tone Pattern 1 1 Tone Pattern 2 2 Tone Pattern 3 3 Tone Pattern 4 4 Incoming Extension Ring Tone 5 Tone Pattern 5 6 Tone Pattern 6 7 Tone Pattern 7 8 Tone Pattern 8 Order 1 Pattern 0 Pattern 1 default Order 2 Pattern 1 Pattern 2 default Order 3 Patter...

Page 199: ...5 20 10 08 Class of Service Options Answer Service Virtual Extension Off Hook Answer Turn Off or On an extension ability to answer an incoming call on a Call Arrival CAR Secondary Incoming Extension SIE Virtual Extension simply by lifting the handset 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 01 15 20 13 27 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Busy on Seizing Virtual Extension If set to 1 a busy exten...

Page 200: ...rrival CAR Key on a telephone 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 752 3 Press the key you want to program 4 Dial 03 5 Dial the number of the extension you want to appear on the key 6 Press Hold once for Immediate Ring To set for Delayed Ring skip to Step 8 7 Dial the Mode number in which the key rings 1 Day 1 5 Day 2 2 Night 1 6 Night 2 3 Midnight 1 7 Midnight 2 4 Rest 1 8 Rest 2 8 Press Hold to set up Delayed...

Page 201: ...their time on the telephone For incoming trunk calls the Call Time begins as soon as the user answers the call Conditions The Call Timer starts over each time the call is retrieved from Hold or Park The Call Duration Timer Program 20 13 36 is not displayed for inbound ACD calls Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals with Display Required Component s None Rela...

Page 202: ...tically Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to extensions Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Default Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 09 06 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Incoming Time Display If this option is set to 1 th...

Page 203: ...g incoming calls follow Call Forwarding Centrex when the incoming trunk is a PBX Centrex trunk DIT ANA Station Transfer Automated Attendant Transfer DISA Calls Call Forwarding Centrex is not supported for Call Forward Both Ring Split A maximum of 24 digits can be assigned in the destination for Call Forwarding Centrex When a trunk is set to CTX PBX and is set for Call Forwarding Centrex to an inco...

Page 204: ...sabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s PBX Centrex CO line Related Features Call Forwarding Call Arrival CAR Keys Code Restriction Direct Inward Dialing DID Do Not Disturb Door Box PBX Compatibility Virtual Extensions Voice Response System VRS ...

Page 205: ...hould be able to use Call Forwarding Centrex 0 Common Use 1 Extension Only 2 Trunk Only Default Circuit Resource 01 08 1 Extensions Circuit Resource 09 32 2 Trunks Circuit Resource 33 96 0 Not Used Circuit Resource 97 160 0 Common When PZ BS10 is installed 97 160 are available 11 11 45 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Set Cancel Call Forward All Split Assign the Call Forward All Split ...

Page 206: ...busy 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 05 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Intercom Off Hook Signaling Turn Off or On an extension ability to receive off hook signals 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Automatic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override Allow a busy extension ability to Manually 0 or Automatically 1 receive off...

Page 207: ...he handset 2 Dial the Call Forwarding Split Service Code default not assigned 3 Dial 3 CTX PBX 4 Dial 1 Set 5 Dial number to Centrex Forward to 6 Hang up To cancel Call Forwarding Centrex 1 At a multiline terminal press Speaker OR At a single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial the Call Forward Split Service Code default not assigned 3 Dial 0 Cancel 4 Dial 3 CTX PBX or 0 All ...

Page 208: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 174 Call Forwarding Centrex THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 209: ...ng Call Forwarding Immediate All calls forward immediately to the destination and only the destination rings Call Forwarding with both Ringing All calls forward immediately to the destination and both the destination and the forwarded extension ring not for Voice Mail Call Forwarding when Unanswered Calls forward only if they are unanswered Ring No Answer Call Forwarding Follow Me Refer to Call Fo...

Page 210: ...ard Both Ring set to another extension it will only continue to forward if the Both ring location is forwarded B NA or NA to VM and no where else Version 3000 or higher software is required Call Forwards can be chained allowing calls to forward from one extension to the next Up to 32 extensions can be linked in a call forward chain Periodic reminder message requires a PZ VM21 daughter board for Vo...

Page 211: ...Forwarding but it cannot set any data Call Forward Both Ring Split does not work to an off premise destination If an IP telephone has forwarding set and then loses connection it follows the forwarding If an IP phone has Busy and No Answer Forwarding set to different locations and it loses connection it follows the Busy forwarding location When the following are done in sequence Call Forwarding Bus...

Page 212: ...e touch DSS key and in speed dial bins If the terminal is configured for Call Forward Both Ring and DND is activated the calling station will receive a busy tone Call Forward Both Ring is not followed With Version 8000 or higher software if Program 20 11 30 is set to 0 Off the Call FWD setting is displayed on the terminal LCD screen when idle Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals A...

Page 213: ...istrator Setting the Automatic Transfer for Each Trunk Line Set the service code for setting automatic transfer for each trunk line MLT default 733 11 10 07 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Canceling the Automatic Transfer for Each Trunk Line Set the service code for canceling automatic transfer for each trunk line MLT default 734 11 10 08 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Set...

Page 214: ...tion Set Cancel Call Forward Busy Split Set or Cancel the call forward busy split MLT SLT default not assigned 11 11 47 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Set Cancel Call Forward No Answer Split Set or Cancel the call forward no answer split MLT SLT default not assigned 11 11 48 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Set Cancel Call Forward Busy No Answer Split Set or Cancel the ca...

Page 215: ...e Function Code Service Code 752 by default 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to extensions Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Default Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 09 01 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Second Call for DID DISA DIL E M Override Turn Off or On an extension ability to receive a...

Page 216: ...Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 23 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service CAR VE Call Forward Set Cancel Turn Off or On the ability to set and cancel Call Forwarding for a CAR or Virtual Extension 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 30 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Disable Call FWD Indication on LCD When set to On 1 Call FWD setting is not shown on the terminal L...

Page 217: ...tion for Both ring All Call No Answer Assign Intercom Call Forwarding Destination for ring all call and no answer 1 9 0 R Up to 24 digits default not assigned 24 09 04 Call Forward Split Settings CO Call Forwarding Busy Destination Assign CO Call Forwarding for busy destinations 1 9 0 R Up to 24 digits default not assigned 24 09 05 Call Forward Split Settings Intercom Call Forwarding Busy Destinat...

Page 218: ...d Immediate Service Code default 741 OR At the multiline terminal only press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys Program 15 07 01 10 or SC 751 Key Code 10 3 Dial 0 Cancel 4 Press Speaker or hang up The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key turns off To set Call Forward Busy No Answer at a forwarding station 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker 2 Dial the Call Forward Busy No Answe...

Page 219: ...r press Speaker 2 Dial the Call Forward Both Ring Service Code default 745 OR At the multiline terminal only press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys Program 15 07 01 14 or SC 751 Key Code 14 3 Dial 1 Set 4 Dial the destination extension number 5 Press Speaker or hang up The Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key turns on To cancel Call Forward Both Ring at a forwarding station 1 Pi...

Page 220: ...rom the destination station 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker 2 Dial the Call Forward Follow Me Service Code default 746 OR At the multiline terminal only press the Call Forwarding Programmable Function keys Program 15 07 01 10 or SC 751 Key Code 15 3 Dial 0 Cancel 4 Dial the station number which is forwarded or 0 to cancel all extensions 5 Press Speaker or hang up The Call Forwarding Program...

Page 221: ...1 Set 4 Dial the extension number to be forwarded and then the destination number 5 Press Speaker or hang up To cancel Call Forward Busy No Answer for any Extension to Destination 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker 2 Dial the Call Forward Busy No Answer for any Extension to Destination Service Code default 793 3 Dial 0 Cancel 4 Dial the station number which is forwarded 5 Press Speaker or hang...

Page 222: ... Extension 1 Press the idle Virtual Extension key 2 Dial the Call Forward Busy No Answer Service Code Default 744 3 Dial 1 Set 4 Dial the destination extension or off premise number 5 Press Speaker or hang up Refer to Voice Response System VRS Call Forwarding Park and Page on page 2 2077 To cancel Call Forward Busy No Answer using a Virtual Extension 1 Press the idle Virtual Extension key 2 Dial t...

Page 223: ...hone Call Forwarding with Follow Me reroutes calls from the destination extension To reroute calls from the initiating forwarding extension use Call Forwarding Conditions Call Forwarding an extension in a Department Group prevents that extension from receiving Department Pilot Calls Multiple Stations can set Call Forward Follow Me to one station Calls to extensions with DND active do not follow Ca...

Page 224: ...ogram Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 11 07 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Call Forwarding Follow Me Assign the service code of Call Forward Follow Me MLT SLT default 746 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign functions to multiline terminal line keys Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 751 by default 15 Call Forward with Follow Me 00 99 ...

Page 225: ...w Me from your own multiline terminal 1 At your multiline terminal press Speaker and dial Service Code 746 Program 11 11 07 OR Press the Call Forward Follow Me key Program 15 07 01 or SC 751 Code 15 2 Dial 0 to cancel 3 Dial 0 Cancel All Forward Follow Me OR Dial the extension number with Follow Me set To activate Call Forward Follow Me from a single line telephone 1 At a single line telephone oth...

Page 226: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 192 Call Forwarding with Follow Me THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 227: ...extension 1 Transferred calls 1 Off Premise Call Forwarding does not reroute Call Arrival CAR Keys Call Arrival CAR Keys or Ring Group calls i e trunk ringing according to Ring Group assignments made in Program 22 04 and Program 22 05 Conditions If a call that forwards Off Premise goes out on a trunk assigned as TIE or DID and the called party does not answer before the time in Program 34 07 05 th...

Page 228: ...daughter board for VRS callers to an extension forwarded off premise hear Please hold on your call is being rerouted This option can be disabled in Program 40 10 01 by setting it to disable When a station is in DND and any Call Forwarding Off Premise is set the call forwards immediately Call Forwarding Off Premise is not supported when using Alternate Trunk Group Routing Default Setting Disabled S...

Page 229: ...D CP00 US ETUs for either DTMF receiving or dial tone detection Program 14 01 13 Basic Trunk Data Setup Loop Supervision Enable 1 loop supervision for each trunk that should be able to use Call Forwarding Off Premise 0 Common Use 1 Extension Only 2 Trunk Only Default Circuit Resource 01 08 1 Extensions Circuit Resource 09 32 2 Trunks Circuit Resource 33 96 0 Not Used Circuit Resource 97 160 0 Comm...

Page 230: ...r Split Service Code MLT SLT default not assigned 11 11 49 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Set Cancel Call Forward Both Ring Split Assign the Call Forward Both Ring Split Service Code MLT SLT default not assigned 11 11 52 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Set Cancel Call Forward All Destination No Split Assign the Call Forward All for any Extension Service Code MLT SLT defa...

Page 231: ... a previous call is ringing the extension but has not yet been answered the second caller hears busy regardless of this program setting 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 09 07 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Call Queuing Turn Off or On an extension user ability to have calls queued if a call rings the extension when it is busy 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 12 Class of S...

Page 232: ...tion numbers for both ring all call and no answer 1 9 0 R Up to 24 digits default not assigned 24 09 03 Call Forward Split Settings Intercom Call Forwarding Destination for both ring All Call No Answer Assign Intercom Call Forwarding destination numbers for both ring all call and no answer 1 9 0 R Up to 24 digits default not assigned 24 09 04 Call Forward Split Settings CO Call Forwarding Busy Des...

Page 233: ...tem Administrator Canceling the Automatic Transfer for each Trunk Line Customize the service code to be used to cancel the Automatic Trunk Forwarding feature MLT default 734 11 10 08 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Setting the Destination for Automatic Trunk Transfer Customize the service code to be used to set the destination for the Automatic Trunk Forwarding feature MLT default 735 ...

Page 234: ...oming trunk type for each trunk There is one item for each Mode When using Trunk to Trunk Forwarding the trunks must be set for Normal 0 0 Normal 1 VRS second dial tone if no VRS installed 2 DISA 3 DID 4 DIL 5 E M Tie line 6 Delayed VRS 7 ANI DNIS 8 DID DDI Mode Switching default 0 24 02 11 System Options for Transfer No Answer Step Transfer Assign the amount of time each transfer destination ring...

Page 235: ...omatic Trunk Forwarding feature for a Department Group MLT default 604 13 01 01 Speed Dialing Function Setup Speed Dialing Auto Outgoing Call Mode Determine if dialing an Speed Dialing number will dial an outside number seizing a trunk as assigned in Program 13 05 or an Intercom number 0 Trunk Dialing Mode 1 Extension Dialing Mode 0 Trunk Outgoing Mode 1 Intercom Outgoing Mode default 0 13 04 01 S...

Page 236: ...nsion priority when a group is called Call Pickup Groups are set up in 23 02 Department Groups 1 64 Priority 1 999 Default 1 extensions in Department Group 1 with priority in port order Port 1 priority 1 Port 256 priority 256 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to extensions Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Default Extension port 101 Class ...

Page 237: ... 1 9 01 99 or 001 100 or 9 Line number e g 05 or 005 for line 5 Your DND or Call Forwarding Device Programmable Function key flashes Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 22 11 05 DID Translation Table Number Conversion Transfer Destination Number 1 For each DID Translation Table entry 1 2000 specify the first and second Transfer Destinations if the callers rec...

Page 238: ... Dial Trunk Access Code default 9 number 9 2142622000 Trunk access codes are 9 ARS Trunk Group Routing 704 Line Group 1 9 01 99 or 001 100 or 9 Line number e g 05 or 005 for line 5 Your DND or Call Forwarding Device Programmable Function key flashes To cancel Call Forwarding Off Premise Split 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker OR 2 At a single line telephone lift the handset 3 Dial the Call...

Page 239: ...ding Off Premise for a Door Box 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker dial SC 722 OR At the multiline terminal only press Call Forward Device key Program 15 07 01 or SC 751 code 54 OR At the single line telephone lift the handset dial 722 2 Dial 0 Cancel Trunk to Trunk Forwarding Set the Destination and Forward the Line 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 735 3 Dial trunk port number 001 200 to be defin...

Page 240: ...d 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 733 3 Dial trunk port number to be used 001 200 4 Press Speaker to hang up Cancel Automatic Trunk Forwarding 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 734 3 Dial trunk port number to be used 001 200 4 Press Speaker to hang up Department Group Line Forwarding Method 1 Set the Destination and Forward the Line 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 604 3 Dial the Department Group number 01 64 to be de...

Page 241: ...me mode 1 8 to be defined 5 Press the Exit key 6 Press Speaker to hang up Method 2 follows the pre defined destination in Program 24 05 01 Set Automatic Trunk Forwarding The Speed Dial bin must be defined in Program 13 04 01 for the line to forward 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 602 3 Dial the Department Group number 01 64 to be defined 4 Press Speaker to hang up Cancel Automatic Trunk Forwarding 1 Lif...

Page 242: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 208 Call Forwarding Off Premise THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 243: ...xtension user can override Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb at another extension This is helpful for example to dispatchers and office managers that always need to get through Conditions None Default Setting Disabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Programmable Function Keys ...

Page 244: ...e Setup for Service Access Bypass Call Customize the Service Code which is to be used for Call Forwarding DND Override MLT SLT default 707 11 16 06 Single Digit Service Code Setup DND Call Forward Override Bypass Customize the 1 digit Service Code used for DND Call Forward Override default not assigned 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign functions to multiline terminal line keys Line Key 1 ...

Page 245: ... Issue 13 0 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override 2 211 Operation To override an extension Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb 1 Call the forwarded or DND extension 2 Press the Override key Program 15 07 or SC 751 37 ...

Page 246: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 212 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 247: ...nts ACD Call Monitoring Enhancement With Version 9000 or higher system software and the V9000 Enhancement license users have the capability to enable ACD Call monitoring 15 Feature key for any call In previous software versions ACD Call Monitor only worked when the system was configured for ACD and only ACD agent calls could be monitored With Version 9000 software ACD Call Monitor will function ev...

Page 248: ...ack Both Intercom parties must lift the handset or press Speaker An extension user cannot monitor a conference however an extension programmed for Call Monitor can barge In to a conference With Program 20 13 10 set to 0 a call which has been barged into can be placed on hold by the originator of the outside call Both the outside caller and the extension which is monitoring the call are placed on h...

Page 249: ...ility Terminals All Terminals Required Component s ACD Call Monitor 15 Feature key Enhancement requires Version 9000 or higher system software V9000 Enhancement license Related Features Barge In Conference Hold Intercom Park Programmable Function Keys VM8000 InMail ...

Page 250: ...02 Single Digit Service Code Setup Barge In Customize the one digit Service Codes used for Barge In default not assigned 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign functions to multiline terminal line keys Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 752 by default 20 02 27 System Options for Multiline Telephones ACD Monitor for Business Mode S...

Page 251: ...Allow 1 Deny 0 the extension user ability to have multiple users Barge In to their conversation 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 45 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service MIC Key Mode While Call Monitoring Set per class of service when in Call Monitoring Mode determines if the monitored parties receives the barge in alert tone when Coaching Mode is enabled 0 Enable 1 Disable default...

Page 252: ...eaker or lift handset 2 Dial 710 or press the Barge In key Program 15 07 or SC 751 34 3 Dial a busy extension If Monitoring is not possible the extension user hears a warning tone the DISA user is rerouted to the defined ring group the Tie Line user hears a busy tone To Call Monitor using Coaching Ability 1 Call a busy extension 2 Press the Barge In key Program 15 07 or SC 751 34 21 01 03 System O...

Page 253: ...lity on and off To Call Monitor using Coaching Ability without first calling the busy extension 1 Press Speaker or lift the handset 2 Dial 710 or press the Barge In key Program 15 07 or SC 751 34 3 Dial a busy extension 4 Press MIC or Feature 1 to toggle Coaching Ability on and off to the monitored station To Call Monitor after calling a busy extension using ACD Call Monitor Version 9000 or higher...

Page 254: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 220 Call Monitoring THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 255: ...s feature works with the following calls Normal trunk call DID DISA DIL E M ICM The following calls cannot be redirected with the feature ACD Transferred Department Group all ring mode Door Box Virtual Extension Conditions After pressing the Call Redirect key the call does not recall to the extension The predefined destination must be an extension number or voice mail pilot number When a call is R...

Page 256: ... WebPro wizards for feature programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 15 07 01...

Page 257: ...of Service 1 15 to extensions Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Default Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 11 16 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Redirect Turn Off or On an extension user ability to transfer a call to a predefined destination such as an operator voice mail or another extension without answering the call 0 Off 1 O...

Page 258: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 224 Call Redirect THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 259: ...ut being forgotten Conditions Call Arrival CAR Key virtual extension keys do not support Call Waiting Camp On Programmable Function keys code 35 If an extension user Camps On and then hangs up the system converts the Camp On to a callback Off Hook Signaling gives an extension the ability to block a caller from dialing 750 to Camp On and or DID callers from automatically camping on Function keys si...

Page 260: ...signed Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 11 23 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Second Call for DID DISA DIL This service code enables Second Call to each extension when Program 20 09 01 Second Call is set to 0 disable MLT default 679 11 12 04 Service Code Setup for Service Access Set Camp On Customize the Service Code which is to be used for...

Page 261: ...euing Callback Time Set the Trunk Queuing callback time A Trunk Queuing Callback rings an extension for this time 0 64800 seconds default 15 20 01 09 System Options Callback Trunk Queuing Cancel Time The system cancels an extension Callback or Trunk Queueing request after this time 0 64800 seconds default 64800 20 03 01 System Options for Single Line Telephones SLT Call Waiting for Answer Mode For...

Page 262: ...Service Intercom Off Hook signaling Turn Off or On an extension ability to receive off hook signals 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Automatic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override Allow a busy extension ability to Manually 0 or Automatically 1 receive off hook signals 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 35 Class of Service Options Suppl...

Page 263: ...tiline terminal press Speaker and dial 770 OR At a multiline terminal press the Camp On key Program 15 07 or SC 751 35 OR At the single line telephone lift the handset and dial 770 To Split answer a waiting call at a single line telephone Listen for Call Waiting Tones 1 Hookflash and dial 794 to repeatedly split between the two calls The operation depends on the setting in Program 20 03 01 This op...

Page 264: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 230 Call Waiting Camp On THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 265: ...g the system cancels the Callback 4 As soon as caller B answers the system sets up an Intercom call between A and B Callback Automatic Answer determines how an extension user answers the Callback ring When Callback Automatic Answer is enabled a user answers the Callback ring when they lift the handset When Callback Automatic Answer is disabled the user must press the ringing line appearance to ans...

Page 266: ...for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 12 05 Service Code Setup for Service Access Cancel Camp On If required redefine the service code used cancel Camp On MLT SLT default 770 11 12 44 Service Code Setup for Servic...

Page 267: ...nce to place the call To cancel a Callback 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker and Dial 770 OR At the multiline terminal press Camp On key Program 15 07 or SC 751 35 OR At the single line telephone lift the handset and dial 770 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign functions to multiline terminal line keys Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Function ...

Page 268: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 234 Callback To test Callback at a single line telephone 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 799 3 Hang up 4 When the telephone rings lift the handset You hear the Hold tone 5 Hang up ...

Page 269: ... dropping the call When a subscriber listens to a message from a Softkey equipped telephone and Caller ID information is unavailable the voice mail system leaves the second line of the LCD blank When Caller ID is disabled on the system voice mail displays the message count On the UM8000 Mail from the subscriber options Softkey menu a subscriber can access a Softkey menu that allows selection of na...

Page 270: ...red on the Integration Options line of System Switch Switch Information Screen to enable this voice mail feature Default is RCV 6 10 where 6 is the number of rings voice mail tries when returning a call and 10 is the number of minutes a retuned call can last On the UM8000 Mail a trunk access code must be entered on the Return call outdial access code line of System Switch Dialing Codes screen so t...

Page 271: ...ire an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 14 01 22 Basic Trunk Data Setup Caller ID to Voice Mail Enable Disable the system ability to send the Caller ID digits to voice mail Trunks 1 200 0 Disable 1 Enable default 0 14 02 10 Analog Trunk Data Setup Caller ID Enable 1 Disable 0 a trunk to r...

Page 272: ...0 2 To exit from the call hang up To return call from the VM8000 InMail 1 While listening to a message with CID information press More More then Call softkeys OR Dial 6 2 MC 2 To exit from the call hang up If you hear Your call cannot go through your system Caller ID is not properly set up You will be returned to the listen mode for the message you were listening to when you tried the Make Call ...

Page 273: ...wo types of Caller ID message formats are currently available Single Message Format and Multiple Message Format With Single Message Format the Telco sends only the caller s telephone number DN The DN has seven or 10 digits In Multiple Message Format the Telco sends the DN and the caller s name The DN for this format also has seven or 10 digits and the name provided consists of up to 15 ASCII chara...

Page 274: ...ndicate a new call was placed in the temporary memory If enabled in programming the telephone display shows CHECK LIST This Caller ID data from the temporary memory can be saved in either Speed Dial bins or in One Touch keys making them available for placing future calls Cursor Key Operation By pressing the Left Cursor Key the user can access the Redial and Incoming Call History menus The flow cha...

Page 275: ...me for SLT System programming provides an option for single line telephones to display Caller ID Add Trunk Access Code to Caller ID with Wireless DECT SIP Phones UNIVERGE SV8100 SIP DECT Phones on the UNIVERGE SV8100 can hold incoming call history This history is created based on the Caller ID information element contained in the call Setup message which is transmitted from the UNIVERGE SV8100 Thi...

Page 276: ...n Available for FSK or DTMF Type for Single Line Telephone An option Program 15 03 11 is available for the Caller ID which allows you to select either FSK or DTMF as the Caller ID type to be received by a single line telephone Option Available for FSK or DTMF Type from Analog Trunk An option Program 14 02 16 is available for the Caller ID which allows you to select the type of Caller ID signal fro...

Page 277: ...e Incoming Time Display is set to 1 On the first line displays the time and date When you shut down the system incoming history data is cleared But you can back up the history data by pressing Speaker 9 Program 15 07 01 button 63 when enabled removes the CPN from the setup message when making an outbound ISDN call this is a toggle enable disable button and can be used on a Call by Call basis Progr...

Page 278: ... Display Function Memo information cannot be programmed via telephone programming or service access code only via Web Pro and PC Pro The Memo Display function is only supported on Multiline terminals The Memo Display function is only supported for incoming trunk calls with Caller ID information The destination station must be idle for the Memo Display function to work The Memo Display function wil...

Page 279: ... s CD 4COTB with PZ 4COTF Daughter Board CD 2BRIA with PZ 2BRIA Daughter Board CD PRTA Related Features Automatic Route Selection Call Arrival CAR Keys Caller ID Call Return Conference Voice Call Privacy Release Dterm Cordless II Dterm Cordless Lite II Telephones Park Speed Dial System Group Station Station Message Detail Recording T1 Trunking with ANI DNIS Compatibility VM8000 InMail ...

Page 280: ...d 10 09 01 DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup Allocate the circuits 1 16 or 1 64 on the CD CP00 US for either DTMF receiving or dial tone detection The CD CP00 US has 32 resources for DTMF receiving and Dial Tone detection When a PZ BS10 is installed there are 64 resources available When Program 10 09 01 is set to 0 Common and Program 14 02 10 Caller ID is set to 1 Yes all DTMF Dial Tone Detection r...

Page 281: ...ks 1 200 0 Disable 1 Enable default 0 14 02 10 Analog Trunk Data Setup Caller ID Enable 1 or Disable 0 a trunk to receive Caller ID information Trunks 1 200 0 No 1 Yes default 0 15 02 08 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Automatic Handsfree Set whether pressing a key accesses a One Touch Key 1 or preselects the key 0 0 Preselect 1 One Touch Automatic Handsfree default 1 15 02 15 Multiline Telep...

Page 282: ...isplay Holding Time Determine the time a user display shows Caller ID for a second incoming call 0 64800 seconds default 5 seconds 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to extensions Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Default Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 08 15 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Blo...

Page 283: ... resource becomes available during this time the call immediately rings the single line telephone with Caller ID If the time expires before a resource becomes available the system rings the single line telephone without Caller ID until the queuing time expires the single line telephone does not ring If the queuing timer is set to 0 the system does not queue the incoming call 0 64800 seconds defaul...

Page 284: ...tem and Group Speed Dialing numbers and names 1 9 0 Pause Press line key 1 Recall Flash Press line key 2 Code to wait for answer supervision in ISDN Press line key 3 maximum 24 digits default not assigned 13 04 08 Speed Dialing Number and Name Memo Display 1 This can only be set using Web Pro or PC Pro and determines what will be displayed on line 1 of the multiline telephone when Program 15 02 58...

Page 285: ...st Number xx Caller ID number mm dd hh mm incoming date and time Preview List Next List Store Store in List DEL Delete from List 15 02 58 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Display Mode of Incoming Trunk Determines if the incoming CID or the Memo 1 2 3 setting will be displayed for a matching CID number 0 CID 1 Memo Information default 0 1 01 FRI 09 00AM 301 STA 301 LIST DIR ICM PROG LIST MENU R...

Page 286: ...lay shows If all Speed Dial bins are used the display shows TABLE IS FULL 7 Press HOLD The display shows 8 Enter the name to be associated with the stored number xxxxxxxxxxxxx mm dd hh mm STA SYS Store to SYS COMMON ENTER BIN SYS XXXX xxxxxxxxxxxxx SYS XXXX Table 2 8 Keys for Entering Names Use this keypad digit When you want to 1 Enter characters 1 _ Æ Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó 2 Enter characters A C a c...

Page 287: ...s 0 ô Õ ú ä ö ü Enter characters B E S Accepts an entry only required if two letters on the same key are needed ex TOM Pressing again Space In system programming mode use the right arrow Softkey instead to accept and or add a space CONF Clear the character entry one character at a time HOLD Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right SET SYS 1 01 FRI 09 00AM 301 ST...

Page 288: ...ial bin SYS Store in System Speed Dial bin 5 Press the STA Softkey The display shows 6 Press the One Touch key in which the number is to be stored or dial 1 9 0 If you press Hold the next available One Touch key is used The display shows If all One Touch keys are used the display shows TABLE IS FULL 7 Press Hold The display shows 8 Enter the name to be associated with the stored number Refer to Ta...

Page 289: ...xt entry 4 The Call History key remains on as long as entries remain in memory 5 To place a call back to a number in the temporary memory list with the number to be dialed displayed press a line key or Speaker Refer to Table 2 8 Keys for Entering Names on page 2 252 The outgoing call is placed To display Caller ID for a call in Park Program 15 02 08 is set to 0 preselect for this feature 1 With Pr...

Page 290: ...missed unanswered The second row shows the date and time of the call Press the up and down softkeys to see the list of calls available in the buffer 3 If the Caller ID includes a name you can press the HELP key to view the number of the caller 4 To call the displayed number press a line Call Appearance CAP Key OR To erase the displayed number without returning the call press the DEL Softkey 5 Pres...

Page 291: ...ches the Speed Dial group number programmed in Program 22 16 01 and Speed Dial entry in Programs 13 02 01 and 13 04 01 The analog ISDN or IP trunk call can also be routed to an alternative extension or incoming ring group if the Caller ID number matches the common or group Speed Dial table Program 13 04 This option can block calls on all trunks or it can be set on a per trunk basis Programming Exa...

Page 292: ...ice code Program 11 10 32 or Programmable Function Key code 86 To reject the call with 2142622000 Caller ID incoming call Program 14 01 27 1 reject Program 20 07 25 1 Enable for COS Program 22 16 64 Speed Dial group 64 Program 13 02 Group 64 1000 1099 Program 13 04 01 Table 1000 2142622000 then Turn on the Caller ID Refuse mode using the service code Program 11 10 34 or Programmable Function Key c...

Page 293: ...tension is available When Program 13 04 is used it will override the setting in Program 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Program 13 04 will follow Common or Group Speed Dial numbers With Version 8000 or higher software the number of Tone Patterns increased from four to eight After setting new system data Tone Patterns 5 8 downgrading to Version 7000 or lower may cause incoming rings to not funct...

Page 294: ...gramming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 10 32 Service Code Setup for System ...

Page 295: ...n the incoming caller ID matches the number programmed in the speed dial bin this setting determines the destination of the call 0 Not Used 1 Internal Dial 2 Incoming Ring Group IRG default 0 13 04 04 Speed Dialing Number and Name Transfer Destination Number When the incoming caller ID matches the number programmed in the speed dial bin this setting determines the destination of the call If Transf...

Page 296: ...ion Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 752 by default 20 07 24 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Set Cancel Private Call Refuse Enable 1 or Disable 0 an extension user ability to set or cancel Private Call Refuse 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 07 25 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Set Cancel Caller ID Refuse Enable Disable an extension abi...

Page 297: ...h refusing Speed Dial area PRG 22 16 data exists 2 Go to Chart 2 No No Yes Yes PRG 14 01 27 1 And refuse mode is Play VRS Message PRG 40 10 07 Disconnect the call Search PRG 13 04 01 Data unmatched Data matched PRG 13 04 03 2 1 0 Off On Follow PRG 22 02 01 Ring the extension number Ring the incoming ring group ...

Page 298: ...Ringing Operation None Follow PRG 22 02 01 Ring the extension number Ring the incoming ring group Disconnect the call Play VRS Message PRG 40 10 07 PRG 14 01 27 1 And refuse mode is 2 Off On Anything Else Private Reason of No Caller ID PRG 22 18 01 1 2 0 ...

Page 299: ...des to pick up the ringing trunk You normally set up Universal Answer along with Universal Night Answer refer to Night Service on page 2 1175 When a Universal Night Answer call rings the External Paging an employee can answer the call from the first available telephone You might also want to use Universal Answer in a noisy warehouse or machine shop where the volume of normal telephone ringing is n...

Page 300: ...picked up regardless of access map programming An extension user can answer an outside call just by lifting the handset Long Conversation Cutoff can disconnect incoming and outgoing CO calls after a set time period Using the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature allows users on outgoing calls to hear a warning tone prior to the call disconnecting Line keys and Call Appearance CAP Keys simplif...

Page 301: ... the phone goes idle To adjust for proper audio quality refer to Programs 81 07 and 81 17 For any incoming call internal or external only one MH240 wireless handset can be assigned to ring for the incoming call Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s Any Trunk Blade i e CD 4COTB CD 2BRIA CD PRTA etc Related Features Automatic Call Distribution ACD C...

Page 302: ...rogram Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 03 XX ETU Setup Use program 10 03 XX to setup and confirm the basic configuration data for each blade This program represents different data depending on the blade installed in the slot Please refer the SV8100 Programming Manual for a more detailed description of this program The assigned data varies depending on the blad...

Page 303: ...option must be set to 1 for the trunks to ring and light correctly Trunks 1 200 0 Normal delayed 1 Immediate Ringing default 1 14 05 01 Trunk Group Trunk Group Number Assign trunks to trunk groups then go to Program 14 06 01 below to set up Trunk Group Routing Trunks 1 200 Trunk Groups 1 100 Default Trunks 1 200 assigned to trunk group 1 with priorities equal to the trunk number Trunk 1 Priority 1...

Page 304: ...on Hold 5 Incoming access and access when trunk on Hold 6 Incoming and Outgoing access 7 Incoming access outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold Trunk Access Maps 1 200 Default Access Maps 1 200 Trunk Ports 1 200 assigned with option 7 access incoming and outgoing access and access when trunk is on Hold 15 01 05 Basic Extension Data Setup Restriction for Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line Ena...

Page 305: ...one 1 5 Ring Tone 2 6 Ring Tone 3 7 Ring Tone 4 8 Ring Tone 5 default 2 15 02 22 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Multiple Incoming From Intercom and Trunk When this option is disabled incoming calls to an extension indicate on any Hotline key for that extension as solid busy When this option is enabled lighting is determined by the setting of Program 22 01 01 Incoming Call Priority If set to ...

Page 306: ...fine or Disable the page to be automatically displayed when a DESI Less terminal becomes idle 0 Disable 1 Display page 1 2 Display page 2 3 Display page 3 4 Display page 4 default 0 15 25 04 DESI less Page Setup Answer Automatic Screen Switching Define or Disable the page to be automatically displayed when a DESI Less terminal answers a call 0 Disable 1 Display page 1 2 Display page 2 3 Display pa...

Page 307: ...line the system determines the call is unable to complete and releases the DTMF receiver 0 64800 seconds default 20 21 01 17 System Options for Outgoing Calls Restriction Digit in Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line With the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature determine the number of digits 0 9 to be dialed before the call should be disconnected Digits 0 9 default 4 22 01 01 System Options for...

Page 308: ... 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Assign extensions to ring groups Maximum eight digits Default Extensions 101 108 first eight ports ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls No other extensions ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls 22 05 01 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment To have the trunks ring extensions assign trunks to a Ring Group The incoming ring group assignment programmed in...

Page 309: ...ail default 1 23 03 01 Universal Answer Auto Answer Use this program to let an extension user automatically answer trunk calls that ring other extensions When the user lifts the handset they automatically answer the ringing calls based on Trunk Group Routing programming defined in Program 14 06 Maximum eight digits Day Night Mode 1 8 Route Table Number 0 100 default 0 82 08 01 Sidetone Volume Setu...

Page 310: ...he call and you can skip Step 2 2 Dial 0 If you hear error tone your extension Class of Service prevents Universal Answer To listen to the incoming trunk ring choices 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 711 2 3 Select the ringing 1 8 and tone range 1 4 you want to check 4 Go back to step 3 to listen to additional choices or press Speaker to hang up To change the ringing of your incoming trunk 1 Press Speaker 2...

Page 311: ...vailable trunks Trunk Port Disable The system provides a service code default 645 which can be used by an extension user to block a trunk for outgoing calls The user which busied out the trunk still has access to it All other users are blocked from seizing it to place an outgoing call The trunk however can still be answered by any user programmed with the trunk access Sidetone Volume Setup Allows ...

Page 312: ...sers without Automatic Handsfree can preselect a line key before lifting the handset or pressing Speaker Long Conversation Cutoff can disconnect incoming and outgoing CO calls after a set time Using the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature allows users on outgoing calls to hear a warning tone prior to the call disconnecting An extension Toll Class of Service may prevent dialing certain numbe...

Page 313: ...equired Component s Any Trunk Blade i e CD 4COTB CD 2BRIA CD PRTA etc Related Features Alphanumeric Display Automatic Route Selection Call Appearance CAP Keys Code Restriction Dial Tone Detection Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing Long Conversation Cutoff Microphone Cutoff Programmable Function Keys Trunk Group Routing Trunk Groups ...

Page 314: ...iled description of the 10 03 XX programs 11 01 01 System Numbering Set system numbering plan Refer to UNIVERGE SV8100 Programming Manual 11 09 01 Trunk Access Code If required change the single digit Trunk Access Code normally 9 If you change this code you must also review the settings in Program 11 01 01 for the new code selected Dial up to four digits default 9 11 09 02 Trunk Access Code 2nd Tr...

Page 315: ...ny No 1 Allow Yes default 1 14 01 10 Basic Trunk Data Setup DTMF Tones for Outgoing Calls For each trunk Enable Disable the ability to hear the DTMF of the digits dialed when placing the outgoing call 0 Disable 1 Enable default 0 14 02 05 Analog Trunk Data Setup Dial Tone Detection for Manually Accessed Trunks Enable Disable dial tone detection for directly accessed trunks If disabled the system o...

Page 316: ...ault all group are assigned to Trunk Group 1 Trunk Group Number 0 100 Priority Number 1 200 default Trunk Group 1 with priority in ascending order 14 06 01 Trunk Group Routing Priority Order Number Set the priority order number 1 4 0 Not Specify 1 100 Trunk Group Number 1001 1100 1000 Route Table Number Default Route 1 Order Number 1 1 Trunk Group 1 Order Numbers 2 3 4 0 Not Specified All Other Ro...

Page 317: ... trunk on Hold Trunk Access Maps 1 200 Default Access Maps 1 200 Trunk Ports 1 200 assigned with option 7 access incoming and outgoing access and access when trunk is on Hold 15 02 01 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Display Language Selection To select options 8 10 press either 8 or Recall then press line keys 1 3 Key 1 is option 8 Key 2 is option 9 and Key 3 is option 10 Define the display l...

Page 318: ... 752 by default 20 02 06 System Options for Multiline Telephones Preselection Time Set the preselection time When a multiline terminal user preselects a line key the system remembers the preselection for this time 0 64800 seconds default 5 seconds 20 02 09 System Options for Multiline Telephones Disconnect Supervision Enable Disable disconnect supervision for the system trunks 0 Disable 1 Enable d...

Page 319: ...sable on Incoming Line With the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature determine the number of digits 0 9 to be dialed before the call should be disconnected Digits 0 9 default 4 21 02 01 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Assign Program 14 06 routes to extensions 0 100 0 No Setting default 1 21 15 01 Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Designate the trunk route accessed when a user d...

Page 320: ...up 2 Dial the number 82 08 01 Sidetone Volume Setup Adjust the multiline terminal side tone volume There are two levels based on whether the connected trunk is a digital trunk or analog trunk 0 9 Digital Sidetone Level 0 54 db 1 48 db 2 42 db 3 36 db 4 30 db 5 24 db 6 18 db 7 12 db 8 12 db 9 12 db Analog Sidetone Level 0 54 db 1 54 db 2 54 db 3 48 db 4 42 db 5 36 db 6 30 db 7 24 db 8 18 db 9 12 db...

Page 321: ...ver a specific trunk 1 Dial 9 2 Dial the line number e g 005 for line 5 3 Dial the number OR 1 At the multiline terminal press line key Program 15 07 01 or SC 752 01 001 to 200 2 Dial the number To busy out a trunk from outbound usage 1 Press Speaker 645 Trunk Number 001 200 1 The user which busied out the trunk still has access to it All other users are blocked from seizing it to place an outgoin...

Page 322: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 288 Central Office Calls Placing THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 323: ...n can have a different Class of Service for each Service mode At default the Mode names are assigned as follows Mode 1 No setting Mode 2 Night Mode 3 Midnight Mode 4 Rest Mode 5 Day2 Mode 6 Night2 Mode 7 Midnight2 Mode 8 Rest2 If a user dials a number not programmed in ARS Program 26 01 03 determines if the system should route over the trunk group settings defined in Program 21 02 or play an error...

Page 324: ... of Service via Service Code An extension can use Service Code 677 to change another extension Class of Service Program 20 13 28 1 An extension can automatically block another extension attempt to change their Class of Service via Service Code 677 Program 20 13 28 0 The default Service Code for this option is 677 Program 11 11 24 677 System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s...

Page 325: ... Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to extensions Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Default Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 07 01 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Manual Night Service Enabled Turn Off or On an extension ability to manually Switch the Night Mode Service Code 718 This option must be enabled for an extension to b...

Page 326: ... to use the Trunk Port Disable feature 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 14 default 1 for COS 15 20 07 13 Class of Service Options Administrator Level VRS Record VRS Msg Operation Turn Off or On an extension user ability to record erase and listen to VRS messages 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 14 default 1 for COS 15 20 07 14 Class of Service Options Administrator Level VRS General Message Play Turn ...

Page 327: ...for COS 1 15 20 07 25 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Set Cancel Caller ID Refuse Enable Disable an extension ability to set or cancel Caller ID Refuse 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 07 26 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Dial In Mode Switch Enable Disable an extension user ability to set or cancel dial in mode switch 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 07 27 Class ...

Page 328: ... On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 08 08 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Toll Restriction Dial Block Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Dial Block 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 08 09 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Hotline Extension Ringdown Turn Off or On Ringdown Extension for extensions with this COS 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 08 10 Class o...

Page 329: ...ame and number of the extension that dialed 911 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 08 17 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service ARS Override of Trunk Access Map Turn Off or On an extension user ability to override the trunk access map programming for outgoing calls 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 08 19 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Hotline for SPK Turn Off or On an ...

Page 330: ...Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Notification for Incoming Call List Existence Determine whether or not the CHECK LIST message is displayed to indicate a missed call 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 09 05 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Signal Voice Call Turn Off or On an extension user ability to enable Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for their inc...

Page 331: ...ted Call Pickup for calls ringing an extension Pickup Group Service Code 756 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 10 06 Class of Service Options Answer Service Meet Me Conference and Paging Turn Off or On an extension to use Meet Me Conference and Paging 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 10 07 Class of Service Options Answer Service Automatic Off Hook Answer Turn Off or On an extension to use U...

Page 332: ... 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 06 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Unscreened Transfer Ring Inward Transfer Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Unscreened Transfer 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 07 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Transfer Without Holding Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Transfer Without Holding 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 ...

Page 333: ...l to a predefined destination such as an operator voice mail or another extension without answering the call 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 17 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Department Group Trunk to Trunk Transfer Each Telephone Group Transfer Turn Off or On the ability of an extension in a Department Group to use the Trunk to Trunk Forwarding service codes 0 Off 1 On def...

Page 334: ... Turn Off or On using the Call Park Automatically Search option 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 12 02 Class of Service Options Charging Cost Service Advice of Charge ISDN AOC Turn Off or On a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or Automatic Route Selection 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 12 03 Class of Service Options Charging Cost Service Cost Display TTU ...

Page 335: ... Privacy Release Turn Off or On an extension user ability to initiate a Voice Call Conference 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 10 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Monitor Enables the extension Barge In Mode to be Speech mode or Monitor mode i e Barge In initiator 0 Speech 1 Monitor default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 11 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Room Mon...

Page 336: ...ble Display Messaging 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 20 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Account Code Toll Restriction Operator Alert Restricted Operation Transfer Turn Off or On operator alert when an extension improperly enters an Account Code or violates Toll Restriction 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 21 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Extension Na...

Page 337: ...kground Music on and off 0 Deny 1 Allow default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 31 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Connected Line Identification COLP Define the supplementary feature availability for each extension Class of Service COS 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 32 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Deny Multiple Barge Ins Turn Off or On an extension user ability to ha...

Page 338: ... a DSS console 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 42 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Extension Data Swap Enabling Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use the Station Relocation feature 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 44 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Live Monitor Enabling Turn Off or On an extension ability to use Live Monitor 0 Off 1 On default ...

Page 339: ...ability to absorb ignore the first incoming digit Use this to make the tie trunk compatible with 3 and 4 digit Tie Line service This option does not apply to DISA 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 14 02 Class of Service Options for DISA E M Trunk Group Routing ARS Access Enable Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or Automatic Route Selection 0 Off 1 On d...

Page 340: ...bility to use Direct Trunk Access Service Code 715 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 14 09 Class of Service Options for DISA E M Forced Trunk Disconnect Not for ISDN T point Enable Disable a tie trunk caller ability to use Forced Trunk Disconnect Service Code 26 This option is not available to DISA callers 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 14 10 Class of Service Options for DISA E M Call For...

Page 341: ... the current value unchanged 8 Enter the Day 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold You see MODE6 nn Press Hold to leave the current value unchanged 9 Enter the Night 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press Hold You see MODE7 nn Press Hold to leave the current value unchanged 10 Enter the Midnight 2 Mode Class of Service f...

Page 342: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 308 Class of Service THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 343: ...or gain time Conditions The system retains the Clock Calendar Display after a power failure or system reset Changing the time may change the current Class of Service COS service depending on the COS mode setup You can program the system to automatically switch modes Single line telephones cannot set the time and date Changing the system time automatically changes the VM8000 InMail time Default Set...

Page 344: ...ed when programming this feature in the order they are most commonly used These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro wizards for feature programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the syst...

Page 345: ...tem should adjust for daylight savings time 0000 2359 00 00 23 59 default 02 00 10 24 03 Daylight Savings Setup Start of Month Summer Time Enter the month of system should adjust the time for daylight savings time 01 12 01 12 1 Jan 2 Feb etc default 3 10 24 04 Daylight Savings Setup Start of Week Enter the week of the month the system should adjust the time for daylight savings time 0 5 0 Last Wee...

Page 346: ... hour 3 15PM MAR 10 TUE Type 3 12 hour 3 10 TUE 3 15 PM Type 4 12 hour 3 15PM TUE 10 MAR Type 5 24 hour 10 MAR TUE 15 15 Type 6 24 hour 15 15 MAR 10 TUE Type 7 24 hour 3 10 TUE 15 15 Type 8 24 hour 15 15 TUE 10 MAR default 3 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to extensions Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Default Extension port 101 Class 1...

Page 347: ... by other ports during green blink flutter the line key becomes in use and LED is turned on red When the station is using a DTL 8LD telephone flashes on the LCD of a Direct Trunk appearance line key to indicate a new message is stored in the CO voice mail system A local Voice Mail system and this feature can be supported in the same system When power outage or some other reason causes the Central ...

Page 348: ...t Setting None System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s CD 4COTB Blade with PZ 4COTF Daughter Board Related Features Battery Backup System Power Message Waiting Speed Dial System Group Station VM8000 InMail Voice Mail Integration Analog ...

Page 349: ...line 0 LED Off 1 LED On default 0 20 02 08 System Options for Multiline Telephones LCD Display Holding Time This time determines how long a user s display shows Caller ID for a second incoming call 0 64800 seconds default 5 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to extensions Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Default Extension port 101 Class 15...

Page 350: ...sition 1 Press Feature 2 Dial 29 3 Press the CO line 4 Dial the Central Office Message Waiting Indication callback number The Exit key is used to clear all digits 5 Press Feature This operation updates data in Program 13 04 01 a user can also edit the dial digits in Program 13 04 01 from handset programming or PCPro WebPro To retrieve a Central Office Message Waiting Indication 1 Press Feature 2 D...

Page 351: ...UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 13 0 CO Message Waiting Indication 2 317 To clear the Central Office Message Waiting Indication from an Attendant Position 1 Press Feature 2 Dial 20 3 Press the CO line key ...

Page 352: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 318 CO Message Waiting Indication THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 353: ...gram causes a problem when dialing 911 Since it is only a 3 digit number the call does not have a talk path preventing the emergency dispatcher from hearing the caller This option should be kept at its default setting of 0 to prevent any problem with dialing 911 Common Permit Code Table Use the Common Permit Code Table when you have numbers you want all Code Restriction Classes to dial To let all ...

Page 354: ...2 digits maximum using 0 9 and Recall as a wild card International Call Restriction International Call Restriction lets you limit the international calls an extension user may dial You can build a restrict table to prevent only certain calls or you can build a permit table to allow only certain calls To allow most international calls use the International Call Restrict Table To prevent most intern...

Page 355: ...follows Tie Line Code Restriction Enhanced In Program 34 01 05 E M Tie Line Basic Setup System Code Restriction if this option is set to 0 the system follows the setting in Program 21 05 13 Code Restriction Class Restriction of Tie Line Calls to determine whether or not the Code restriction setting in Program 34 08 is to be followed If this option is set to 1 the system follows the system Code res...

Page 356: ...ass 02 Toll Restriction Class 02 is applied When trunk class is 15 and station class 03 Toll Restriction Class 15 is applied Default Setting Disabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Central Office Calls Placing Code Restriction Override Code Restriction Dial Block Direct Inward System Access DISA PBX Compatibility Multiple Trunk Types ...

Page 357: ...sable Code Restriction 0 Restriction Disabled No 1 Restriction Enabled Yes default 1 15 02 30 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Toll Restriction Class Select the Toll Restriction Class to be used when placing a call from a virtual extension 0 Vir Ext Virtual Extension Class 1 Real Ext Real Extension Class default 1 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to exten...

Page 358: ... code restriction when hook flash is sent on inbound trunk followed by dialed digits 0 Disable 1 Enable default 0 21 01 16 System Options for Outgoing Calls Supervise Dial Detection Timer With the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature if dial tone is not detected after the extension answers an incoming line the system determines the call is unable to complete and releases the DTMF receiver 0 6...

Page 359: ...Program 21 06 05 is referred to or not referred to 0 Unassigned 1 Assigned Default 1 6 15 0 2 5 1 21 05 07 Toll Restriction Class Permit Code Table Set the tables 1 4 when referring to the table set up by Program 21 06 06 1 4 Table 0 Disable None Default 1 2 6 15 0 3 1 4 2 5 3 21 05 08 Toll Restriction Class Restriction Table Set the tables 1 4 when referring to the table set up by Program 21 06 0...

Page 360: ...o four digits default Tables 1 10 No Setting 21 06 02 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup International Call Permit Code Table Enter the international dialing codes you want to permit Dial Up to six digits Default Tables 1 20 No Setting 21 06 03 Toll Restriction Table Data Setup Maximum Number of Digits Table Assignment Select the maximum number of digits allowed in outgoing calls for each table 4 3...

Page 361: ...digits using 0 9 and LINE KEY 1 don t care Refer to the PBX Compatibility feature for the specifics Dial Up to two digits default Table 1 4 No Setting 21 21 01 Toll Restriction for Trunks Seized Trunk Basis Setting Restriction Class Enter the Toll Restriction Class for the selected trunk 1 15 default 1 34 01 05 E M Tie Line Basic Setup System Toll Restriction Determine if an incoming Tie Line call...

Page 362: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 328 Code Restriction THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 363: ...o each extension Or extensions can share the same override code Code Restriction Override bypasses all Code Restriction programming Walking Code Restriction allows you to assign a Code Restriction level for each user When a call is placed using Walking Code Restriction the restriction for the call is based on the Code Restriction level defined in Programs 21 05 xx and Programs 21 06 xx Conditions ...

Page 364: ...efault 775 11 11 36 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Toll Restriction Override If required change the service code 663 for Toll Restriction Override MLT SLT default 663 20 08 06 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Toll Restriction Override Turn Off or On Toll Restricting Override Service Code 663 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 21 01 07 System Options for Outgoing Calls To...

Page 365: ... 1 Displayed default 1 35 02 05 SMDR Output Options Summary Weekly Set this option to 1 to have the SMDR report provide a weekly summary every Saturday at midnight 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed default 1 35 02 06 SMDR Output Options Summary Monthly Set this option to 1 to have the SMDR report provide a monthly summary at midnight on the last day of the month 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed default 1 35 ...

Page 366: ...e whether or not the CLI DID Number Switching should be displayed 0 CLI CLIP 1 DID Calling Number 2 Caller ID Name default 0 35 02 16 SMDR Output Options Trunk Name or Received Dialed Number Determine how the SMDR should print incoming calls on ANI DNIS or DID trunks If set to 1 ANI DNIS trunks can print DNIS digits If set to 0 trunk names are printed instead 0 Trunk Port Name 1 Received Dialed Nu...

Page 367: ...UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 13 0 Code Restriction Override 2 333 Walking Code Restriction 663 ...

Page 368: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 334 Code Restriction Override Temporary Code Restriction Override service code 663 be changed 775 ...

Page 369: ...ar error tone if you dial your code incorrectly 4 Press idle line key or dial trunk access code 5 Dial the number without any restriction To use your Walking Code Restriction level at an extension You can override restriction for only one call at a time 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 663 and dial the 6 digit Walking Toll Restrictio...

Page 370: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 336 Code Restriction Override THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 371: ...nt This function works by password and Class of Service control the supervisor is not an assigned extension If Dial Block is available for all Classes of Service everyone may become a supervisor if they know the Dial Block password Conditions If the system is reset by a first initialize the Dial Block feature is cleared This feature is not available for ISDN S Bus extensions Both Program 21 09 01 ...

Page 372: ...ervisor Assign a service code used by the supervisor to set Dial Block for another extension MLT default 601 11 11 33 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Dial Block Assign a service code to use for Dial Block MLT SLT default 600 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to extensions Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Default Extension por...

Page 373: ... 600 3 Dial the 4 digit Dial Block code 4 Dial 0 Confirmation tone is heard 5 Press Speaker or replace the handset to hang up 21 10 01 Dial Block restriction Class per Extension Assign the Code Restriction COS 1 15 used by an extension when the Dial Block feature is enabled If this data is 0 Code Restriction COS follows Program 21 09 01 0 1 15 0 No Setting default 0 90 19 01 Dial Block Release Ent...

Page 374: ...ogramming 4 Dial the extension number to blocked 5 Dial 1 Confirmation tone is heard 6 Press Speaker or replace the handset to hang up To release Dial Block from another extension 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 601 3 Dial the 4 digit Dial Block code 4 Dial the extension number to be released from Dial Block 5 Dial 0 Confirmation to...

Page 375: ... a customer and a service technician The dispatcher can meet together with all parties privately set up a service strategy with the technician and then meet again to set the schedule Split cycles through the Conference in the same order in which the Conference was initially set up If a user places an outside call conferences extension 101 followed by extension 102 Split cycles from the trunk to 10...

Page 376: ...ng lets an extension user set up a two party meeting via Paging A user can set up an Unsupervised Trunk to Trunk Conference and then drop out of the call allowing the remaining parties to continue the conversation Establish two trunk calls press Hold and dial 8 You can optionally program Conf Transfer for Transfer In this case the multiline terminal must have a Conference function key The system a...

Page 377: ...ine what the service code should be for an internal party to use the Barge In feature MLT SLT default 710 11 12 47 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Waiting Answer Split Answer If required change the code users dial to Split while on a call SLT default 794 11 12 57 Service Code Setup for Service Access Tandem Trunking With two trunks in Conference press Hold and dial 8 and the Conference ...

Page 378: ...ns Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Default Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 11 21 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Restriction for Tandem Trunking on Hang Up Allow Deny an extension users s ability to set up a tandem conference call automatically when they hang up 0 Allow 1 Deny default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 08 Class of Service Opt...

Page 379: ...previously added to the Conference The unanswered call drops and the initiator is back into the Conference call Adding an Intercom call to an outside Conference call Press the Conf softkey on the multiline terminal display or Conf twice to re establish the Conference If using a non display telephone press Conf twice With only Intercom calls in the Conference Press Conf twice to re establish the Co...

Page 380: ... to alternate between the remaining parties in the Conference Press the Conf softkey or press Conf twice to set up the Conference again Single Line Telephone 1 Hookflash and dial 794 Repeat this procedure to alternate between the remaining parties in the Conference Hookflash twice to set up the Conference again To drop an outside call from the Conference 1 Press Hold to place the conference call o...

Page 381: ...3 Hang up Single Line Telephone 1 Hookflash and dial 8 2 Hang up To Barge In to Conference Call 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker and dial the service code default 710 If the telephone does not have the proper COS a warning tone is sent After the user hangs up the system automatically places a Callback to the extension 2 Dial the extension number or press a DSS key of a telephone within a Con...

Page 382: ...ly places a Callback to the extension The display shows the line Number Number Name and Extension Name Number 3 Dial the extension number or press a DSS key of a telephone in a Conference call If an error tone is heard Barge In is not enabled for the extension and the call cannot go through Retrieve the call by pressing the flashing line or Call Appearance CAP Key or hang up and the call recalls t...

Page 383: ...le Option The Privacy Mode Toggle option allows an extension user to quickly change an outside call from the non private mode to the private mode If the outside call is on a line key the user just presses the line key to switch from non private mode to private mode For systems using the Privacy Mode Toggle option trunks initially have the privacy released The remainder of the call is private If th...

Page 384: ...Pro wizards for feature programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 14 01 19 Bas...

Page 385: ...ay Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Default Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 13 09 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Privacy Release Turn Off or On an extension user ability to initiate a Voice Call Conference 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 17 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Tone Display Intrusion Tone T...

Page 386: ...y Release To toggle between Private and Non Private mode 1 Press the Meet Me Conference key Program 15 07 01 SC 751 32 OR Press the Trunk Line Key This toggles from Non Private to Private To go back to Non Private the Meet Me Conference Key above must be pressed ...

Page 387: ...omatic banking an outside Automated Attendant bulletin boards and Other Common Carriers OCCs After the outside service answers the user can dial digits for whatever options the services allow Without Continued Dialing the system Toll Restriction cuts off the call after a specific number of dialed digits See Guide to Feature Programming on page 2 354 for additional information Conditions The abilit...

Page 388: ...these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 15 03 03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Terminal...

Page 389: ...er ability to use Continued Dialing which allows DTMF signal sending while talking on extension 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 21 04 01 Toll Restriction Class for Extensions Assign a Toll Restriction Class 1 15 to an extension Day Night Mode 1 9 9 Power Failure Mode 1 15 default 2 21 05 04 Toll Restriction Class Maximum Number of Digits Table Assignment Select the table defined in Program 21 06...

Page 390: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 356 Continued Dialing THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 391: ...a Flash Recall key can be placed on a line key With Version 4000 or higher software the door strike relay can be activated from the MH240 or Cordless DECT terminal by a Flash Key assigned to a line key in Program 15 07 751 62 Feature Cordless DECT Terminals DTL 8R 1 and ITL 8R 1 Digital Technology 1 9 GHz 6 0 LCD 2 line 24 digit LCD Display Silent Alarm Yes Dedicated Keys TALK TRANSFER HOLD CONF S...

Page 392: ...tery must be replaced with another charged battery pack within 20 seconds otherwise the connection is lost The handset has visual and audible indicators to warn of a low battery condition When a message is received the message icon is displayed Synchronous Ringing does not apply to the cordless terminals A beep indicates when the cordless terminal receives off hook ringing A spare battery is avail...

Page 393: ...d for ITL 8R DECT IP Cordless phones Multiple SIP server registration is not supported for ITL 8R DECT IP Cordless phones Network Address Translation NAT transversal mode is not supported for ITL 8R DECT IP Cordless phones Back Ground Music BGM is not supported for ITL 8R DECT IP Cordless phones Cordless terminals cannot receive voice announcements when idle The ITL 8R 1 Cordless IP DECT Terminal ...

Page 394: ... Availability Terminals DTL 8R 1 TEL ITL 8R 1 TEL Required Component s CD 8DLCA Blade with PZ 8DLCB Daughter Board CD CP00 US with PZ 32 64 128IPLA or PZ 32 64 128IPLB Daughter board SIP telephone licenses OR CD 16DLCA Related Features Cordless Telephone Connection ...

Page 395: ...igned The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 03 01 ETU Setup DLCA PKG Setup Terminal Type B1 Setup and confirm the Basic Configuration data for terminal type B1 0 Not set 1 Multiline Terminal 2 SLT Adapter 3 Bluetooth Cordless Handset 6 PGD Paging 7 PGD Tone Ringer 8 PGD Doorbox 9 PGD ACI 10 DS...

Page 396: ...U10 ADP Paging 7 PGD 2 U10 ADP Tone Ringer 8 PGD 2 U10 ADP Door Box 9 PGD 2 U10 ADP ACI 12 APR B2 Mode default 0 10 03 07 ETU Setup DLCA PKG Setup Logical Port Number B2 Use to setup and confirm the Basic Configuration data for logical port number B2 0 Not Set 6 PGD 2 U10 ADP Ext Speaker 7 PGD 2 U10 ADP Paging Tone Ringer 1 8 8 PGD 2 U10 ADP for Door Box 1 8 ACI 1 96 9 PGD 2 U10 ADP 12 APR for B2 ...

Page 397: ...splay the Night indication 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 14 default 1 for COS 15 20 07 03 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Time Setting Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set the Time via Service Code 728 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 07 05 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Set Cancel Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer Turn Off or On the ability of an extensi...

Page 398: ...ta is included in the SMDR Printout for each Class of Service 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 14 default 1 for COS 15 20 07 19 Class of Service Options Administrator Level SMDR Printout Department Group STG Data Define if Department Group STG Data is included in the SMDR Printout for each Class of Service 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 14 default 1 for COS 15 20 07 20 Class of Service Options Admin...

Page 399: ...3 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service System Speed Dialing Turn Off or On an extension user ability to make outbound calls using system speed dial numbers 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 08 04 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Group Speed Dialing Turn Off or On an extension user ability to make outbound calls using group speed dial numbers 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS ...

Page 400: ...ass Of Service 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 08 15 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Block Outgoing Caller ID Turn Off or On a user Class of Service from automatically blocking outgoing Caller ID information when a call is placed If block is enabled the system automatically inserts the Caller ID block code 67 defined in Program 14 01 21 before the user dialed digits this requir...

Page 401: ...Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Notification for Incoming Call List Existence Determine whether or not the CHECK LIST message is displayed to indicate a missed call 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 09 05 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Signal Voice Call Turn Off or On an extension user ability to enable Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for their inc...

Page 402: ...ll Pickup for calls ringing an extension Pickup Group Service Code 756 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 10 06 Class of Service Options Answer Service Meet Me Conference and Paging Turns Off or On an extension to use Meet Me Conference and Paging 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 10 07 Class of Service Options Answer Service Automatic Off Hook Answer Turns Off or On an extension to use Unive...

Page 403: ...lt 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 07 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Transfer Without Holding Turn Off or On an extension ability to use Transfer Without Holding 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 11 08 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Transfer Information Display Turn Off or On an extension incoming Transfer pre answer display 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 09 Class ...

Page 404: ...ce Department Group Trunk to Trunk Transfer Each Telephone Group Transfer Turn Off or On an extension user in a Department Group ability to use the Trunk to Trunk Forwarding service codes 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 18 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service No Recall Allow 0 Deny 1 answered Transferred calls from recalling the originating extension 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS ...

Page 405: ...oming Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Long Conversation Cutoff for incoming calls 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 03 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Long Conversation Cutoff Outgoing Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Long Conversation Cutoff for outgoing calls 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 04 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv...

Page 406: ...ability to call a Department Group Pilot 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 15 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Initiate Turn Off or On an extension user ability to Barge in on other s calls 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 16 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Receive Turn Off or On Barge In at the receiving extension i e Barge In receive 0 ...

Page 407: ...f or On an extension user ability to press a line key to barge into an outside call The Barge In feature must be enabled if this option is to be used 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 26 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Group Listen Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Group Listen 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 27 Class of Service Options Supplementary Serv...

Page 408: ...k Camp On Turn Off or On an extension user ability to block callers from dialing to camp on 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 36 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Call Duration Timer Display Turn Off or On a Call Timer for the extension 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 01 15 20 13 38 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Headset Ringing for SLT Turn Off or On an extension u...

Page 409: ...fault 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 47 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Station Number Display Determine if a station Number is displayed On or not displayed Off in the LCD when the phone is idle 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 48 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Station Name Display Determine if a station Name is displayed On or not displayed Off in the LCD when the pho...

Page 410: ...ltiline terminal When initially installed function keys F1 F8 default to Line keys 1 8 respectively and Off Hook Ringing defaults to ON Global Off Hook Ringing must be ON default for any function key to operate with off hook ringing Switching Between the Desktop Multiline Telephone and the Cordless DECT Terminals Using the Base Unit When the Cordless DECT Terminals is associated with a multiline t...

Page 411: ...ne The cordless telephone requires a PBR circuit while dialing When all PBR circuits are busy a busy tone is heard when the phone goes off hook Depending on your environment the maximum number of cordless devices used without interference varies This feature works with 2500 type cordless single line telephones The multiline terminal user and the associated cordless telephone user cannot talk to ea...

Page 412: ...F indication Headset Ringing The APR L AP R R and AP A R only support DTMF signaling DP Dial Pulse is not supported Default Setting None System Availability Terminals Any DTH DTR terminal with an AP A R or AP R R Unit except the DTR 2DT 1 TEL Any DTL terminal with an APR L Unit except the DTL 2DT 1 TEL Required Component s 2500 type cordless Single Line Telephone Related Features Ancillary Device ...

Page 413: ...assigned The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 03 01 ETU Setup DLCA PKG Setup Terminal Type B1 Setup and confirm the Basic Configuration data for terminal type B1 0 Not set 1 Multiline Terminal 2 SLT Adapter 3 Bluetooth Cordless Handset 6 PGD Paging 7 PGD Tone Ringer 8 PGD Doorbox 9 PGD ACI 10...

Page 414: ...PGD 2 U10 ADP Paging 7 PGD 2 U10 ADP Tone Ringer 8 PGD 2 U10 ADP Door Box 9 PGD 2 U10 ADP ACI 12 APR B2 Mode default 0 10 03 07 ETU Setup DLCA PKG Setup Logical Port Number B2 Use to setup and confirm the Basic Configuration data for logical port number B2 0 Not Set 6 PGD 2 U10 ADP Ext Speaker 7 PGD 2 U10 ADP Paging Tone Ringer 1 8 8 PGD 2 U10 ADP for Door Box 1 8 ACI 1 96 9 PGD 2 U10 ADP 12 APR f...

Page 415: ... to set the Time via Service Code 728 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 07 04 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Storing Speed Dialing Entries Turn Off or On an extension to store System or Group Speed Dialing numbers 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 07 05 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Set Cancel Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer Turn Off or On an extension user abi...

Page 416: ...2 and record listen to or erase the General Message 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 14 default 1 for COS 15 20 07 18 Class of Service Options Administrator Level SMDR Printout Accumulated Extension Data Define the Class of Service COS for the SMDR printout of accumulated extension data 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 14 default 1 for COS 15 20 07 19 Class of Service Options Administrator Level SMDR ...

Page 417: ...he extension 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 08 03 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service System Speed Dialing Turn Off or On an extension user ability to make outbound calls using system speed dial numbers 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 08 04 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Group Speed Dialing Turn Off or On an extension user ability to make outbound calls using ...

Page 418: ...tgoing Caller ID Turn Off or On a user Class of Service from automatically blocking outgoing Caller ID information when a call is placed If block is enabled the system automatically inserts the Caller ID block code 67 defined in Program 14 01 21 before the user dialed digits this requires Program 14 02 10 to be enabled If block is disabled the system outdials the call just as it was dialed by the ...

Page 419: ...lay calling party information on CCIS calls 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 10 01 Class of Service Options Answer Service Group Call Pickup Within Group Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup for calls ringing an extension Pickup Group as well as ring group calls Service Code 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 10 02 Class of Service Options Answer Service Group Call Pickup Another Group Turn Off ...

Page 420: ...Call Forward All Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set Call Forward Immediate 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 02 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forward When Busy Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set Call Forwarding when Busy 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 03 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding When Unanswered Tur...

Page 421: ...15 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service VRS Personal Greeting Message Greeting Turn Off or On an extension user ability to dial Service Code 616 to record listen to or erase the Personal Greeting Message 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 16 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Redirect Turn Off or On an extension user ability to transfer a call to a predefined destin...

Page 422: ... Service Transfer Park Call Turn Off or On an extension user ability to transfer a parked call 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 12 03 Class of Service Options Charging Cost Service Cost Display TTU ISDN billing information 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 01 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Long Conversation Alarm Turn Off or On the Warning Tone for Long Conversation not f...

Page 423: ...ntary Service Room Monitor Extension Being Monitored Turn Off or On an extension user ability to be monitored by other extensions 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 13 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Continued Dialing DTMF Signal on ICM Call Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Continued Dialing which allows DTMF signal sending while talking on extension 0 Off 1 On d...

Page 424: ...Supplementary Service Privacy Release by Pressing Line Key Turn Off or On an extension user ability to press a line key to barge into an outside call The Barge In feature must be enabled if this option is to be used This applies only to the multiline terminal 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 26 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Group Listen Turn Off or On an extension user abil...

Page 425: ...r ability to block off hook signals manually sent from a co worker 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 35 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Block Camp On Turn Off or On an extension user ability to block callers from dialing to camp on 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 39 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service ACD Queue Status Display Turn Off or On the ACD Queue Sta...

Page 426: ...rvice Options Supplementary Service Station Name Display Determine if a station Number is displayed On or not displayed Off in the LCD when the phone is idle 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 49 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service BLF Indication on CO Incoming State Determine if a BLF of the station lights when a Normal CO call is ringing the phone This applies only to the multili...

Page 427: ... terminal to its associated cordless single line telephone 1 The single line telephone user goes off hook at this time the call is automatically connected to the single line telephone 2 The multiline terminal user goes on hook To use Hookflash Refer to the operation for Single Line Telephone Access ...

Page 428: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 394 Cordless Telephone Connection THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 429: ...line terminal and a single line telephone are assigned for Data Line Security Tone Override Voice Override and Call Alert notification tone are not heard over the handset speaker Data Line Security protects a station from Barge In even when Barge In is allowed in Class of Service When any multiline terminal or single line telephone calls a station with Data Line Security a constant busy tone is he...

Page 430: ...r COS 1 15 20 09 06 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Incoming Time Display If this option is set to 1 the Incoming Call Time is displayed on the multiline terminal LCD while the telephone is ringing 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 01 15 20 09 07 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Call Queuing Turn Off or On an extension user ability to have calls queued if a call rings the e...

Page 431: ...Extensions Virtual Extensions and Call Arrival Keys Conditions An extension user can answer an outside call just by lifting the handset depending on programming Terminals must have a CAP or CO line appearance for a trunk call to be answered on the telephone Default Settings None System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Call Arrival CAR Keys Central Off...

Page 432: ...rly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 14 07 01 Trunk Access Map Setup Set up the Trunk Access Maps This sets the access options for trunks Ring Group programming overrides Access Map programming 0 No access 1 Outgoing access only 2 Incoming access only 3 Access only when trunk on Hold 4 Outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold 5 Incoming acces...

Page 433: ...ensions set for Delayed Ringing see Program 15 11 ring the extension after this time 0 64800 seconds default 10 22 01 04 System Options for Incoming Calls DIL No Answer Recall Time A DIL that rings its programmed destination longer than this time diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring Group set in Program 22 08 0 64800 seconds default 0 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Set the feature type for the tr...

Page 434: ...on a phone 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 752 3 Press the key you want to program 4 Dial 03 5 Dial the number of the extension you want to appear on the key 6 Press Hold once for Immediate Ring skip to step 8 for Delayed Ring 7 Dial the mode number in which the key rings 1 Day 1 2 Night 1 3 Midnight 1 4 Rest 1 5 Day 2 6 Night 2 7 Midnight 2 8 Rest 2 8 Press Hold for a second time for Delayed Ring or Skip ...

Page 435: ...UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 13 0 Delayed Ringing 2 401 9 Dial the mode number in which the key delay rings 1 Day 1 2 Night 1 3 Midnight 1 4 Rest 1 5 Day 2 6 Night 2 7 Midnight 2 8 Rest 2 10 Press Speaker ...

Page 436: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 402 Delayed Ringing THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 437: ...s a busy extension in a Department Group the system can optionally route the call to the first available group member The system follows Program 22 15 01 22 15 07 for playing the periodic VRS message Department Calling also allows each Department group to transfer calls to a predefined Speed dial bin Program 24 05 01 immediately or after a Delayed time Program 24 02 08 Internal and transferred cal...

Page 438: ... route User Log Out Log In An extension user can log out and log in to a Department Calling Group By logging out the user removes their extension from the group Once logged out Department Calling bypasses their extension When they log back in Department Calling routes to their extension normally All users can dial a code to log in or log out of their Department Calling Group A multiline terminal c...

Page 439: ...ed out and an intercom call is made to the Department Group the caller hears a busy signal Extensions in a Department Group which have Call Forwarding enabled are not included in the call hunt The extension to which the user is forwarded does not receive the hunted calls When you use the automatic Department Step calling Program 16 01 03 it hunts only to members with the same or lower priority Eas...

Page 440: ...gram 16 01 05 Extension Group All Ring Mode Operation does not work to a Secondary Department Group Department Queuing will not work to Secondary Group Extensions Default Setting Disabled Priority Routing Figure 2 2 Department Calling Priority Call Routing Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 CALL CALL CALL Telephone on a call Telephone...

Page 441: ...UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 13 0 Department Calling 2 407 Circular Routing System Availability Terminals All Terminals Figure 2 3 Department Calling Circular Routing CALL 1 CALL 2 CALL 3 CALL 4 ...

Page 442: ...evel 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 07 01 Department Group Pilot Numbers Dial Assign pilot numbers to each Department Group set up Up to eight digits default not assigned 11 11 25 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Auto...

Page 443: ... Single Digit post dialing Service Code for All Member Ring default not assigned 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a Department Calling key 46 so extension users can install or remove themselves from the Department Calling Group Additional keys can also be assigned for Department Group features immediate calling destination 58 delayed calling destination 59 and DND destination 60 Line Key...

Page 444: ...roup should ring Automatically or use the service code defined in Program 11 12 09 Selecting automatic overrides the settings of Programs 16 01 03 and 16 01 04 0 Manual 1 Automatic default 0 16 01 06 Department Group Basic Data Setup STG Withdraw Mode Set the STG withdraw mode for each department group 0 Disable Camp On 1 Enable Overflow Mode default 0 16 01 07 Department Group Basic Data Setup Ca...

Page 445: ...1 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 09 07 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Call Queuing Turn Off or On an extension user ability to have calls queued if a call rings the extension when it is busy 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 17 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Department Group Trunk to Trunk Transfer Each Telephone Group Transfer Turn Off or On an ...

Page 446: ...Program 22 02 01 above assign the DIL destination as the Department Group pilot number as assigned in Program 11 07 01 Extension Number maximum eight digits default not assigned 24 02 05 System Options for Transfer Message Wait Ring Interval Time For Single Line Telephones SLTs without message waiting lamps this is the time between intermittent ringing If this value is set to 0 the system rings on...

Page 447: ...ey lights while you are logged out To log back in to your Department Calling Group When you log back in Department Calling routes calls to your extension 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 650 0 OR Press Department Calling Log In key Program 15 07 01 or SC 751 46 The key goes out when you log back in To change the Department Group Overflow Destination 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 604 Department Group 01 64 3 Dial 0...

Page 448: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 414 Department Calling THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 449: ...ble Department Step Calling also allows an extension user to cycle through the members of a Department Group Conditions If required use this option to change the Department Step Calling Single Digit Service Code default code 2 A function key for Department Step Calling can be assigned code 36 In Program 20 08 12 enable 1 or disable 0 an extension user ability to use Department Step Calling Default...

Page 450: ...e Code Setup for Service Access Step Call If required customize the Step Call service code used by an extension user MLT SLT default 708 11 16 01 Single Digit Service Code Setup Step Call If required change the Department Step Calling Single Digit Service Code default 2 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a function key Department Step Calling code 36 Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code...

Page 451: ...lace a call to a busy Department Group member OR Place a call to a Department Group pilot number 2 Dial Department Step Code 2 to call the next available Department Group member 3 Repeat step 2 to call other Department Group members You step through Department Groups set in Program 16 02 01 ...

Page 452: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 418 Department Step Calling THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 453: ...s provide no Call Progress tones Conditions Dial Pad Confirmation Tone does not apply to single line telephones or Wireless DECT SIP Terminals Dial Pad Confirmation Tone is not canceled when dialing in handset mode Dial Pad Confirmation Tone is canceled when dialing in handsfree mode but only for internal calls The tone is still heard for external dialing Default Setting Disabled System Availabili...

Page 454: ... for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Operation To enable disable Dial Pad Confirmation Tone 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker 2 Dial 724 Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 ...

Page 455: ... does not occur If the user accesses the trunk via a Trunk Group by dialing a trunk group code or automatically using a feature like Last Number Redial the system can drop the trunk or optionally skip to the next trunk in the group Refer to the chart under Programming for more information Conditions None Default Setting Disabled for manually dialed calls enabled for automatically dialed calls Syst...

Page 456: ...nd require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 09 01 DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup If dial tone detection is enabled be sure to allocate at least one circuit for dial tone detection ICM Trunk 0 or Trunk 2 0 Common Use 1 Extension Only 2 Trunk Only Default Circuit Resource 01 08 1 Ex...

Page 457: ...ously enter 0 0 64800 seconds default 5 21 01 05 System Options for Outgoing Calls Disconnect Time When Dial Tone Not Detected If 14 02 11 is Enabled the system skips over a trunk if dial tone is not detected This option pertains to calls placed using Speed Dial ARS Last Number Redial or Save Number dialed It does not pertain to line key or Direct Trunk Access calls 0 64800 seconds default 3 21 01...

Page 458: ...thod 14 02 05 14 02 11 Result if dial tone not present Press a line key or Dial 9 Trunk number 0 0 Trunk hangs does not disconnect 0 1 Trunk hangs does not disconnect 1 0 Trunk drops 1 1 Trunk drops Dial a Trunk Group code or Automatically through a feature 0 0 Trunk hangs does not disconnect 0 1 Trunk reroutes after time out 1 0 Trunk drops 1 1 Trunk reroutes after time out ...

Page 459: ... displayed number To place an outgoing call an extension user must have outgoing access to a line CAP or trunk group key If the system has VRS or VM8000 InMail installed you must press to preview a number Version 3000 or lower software With Version 4000 Version 6000 software you must press to preview a number With Version 7000 or higher software pressing to preview a number is not required Default...

Page 460: ...e an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Operation To use Dial Number Preview to place a call multiline terminal only 1 Do not lift the handset or press Speaker 2 Dial Skip to step 3 if at Version 3000 and lower and a VRS or VM8000 InMail is not installed or Version 7000 or higher Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 20 06 01 C...

Page 461: ... press Redial and dial the Speed Dial System Group bin number you want to call The number is displayed 4 To dial out the displayed trunk number press a Line Trunk Group key If the previewed number as a trunk access code e g 9 you can press Speaker instead OR To dial an Intercom number press Speaker OR To cancel the number without dialing it out press Hold ...

Page 462: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 428 Dialing Number Preview THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 463: ...The source clock signals are extracted from digital trunk blades and are supplied to the PLO The PLO synchronization source priorities are as follows 1 CD PRTA 2 CD CCTA External 3 CD 2BRIA 4 CD CP00 US Conditions If multiple PRIs exist the system chooses the first one that synchronized with the carrier If there are multiple PRIs and the one being used for the source goes down the system begins to...

Page 464: ...s ISDN Compatibility K CCIS T1 T1 Trunking with ANI DNIS Compatibility Feature Examples Digital Trunk Clocking Examples If multiple PRIs exist the first one that synchronized with the carrier is chosen In this example the PRI in 02 was the first to synchronize with the carrier therefore it is the PLO synchronization source Figure 2 4 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 1 ...

Page 465: ...he carrier and became the PLO synchronization source The PRI in 05 then went down and the system began looking forward in slot numbers to find the next PLO source In this case the PRI in 02 was the next source because after it looks through the rest of the slots in the system it starts over with 01 In this example there are multiple T1 circuits in the system There can only be one T1 circuit assign...

Page 466: ...n The BRI then becomes the PLO synchronization source because when a PRI is in the system T1s cannot be assigned as EXTERNAL which are not in the PLO synchronization source priority list If multiple BRIs exist but no PRI or T 1 EXTERNAL exists the system chooses the first BRI that synchronized with the carrier In this example the BRI in 04 synchronized with the carrier first and became the PLO syn...

Page 467: ...until it went down There are no other PRIs T1 Externals or BRIs in the system The CD CP00 US now becomes the PLO synchronization source Guide to Feature Programming Refer to the related features for programming Operation Refer to the related features for details Figure 2 11 Digital Trunk Clocking Example 8 ...

Page 468: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 434 Digital Trunk Clocking THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 469: ...tween 2000 entries DID Dialed Number Translation DID allows different tables for DID number translation This gives you more flexibility when buying DID service from Telco If you cannot buy the exact block of numbers you need e g 301 556 use the translation tables to convert the digits received For example a translation table could convert digits 501 756 to extension numbers 301 556 The UNIVERGE SV...

Page 470: ...th additional instructions For example the first Automated Attendant Greeting can be Thank you for calling Please dial the extension number you wish to reach or dial 0 for the operator If the caller inadvertently dials an extension that does not exist they could hear The extension you dialed is unavailable Please dial 0 for assistance or dial to leave a message so we can call you back You assign A...

Page 471: ...sion ring group or Voice Mail If Busy Intercept is disabled the call follows DID Camp On programming Ring No Answer Intercept Ring No Answer Intercept sets the routing options for DID calls that ring unanswered at the destination extension With Ring No Answer Intercept enabled the unanswered call reroutes to the DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice Mail after the DID Ring No Answer Time If ...

Page 472: ...en the primary destination Program 22 11 05 is set to Voice Mail the Voice Mail protocol is 1 Busy Intercept Forward Busy 2 Ring No Answer Intercept Forward RNA When the secondary destination Program 22 11 06 is set to Voice Mail the Voice Mail protocol is based on the first destination routing When the incoming call is forwarded to the first destination by a busy intercept the Voice Mail protocol...

Page 473: ... the 2000 different Dial In Conversion table entries in Program 22 11 01 Program 22 11 01 and Program 22 11 02 Table No Receive Dial Transfer Dial 1 No setting 100 2 No setting 101 3 No setting 102 Program 22 17 Table No Receive Dial Time Pattern Start Time End Time PRG 22 11 1 100 1111 1 00 00 09 00 1 2 09 00 12 00 2 3 12 00 13 00 3 4 13 00 18 00 2 5 18 00 00 00 1 6 00 00 00 00 0 7 00 00 00 00 0 ...

Page 474: ...nversion table has a maximum of eight programmable Time Patterns and Day of Week Pattern can reference one of the 2000 different Dial In Conversion table entries in Program 22 11 01 8 00 00 00 00 0 Table 2 11 Example 2 Manual Change Program 22 17 Table No Receive Dial Time Pattern Start Time End Time PRG 22 11 1 100 1111 1 00 00 00 00 1 2 00 00 00 00 2 3 00 00 00 00 3 4 00 00 00 00 0 5 00 00 00 00...

Page 475: ...RGE SV8100 Issue 13 0 Direct Inward Dialing DID 2 441 Program 22 11 01 and Program 22 11 02 Table No Receive Dial Transfer Dial 1 None 101 2 None 102 3 None 103 4 None 300 Example 2 Saturday Example 3 Sunday ...

Page 476: ...outed to a dial prompt Table 2 12 Example 1 Monday Friday Program 22 17 Table No Receive Dial Time Pattern 02 Start Time 03 End Time 04 PRG 22 11 05 Day 1 734 1 00 00 08 00 4 Ext 300 Mon Fri 1 On 734 2 08 00 17 00 1 Ext 101 734 3 17 00 00 00 4 Ext 300 Table 2 13 Example 2 Saturday Program 22 17 Table No Receive Dial Time Pattern 02 Start Time 03 End Time 04 PRG 22 11 05 Day 2 734 1 00 00 09 00 4 E...

Page 477: ...all is transferred because of Call Forwarding No Answer Call Forwarding Busy or DND the reason for Transfer option can display to the transferred extension when the call is ringing to their telephone Direct Inward Lines DILs also provide a way for outside callers to dial a system extension virtual extension or Department Group directly DISA also allows outside callers to dial system extensions dir...

Page 478: ...iven to the pattern that is set manually However when a time pattern changes with the time schedules set in Program 22 17 the pattern applied by the Manual change is canceled and the Time Pattern is given priority When Transfer Operation Mode is set to busy call queuing must be turned off for it to work Incoming calls on T1 ANI trunks can only follow Program 22 11 01 They do not follow Programs 22...

Page 479: ...ng on the blade installed in the slot Please refer to the SV8100 Programming Manual for a more detailed description of the 10 03 XX programs 10 09 01 DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup If the system has DTMF DID trunks be sure to reserve at least one circuit for analog trunk DTMF reception type 0 or 2 There must be an available receiver for each DTMF DID trunk Use the following as a guide when alloc...

Page 480: ...ey available for the second call and a previous call is ringing the extension but has not yet been answered the second caller hears busy regardless of this program setting 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 23 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Display the Reason for Transfer Select whether or not an extension should display the reason a call is being transferred to their extensio...

Page 481: ...extensions ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls 22 09 01 DID Basic Data Setup Expected Number of Digits For each DID Translation Table 1 20 enter the number of digits the table expects to receive from the CO eight maximum For example for a table used with 3 digit DID service enter 3 1 8 default 4 22 09 02 DID Basic Data Setup Received Vacant Number Operation Enable Disable Vacant Number Intercept ...

Page 482: ...or each tables received number 0 No Setting 1 100 Incoming Group 101 Not Used 102 In Skin External Voice Mail or InMail 201 264 Extension Group 400 Valid Extension Number 401 DISA 501 548 DISA VRS Message 1000 999 Speed Number 000 999 default 0 22 11 06 DID Translation Table Number Conversion Transfer Destination Number 2 400 Allows the outside party to dial a different extension number in the tra...

Page 483: ...lation Number Conversion Transfer Destination Number 2 are set the priority of transferring is in this order Program 22 11 05 then Program 22 11 06 then if Program 22 11 11 is enabled Program 22 12 01 0 Disable Caller hears Ringback 1 Enable Go to normal ring default 1 22 12 01 DID Intercept Ring Group For each DID Translation Table program the DID Intercept destination The destination can be a Ri...

Page 484: ...ge number with ACI 1 4 or 01 16 ACI group number with SLT 1 8 or 01 64 Department Group number 0 No Message 1 VRS 01 100 VRS Message Number 2 ACI 01 04 ACI Group Number 3 Department Groups 01 64 Extension Group Number default 0 25 03 01 VRS DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing For each trunk port set what happens to a call when the DISA or Automated Attendant caller dials incorrectly or...

Page 485: ... hears if they dial incorrectly after answer If you enter 0 the call reroutes according to Program 25 03 and Program 25 04 Make one entry for each Night Service mode 0 100 0 No Setting default 0 25 06 02 VRS DISA One Digit Code Attendant Setup Destination Number Set up single digit dialing for Automated Attendant callers For each VRS Message programmed to answer outside calls specify The digit the...

Page 486: ...k caller is disconnected 0 64800 seconds default 10 25 07 11 System Timers for VRS DISA VRS DISA Answer Delay Time Set the time the system waits after receiving an incoming VRS DISA call before the system automatically answers the call 0 64800 seconds default 0 25 07 13 System Timers for VRS DISA VRS DISA Busy Tone Interval If a DISA caller dials a busy extension and Program 25 04 01 is set to 0 t...

Page 487: ...o the Dial In Mode Switching setup code Code 88 Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 752 by default 20 07 26 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Dial In Mode Switch Enable Disable an extension user ability to manually change Dial In Modes 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup For each Night Servic...

Page 488: ...lt not assigned 22 17 02 Dial In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern Start of Time Define the Starting Time for each DID Translation table in Program 22 17 01 0000 2359 Time default 0000 22 17 03 Dial In Conversion Table Area Setup for Time Pattern End of Time Define the Ending Time for each DID Translation table in Program 22 17 01 0000 2359 Time default 0000 22 17 04 Dial In Conversion ...

Page 489: ...0 Issue 13 0 Direct Inward Dialing DID 2 455 4 Dial the Time Pattern 1 8 Table 2 15 LED Flash Patterns Time Pattern LED Appearance Pattern 1 Off Pattern 2 On Pattern 3 Slow Flash Pattern 4 Fast Flash Patterns 5 8 Off ...

Page 490: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 456 Direct Inward Dialing DID THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 491: ...not answered they ring to the Technical Service department Conditions If unanswered a DIL without delayed ringing rings an extension until the outside party hangs up If a DIL rings a Department Group and all agents are busy the system routes the call as follows 1 The trunk rings the overflow destination assigned in Program 22 08 2 If there is no 22 08 assignment the call rings according to the Rin...

Page 492: ...the call rings the key If not the call rings an available line appearance For other extensions the DIL indicates busy A DIL rings its assigned extension without Ring Group programming A DIL only rings its assigned extension It does not ring other extensions in a Ring Group Transferred calls on DISA DID DIL ISDN trunks or from the VRS can display the reason a call is being transferred Call Forward ...

Page 493: ...l 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys To have the DIL ring a key program a line key for the DIL trunk Line Key 1 48 0 99 Norm...

Page 494: ...o their extension Call Forward Busy Call Forward No Answer DND 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 22 01 04 System Options for Incoming Calls DIL No Answer Recall Time A DIL that rings its programmed destination longer than this time diverts to the DIL No Answer Ring Group set in Program 22 08 0 64800 seconds default 0 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Assign each DIL Service Type 4 Make an entry f...

Page 495: ...IL OR Dial 9 and the DIL trunk number e g 005 OR Dial 704 and the DIL trunk group number e g 05 OR Dial 9 for Trunk Group Access 3 Dial the number 22 07 01 DIL Assignment Set the destination extension number for each DIL for each Night Service mode The destination can be an extension port virtual extension number or Department Group pilot number as assigned in Program 11 07 01 Extension Number max...

Page 496: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 462 Direct Inward Line DIL THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 497: ...ions like other outside calls If an extension has a line key for the DISA trunk the call rings that key If the extension does not have a line key the extension must have a Call Appearance CAP key to answer the call You can set DISA operation differently for each Night Service mode For example a trunk can be a normal trunk during the day and a DISA trunk at night You can also set the routing for DI...

Page 498: ...r Trunk Groups 1 100 This allows the DISA caller to place an outgoing call over the selected group Trunk Group Access bypasses the system Trunk Group Routing ARS Trunk Access Maps As with dial 9 access toll charges are incurred by the system Speed Dial System Group Station The System Speed Dial dialing bins may be available to DISA callers This could save the DISA caller time when dialing To acces...

Page 499: ...usy Your call will be answered when a line becomes free while the caller waits The interval between the voice prompts is the VRS Waiting Message Interval Time When an extension in the Department Group becomes available the call automatically goes through If the Department Calling Group remains busy past the DISA No Answer Time the DISA call routes to the overflow destination or disconnects What ha...

Page 500: ...t the DTMF signaling requirements of EIA Specification RS 464 DISA trunks must be ground start or supervised loop start The Continue Disconnect code must be DTMF With an analog trunk the Continue Disconnect code may work using DTMF sounds from the opposite side trunk With an ISDN trunk Program 14 01 25 must be enabled to detect the Continue Disconnect code The Continue Disconnect code is not accep...

Page 501: ...eated as an internal call no matter what Program 13 01 01 is set to If an outside number is required the trunk access code must be put into the speed dial bin Default Setting Disabled System Availability Terminals Remote Analog DTMF 2500 type telephones Required Component s CPU Daughter Board PZ VM21 and VM8000 InMail for Announcements Related Features Automatic Route Selection Central Office Call...

Page 502: ...s allocate one DTMF receiver for every 10 devices that use them In heavy traffic sites allocate one DTMF receiver for every five devices that use them 0 Common Use 1 Extension Only 2 Trunk Only Default Circuit Resource 01 08 1 Extensions Circuit Resource 09 32 2 Trunks Circuit Resource 33 96 0 Not Used Circuit Resource 97 160 0 Common When PZ BS10 is installed 97 160 are available 11 01 01 System ...

Page 503: ...bility to receive a second call from a DID DISA DIL or tie line caller With this option set to 1 the destination extension must be busy for a second DNIS caller to ring through If the destination extension does not have a trunk or CAP key available for the second call and a previous call is ringing the extension but has not yet been answered the second caller hears busy regardless of this program ...

Page 504: ... use the telephone system Internal Paging 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 14 07 Class of Service Options for DISA E M External Paging Enable Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use the telephone system External Paging 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 14 08 Class of Service Options for DISA E M Direct Trunk Access Enable Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use Direct Tr...

Page 505: ...D 4 DIL 5 E M Tie line 6 Delayed VRS 7 ANI DNIS 8 DID DDI Mode Switching default 0 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Assign the extensions that should receive the overflow Set the ringing in Program 22 06 Maximum eight digits Default Extensions 101 108 first eight ports ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls No other extensions ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls 25 01 01 VRS DISA L...

Page 506: ...oice Mail Ring Groups 1 100 Trunk Ports 001 200 Day Night Mode 1 8 0 Disconnect 1 100 Incoming Ring Group 102 In Skin External Voice Mail or VM8000 InMail 104 Speed Dial table Program 25 15 01 Version 3000 software or higher is required default 0 25 04 01 VRS DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer Busy Set the operating mode of each DISA trunk This sets what happens to the call when the DISA call...

Page 507: ...VRS callers single key access to extensions the company operator Department Calling Groups and Voice Mail For each VRS message set to answer outside calls see Program 25 02 and Program 25 05 you specify The digit the VRS caller dials 0 9 Keep in mind that if you assign destinations to digits outside callers cannot dial system extensions starting with that digit The destination reached eight digits...

Page 508: ...fore the system sets the call as a Ring No Answer After this time expires the call follows the programmed Ring No Answer routing set in Program 25 03 and 25 04 0 64800 seconds default 0 25 07 03 System Timers for VRS DISA Disconnect after VRS DISA retransfer to IRG From DISA trunk when the call may go to Incoming Ring Group IRG of Program 25 03 25 04 This setting determines the time the call is ri...

Page 509: ...ystem terminates the DISA call 0 64800 seconds default 30 25 07 11 System Timers for VRS DISA VRS DISA Answer Delay Time Set the time the system waits after receiving an incoming VRS DISA call before the system automatically answers the call 0 64800 seconds 0 64800 seconds default 0 25 07 13 System Timers for VRS DISA VRS DISA Busy Tone Interval If a DISA caller dials a busy extension and Program ...

Page 510: ...rd the caller dials Program 21 04 cannot be used to assign Toll Restriction to DISA trunks Day Night Mode 1 8 Toll Restriction Class 1 15 default 2 25 12 01 Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA Assign the trunk route that DISA Callers access if they dial the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code Refer to Central Office Calls Placing on page 2 277 for more information on setting up Alternate Trunk Ro...

Page 511: ...ation Using the Continue code before the warning tone is heard has no action 0 9 default not assigned 20 28 02 Trunk to Trunk Conversation Conversation Disconnect Code When Program 14 01 25 is enabled determine the 1 digit code the user should dial 0 9 to immediately disconnect their call Using the Disconnect code before the warning tone is heard disconnects the call 0 9 default not assigned 20 28...

Page 512: ... continues after the time in Program 24 02 07 expires If this option is set to 0 the conversation is disconnected immediately This program has no affect if Program 24 02 07 is set to 0 One of the trunks used must be an analog trunk or leased line This applies to manually transferred Tandem Trunk and DISA calls 0 64800 seconds default 0 25 07 07 System Timers for VRS DISA Long Conversation Warning ...

Page 513: ...mber 1 100 for an outside call OR Dial 9 a trunk number 1 200 for an outside call OR Dial 2 System Speed Dialing bin number OR Dial 0 for the operator OR Dial 701 an Internal Paging Zone number 0 1 9 00 01 64 OR 25 07 08 System Timers for VRS DISA Long Conversation Disconnect Time Determine the time the system waits before disconnecting a DISA or any automatically transferred trunk to trunk such a...

Page 514: ... defined in Program 11 11 01 through Program 11 11 05 6 Dial the number of the extension to be forwarded 7 Dial 1 to set Call Forwarding or 0 to cancel Call Forwarding 8 Dial the extension number to which the calls will be forwarded To use the Continue code to extend a DISA call 1 An external call connects to an external number either by transferring with Tandem Trunking or by DISA caller 2 After ...

Page 515: ...You can also program the DSS Console keys to store Service Codes up to 29 digits long This provides the DSS Console user with many of the features available on One Touch and Programmable Feature Keys The DSS Console keys can optionally store additional associated digits after the Service Code For example storing 70401 under a DSS Console key accesses Trunk Group 1 when the console user presses the...

Page 516: ...all Forwarding indication for extensions forwarded with Immediate Call Forwarding A DSS Console can have line keys for placing and answering calls The DSS Console provides one touch calling and a Busy Lamp Field for Door Boxes Refer to Door Box on page 2 517 when programming Door Boxes The DSS Console provides one touch Night Service switching Refer to Night Service on page 2 1175 when programming...

Page 517: ...tered The can be entered in the dial string of a DSS One Touch button The only applies to ISDN and Intercom calls When using the the system waits for the destination to answer answer supervision and then sends the rest of the digits Entering a P pause in a DSS One Touch dial string can be used for CO calls Intercom calls or after the for ISDN calls When the system has the Hotel Motel license 0007 ...

Page 518: ...Console Related Features Automatic Call Distribution ACD Call Forwarding Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing Door Box Night Service One Touch Calling Paging External Paging Internal Programmable Function Keys Speed Dial System Group Station ...

Page 519: ...LCA PKG Setup Terminal Type B1 Set up and confirm the Basic Configuration data for terminal type B1 0 Not set 1 Multiline Terminal 2 SLT Adapter 3 Bluetooth Cordless Handset 6 PGD Paging 7 PGD Tone Ringer 8 PGD Doorbox 9 PGD ACI 10 DSS Console 11 Not Used default 0 15 02 08 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Automatic Handsfree Set to 1 for a DSS Console to have one touch operation If set to 0 t...

Page 520: ...vice Code keys Programmable Function Keys and One Touch Calling keys The key when defined as a DSS One Touch key code 01 can have any function up to four digits e g extension number or Service Code The function information such as extension number or Service Code would then be entered as the additional data Key Number 001 500 0 99 General Functional Level 97 Door Box Access key additional data 1 8...

Page 521: ...tatus Code 4 Hotel DSS Define the LED patterns for hotel status code 4 on the DSS consoles 0 7 default 3 RW 30 05 13 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 5 Hotel DSS Define the LED patterns for hotel status code 5 on the DSS consoles 0 7 default 5 IL 30 05 14 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 6 Hotel DSS Define the LED patterns for hotel status code 6 on the DSS consoles 0 7 default 3 R...

Page 522: ...ess the DSS key for the extension to receive the transfer 30 05 20 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code Hotel DSS Define the LED patterns for hotel status code on the DSS consoles 0 7 default 5 IL 30 05 21 DSS Console Lamp Table VM Message Indication Define the LED patterns for VM message indications on the DSS consoles 0 7 default 3 RW 30 10 01 DSS Console IP Terminal Setup MAC Address Read O...

Page 523: ...e using your DSS Console 1 Press the DSS Console Internal Page zone key Group key 1 64 If the zone you want is busy try again later If you do not have Handsfree lift the handset to make your announcement Switching the Night Service mode from your DSS Console 1 Press the Night Service key External Page Busy Lamp Field When the DSS key is On Off The External Page zone is Busy Idle Internal Page Busy...

Page 524: ... as One Touch Keys These keys can be used for Direct Station Selection Trunk Calling Personal Speed Dial Speed Dialing and Service Code access The stored service code cannot be longer than three digits 1 Press the DSS Console key for function For example you can forward your calls by pressing DSS key 1 destination Your DSS key must have been previously programmed for Call Forward ...

Page 525: ... Ring Group calls Direct Inward Lines Transferred trunk calls Transferred Intercom calls Ringing and voice announced Intercom calls Conditions Calls which were on hold or transferred which recall the extension can be answered using Directed Call Pickup Personal Park also uses the Directed Call Pickup code Voice Mail Park and Page also uses the Directed Call Pickup code Directed Call Pickup cannot ...

Page 526: ...most commonly used These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro wizards for feature programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name ...

Page 527: ...ther Group Customize the Service Codes for call pickup for another group MLT SLT default 769 11 12 29 Service Code Setup for Service Access Direct Extension Call Pickup Customize the Service Codes for direct extension call pickup MLT SLT default 11 12 30 Service Code Setup for Service Access Specified Trunk Answer Customize the Service Codes for specified trunk answer MLT SLT default 672 20 06 01 ...

Page 528: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 494 Directed Call Pickup THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 529: ...system resorts extension names when You change Program 15 01 01 Extension Numbers and Names Any user dials 700 and changes their extension name Directory Dialing follows all the programmed options and conditions for Speed Dial System Group Station Intercom Calling and One Touch Calling Extension Directory only shows a telephones VEs that are connected and have a name assigned in Program 15 01 01 D...

Page 530: ...ls are used with PCPro and WebPro wizards for feature programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned...

Page 531: ...n enter several letters to help narrow the search Press to enter additional letters on the same key ex TOM 8666 6 4 Press the Down Arrow softkey to jump to that section 5 Press the Volume or key to scroll through the list If you wait too long between your selections Directory Dialing automatically cancels 6 Lift the handset or press the DIAL softkey or press Speaker to place the selected call If y...

Page 532: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 498 Directory Dialing THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 533: ...ERGE SV8100 Programming Manual for more details Conditions Single line telephone users cannot listen to or hear the pitch of the telephone incoming ring If Program 22 03 01 is set to 0 3 or 9 12 and Program 15 02 02 is set to 1 3 trunk calls follow the ring pattern in Program 22 03 01 and the pitch in Program 15 02 02 If Program 22 03 01 is set to 4 8 and Program 15 02 02 is set to 1 3 trunk calls...

Page 534: ...work Refer to the Programming section of the VM8000 InMail feature for details Call Holding Busy Greeting Call Screening Await Answer Transfer When a ring group call rings a Single Line Station the BLF indication shows busy The priority of the Large LED is as follows 1 CO Call Ringing 2 Message Waiting Received 3 VM Message Waiting 4 Message Waiting Set Program 15 08 is only effective for Virtual ...

Page 535: ...UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 13 0 Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns 2 501 Figure 2 12 Trunk Distinctive Ringing Flow Chart ...

Page 536: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 502 Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns Default Setting Enabled Figure 2 13 ICM Distinctive Ringing Flow Chart ...

Page 537: ...d WebPro wizards for feature programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 15 02 0...

Page 538: ...phone Basic Data Setup Message Waiting Lamp Cycle for Called Extension Select the cycle method that the Large LED flashes when the extension has Message Waiting set to the extension 1 Cycle 1 2 Cycle 2 3 Cycle 3 4 Cycle 4 5 Cycle 5 6 Cycle 6 7 Cycle 7 default 3 15 02 37 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp Color Set up various message wait lamp cycle options for lamp c...

Page 539: ... 2 Pattern 3 default Order 4 Pattern 3 Pattern 4 default 20 13 49 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service BLF Indication on CO Incoming State Determine if a BLF of the station lights when a Normal CO call is ringing the phone 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 15 01 Ring Cycle Setup Normal Incoming Call on Trunk Define the ringing cycle for Normal Incoming Trunk calls Ringing Cycle 1 13 d...

Page 540: ...1 4 Melody 1 Melody 5 Ring Tone Pattern 5 8 default 0 80 01 01 Service Tone Setup Repeat Count Customize the system basic tones and system service tones You need to reset for the changes to take effect 0 255 0 until On Hook 80 01 02 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number The following features require that the system tones listed below be changed to match the table After changing these settings the ...

Page 541: ...ansfer Refer to Table 2 19 Basic Tone Table Tone 39 on page 2 508 Table 2 17 Basic Tone Table Tone 06 Tone 06 Unit Basic Tone Duration Gain Level 1 11 480 620Hz 13 13dB 300ms 32 2 0 No Tone 300ms 32 3 0 No Tone 0ms 4 0 No Tone 0ms 5 0 No Tone 0ms 6 0 No Tone 0ms 7 0 No Tone 0ms 8 0 No Tone 0ms Table 2 18 Basic Tone Table Tone 14 Tone 14 Unit Basic Tone Duration Gain Level 1 10 440 480Hz 13 13dB 10...

Page 542: ... want to check 1 8 OR For trunk calls select the pitch 1 8 and the tone 1 4 you want to check 5 Go back to step 4 to listen to additional choices or press Speaker to hang up 7 0 No Tone 0ms 8 0 No Tone 0ms Table 2 19 Basic Tone Table Tone 39 Tone 39 Unit Basic Tone Duration Gain Level 1 12 440 620Hz 16dB 500ms 32 2 0 No Tone 500ms 32 3 0 No Tone 0ms 4 0 No Tone 0ms 5 0 No Tone 0ms 6 0 No Tone 0ms ...

Page 543: ...nd Flash Patterns 2 509 To change the pitch of your incoming ring multiline terminal only 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 720 3 Dial 1 to change ringing for Intercom calls OR Dial 2 to change ringing for trunk calls 4 Select the pitch 1 8 5 Press Speaker to hang up ...

Page 544: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 510 Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 545: ...a multiline terminal Softkeys DND feature key or DND system access code 1 Incoming trunk calls blocked 2 Paging incoming Intercom Call Forwards and transferred trunk calls blocked 3 All calls blocked 4 Incoming Call Forwards blocked 0 Do Not Disturb canceled Multiline Line Terminals display the following to indicate the type of DND that is set 1 DND EXTERNAL 2 DND INTERCOM 3 DND ALL 4 DND TRANSFER...

Page 546: ...ward Override Bypass default No Setting 3 OVRD Softkey When a call is transferred because of Call Forwarding No Answer Call Forwarding Busy or DND the Reason for Transfer option can display to the transferred extension while the call is ringing to the user telephone DND modes 1 3 causes calls to follow Program 22 08 programming then Program 22 05 programming even if the extension is forwarded When...

Page 547: ...ilability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Call Forwarding Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override Central Office Calls Answering Direct Inward Line DIL Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns Selectable Display Messaging ...

Page 548: ...rvice Code for DND MLT SLT default 707 11 16 06 Single Digit Service Code Setup DND Call Forward Override Bypass If a single digit service code is to be used assign an available code number default not assigned 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign functions to multiline terminal line keys DND 3 Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code...

Page 549: ...alls Blocked ALL All Calls Blocked Cftwto Call Forwards Blocked To Cancel DND Heading 6 Do not lift handset 7 Press Program softkey 8 Press DND softkey 9 Press Cncl softkey Multiline Terminal Using Feature Key or Access Code 1 Do not lift the handset 2 Press the DND feature key programmed in Program15 07 01 or SC 751 03 OR Press Speaker and dial 747 20 13 40 Class of Service Options Supplementary ...

Page 550: ...rcom Call Forwards and Transferred Trunk Calls Blocked 3 All Calls Blocked 4 Call Forwards Blocked Single Line Telephone 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 747 3 Dial the DND option code 0 Cancel DND 1 Incoming Trunk Calls Blocked 2 Paging Incoming Intercom Call Forwards and Transferred Trunk Calls Blocked 3 All Calls Blocked 4 Call Forwards Blocked ...

Page 551: ...rminal user can press the Recall key to activate the Door Box contacts This in turn releases the electric strike on the entrance door The device connected to the Door Box contacts cannot exceed the contact ratings shown in the following table The system can have up to eight Door Boxes Six chime tones are available Conditions The Door Box Feature Requires a PGD 2 U10 ADP A maximum of 56 PGD 2 U10 A...

Page 552: ...Notification is shown in the display Dterm cordless and Cordless DECT telephones can activate the door strike relay using a Recall key assigned in the phone configuration or by a Flash Key assigned to one of the line keys in Program 15 07 751 62 Version 4000 or higher software is required The door strike relay can be activated from a MH240 terminal by a Flash Key assigned to a line key in Program ...

Page 553: ...3 10 03 01 1 ETU Setup DLCA PKG Setup Terminal Type B1 Set up and confirm the Basic Configuration data for terminal type B1 0 Not set 1 Multiline Terminal 2 SLT Adapter 3 Bluetooth Cordless Handset 6 PGD Paging 7 PGD Tone Ringer 8 PGD Doorbox 9 PGD ACI 10 DSS Console 11 Not Used default 0 10 03 06 ETU Setup DLCA PKG Setup Terminal Type B2 Set up and confirm the Basic Configuration data for termina...

Page 554: ...x call When this timer expires the caller hears busy tone for 3 seconds fixed time and the call is then disconnected 0 64800 seconds default 60 32 02 01 Door Box Ring Assignments Determine which Door Box should ring which extension by entering the extension number Each Door Box can be programmed to ring up to 32 extensions and an extension can be programmed to ring for multiple Door Boxes Maximum ...

Page 555: ...king to the Door Box press Recall Single Line 500 2500 Telephone 1 While talking to the Door Box hookflash To answer a Door Box chime 1 Lift the handset or press Speaker 32 03 03 Door Box Basic Setup CODEC Receive Gain Setup Set the Receive Gain for each Door Box 1 63 15 5dB 15 5dB default 32 32 04 01 Door Box Name Setup Door Box Name Define the name of each Doorphone Up to 12 characters default n...

Page 556: ...ox call 1 Press the Flash key or hookflash to place your active call on hold 2 Dial the door box access code 702 by default plus the door box number 1 8 to answer the Door Box call To retrieve the original call hang up The original call rings the single line telephone To activate Call Forwarding Off Premise for a Door Box This option only works for ISDN PRI or BRI Trunks 1 At the multiline termina...

Page 557: ... Off Premise for a Door Box 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker dial SC 722 OR At the multiline terminal only press External Forward by Doorphone key Program 15 07 01 or SC 751 code 54 OR At the single line telephone lift the handset dial 722 2 Dial 0 for Cancel ...

Page 558: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 524 Door Box THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 559: ...allows Recall to be used to provide a hookflash to the PBX or Central Office A single line telephone user can use the Drop Key function with an access code Conditions The Drop Key provides a timed disconnect signal on CO PBX lines The Drop Key cannot be used for internal DID or Tie line calls Default Setting None System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Feature...

Page 560: ...rop Operation for SLT Customize the trunk drop operation for single line telephone Service Codes SLT default not assigned 14 02 03 Analog Trunk Data Setup Flash Type Select the flash type 0 Open Loop Flash 1 Ground Always set this option for Open Loop Flash 0 default 0 14 02 04 Analog Trunk Data Setup Hooking Type Use Flash for Timed Flash Program 81 01 14 or Disconnect Program 81 01 15 A user can...

Page 561: ...its 0 20ms 1 40ms 2 60ms 3 80ms 4 100ms 5 140ms 6 160ms 7 200ms 8 400ms 9 600ms 10 800ms 11 1 0 seconds 12 1 5 seconds 13 2 0 seconds 14 3 0 seconds 15 5 0 seconds default 9 600ms 81 10 08 COI Initial Data Setup Hookflash Time Selection 2 Set the open loop disconnect duration 20ms 5 0 sec for analog trunk COI U ETU circuits 0 20ms 1 40ms 2 60ms 3 80ms 4 100ms 5 140ms 6 160ms 7 200ms 8 400ms 9 600m...

Page 562: ... number To use Feature plus Recall from a multiline terminal with a CO PBX call in progress 1 Press Feature 2 Press Recall Receive the new CO PBX dial tone 3 Dial the desired number To use the Drop Key feature from a single line telephone with a CO PBX call in progress 1 Hookflash 2 Receive internal dial tone 3 Dial the Service Code Program 11 12 59 default not assigned 4 Receive the new CO PBX di...

Page 563: ...de is down the OFF icon is displayed When the battery is low the icon is displayed When there is no transmission between the Base Unit and the handset for about five minutes there are no LCD or LED indications on the cordless terminal handset Ringing off hook or pressing keys resumes LCD and LED indications The ring pattern for the cordless terminal can be selected by system programming and multil...

Page 564: ...m cordless and DECT telephones do not ring when receiving a doorbox call Notification is shown in the display Dterm cordless and Cordless DECT telephones can activate the door strike relay using a Recall key assigned in the phone configuration or by a Flash Key assigned to one of the line keys in Program 15 07 751 62 Version 4000 or higher software is required The Dterm Cordless Lite II can be use...

Page 565: ...VERGE SV8100 Issue 13 0 Dterm Cordless II Terminal 2 531 System Availability Terminals DTR 4R 1 TEL Required Component s CD 8DLCA OR CD 8DLCA with PZ 8DLCB Daughter Board OR CD 16DLCA Related Features None ...

Page 566: ...umber Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 03 02 ETU Setup DLCA PKG Setup Logical Port Number B1 Set up and confirm the Basic Configuration data for logical port number B1 0 Not set 1 Multiline Terminal 1 256 2 SLT Adapter 1 256 6 PGD 2 U10 ADP Paging 1 8 7 PGD 2 U10 ADP for Tone Ringer 1 8 8 PGD 2 U10 ADP for Door Box 1 8 9 PGD 2 U10 ADP for ACI 1 96 10 DSS 1 32 11 Not U...

Page 567: ...ers can install or remove themselves from the Department Calling Group Additional keys can also be assigned for Department Group features immediate calling destination 58 delayed calling destination 59 and DND destination 60 Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 752 by default 20 07 01 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Manual ...

Page 568: ...r ability to record erase or listen to VRS Messages 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 14 default 1 for COS 15 20 07 14 Class of Service Options Administrator Level VRS General Message Play Turn Off or On an extension user ability to dial 4 or Service Code 611 to listen to the General Message 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 14 default 1 for COS 15 20 07 15 Class of Service Options Administrator Level V...

Page 569: ...Level Dial In Mode Switch Enable Disable an extension user ability to set or cancel dial in mode switch 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 07 27 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Do Not Call Administrator Enable Disable an extension user ability to set or cancel do not call administrator 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 08 01 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Intercom...

Page 570: ...n an extension allowing force Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 08 11 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Protect for the Call Mode Switching from Caller When an extension is set to ring mode for ICM calls enable this option to prevent callers from changing the call to voice announce mode 0 Off 1 On default 0...

Page 571: ...ser ability to override the trunk access map programming for outgoing calls 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 08 22 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Voice Over to busy Virtual Extension Define the COS for voice over to busy virtual extension 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 09 01 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Second Call for DID DISA DIL E M Override Turn Off ...

Page 572: ...ault 1 for COS 1 15 20 09 08 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Calling Party Information Turn Off or On and extension ability to display calling party information on CCIS calls 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 10 01 Class of Service Options Answer Service Group Call Pickup Within Group Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup for calls ringing an extension Pickup Group and ring group call...

Page 573: ...vice Call Forward All Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set Call Forward Immediate 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 02 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forward When Busy Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set Call Forwarding when Busy 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 03 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding When Unanswere...

Page 574: ... Forwarding Off Premise External Call Forwarding Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set up Call Forwarding Off Premise at the extension 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 11 13 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Operator Transfer After Hold Callback Turn Off or On an extension user ability to have a call which recalls from hold transfer to the operator 0 Off 1 On default 0 f...

Page 575: ...tension user ability to set up a tandem conference call automatically when they hang up 0 Allow 1 Deny default 0 for COS 1 15 20 11 22 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Restricted Unsupervised Conference Allow Deny an extension user ability to initiate a Trunk to Trunk Transfer Tandem Trunking 0 Allow 1 Deny default 0 for COS 1 15 20 11 23 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Servic...

Page 576: ...tary Service Privacy Release Turn Off or On an extension user ability to initiate a Voice Call Conference 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 10 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Monitor Enable the Barge In Speech Mode or Monitor Mode at the initiating extension i e Barge In initiator 0 Speech 1 Monitor default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 11 Class of Service Options Supplementar...

Page 577: ...lay Messaging 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 20 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Account Code Toll Restriction Operator Alert Restricted Operation Transfer Turn Off or On operator alert when an extension improperly enters an Account Code or violates Toll Restriction 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 21 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Extension Name Turn ...

Page 578: ... 13 31 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Connected Line Identification COLP Define the supplementary feature availability for each extension Class of Service COS 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 32 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Deny Multiple Barge Ins Allow Deny the extension user ability to have multiple users Barge In to their conversation 0 Off 1 On default ...

Page 579: ...ation Relocation feature 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 44 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Live Monitor Enabling Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Live Monitor 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 45 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service MIC Key Mode While Call Monitoring Set per class of service when in Call Monitoring Mode determines if the monit...

Page 580: ...NR SPD Answer ANS Feature FNC or Recall When assigned these keys operate the same as on an NEC multiline terminal When initially installed function keys F1 F4 default to Line Keys 1 4 respectively and Off Hook Ringing defaults to ON Global Off Hook Ringing must be ON default for any Function key to work with Off Hook Ringing To place an internal call 1 Press TALK icon is displayed 2 Dial the Stati...

Page 581: ...ed 2 When the handset is out of the Base Unit press TALK if ringing line preference is assigned icon is displayed 3 Talk To place a call on Hold internal or outside With a call in process press HOLD To retrieve a held call press flashing F1 F4 After a programmed time the held call recalls to the originating terminal To redial a number 1 Press REDIAL 2 The previously dialed number is called To tran...

Page 582: ...ng Type B High Ring Type B Low Ring Type C High Ring Type C Low Ring Off Vibration To adjust receive volume level 1 With a call in progress press R VOL to decrease volume 2 Press R VOL to restore normal volume To Mute the microphone 1 Press the MUTE key lower key on left side Microphone is muted 2 Press the MUTE key again to activate microphone To use the Charging Unit 1 Place handset and or spare...

Page 583: ... terminals are idle A call in progress cannot be switched When tried it is dropped Switching held calls is not recommended because LED indications are not provided The Power LED and the applicable position LED are on to indicate selection To switch from Desk to Cordless using the Redial Key 1 Verify that the Base Unit is in Desk mode 2 Remove the battery 3 Press and hold and on the handset 4 Insta...

Page 584: ...s TALK to restore standby mode 11 Press REDIAL to test this feature 12 The Base Unit automatically changes from Desk to Cordless This is a one time operation but one of the F1 F4 keys can be programmed for the redial function 13 To restore the normal redial function enter setup mode and press F3 and HOLD to display Digital Redial 14 Press TALK to restore standby mode ...

Page 585: ...ical The battery can be hot swapped while on a call The battery must be replaced with another charged battery pack within 20 seconds otherwise the connection is lost The handset has visual and audible indicators to warn of a low battery condition When a message is received the message icon is displayed Feature Dterm Cordless Lite II DTH 4R 1 Digital Technology 900 MHz FM with ADPCM digital LCD 2 l...

Page 586: ... receiving a doorbox call Notification is shown in the display Dterm cordless and Cordless DECT telephones can activate the door strike relay using a Recall key assigned in the phone configuration or by a Flash Key assigned to one of the line keys in Program 15 07 751 62 Version 4000 or higher software is required Under certain conditions HOLD and TRANSFER have the same behavior To prevent an unwa...

Page 587: ...t commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 03 0...

Page 588: ...R telephones Set up and confirm the Basic Configuration data for optional installed Unit 1 0 None 1 APR Module 2 APA Module 3 ADA Module 4 CTA CTU Module default 0 10 03 05 ETU Setup DLCA PKG Setup Optional Installed Unit 2 Set up and confirm the Basic Configuration data for optional installed Unit 2 0 None 1 APR Module 2 APA Module 3 ADA Module 4 CTA CTU Module default 0 10 03 06 ETU Setup DLCA P...

Page 589: ...ephones Shows optional adapter information 0 No option 1 APR 2 ADA 3 BHA default 0 10 03 11 ETU Setup DLCA PKG Setup Handset Option Information Shows optional adapter information 0 No option 1 PSA PSD 2 Bluetooth Cordless Handset default 0 20 07 01 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Manual Night Service Enabled Turn Off or On an extension user ability to manually Switch the Night Mode Se...

Page 590: ...s Administrator Level VRS General Message Play Turn Off or On an extension user ability to dial 4 or Service Code 611 to listen to the General Message 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 14 default 1 for COS 15 20 07 15 Class of Service Options Administrator Level VRS General Message Record Delete Turn Off or On an extension user ability to dial Service Code 612 and record listen to or erase the Genera...

Page 591: ...ns Administrator Level Dial In Mode Switch Enable Disable an extension user ability to set or cancel dial in mode switch 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 07 27 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Do Not Call Administrator Enable Disable an extension user ability to set or cancel do not call administrator 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 08 01 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call...

Page 592: ...extension to force Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 08 11 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Protect for the Call Mode Switching from Caller When an extension is set to ring mode for ICM calls enable this option to prevent callers from changing the call to voice announce mode 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 ...

Page 593: ...lt 0 for COS 1 15 20 08 22 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Voice Over to busy Virtual Extension Enable Disable an extension user ability to voice over to a busy virtual extension 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 09 01 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Second Call for DID DISA DIL E M Override Turn Off or On an extension ability to receive a second call from a DID DI...

Page 594: ...lls 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 10 01 Class of Service Options Answer Service Group Call Pickup Within Group Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup for calls ringing an extension Pickup Group and ring group calls Service Code 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 10 02 Class of Service Options Answer Service Group Call Pickup Another Group Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup for calls ringing outsi...

Page 595: ...Forward When Busy Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set Call Forwarding when Busy 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 03 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding When Unanswered Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set Call Forwarding when Unanswered 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 04 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding ...

Page 596: ...r Transfer After Hold Callback Turn Off or On an extension user ability to have a call which recalls from hold transfer to the operator 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 11 14 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction Turn Off or On the Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction If enabled Trunk to Trunk Transfer is not possible 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 1...

Page 597: ...ility to initiate a Trunk to Trunk Transfer Tandem Trunking 0 Allow 1 Deny default 0 for COS 1 15 20 11 23 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service CAR VE Call Forward Set Cancel Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set and cancel Call Forwarding for a CAR or Virtual Extension 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 24 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Trunk Park Hold Mod...

Page 598: ... Service Barge In Monitor Enable the Barge In Speech or Monitor Mode at the initiating extension i e Barge In initiator 0 Speech 1 Monitor default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 11 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Room Monitor Initiating Extension Turn Off or On an extension user ability to Room Monitor other extensions 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 12 Class of Service Options Supple...

Page 599: ...sfer Turn Off or On operator alert when an extension improperly enters an Account Code or violates Toll Restriction 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 21 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Extension Name Turn Off or On an extension user ability to program the name 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 22 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Busy Status Display Called P...

Page 600: ... Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 32 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Deny Multiple Barge Ins Allow Deny an extension user ability to have multiple users Barge In to their conversation 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 33 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service ACD Supervisor s Position Enhancement Set this option to on for the operator to use service codes in Progr...

Page 601: ...0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 45 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service MIC Key Mode While Call Monitoring Set per class of service when in Call Monitoring Mode determines if the monitored parties receives the barge in alert tone when Coaching Mode is enabled 0 Enable 1 Disable default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 47 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Station Number Display D...

Page 602: ...g Assignment 7 Press Ring Vol to turn Global Off Hook Ringing On or Off LCD indicates ON or OFF as appropriate 8 Press TALK to exit Function keys F1 F4 can be programmed as Line Keys 1 16 Redial LNR SPD Answer ANS Feature FNC or Recall When assigned these keys operate the same as on an NEC multiline terminal When initially installed function keys F1 F4 default to Line keys 1 4 respectively and Off...

Page 603: ...cause line key LED indications are not provided Switching from multiline telephone and Dterm Cordless Lite Telephone 1 Press the Cordless button on the base unit OR Press REDIAL from the Dterm Cordless Lite II handset This applies only if REDIAL is programmed to perform desk to cordless switching To switch from Dterm Cordless Lite II Telephone to multiline telephone 1 Press the DESK button on the ...

Page 604: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 570 Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 605: ...ve Directory if available View current weather for any US city Receive bulletins broadcast from DTPlusWare server Display World Clock for predefined cities When system is equipped with the SMB8000 Multimedia Conference Bridge you can create view and change conferences from a client IP desk phone and iPhone Change DTPlusWare client login password For iPhone users DTPlusWare is available via a local...

Page 606: ...ers and installation instructions Before installing the CSTA Server you must install the appropriate NEC SV8100 Connector software on the PC the CSTA server will be installed on All IP Terminals used for DTPlusWare must have firmware Version 4 x x x or higher installed Predefined instant messages can only be sent from DT750 Sophisticated telephones Table 2 20 DTPlusWare OAI TAPI License Feature Ma...

Page 607: ...tically and provided internal dial tone from your extension the Caller ID must be sent from Mobile Phone to SV8100 for authentication purposes IIS Web server by default responds to HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol URL s which are not secure when accessed externally over the internet It is recommended that any access via Web iPhone client over the internet use a secure communication channel SSL HT...

Page 608: ...itializes CSTA Web client Admin access is only available for configuration DTPlusWare Version 2 xx supports a generic Private contact pop up for caller ID that is restricted or not provided The pop up does not contain any caller information but does provide the ability to select the redirect during the pop up Windows 7 32 bit 64 bit and Windows 2008 server are not supported for DTPlusWare server i...

Page 609: ...e OAI TAPI License Feature Matrix on page 2 572 Supported Internet Browsers Because the DTPlusWare Web Client is a web based application an internet browser is required to access the Web Client Administration User settings The following Internet browsers are supported Windows Internet Explorer 8 x FireFox 3 x x and Safari 3 x x Internet Access If Dynamic DNS is not used then an Internet Connection...

Page 610: ... 3 10 20 01 LAN Setup for External Equipment TCP Port Define the TCP port 0 65535 when communicating to the SMDR type 5 0 65535 default External Device 1 CTI Server 0 External Device 2 ACD MIS 4000 External Device 5 SMDR Output 0 External Device 6 DIM Output 0 External Device 11 O M Server 8010 External Device 12 Traffic Report Output 0 External Device 13 Room Data Output for Hotel Service 0 11 16...

Page 611: ...orwarding Set to On 1 for DTPlusWare Turn Off or On setting Call Forwarding Off Premise at the extension 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 05 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Intercom Off Hook Signaling Set to Off 0 for DTPlusWare Turn Off or On an extension user ability to receive off hook signals 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementar...

Page 612: ...e will show the message notification for outside caller messages Up to eight digits default ext 101 21 01 03 System Options for Outgoing Calls Trunk Interdigit Time External Set to 30 seconds for analog trunks only The system waits for this time to expire before placing the call in a talk state Call Timer starts after time expires Voice Over and Barge In are not allowed until after time expires 0 ...

Page 613: ...figurable system timer pre programmed multiline terminals can dim the brightness of all line keys and feature keys using less power This feature does not affect the multiline terminal display Power Failure Saving Mode If the SV8100 loses system power this feature can be programmed to cut the power to selected terminals while running on the backup battery Cutting the power to specific terminals wil...

Page 614: ...g the Power Cut Off mode power to all phones is restored when the phone system comes back on line When a phone has entered Power Cut Off mode any direct calls to the terminal will follow the stations call forwarding If the phone is part of a chain call forwarding scenario the chain call forwarding will not process while the phone is in Power Cut Off mode When a terminal is set to Power Cut Off mod...

Page 615: ...g call at the terminal ends the Power Saving mode and all LEDs will return to normal brightness Power Failure Saving Mode The same conditions as Power Cut Off mode exists with the following exceptions When the system is in the Power Failure Saving mode power must be restored to the system before restoring power to the phones When in a Power Failure Saving mode a system reset will not restore power...

Page 616: ...utomatic Night Service Patterns Start Time Defines the daily pattern of the automatic mode switching Each mode group has 10 patterns These patterns are used in Programs 12 03 and 12 04 The daily pattern consists of 20 timer settings This option defines the start time 0000 2359 Refer to the SV8100 Programming Manual for default settings 12 02 02 Automatic Night Service Patterns End Time Defines the...

Page 617: ... 0101 Jan 1 1231 Dec 31 Time Pattern Number 0 10 0 No Setting default not assigned 15 02 18 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Power Saving Mode Enable disable the ability of each terminal to cut power when the system is running on battery backup following a loss of power 0 Normal Mode 1 Power Saving Mode Eco Mode default 1 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a function key as a Power Sav...

Page 618: ...ong a multiline terminal is idle before shifting into the Power Saving mode 0 Disable 1 1 minute 2 2 minutes 3 4 minutes 4 8 minutes 5 16 minutes 6 32 minutes 7 64 minutes default 0 20 53 01 Night Mode Group Assignment for Power Save Group Night Mode Service Group Number Assigns the Night Mode Service group number into the Power Save group Power Save Group Number 1 16 Night Mode Service group numb...

Page 619: ...nd TEL 102 cuts at night Settings Using Service Codes Program Program 15 27 01 TEL 101 Power Save Group 2 TEL 102 Power Save Group 2 Table 2 21 Program 12 02 Automatic Night Service Patterns NightGroup Mode Time Pattern Set Time Number Start End Night Mode 1 1 1 0000 0600 2 1 1 2 0600 1900 1 1 1 3 1900 0000 2 Figure 2 14 Automatic Night Service ...

Page 620: ...Code 731 2 Dial 02 Group 2 3 Dial 0 Power On 4 Press Speaker to set Power On for Power Save Group 2 Power Off for the Entire Power Save Group 1 Press Speaker and dial Service Code 731 2 Dial 00 Entire Group 3 Dial 1 Power Off 4 Enter the Password Default 0000 Power supply to the system is cut when all terminals of Entire Power Save Group are in an Idle state Password is set in Program 90 02 02 Use...

Page 621: ... with additional data 02 2 Press the Power Save key 3 The key is turned Off Power Off for the Entire Power Save Group 1 Assign Power Save key SC751 code 06 with additional data 00 2 Press the Power Save key 3 Enter the Password set in Program 90 02 02 User ID3 4 The key turns red Power On for the Entire Power Save Group 1 Assign Power Save key SC751 code 06 with additional data 00 2 Press the Powe...

Page 622: ...e Set Program 15 27 02 to 1 for extensions to have the power cut when the system losses power and runs on battery backup Example Program Program 15 27 02 TEL 101 set to a 1 TEL 102 set to a 1 TEL 103 set to a 0 TEL 104 set to a 0 TEL 101 TEL 102 will be powered Off when a power failure occurs Figure 2 15 Multiline Terminal Darkens ...

Page 623: ...re the Calling Party Number CPN sent out has been enhanced IMPORTANT PLEASE NOTE THE FOLLOWING 1 When ARS is NOT enabled and the system allows trunk access by dialing 9 single line telephones disregard Program 20 03 03 System Options for Single Lines Telephones SLT DTMF Dial to Trunk Lines This prevents the system from connecting to a trunk until all the digits are dialed This can be avoided by us...

Page 624: ...tries to access the trunks defined in the group If the trunks do not exist the call does not dial out For E911 to function correctly remove any uninstalled trunks from the trunk group If Program 21 01 12 System Options for Outgoing Calls Dial 911 Routing Without Trunk Access is set to 0 trunk access code required when using the Dial Number Preview feature and dialing 9 911 if all trunks are busy t...

Page 625: ...e 2 22 CPN for Standard Calls PRG 99 01 58 PRG 20 08 13 PRG 21 12 01 PRG 21 13 01 CPN PRG Off Off Not Assigned Not Assigned None Assigned None Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned 21 12 01 On Not Assigned Not Assigned None Assigned 21 13 01 Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned 21 13 01 On Off Not Assigned Not Assigned None Assigned None Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned 21 12 01 On Not...

Page 626: ...signed None Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 VE Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Not Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 VE Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 VE On Off Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned None Not Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 VE Assigned Not Assigned None Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 VE Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Not Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 VE...

Page 627: ...d None Assigned None Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned 21 12 01 On Not Assigned Not Assigned None Assigned 21 13 01 Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned 21 13 01 On Off Not Assigned Not Assigned None Assigned 21 13 01 Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned 21 13 01 On Not Assigned Not Assigned None Assigned 21 13 01 Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned 21 13 01 The CPN provided is fro...

Page 628: ... VE Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Not Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 VE Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 VE On Off Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned None Not Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 VE Assigned Not Assigned 21 13 01 Terminal Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 Terminal Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Not Assigned Assigned 21 13 01 VE Assigned Not Assig...

Page 629: ... Off Not Assigned Off None None On None None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB On Not Assigned Off None None On None None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA On ...

Page 630: ...A Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA 21 13 01 SysA Assigned Of...

Page 631: ... Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 Sy...

Page 632: ...ff None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA On Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA 21 13 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 ...

Page 633: ...SysB 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None None On None None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB On Not Assigned Off None None On None None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None None On None None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB On ...

Page 634: ...1 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA ...

Page 635: ...01 SysA VE 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None None On None None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB On Not Assigned Off None None On None None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 ...

Page 636: ... SysA VE 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 Sys...

Page 637: ...01 SysA VE 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None None On None None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB On Not Assigned Off None None On None None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 ...

Page 638: ... SysA VE 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 Sys...

Page 639: ...21 13 01 SysA VE 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None None On None None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB On Not Assigned Off None None On None None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 12 01 Sy...

Page 640: ...t Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21...

Page 641: ...01 SysA 21 13 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA 21 13 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off None 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA 21 13 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA 21 13 01 SysA Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA...

Page 642: ...SysA Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA 21 13 01 SysA Assigned...

Page 643: ...SysA Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA 21 13 01 SysA Assigned...

Page 644: ...gned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 13 01 SysA On 21 13 01 SysA 21 13 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 13 01 SysA On 21 ...

Page 645: ...A VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE 21 13 01 SysA VE On Not Assigned Off None 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None None On None None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 0...

Page 646: ... 01 SysA VE 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 ...

Page 647: ...13 01 SysA VE 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None None On None None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB On Not Assigned Off None None On None None Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB On 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysB Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 SysA VE 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB ...

Page 648: ... 01 SysA VE 21 13 01 SysA VE Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA On Not Assigned Off None 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 12 01 SysA On 21 12 01 SysA 21 12 01 SysA Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 13 01 SysA VE On 21 13 01 ...

Page 649: ...ysA terminal 21 13 01 SysA terminal Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal 21 13 01 SysA terminal Assigned On Not Assigned Off None 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal 21 13 01 SysA terminal Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal 21 13 01 SysA terminal Assigned Not Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 13 01 Sys...

Page 650: ... terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal 21 13 01 SysA terminal Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal 21 13 01 SysA terminal On Not Assigned Off None 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal 21 13 01 SysA terminal Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal 21 13 01 SysA terminal Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 13 01 Sy...

Page 651: ... terminal 21 13 01 SysA terminal Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal 21 13 01 SysA terminal On Not Assigned Off None 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal 21 13 01 SysA terminal Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal 21 13 01 SysA terminal Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 Sy...

Page 652: ...sA terminal 21 13 01 SysA terminal Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal 21 13 01 SysA terminal On Not Assigned Off None 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal 21 13 01 SysA terminal Assigned Off 21 12 01 SysB 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 SysA terminal 21 13 01 SysA terminal Assigned Off Not Assigned Off None 21 13 01 SysA terminal On 21 13 01 ...

Page 653: ... 12 01 PRG 21 13 01 CPN PRG Off Off Not Assigned Not Assigned None Assigned None Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned 21 12 01 On Not Assigned Not Assigned None Assigned 21 13 01 Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned 21 13 01 On Off Not Assigned Not Assigned None Assigned None Assigned Not Assigned 21 12 01 Assigned 21 12 01 On Not Assigned Not Assigned None Assigned 21 13 01 Assigned Not Ass...

Page 654: ...ograms for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 12 56 Service Code Setup for Service Access E911 Alarm Shut Off Select the Service Code norm...

Page 655: ...on that dialed 911 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 21 01 12 System Options for Outgoing Calls Dial E911 Routing Without Trunk Access If Enabled 1 an extension user can dial 911 without first dialing a trunk access code or pressing a line key If Disabled 0 an extension user must dial a trunk access code e g 9 or press a line key before dialing 911 If enabled dialing 9 911 still dials out 0 Trunk ...

Page 656: ... 0 Disable 1 Enable default 1 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Default Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 08 13 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service ISDN CLIP Determine if the ISDN calling line identity presentation and screening indicators should be ...

Page 657: ... Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions Assign each extension a Calling Party Number maximum 16 digits per entry The calling number is the subscriber number of the dial in number When a call is made by an extension which does not have an Extension Calling Number assigned Program 21 12 the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in Program 21 13 If a Calling Party Number is as...

Page 658: ...ty To turn off the E911 Alarm at your telephone 1 Lift the handset or press Speaker 2 Dial 786 The alarm goes off OR if you have a display telephone 1 Press the Exit key once to turn off the alarm 2 Press the Exit key again to clear the alarm display ...

Page 659: ...ommon telephone operations These keys include Feature Recall Conference Redial Hold Transfer Answer Speaker Microphone Directory and Message The dial pad is detachable to allow easy customization for a foreign language French or Spanish or for Automatic Call Distribution ACD applications All Electra Elite IPK Terminals are Class B devices and comply with U S FCC regulations for office and resident...

Page 660: ... call the VM pilot number Feature selection Program 15 02 26 The distance from the chassis for IPK multiline terminals DTH type can be extended when local AC power is provided When the IPK Terminal is powered by a local AC R Unit AC Adapter a built in Long Line Adapter allows these telephones to be connected up to a distance of 2000 feet by Twisted 1 Pair Cable at 24 AWG For compatibility of Adapt...

Page 661: ... any of the following adapters is installed in an IPK Terminal AP R R Unit HF R Unit DCR 60 1 Console The WM R Unit Wall Mount Unit is required when any adapter is installed in an Electra Elite Terminal and the terminal is to be wall mounted Default Settings None System Availability Terminals DTH 16LD 1 TEL DTH 32D 1 TEL DTH 16D 1 TEL DTH 8D 1 TEL DTH 8 1 TEL DCR 60 1 CONSOLE AD A R AP A R AP R R ...

Page 662: ...A R UNIT Analog Port Adapter without Ringer AP R R UNIT Analog Port Adapter with Ringer HF R UNIT Adapter for Full Duplex Handsfree BS F R UNIT French Button Unit BS S R UNIT Spanish Button Unit WM R UNIT Wall Mount Unit AC 2R Unit AC Adapter AC 3R Unit AC Adapter PC Type Related Features Ancillary Device Connection Station Name User Programmable Off Hook Signaling Softkeys User Programming Abilit...

Page 663: ...y assigned The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 03 01 ETU Setup DLCA PKG Setup Terminal Type B1 Set up and confirm the Basic Configuration data for terminal type B1 0 Not set 1 Multiline Terminal 2 SLT Adapter 3 Bluetooth Cordless Handset 6 PGD Paging 7 PGD Tone Ringer 8 PGD Doorbox 9 PGD ACI...

Page 664: ...t up and confirm the Basic Configuration data for terminal type 0 Not set 6 PGD 2 U10 ADP Paging 7 PGD 2 U10 ADP Tone Ringer 8 PGD 2 U10 ADP Door Box 9 PGD 2 U10 ADP ACI 12 APR B2 Mode default 0 10 03 07 ETU Setup DLCA PKG Setup Logical Port Number B2 Set up and confirm the Basic Configuration data for logical port number B2 0 Not Set 6 PGD 2 U10 ADP Ext Speaker 7 PGD 2 U10 ADP Paging Tone Ringer ...

Page 665: ...Dialing numbers 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 07 05 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Set Cancel Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use the Trunk to Trunk Forwarding service codes 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 07 10 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Programmable Function Key Programming Appearance Level Turn Off or On a...

Page 666: ...nsion Data Define the COS for the SMDR printout of accumulated extension data 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 14 default 1 for COS 15 20 07 19 Class of Service Options Administrator Level SMDR Printout Department Group STG Data Define the COS for the SMDR printout of department group STG data 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 14 default 1 for COS 15 20 07 20 Class of Service Options Administrator Leve...

Page 667: ... Service Options Outgoing Call Service System Speed Dialing Turn Off or On an extension user ability to make outbound calls using system speed dial numbers 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 08 04 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Group Speed Dialing Turn Off or On an extension user ability to make outbound calls using group speed dial numbers 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 08...

Page 668: ...entation and screening indicators should be allowed 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 08 14 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Call Address Information Define the COS for call address information 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 08 15 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Block Outgoing Caller ID Turn Off or On a user COS from automatically blocking outgoing Caller ID i...

Page 669: ...SA DIL E M Override Turn Off or On the extension ability to receive a second call from a DID DISA DIL or tie line caller With this option set to 1 the destination extension must be busy for a second DNIS caller to ring through If the destination extension does not have a trunk or CAP key available for the second call and a previous call is ringing the extension but has not yet been answered the se...

Page 670: ...Service Code 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 10 02 Class of Service Options Answer Service Group Call Pickup Another Group Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup for calls ringing outside a group Service Code 769 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 10 03 Class of Service Options Answer Service Group Call Pickup for Specific Group Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup for a specific group using service ...

Page 671: ...sion user ability to set Call Forwarding when Busy 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 03 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding When Unanswered Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set Call Forwarding when Unanswered 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 04 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding Both Ringing Turn Off or On an extension ...

Page 672: ...r Transfer After Hold Callback Turn Off or On an extension user ability to have a call which recalls from hold transfer to the operator 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 11 14 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction Turn Off or On Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction If enabled Trunk to Trunk Transfer is not possible 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20...

Page 673: ... ability to initiate a Trunk to Trunk Transfer Tandem Trunking 0 Allow 1 Deny default 0 for COS 1 15 20 11 23 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service CAR VE Call Forward Set Cancel Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set and cancel Call Forwarding for a CAR or Virtual Extension 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 24 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Trunk Park Hold ...

Page 674: ...ault 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Automatic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override Allow a busy extension to Manually 0 or Automatically 1 receive off hook signals 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 07 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Message Waiting Turn Off or On an extension user ability to leave Message Waiting 0 Off 1 On default 1 fo...

Page 675: ...S 1 15 20 13 17 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Tone Display Intrusion Tone Turn Off or On the Barge In Intrusion Tone If disabled this also turns off the Barge In display at the called extension 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 18 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Programmable Function Key Programming General Level Turn Off or On an extension user abili...

Page 676: ...g Virtual Extension If set to 1 a busy extension can be called while someone is talking on a virtual extension key Program 20 13 06 Call Waiting must be off for this option to work 1 On 0 Off default 1 for COS 01 15 20 13 28 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Allow Class of Service to be Changed Turn Off or On an extension user ability to change an extension COS via Service Code 677 0 ...

Page 677: ...r On an extension user ability to use Headset ringing 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 39 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service ACD Queue Status Display Turn Off or On the ACD Queue Status Display for an extension COS Any extension with this option enabled also hears the queue alarm 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 40 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Do Not Dis...

Page 678: ...shows which queue the call is coming from 0 Unlisted 1 Listed default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 51 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Number and Name appear in the directory Determine if an extension name and number are listed On or unlisted Off in the directory 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 14 01 Class of Service Options for DISA E M First Digit Absorption Delete First Digit Dialed ...

Page 679: ...cess Service Code 715 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 14 09 Class of Service Options for DISA E M Forced Trunk Disconnect Not for ISDN T point Enable Disable a tie trunk caller ability to use Forced Trunk Disconnect Service Code 26 This option is not available to DISA callers 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 14 10 Class of Service Options for DISA E M Call Forward Setting by Remote via DI...

Page 680: ...sage Indicator Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Adjustable Base Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Built in Wall Mount Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Headset Jack Built in Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes DESI Label by LCD Yes No No No No Receiver Volume Control for Handset Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Speakerphone Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Headset Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Ring Volume Control Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes LCD Contrast Control Yes Yes Yes Yes No Housing Color Wh...

Page 681: ...X Branch Line Incoming Group or DIL should be programmed The systems cannot distinguish between an incoming facsimile call and a CO PBX call Incoming call may be automatically answered by FAX Machine Ringing assignments should be turned off for fax lines When the facsimile is used the associated CO line key indicates Busy LED on a multiline terminal When the facsimile is not used the FAX Branch CO...

Page 682: ...y assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 14 02 14 Analog Trunk Data Setup Loop Start Ground Start Select Loop start or Grou...

Page 683: ... ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls No other extensions ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls 22 05 01 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment To have the trunks ring extensions assign trunks to a Ring Group The incoming ring group assignment programmed in Program 41 03 01 overrides the setting in this program Incoming Group Number for Day Night Mode 1 8 0 No Setting 001 100 Incoming Group 102 In Sk...

Page 684: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 650 Facsimile CO Branch Connection THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 685: ...lash parameters for compatibility with the connected Telco or PBX Conditions The system does not provide a ground flash Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Enhancements With Version 4000 or higher software a Flash Recall key can be placed on a line key With Version 4000 or higher software the door strike relay can be activated from the MH24...

Page 686: ...ents Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 12 42 Service Code Setup for Service Access Flash on Trunk Lines Customize the Service Codes for flash on trunk lines SLT default 3 14 02 03 Analog Trunk Data Setup Flash Type Make sure this item is set for open loop Flash 0 Open Loop Flash 1 Ground default 0 14 02 04 Analog Trunk Data Setup Hooking Type For each trunk select Timed Flash or open loop Disconnect 0 ...

Page 687: ...0ms 5 140ms 6 160ms 7 200ms 8 400ms 9 600ms 10 800ms 11 1 0 seconds 12 1 5 seconds 13 2 0 seconds 14 3 0 seconds 15 5 0 seconds default 9 600ms 81 10 08 COT Initial Data Setup Hookflash Time Selection 2 Set the open loop disconnect duration 16 4080ms for analog trunk CD 4COTB circuits Program 81 10 08 0 20ms 1 40ms 2 60ms 3 80ms 4 100ms 5 140ms 6 160ms 7 200ms 8 400ms 9 600ms 10 800ms 11 1 0 secon...

Page 688: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 654 Flash Operation To flash the trunk you are on From a Multiline Terminal 1 Press Recall From a Single Line Telephone 1 Hookflash 2 Dial 3 ...

Page 689: ...pplications you can alter the code if needed The system provides a completely flexible system numbering plan Refer to the chart below and the UNIVERGE SV8100 Programming Manual for more details Flexible System Numbering Program Description 11 01 01 System Numbering Set the system internal Intercom numbering plan The numbering plan includes the digits an extension user must dial to access features ...

Page 690: ...11 20 01 the system uses prefix searching giving the lower table number the higher priority For example the user programs 211 in table 1 and 2113 in table 2 then dials 2113 the system selects table 1 11 10 Service Code Setup for System Administrator 11 11 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation 11 12 Service Code Setup for Service Access 11 13 Service Code Setup for ACD 11 14 Service Code Set...

Page 691: ...ple for 3100X 10s Group 4 digit 100s Group 5 digit 11 01 01 Dial 3 31 Digit 4 9 Dial Extension Analyze Table 11 01 01 Dial 3 31 Digit 7 9 Dial Extension Analyze Table 11 20 01 Table 1 Dial 310 11 20 01 Table 1 Dial 3100 11 20 02 Table 1 Intercom 11 20 02 Table 1 Intercom Example for 31000X Example for 310000X 1000s Group 6 digit 10 000s Group 7 digit 11 01 01 Dial 3 31 Digit 4 9 Dial Extension Ana...

Page 692: ...ms for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 01 01 System Numbering Service Code Customize the system internal Intercom numbering plan Refer ...

Page 693: ...runk Route Access Code Assign the Service Code set up in Program 11 01 01 for Alternate Trunk Route Access Dial up to four digits default not assigned 11 10 01 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Night Mode Switching Customize the night mode switching Service Codes for the System Administrator MLT SLT default 718 11 10 03 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Setting the System Time ...

Page 694: ...ministrator Off Premise Call Forward by Door Box Customize the night mode switching Service Codes for the System Administrator MLT default 722 11 10 20 Service Code Setup for System Administrator VRS Record Erase Message Customize the night mode switching Service Codes for the System Administrator MLT SLT default 616 11 10 21 Service Code Setup for System Administrator VRS General Message Playback...

Page 695: ...the System Administrator MLT SLT default not assigned 11 10 36 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Change the Guidance Message Number on Voice Mail Auto Attendant Change the guidance message number on voice mail auto attendant Service Codes for the System Administrator MLT SLT default not assigned 11 11 01 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Call Forward All Set the service code f...

Page 696: ...tion Text Message Setting Customize the text message setting used for registration and setup MLT default not assigned 11 11 15 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Enable Handsfree Incoming Intercom Calls Customize the enable handsfree incoming intercom calls used for registration and setup MLT default 721 11 11 16 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Force Ringing of Incoming Inte...

Page 697: ... Trunk Forwarding feature for a Department Group MLT SLT default 603 11 11 27 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Destination of Automatic Transfer Each Extension Group Customize the service code used to set the destination for the Automatic Trunk Forwarding feature for a Department Group MLT default 604 11 11 28 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Delayed Transfer for Every Exte...

Page 698: ...registration and setup ML SLT default 755 11 11 41 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Tandem Ringing Customize the tandem ringing used for registration and setup MLT SLT default not assigned 11 11 43 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Headset Mode Switching Customize the headset mode switching used for registration and setup MLT SLT default 688 11 11 44 Service Code Setup for S...

Page 699: ...Code MLT SLT default 792 11 11 55 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Call Forward Busy No Answer Destination No Split Set Cancel the call forward busy or no answer destination with no split MLT SLT default 793 11 11 57 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Set Do Not Call Table Customize the set do not call table used for registration and setup MLT SLT default not assigned 11 11 5...

Page 700: ...for Service Access Last Number Dial Assign a service code to use Last Number Dial MLT SLT default 5 11 12 13 Service Code Setup for Service Access Saved Number Dial Customize the service code used for dialing a saved number MLT SLT default 715 11 12 14 Service Code Setup for Service Access Trunk Group Access Customize the Service Codes used for service access MLT SLT default 704 11 12 15 Service C...

Page 701: ...hich are used for service access MLT SLT default 768 11 12 27 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Pickup Customize the Service Codes for call pickup which are used for service access MLT SLT default 11 12 28 Service Code Setup for Service Access Call Pickup for Another Group Customize the Service Codes for call pickup for another group which are used for service access MLT SLT default 769 1...

Page 702: ... Service Access Flash on Trunk lines Customize the Service Codes used for flash on trunk lines SLT default 3 11 12 43 Service Code Setup for Service Access Answer No Ring Line Universal Answer Customize the service code used to manually answer a Universal Night Answer MLT SLT default 0 11 12 44 Service Code Setup for Service Access Callback Test for SLT If required redefine the service code used f...

Page 703: ...Hold key and dial and the Conference Tandem happens MLT SLT default 8 11 12 58 Service Code Setup for Service Access Transfer Into Conference If required change the service code used to transfer a call into a Conference call MLT SLT default 624 11 12 59 Service Code Setup for Service Access Trunk Drop Operation for SLT Customize the trunk drop operation for SLT Service Codes which are used for ser...

Page 704: ...ice Code Setup for Hotel Cancel DND for Own Extension Customize the cancel DND for own extension used with the Hotel Motel feature MLT SLT default 628 11 14 03 Service Code Setup for Hotel Set DND for Other Extension Customize the set DND for other extension used with the Hotel Motel feature MLT SLT default 629 11 14 04 Service Code Setup for Hotel Cancel DND for Other Extension Customize the canc...

Page 705: ...es used with the Hotel Motel feature MLT SLT default 640 11 14 15 Service Code Setup for Hotel Room Status Change for Other Extension Customize the room status change for other extension Service Codes used with the Hotel Motel feature MLT SLT default 641 11 14 16 Service Code Setup for Hotel Room Status Output Customize the room status output Service Codes used with the Hotel Motel feature MLT def...

Page 706: ...trunk For example trunk 2 is in Ring Group 4 When the call is transferred using this service code the trunk rings all extensions programmed for Ring Group 4 or ring the External Paging Group for Ring Group 4 depending on how the system is programmed default not assigned 11 15 11 Service Code Setup Administrative for Special Access Ethernet Port Reset Customize the ethernet port reset Service Codes...

Page 707: ...r DND Call Forward Override default not assigned 11 16 07 Single Digit Service Code Setup Message Waiting Customize the message waiting Service Codes used when a busy or ring back signal is heard default 0 11 16 08 Single Digit Service Code Setup Voice Over Service code used for the Voice Over feature default 6 11 16 09 Single Digit Service Code Setup Access to Voice Mail Customize the access to v...

Page 708: ...n Analyze Table Type of Dials Assign the Type of Dial for the Extension Analyze Table from Program 11 20 01 Type of Dials 0 Not used 1 Service Code 2 Extension Number 5 Operator Access 6 F Route Access default not assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 ...

Page 709: ...n that sets an extension Callback or Trunk Queuing 20 04 03 20 31 03 CAR SIE Virtual Extension Delay Interval If CAR VE is set for Delayed Ringing Program 15 11 01 ring the covering extension after this time Station Timer Class is referred by the station assigned to CAR VE 21 01 02 20 31 04 Intercom Interdigits Time When placing Intercom calls users must dial each digit in this time Station Timer ...

Page 710: ...ack Time An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an extension for this time If not picked up the call goes back on Non exclusive Hold Station Timer Class is referred by held call 24 01 06 20 31 14 Park Hold Time Normal A call left parked longer than this time recalls the extension that initially parked it Trunk or Station Timer Class is referred by held call 24 02 03 20 31 15 Delayed Call Forwarding Time I...

Page 711: ...unk to trunk conversation call after the Long Conversation tone is heard Trunk Timer Class is referred 25 07 09 20 31 21 DISA Internal Paging Time This is the maximum length of an Internal Page placed by a DISA caller If the Page continues longer than this time the system terminates the DISA call Trunk Timer Class is referred 25 07 10 20 31 22 DISA External Paging Time This is the maximum length o...

Page 712: ...euing callback time A Trunk Queuing Callback rings an extension for this interval 0 64800 seconds default 15 20 01 09 System Options Callback Trunk Queuing Cancel Time The system cancels an extension Callback or Trunk Queueing request after this interval 0 64800 seconds default 64800 20 04 03 System Options for Virtual Extensions CAR SIE Virtual Extension Delay Interval CAR Keys SIE Keys Virtual E...

Page 713: ...Time Start Time Hotline Start A Ringdown extension automatically calls its programmed destination after this time 0 64800 seconds default 5 20 31 07 Timer Class Timer Assignment Ring No Answer Alarm Time If a trunk rings a multiline telephone longer than this time the system changes the ring cadence This indicates to the user that the call has been ringing too long 0 64800 seconds default 60 20 31...

Page 714: ...Call Forwarding Time Call Forward No Answer If activated at an extension Delayed Call Forwarding occurs after this time This also sets how long a Transferred call waits at an extension forwarded to Voice Mail before routing to the called extension mailbox 0 64800 seconds default 10 20 31 16 Timer Class Timer Assignment Transfer Recall Time An unanswered transferred call recalls after this time to ...

Page 715: ...callers that do not dial After this time the DID call routes according to Vacant Number Intercept programming 0 64800 seconds default 10 21 01 03 System Options for Outgoing Calls Trunk Interdigit Time External Program the time an extension user must wait before the Barge In feature can be used on a call this time expires before a call is put in a talk state This time also affects Voice Over 0 648...

Page 716: ...stem Options for Hold Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time Set the Hold Recall Time A trunk recalling from Hold rings an extension for this time If still unanswered the call changes to System Hold 0 64800 seconds default 30 24 01 06 System Options for Hold Park Hold Time Normal Set the Park Hold Time 0 64800 seconds A call that is parked longer than the programmed time recalls the extension where i...

Page 717: ...heard 0 64800 seconds default 3600 25 07 08 System Timers for VRS DISA Long Conversation Disconnect Time Determine the time the system waits before disconnecting a DISA caller or any trunk to trunk such as Tandem Trunking conversation call after the Long Conversation tone is heard 0 64800 seconds default 10 25 07 09 System Timers for VRS DISA DISA Internal Paging Time Set the maximum time for an I...

Page 718: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 684 Flexible Timeouts THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 719: ...ians can also use Forced Trunk Disconnect to release a trunk on which there is no conversation This can happen if a trunk does not properly disconnect when the outside party hangs up Conditions This feature only works on an analog trunk ISDN and IP trunks do not have the Forced Trunk Disconnect available Default Setting COS 15 Enabled COS 1 14 Disabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals R...

Page 720: ...tor Forced Trunk Disconnect Assign the Service Code MLT SLT default not assigned 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service COS to an extension There are 15 Classes of Service that can be assigned Assign eight entries one for each Night Service Mode Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Default Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20...

Page 721: ...unk You can now place a call on the free trunk 3 Press the line key for the trunk disconnected in Step 2 OR Dial the trunk access code 9 trunk number for the trunk disconnected in Step 2 Single Line Telephone 1 Dial trunk access code 9 trunk number You hear busy tone Trunk numbers are 001 200 2 Dial Service Code not set at default You hear confirmation beeps as the system disconnects the line 3 Ho...

Page 722: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 688 Forced Trunk Disconnect THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 723: ...ot be used for Door Box Page Relays Therefore it is recommended to first use relays 7 8 for General Purpose Relay function allowing relays 5 6 to be used for Door Box Page Relays With SV8100 CPU Version 7000 and higher all General Purpose Relays can now be programmed with a drive timer The drive timer allows the relay to return to the normally opened position after a timer expires not requiring a ...

Page 724: ...cannot be activated by DISA Default Setting Disabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals using access code Multiline Terminal using line key Required Component s PGD 2 U10 ADP CD CP00 US Related Features Analog Communications Interface ACI Door Box Paging External ...

Page 725: ...tion Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 03 01 1 ETU Setup DLCA PKG Setup Terminal Type B1 Set up and confirm the Basic Configuration data for terminal type B1 When using a PGD U10 for general purpose relay functionality the digital port must be set to one of the valid PGD settings 0 Not Set 1 Multiline Terminal 2 SLT Adapter 3 Bluetooth Cordless Handset 6 PGD Paging 7 PGD Tone Ringer 8 PGD Door...

Page 726: ...0 64800 0 No drive timer 1 0 1 seconds 2 0 2 seconds 3 0 3 seconds 64800 6480 seconds default 0 10 21 05 CD CP00 US Hardware Setup General Purpose Relay Switch on CD CP00 US Used to enable disable the General Purpose Relay that is built into the CD CP00 US 0 Off 1 Relay 1 on CPU 2 Relay 2 on CPU default 0 10 21 06 CD CP00 US Hardware Setup Drive Timer Setup on CD CP00 US With Version 7000 or highe...

Page 727: ...e Line Telephone 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 780 3 Dial Relay Number 0 8 0 is for the relay on the CD CP00 US 1 8 are relays on the PGD 2 U10 ADP To Cancel a Relay Multiline Terminal 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 780 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a function key for General Purpose Relay Code 51 Add Relay number 0 8 Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Functio...

Page 728: ...ays on the PGD 2 U10 ADP OR 1 Press the Line Key assigned as a General Purpose Relay the key is not lit OR 1 Wait for the drive timer to expire Single Line Telephone 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 780 3 Dial Relay Number 0 8 0 is for the relay on the CD CP00 US 1 8 are relays on the PGD 2 U10 ADP OR 1 Wait for the drive timer to expire ...

Page 729: ...nging the user s own pickup group A call ringing another pickup group when the user knows the group number A call ringing another pickup group when the user does not know the group number There are 64 Call Pickup Groups available Conditions A Call Pickup Group cannot have an associated name Group Call Pickup cannot be used to answer calls recalling from Hold or Park Group Call Pickup cannot be use...

Page 730: ...g Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 12 25 Service Code Setup for Service Access...

Page 731: ...t 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 10 01 Class of Service Options Answer Service Group Call Pickup Within Group Enable Disable an extension user ability to pick up calls ringing their pickup group Service Code 756 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 10 02 Class of Service Options Answer Service Group Call Pickup Another Group Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup for calls ringing outs...

Page 732: ...oup number 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker 2 At multiline terminal only press the Group Call Pickup key Program 15 07 or SC 751 25 OR Dial 769 To answer a call ringing a telephone in another Pickup Group when you know the group number 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker 2 At multiline terminal only press the Group Call Pickup key Program 15 07 or SC 751 26 group OR Dial 768 and the group...

Page 733: ...r s co workers listen to the conversation Group Listen turns off the multiline terminal handsfree microphone so the caller does not pick the co worker s voices during a Group Listen Conditions An extension in the headset mode cannot use Group Listen Group Listen is not available to single line telephones Default Setting Disabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Compon...

Page 734: ...ce or answer call using the handset 2 Press Speaker twice but do not hang up Speaker flashes slowly You can talk to the caller through your handset Your co workers hear your caller s voice over your telephone speaker after pressing Speaker twice Press Speaker a third time to turn off Group Listening To talk Handsfree after initiating Group Listen 1 Hang up the handset Program Number Program Name D...

Page 735: ...e 13 0 Group Listen 2 701 To cancel Group Listen without hanging up your call 1 Do not hang up 2 Press the flashing Speaker You can talk to the caller over the handset Your co workers can no longer hear the caller s voice ...

Page 736: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 702 Group Listen THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 737: ...th The station user can still hear the outside or intercom voice Conditions The Mic key or Handset Transmission Cut Off key flashes when active Two service set tones are heard when Handset Mute is activated or deactivated The called party must have answered using handset or speakerphone for the mute feature to work Default Setting None System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required...

Page 738: ...1 2 3 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a function key for Handset Transmission Cut Off code 40 Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 752 by default 80 01 01 Service Tone Setup Repeat Count Customize the system basic tones and system service tones The system must be reset for the changes to take effect Refer to Table 2 33 Servic...

Page 739: ...Tone 0 Basic 2 0 11 5 5 20 6dB 20 6dB 7 DND Busy Tone 0 Basic 2 0 1 2 2 32 0dB 32 0dB 8 B Busy Tone 0 Basic 2 0 11 5 5 20 6dB 20 6dB 9 Internal Reorder Tone 0 Basic 2 11 0 3 2 20 6dB 20 6dB 10 Internal Interrupt Tone 0 Basic 2 0 1 1 1 32 0dB 32 0dB 11 Internal Confirmation Tone 3 Basic 2 0 6 5 1 32 0dB 32 0dB 12 Internal Hold Tone 0 Basic 0 0 0 32 0dB 13 External Hold Tone 0 Basic 0 0 0 32 0dB 14 ...

Page 740: ... 7 7 5 5 5 0 1 1 2 2 3 2 38 3dB 26 3dB 38 3dB 26 3dB 14 9dB 32 0dB 24 Door Box Chime 6 3 Basic 6 8 8 6 6 6 0 1 1 2 2 3 2 38 3dB 26 3dB 38 3dB 26 3dB 14 9dB 32 0dB 25 Service Set Tone 3 Basic 2 0 9 1 1 32 0dB 32 0dB 26 Service Clear Tone 3 Basic 2 0 9 1 1 32 0dB 32 0dB 27 Talkback Tone 2 Basic 2 0 6 1 1 32 0dB 32 0dB 28 Speaker Monitor Tone This tone is what the originator hears when placing a hand...

Page 741: ...ecial Audible Ring Busy Tone 0 Basic 6 0 11 0 11 10 0 5 5 5 5 10 20 32 0dB 32 0dB 32 0dB 32 0dB 32 0dB 32 0dB 40 Internal Call Waiting Tone 1 Basic 1 12 2 32 0dB 41 Intrusion Tone 1 Basic 1 12 5 32 0dB 42 Conference Tone 0 Basic 0 0 0 32 0dB 43 Intrusion Tone 2 0 Basic 1 2 8 32 0dB 44 External Dial Tone 0 Basic 1 9 1 26 3dB 45 External Ring Back Tone 0 Basic 2 10 0 10 30 32 0dB 32 0dB 46 DID Error...

Page 742: ... 32 0dB 32 0dB 32 0dB 32 0dB 58 Opening Chime Tone 1 Basic 8 2 2 14 14 15 15 16 16 2 2 2 2 2 2 6 4 32 0dB 26 3dB 32 0dB 26 3dB 32 0dB 26 3dB 32 0dB 26 3dB 59 Ending Chime Tone 1 Basic 8 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 2 2 2 2 2 2 6 4 32 0dB 26 3dB 32 0dB 26 3dB 32 0dB 26 3dB 32 0dB 26 3dB 60 Splash Tone 1 Mute 1 Basic 2 0 6 1 1 8 12dB 8 12dB 61 Splash Tone 2 Mute 2 Basic 2 0 6 1 1 8 12dB 8 12dB 62 Splash ...

Page 743: ...Press Feature dial 1 OR 3 Press the Handset Transmission Cut Off key Program15 07 01 Key 40 or SC 751 Key Code 40 Table 2 34 Service Tone Setup Program 80 01 02 Item No Item Repeat Count 02 Basic Tone Number 1 33 0 No Tone 33 Default Time Slot 03 Duration Count 1 255 100 25500ms 04 Gain Level dB 1 63 15 5 15 5 ...

Page 744: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 710 Handset Mute THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 745: ...key or virtual extension key without lifting the handset or press Speaker An extension can have Automatic Handsfree for outgoing calls or for both outgoing calls and incoming calls Monitor User can place a call without lifting the handset but must lift the handset to speak Conditions Handsfree and Monitor are not available for single line telephones Prime Line Selection affects how incoming and ou...

Page 746: ... used These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro wizards for feature programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description C...

Page 747: ...sfree 0 Disable 1 Enable default 1 20 02 12 System Options for Multiline Telephones Forced Intercom Ring ICM Call Type Enable Disable Forced Intercom Ringing If enabled incoming Intercom calls normally ring If disabled Intercom calls voice announce 0 Disable Voice 1 Enable Signal default 0 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign Class of Service 1 15 for extensions Day Night Mode 1 8 Class...

Page 748: ... and Monitor To turn on off Monitor 1 Press MIC Feature 1 or the Microphone Function Key Program 15 07 or SC 751 02 to turn on or off the Microphone Monitor is off when MIC LED is lit the Microphone Function Key is lit or the handset is lifted ...

Page 749: ...p the handset Conditions Handsfree Answerback does not require the Speaker phone to be enabled Program 15 02 16 A multiline terminal user can process calls using the speaker and microphone in the telephone instead of the handset With Microphone Cutoff enabled Handsfree Answerback callers to an extension hear a single beep instead of two Incoming Intercom calls always ring single line telephones Th...

Page 750: ...ange the service code used for setting an extension to voice announce for incoming ICM calls MLT default 721 11 11 16 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Force Ringing of Incoming Intercom Calls If required change the service code used for setting an extension to forced ringing for incoming ICM calls MLT default 723 11 12 06 Service Code Setup for Service Access Switching of Voice Call an...

Page 751: ...ght Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Default Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension ports Class 1 20 08 10 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Signal Voice Call Enable Disable an extension user ability to toggle between Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls dial 1 or Service Code 712 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 09 05 C...

Page 752: ...rced Intercom Ringing To change the way your Intercom call signals the extension you are calling 1 Dial 1 If ringing your call voice announces If voice announced your call starts to ring the destination This option is also available at single line telephones ...

Page 753: ...t available for the Electra Professional telephones An extension with a headset can receive voice announced Intercom calls and respond handsfree when idle A Headset Function key is required to answer or place a call in headset mode Headset Ring and Headset Off Hook Ring Programs 15 02 41 and 15 02 42 are not supported for the legacy DTR DTH style terminals The Electronic Headset Switch EHS is only...

Page 754: ...used These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro wizards for feature programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Co...

Page 755: ... Headset Operation code 05 Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 752 by default 20 02 05 System Options for Multiline Telephones Headset Busy Mode Set the conditions under which a headset extension is busy to incoming callers The Headset extension is busy to incoming callers when only one extension appearance is busy 0 OR Headset extensi...

Page 756: ...he headset plugged in The headset only activates when the Headset key is pressed Press the Headset key to answer a ringing call OR Press the Headset key and then a line key or press Speaker then 9 to make an outgoing call OR Press the Headset key to get intercom dial tone OR If on a call press the Headset key to hang up 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Automatic Off Hook Sig...

Page 757: ...r the trunk Exclusive hold is important if a user does not want a co worker picking up their call on Hold Group Hold If a user places a call on Group Hold another user in the Department Group can dial a code to pick up the call This lets members of a department easily pick up each other s calls Intercom Hold A user can place an Intercom call on Hold The Intercom call on Hold does not indicate at a...

Page 758: ... A puts station B on hold and then calls station C station C cannot transfer the call For a station to retrieve a held ICM call the station must have an ICM key assigned in Program 15 07 00 The Exclusive Hold Recall Timer is used when an internal call from a Single Line Telephone or 3rd Party SIP telephone is placed on hold On ACD extensions Hold Recall to Operator is not supported Default Setting...

Page 759: ...gram Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 12 30 Service Code Setup for Service Access Specified Trunk Answer If required redefine the service code used to answer a specific trunk which is either ringing or on hold MLT SLT default 672 11 12 33 Service Code Setup for Service Access Group Hold If required redefine the service code used to answer a specific trunk which...

Page 760: ...ing access and access when trunk is on Hold 15 02 06 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Hold Key Operating Mode Set the function of the Multiline Hold key 0 Normal Common 1 Exclusive Hold default 0 15 02 07 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Automatic Hold for CO Lines When talking on a CO call and another line key is pressed the original trunk is placed on Hold or disconnected 0 Hold 1 Discon...

Page 761: ...Transfer Service Group Hold Initiate Turn Off or On an extension user ability to initiate Group Hold Service Code 732 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 10 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Group Hold Answer Turn Off or On an extension user ability to pick up a call placed on Group Hold Service Code 762 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 13 Class of Service Options Hold Tran...

Page 762: ...e Hold Recall Time A call on Exclusive Hold recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after this time 0 64800 seconds default 90 24 01 04 System Options for Hold Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time Set the Hold Recall Time A trunk recalling from Hold rings an extension for this time If still unanswered the call changes to System Hold 0 64800 seconds default 30 24 01 05 System Options for Hold F...

Page 763: ...old To place a call on Hold so anyone in your Department Group can pick it up 1 Press Hold 2 Dial 732 3 Press Speaker to hang up Single Line Telephone 1 Hookflash 2 Dial 732 3 Hang up To pick up a call on Group Hold 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 762 Single Line Telephone 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 762 Intercom Hold To place an Intercom call on Intercom Hold 1 Press Hold 2 Press Speaker to hang up ...

Page 764: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 730 Hold To pick up an Intercom call on Intercom Hold 1 Press Speaker 2 Press flashing ICM 00 or Conf ...

Page 765: ...Key Pad enabled a trunk is seized when dialing the first digit of the called party number When both Hot Key Pad and Dialing Number Preview are turned on Hot Key Pad has priority and Dialing Number Preview does not work When both Hot Key Pad and Hotline are turned on Hot Key Pad has priority and Hotline does not work When placing an outgoing call with the Hot Key Pad feature the user must dial the ...

Page 766: ...l 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Cl...

Page 767: ...ey Pad 1 The multiline terminal is idle There is no need to press Speaker 2 Dial the trunk access code 9 by default and the external destination number you want to call 20 08 20 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Hot Key Pad Turn Off or On an extension user ability to make a call by dialing the number without going off hook 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 Program Number Program Name ...

Page 768: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 734 Hot Key Pad THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 769: ...he application blade for PMS integration to SV8100 This new blade provides the following features Programming is supported using HTML interface PVA PMS supports NEAX 90K NEAX 60K KTSi and KTSi w ENQ protocols The PVA PMS IP address is assigned in system programming similar to other blades and the CPU IP address is populated automatically The Mask feature allows the masking of the following PMS mes...

Page 770: ...m their room leave them a Message Waiting When the guest returns they see the lamp on their phone flashing and can automatically call you back You can use Message Waiting when you have parcels for a guest dropped off at your front desk Do not keep redialing the guest if they are not in just send them a Message Waiting Your DSS Console can show all the rooms that have messages waiting PMS Integrati...

Page 771: ...protocol The PMS U10 Configurator software Version 1 0 1 0 or higher is required for Microsoft Vista 32 bit support To check the version number while the application is running press ALT V Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 Hotel Motel Services Guide for complete programming information PMS U10 Configurator Software The PMS Configurator is used to setup the PMS U10 for LAN access and communication betwe...

Page 772: ...till use your console for business mode features Do Not Disturb A guest can activate DND anytime they need privacy for example if they need to work uninterrupted Do Not Disturb DND blocks the room telephone incoming calls and Paging announcements This can be set from the room phone or attendant phone Flexible Numbering Plan To simplify dialing guests and services in your facility customize your sy...

Page 773: ... on any Windows 7 operating system Function codes 92 and 93 can be assigned only to a DSS Console that is in Hotel Mode These features do not work when programmed on multiline telephone line keys or on a DSS Console in Business mode When multiple DSS Consoles are used for Hotel Motel function keys must be assigned to each DSS console for Wake Up Call Indication and Room Status Indication The Messa...

Page 774: ...et DND for Other Extension 11 14 04 630 Cancel DND for Other Extension 11 14 05 631 Set Wake Up Call for Own Extension 11 14 06 632 Cancel Wake Up Call for Own Extension 11 14 07 633 Set Wake Up Call for Other Extension 11 14 08 634 Cancel Wake Up Call for Other Extension 11 14 09 635 Set Room to Room Call Restriction 11 14 10 636 Cancel Room to Room Call Restriction Hotel 11 14 11 637 Change Toll...

Page 775: ...RTB Blue S S S N S N S N S CD ETIA Blue S S S N S N S N S CD PVAA Blue S S S N S N S N S IP3WW RTU B1 White N S N S N S S S S IP3WW GSWU B1 White N S N S N S S S S LU PVA CONF PORT8 LIC White N S N S N S S S S S Supported N S Not Supported Table 2 36 Valid Room Status Changes when Program 42 01 06 is set to 1 Enabled Change Status Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Code 4 Code 5 Code 6 Code 7 Code 8 Code 9 Code...

Page 776: ...is only required when using the PVA PMS for PMS integration Table 2 37 Valid Room Status Changes when Program 42 01 06 is set to 0 Disabled Change Status Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Code 4 Code 5 Code 6 Code 7 Code 8 Code 9 Code 0 Code Code Original Status Code 1 N Y N N Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y Code 2 Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Code 3 Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Code 4 Y Y N N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Code 5 Y Y Y Y N Y Y Y Y Y...

Page 777: ...10 the following licenses affect this feature SV8100 Hotel Motel License LK SYS HM LIC Feature Code 0007 This license is required to enable the Hotel feature in the SV8100 UM8000 Hotel Motel license LKS UMS Hotel PMS LIC Feature Code 1407 This license is only required when using the UM8000 Mail hotel features such as PMS integration and Hotel Guest room mailboxes Related Features Code Restriction ...

Page 778: ... 0 65535 when communicating to the SMDR type 5 0 65535 default External Device 1 CTI Server 0 External Device 2 ACD MIS 4000 External Device 5 SMDR Output 0 External Device 6 DIM Output 0 External Device 11 O M Server 8010 External Device 12 Traffic Report Output 0 External Device 13 Room Data Output for Hotel Service 0 11 10 16 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Leaving Message Waiting R...

Page 779: ... 14 08 Service Code Setup for Hotel Cancel Wake Up Call for Other Extension Customize the cancel wake up call for other extension used with the Hotel Motel feature CD CP00 US must be licensed for Hotel Motel MLT SLT default 634 11 14 09 Service Code Setup for Hotel Set Room to Room Call Restriction Customize the set room to room call extension used with the Hotel Motel feature CD CP00 US must be l...

Page 780: ... feature CD CP00 US must be licensed for Hotel Motel MLT SLT default 675 11 14 18 Service Code Setup for Hotel Set Hotel PMS Code Restriction Customize the set hotel PMS code restriction Service Codes used with the Hotel Motel feature CD CP00 US must be licensed for Hotel Motel MLT default 666 15 03 01 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup SLT Signaling Type Determine the dialing type the connect...

Page 781: ... Operator Extension Operator s Extension Number Define the extension numbers used by operators Up to eight digits default 101 20 35 01 Extension s Operator Setting Assign an extension to an operator group 0 15 default 0 30 01 01 DSS Console Operating Mode Set the mode of the system DSS Consoles This option applies to all system DSS Consoles 0 Business Mode 1 Hotel Mode 2 ACD Monitor Mode 3 Busines...

Page 782: ... Hotel Mode Assign the setup message mode for wake up call hotel mode options for Hotel Motel Service 0 Fixed Message 1 VRS Message 2 Time Information and VRS default 0 42 01 05 System Options for Hotel Motel Wake Up Call Message Assignment Assign the wake up call message assignment options for Hotel Motel Service 0 100 0 No Setting default 0 42 01 06 System Options for Hotel Motel Flexible Room S...

Page 783: ...red 3 Maid in Room 4 Inspection Required 5 Maintenance Request 6 Out of Order 7 Reserve 1 8 Reserve 2 9 Reserve 3 0 Room Clean Vacant Reserve 5 Reserve 6 42 03 01 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel Check In Operation Set the Hotel Motel check in operation COS options 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 42 03 02 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel Check Out Operation Set the Hotel Motel check out ...

Page 784: ...ervice Options Hotel Motel Wake Up Call Setting for Own Extension Set the Hotel Motel wake up call setting for own extension COS options 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 42 03 11 Class of Service Options Hotel Motel Change Room Status for Own Extension Set the Hotel Motel change room status for own extension COS options 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 42 03 12 Class of Service Options Hotel Mot...

Page 785: ...ng the PMS feature 0 65535 default 5129 42 06 02 PMS Service Setting 3 00 AM Auto Room Scan Set maid required status for all checked in rooms at 3 00 AM 0 Off 1 On default 0 42 06 03 PMS Service Setting CheckIn Message Type Set the check in message type when using the PMS feature 0 Off 1 On default 0 42 06 04 PMS Service Setting CheckOut Auto Status Change Set the checkout auto status change when ...

Page 786: ...6 default 4 42 07 01 PMS Restriction Level Conversion Table Change the default Toll Restriction class on check in for a room Program 42 02 02 1 15 Default Level 0 10 Level 1 11 Level 2 12 Level 3 13 42 09 01 Flexible Setup for Room Status When Program 42 01 06 is enabled dial room status codes can be defined in this program Note the code definitions only apply to the system itself when sending roo...

Page 787: ...annot use Hotline to pick up a call ringing their partner s extension If a station is an ACD agent the Hotline key blinks to indicate the ACD agent s status Hotline keys can be assigned to the DSS consoles Hotline does not override Do Not Disturb Hotline always follows the Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing mode set at the called extension The Hotline caller can override the setting if d...

Page 788: ...ult Setting Disabled Related Features Automatic Call Distribution ACD Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns Direct Station Selection DSS Console Do Not Disturb Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing Off Hook Signaling Programmable Function Keys Ringdown Extension Internal External ...

Page 789: ...Appearance Function Code Service Code 752 by default 15 02 22 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Multiple Incoming From Intercom and Trunk When this option is Disabled incoming calls to an extension indicate on any Hotline key for that extension as solid busy When this option is Enabled lighting is determined by the setting of Program 22 01 01 Incoming Call Priority If set to trunk 1 the Hotline...

Page 790: ... COS 1 15 Refer to Table 2 38 Extension Busy Setup on page 2 758 21 01 09 System Options for Outgoing Calls Ringdown Extension Timer Hotline Start A Ringdown extension automatically calls its programmed destination after this time 0 64800 default 5 21 11 01 Extension Ringdown Hotline Assignment Define the Hotline destination number for each extension number maximum 24 digits 0 Pause Hook Flash Cod...

Page 791: ...tel DSS Define the LED patterns for hotel status code 4 on the DSS consoles 0 7 default 3 RW 30 05 13 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 5 Hotel DSS Define the LED patterns for hotel status code 5 on the DSS consoles 0 7 default 5 IL 30 05 14 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 6 Hotel DSS Define the LED patterns for hotel status code 6 on the DSS consoles 0 7 default 3 RW 30 05 15 DSS ...

Page 792: ...l from your Hotline partner 1 If you hear two beeps speak toward the telephone OR If your telephone rings lift the handset 30 05 20 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code Hotel DSS Define the LED patterns for hotel status code on the DSS consoles 0 7 default 5 IL 30 05 21 DSS Console Lamp Table VM Message Indication Define the LED patterns for VM message indication on the DSS consoles 0 7 defaul...

Page 793: ...all is completed or when a station is off hook and digits are not dialed in a programmed time Conditions Howler tone is generated 30 seconds after a call is disconnected and the telephone is left off hook or the telephone is left off hook without dialing Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features None ...

Page 794: ...l 1 2 3 20 18 02 Service Tone Timers Busy Tone Timer After getting Intercom dial tone a telephone user has this time to dial the first digit of the Intercom call 0 64800 seconds default 15 80 01 01 Service Tone Setup Repeat Count Customize the system basic tones and system service tones The system must be reset for the changes to take affect 0 255 0 until On Hook Refer to Table 2 33 Service Tone S...

Page 795: ...al News RSS News Weather Photo RSS Photo Calendar Banner Sub Banner text Screen Saver Icon Position Mascot Greeting Widget Conditions Speed Dial only supports a single number The Photo displayed in the News RSS News feed is only supported on the DT750 and ITL 12CG terminals The DT730 ITL 12DG and ITL 8LDE do not support the IAA Calendar Sub Banner text can only be displayed in the Retro mode The S...

Page 796: ... to prevent the IAA configuration from being erased from the terminal NEC recommends that configuration assignment through the URL setting be set and stored under the Home URL terminal XML configuration General maintenance on the IAA server may be performed as needed and especially after normal business hours 6PM to 5AM USA Central Time IAA is temporally unavailable during maintenance The response...

Page 797: ...L 320C with firmware 5 0 4 0 or higher installed Weather All X X X X X Photo All X X X X X RSS Photo All X N A X N A N A Calendar All X N A X N A N A Banner All X X X X X Screen Saver All X X X X X Icon Position Retro X X X X X UCE UC XML All X X X X X Mascot Greeting All X N A X N A N A Modern Design Modern X N A X N A N A Splash Screen All X N A X N A N A Instruction All X X X X X Widget All X N...

Page 798: ...uired Component s IP Phone Manager 6 1 0 or higher must be installed FTP or TFTP server application must be installed Related Features SV8100 SV8300 Terminals Programming None Operation Refer to the Instant Access Application User Guide for detailed feature information ...

Page 799: ...y the extension can be displayed The details of the trunk busy status the extension using the line can be displayed after trying to access the trunk This feature provides a user information which can determine whether they should use Barge In for the extension or trunk This information automatically displays for a multiline terminal once programmed Conditions Preventing ICM calls does not affect d...

Page 800: ...d extension places an Intercom call The incoming ringtone from a pre assigned extension set in Program 15 01 13 is limited to calls to the actual extension not the Virtual Extension Incoming calls to the VE follows Program 15 08 1 settings Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing Inte...

Page 801: ...vice code used at an extension to change the displayed language on a multiline terminal display MLT default 678 15 01 13 Basic Extension Data Setup Special Ringtone Choice Use to select the special incoming ring tone for the extension When called from this Program on the set extension the called extension rings with the selected ring tone 0 Incoming Extension Ringtone 1 Tone Pattern 1 2 Tone Patte...

Page 802: ...Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Busy Status Display Called Party Status Turn Off or On an extension user ability to display the detailed state of the called party 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 17 01 Operator Extension Operator s Extension Number Define the extension numbers used by operators Up to eight digits default 101 20 18 01 Service Tone Timers Extension Dial Tone Time ...

Page 803: ... Class 1 20 08 10 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Signal Voice Call Turn Off or On an extension ability to force Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 09 05 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Signal Voice Call Turn Off or On an extension user ability to enable Handsfree Answerback or Forced Interc...

Page 804: ... Low 1100 660 520 1400 760 660 16Hz Modulation 16Hz Modulation 16Hz Modulation Pattern 2 Trunk Incoming High Mid Low 1100 660 520 1400 760 660 8Hz Modulation 8Hz Modulation 8Hz Modulation Pattern 3 Trunk Incoming High Mid Low 2000 1400 1100 760 660 540 16Hz Modulation 16Hz Modulation 16Hz Modulation Pattern 4 Trunk Incoming High Mid Low 2000 1400 1100 760 660 540 8Hz Modulation 8Hz Modulation 8Hz ...

Page 805: ...ck the extension data multiline terminal only 1 Press the Help key 2 Dial the extension number You display shows your telephone extension number port number and extension Department Group You can also check any other extension numbers information by pressing Help the extension number 3 Press Exit to return the normal time date display Pattern 8 Trunk Incoming High Mid Low 1400 760 660 540 540 540 ...

Page 806: ...ERGE SV8100 2 772 Intercom To change how Intercom calls ring the extension 1 Press Speaker or lift the handset 2 Dial 723 to have calls ring your extension OR 3 Dial 721 to have calls voice announce to your extension ...

Page 807: ...erminal Basic licenses are provided If a system with Version 3000 3 01 or lower is upgraded to Version 3100 Version 8000 8 0 software the system gains four IP Terminal licenses as soon as it is upgraded With Version 5 0 0 0 firmware the following features are supported Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP Standard used to transmit and receive information about neighboring network devices using Layer...

Page 808: ...000 8 01 or higher software four IP Terminal Advanced 5111 licenses are provided If a system with Version 3000 3 01 or lower is upgraded to Version 8000 8 01 or higher software the system gains four IP Terminal Advanced 5111 licenses as soon as it is upgraded With Version 9000 or higher software the NAPT feature is enhanced Previously when the DT700 connected to the system via NAPT the intermediat...

Page 809: ...n module for the IP DT700 and digital DT300 multiline telephones The PSA L UNIT allows connection to an analog trunk if the power or system connection were to fail or the IP telephone loses connection to the UNIVERGE SV8100 system No programming is required on the UNIVERGE SV8100 to support this adapter Connecting to an IP Telephone The Power Save Adapter connects to an analog PSTN Public Switched...

Page 810: ...ol LLDP or IEEE 802 1AB is a vendor neutral Data link layer protocol used by network devices for advertising their identity capabilities and interconnections on the IEEE 802 LAN network LLDP performs functions similar to several proprietary protocols such as Cisco Discovery Protocol Extreme Discovery protocol Nortel Discovery Protocol also known as SONMP and Microsoft s Link Layer Topology Discove...

Page 811: ...er is a programmable feature that may be enabled or disabled Program 10 26 04 System Tones and Ring Tones IP telephones do not use Program 80 01 Service Tone Setup entries The tones are generated locally by the IP telephone When a Door Box chime rings an IP telephone the system activates the chimes using a ring command Because of this if the volume is adjusted while the door chime is sounding the ...

Page 812: ...ser to login at one phone and later login at another phone and keep the same extension number This is useful in the case where an office user has an IP multiline terminal at work and at home or a Softphone they use on the road They log in at work to use the office terminal and when they get home or are on the road they login the home terminal or Softphone When this happens the office terminal is l...

Page 813: ...external speaker multicast is not used and the gateway is not required The system sees terminal types 1 Economy 2 Value 3 Desi Less 4 Sophisticated and 5 Softphone as the same terminal type When using Multiple Logon the same Personal ID index can be assigned to an ITL Softphone a CTI Desktop and an MH240 terminal type Two ports of the same terminal type Program 15 05 26 cannot be assigned to the s...

Page 814: ...an be downloaded at the same time Restrictions When using DT700 IP phones assigning the following features to a large number of phones 30 or more is not recommended The same Trunk Line assignment squared key system The same Virtual Extension assignment Paging key with LED ON assignment The same location Park key The same location CAP key The same BLF key assignment Day Night Mode Change key assign...

Page 815: ... SV8100 the ability to traverse its own subnet With NAPT the network administrator can place the CD CP00 US and the IPLA IPLB VoIPDB in the customers LAN while still making it accessible to users outside the local LAN The NAPT Feature also allows the IP terminals to be placed in a local LAN in a remote network and be able to communicate back to the SV8100 With Version 3000 Version 5000 software Po...

Page 816: ...s enabled IP phone service WILL be interrupted With Version 6000 or higher software installed the new NAPT feature is only effective when Program15 05 45 is set 1 On Refer to Figure 2 20 Example NAT Traversal or an examples of the NAT Traversal network Table 2 41 Example Required System Settings and Table 2 42 Example Required IP Terminal Settings on page 2 783 provide examples of required system ...

Page 817: ...RTP send port choice Version 6000 or higher required 7 84 26 01 172 16 0 20 172 16 0 20 VOIP DSP IP Address Table 2 42 Example Required IP Terminal Settings Index Name Default Input Data 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 172 17 0 100 2 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 172 17 0 254 3 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 255 255 0 0 4 NAT Traversal Mode 1 Disable 2 Dynamic 5 WAN Mate IP Address 0 0 0 0 10 1 1 1 6 WAN SIP Mate Port 5060 5...

Page 818: ... ALG or similar SIP application function of all routers in the network must be disabled The SV8100 Desktop Application does not support Network Address Translation NAPT If a user would like to connect the Desktop Application through an Internet Connection the use of a VPN is required If excessive packet loss occurs on the network IP phones will play a warning tone during conversations To disable t...

Page 819: ... Board installed LK SYS V3000 Enhancements LIC or higher US LK SYS NAPT LIC Other Related Features None Table 2 44 NAPT Terminals Minimum Timer Settings Program Number Number of DT700 Terminals Using Programs 15 05 47 and 15 05 48 1 144 terminals 145 192 terminals 193 464 terminals 465 512 terminals 15 05 47 minimum setting 60 seconds 90 seconds 180 seconds 180 seconds 15 05 48 minimum setting 60 ...

Page 820: ...r Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 12 01 CD CP00 US Network Setup IP Address Assign the IP Address for the CPU NIC card When an IPLA IPLB card is installed in the system it is recommended to set this Program to 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 default 172 16 0 10 10 12 03 CD CP00 US Network Setup Default Gateway Assig...

Page 821: ...254 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 128 0 255 255 192 0 255 255 224 0 255 255 240 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 default 255 255 0 0 10 26 04 IP System Operation Setup DT700 Peer to Peer Mode Enable Disable the Peer to Peer feature for SIP IP stations 0...

Page 822: ... not come on line 0 Normal 1 Auto 2 Manual default 0 15 05 15 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup CODEC Type Set the registered IP Phone Codec type Reference Program 84 24 DT700 Codec Basic Information 1 Type 1 2 Type 2 3 Type 3 4 Type 4 5 Type 5 default 1 15 05 26 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup DT700 Terminal Type Set the DT700 series terminal type 0 Not Set 1 ITL E 1D IP E 1 2 ITL D 1...

Page 823: ...p to 16 characters default not assigned 84 22 03 DT700 Multiline Logon Information Setup User ID Omission Enable Disable User ID Omission Used when the registration mode 10 46 01 is set to manual When the phone prompts for a login the previous user ID appears so the user only has to enter the password 0 Off 1 On default 0 84 22 04 DT700 Multiline Logon Information Setup Log Off When the registrati...

Page 824: ...P port number to be used for each DSP on the IPLA IPLB Only even numbered ports are supported 0 65534 Defaults VoIP GW1 10020 VoIP GW2 10052 VoIP GW3 10084 VoIP GW4 10116 VoIP GW5 10148 VoIP GW6 10180 VoIP GW7 10212 VoIP GW8 10244 Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 12 01 CD CP00 US Network Setup IP Address Assign the IP Address for the CPU NIC card When a...

Page 825: ...0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 default 172 16 0 10 10 12 10 CD CP00 US Network Setup Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask of the IPLA IPLB 128 0 0 0 192 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 240 0 0 0 248 0 0 0 252 0 0 0 254 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 255 128 0 0 255 192 0 0 255 224 0 0 255 240 0 0 255 248 0 0 255 252 0 0 255 254 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 128 0 255 255 192 0 255 255 224 0 255...

Page 826: ...NAT Mode Turns On Off the DT700 NAT mode of the system 0 Off 1 On default 0 10 58 01 Network Address Network Address This program sets the IP or Network address for phones that are not to be routed through the NAPT translations For example if a system had multiple NAPT phones and another site with multiple IP phones connected via a VPN connection you would not want the phones connected over the VP...

Page 827: ... 254 255 255 255 255 default 255 255 0 0 15 05 45 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup NAT Plug and Play This program is valid when Program 10 46 14 is On NAT feature activated Select sending RTP port number to remote Router use from negotiation result 0 or received RTP packet 1 SV8100 uses this program to decide a destination port of RTP transmitting packets from IPLB to a remote IP terminal If...

Page 828: ...uired 0 Disable 60 65535 sec default 180 84 26 01 IPL Basic Setup IP Address Assign the IP address for each DSP on the IPLA IPLB xxx xxx xxx xxx Defaults Slot 1 172 16 0 20 Slot 4 172 16 0 44 VoIP GW 1 8 172 16 0 20 172 16 0 27 84 26 02 IPL Basic Setup RTP Port Number Assign the RTP port number to be used for each DSP on the IPLA IPLB Only even numbered ports are supported 0 65534 Defaults VoIP GW...

Page 829: ... programming define the programming options as required for the system features Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 Programming Manual and the UNIVERGE SV8100 Networking Manual for programming details Operation Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 Networking Manual for detailed feature information ...

Page 830: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 796 IP Multiline Station SIP THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 831: ... has been cleared specifically for voice applications thus avoiding any interference problems and delivering crystal clear and secure voice conversations The ML440 provides numerous features and conveniences for optimal comfort Its illuminated graphic color LCD display enables use in poorly lit environments while its internal loudspeaker provides Handsfree operation with excellent sound quality Po...

Page 832: ...r the spare pairs The switch can be used with other devices than the IP telephones and detects whether or not power is needed Using a PoE switch makes it easier to protect the IP telephones from loss of power connection of the PoE switch to an UPS Updating the AP20 and ML440 System Firmware The firmware on base stations and handsets is updated remotely using the HTTP configuration interface to dow...

Page 833: ...s Analog Communications Interface ACI N A Ancillary Device Connection N A Answer Hold No Answer Key N A Applications N A Attendant Call Queuing No Automatic Call Distribution ACD Yes Automatic Release N A Automatic Route Selection Yes Background Music No Barge In Yes Can monitor but cannot use the microphone toggle feature The handset mute button is the only way to mute audio from handset during m...

Page 834: ...oring Yes Can monitor but cannot use the microphone toggle feature The handset mute button is the only way to mute audio from handset during monitoring Call Queuing Yes Call Redirect No Call Transfer Yes Supervised and Unsupervised Call Waiting Camp On Yes Callback Yes Caller ID Yes Caller ID Return Yes Central Office Calls Answering Yes Central Office Calls Placing Yes Class of Service Yes Clock ...

Page 835: ...ly Do Not Disturb Yes Do Not Disturb DND can be set from the ML 440 using dial access codes or a function key Door Box Yes Door Box will not ring a ML 440 phone but will flash the large LED A ML 440 can call a door box but cannot activate a relay to open the door Drop Key Yes E911 911 Yes Electra Elite Terminal Migration N A Facsimile CO Branch Connection N A Flash No Flexible System Numbering Yes...

Page 836: ...r Yes Can initiate a Meet Me Paging but cannot receive internal pages to respond to an Internal Meet Me Transfer Page Memo Dial No Message Waiting Indication MWI Yes Only supports voice mail MWI Microphone Cutoff Yes This is a function of the ML 440 Handset Multiple Trunk Types Yes Music on Hold No Callers to a ML440 hear SV8100 MOH Calls made from ML440 handsets do not hear MOH Name Storing No Ne...

Page 837: ...ultiline Terminal No Pulse to Tone Conversion No Quick Transfer to Voice Mail Yes Repeat Redial No Reverse Voice Over No Ring down Extension Internal External Yes A ML 440 can be a ring down destination but cannot originate a ring down call Ring Groups Yes Room Monitor No A ML 440 can be monitored but cannot monitor other extensions Save Number Dialed Yes Secondary Incoming Extension Yes Secretary...

Page 838: ...V8100 Communications Analyst Enterprise Yes SV8100 UC Desktop Suite Applications No SV8100 PoE Gigabit Switch Yes SV8100 SV8300 Terminals N A Synchronous Ringing No T1 Trunking with ANI DNIS Compatibility Yes Tandem Ringing No Tandem Trunking Unsupervised Conference Yes TAPI Compatibility No Tone Override Yes Traffic Reports No Transfer Yes Trunk Group Routing Yes Trunk Groups Yes Trunk Queuing Ca...

Page 839: ... simultaneous voice paths The ML440 and AP20 system uses NEC i SIP for SV8100 The ML440 and AP20 system supports the G 711 CODEC only The ML440 Handset and AP20 Access Point are not supported in UX5000 or UX5000 Migration systems The ML440 Handset and AP20 Access Point do not support peer to peer operation The ML440 Handset does not support the Live Monitor feature The line keys on the ML440 corre...

Page 840: ...20 system are not supported for use with UCB Unified Communications for Business and DeskTop Suite The ML440 and AP20 system cannot be used on multiple SIP servers at the same time NAT or NAPT is only supported on the DT700 series phones NAT or NAPT is not supported on the ML440 MH240 the Wireless DECT SIP SP310 or third party SIP phones For CID to appear in the call log of the ML440 for all trunk...

Page 841: ...feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 12 01 CD CP00 US Network Setup IP Address Assign the IP address 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 254 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 default 192 168 0 10 10 12 03 CD CP00 US Net...

Page 842: ... 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 default 255 255 0 0 10 13 01 DHCP Server Mode Enable Disable the built in DHCP Server 0 Disable 1 Enable default 0 10 13 02 Lease Time Lease time of the IP address to a client Press the Transfer Key to increment to the next setting data Days 0 255 Hour 0 23 Default 0 day 0 hour 10 13 05 Last DHCP Data If 10 13 01 is enabled this setting dete...

Page 843: ...Trunk Mode 1 Extension Trunk Mode default 0 15 05 28 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup Addition Information Setup Determines manner in which CID id presented to an extension For the ML440 extensions this should be set to 1 0 Do not inform 1 Inform default 0 20 02 12 System Options for Multiline Telephones Forced Intercom Ring ICM Call Type Enable Disable Forced Intercom Ringing If enabled inc...

Page 844: ...ation Assign CO Call Forwarding for busy destinations 1 9 0 R Up to 24 digits default not assigned 24 09 05 Call Forward Split Settings Intercom Call Forwarding Busy Destination Assign Intercom Call Forwarding for busy destinations 1 9 0 R Up to 24 digits default not assigned 24 09 06 Call Forward Split Settings Call Forwarding Destination for CTX PBX for All Call No Answer Assign Call Forwarding ...

Page 845: ...ts are supported 0 65534 Defaults VoIP GW1 10020 VoIP GW2 10052 VoIP GW3 10084 VoIP GW4 10116 VoIP GW5 10148 VoIP GW6 10180 VoIP GW7 10212 VoIP GW8 10244 84 26 03 IPL Basic Setup RTCP Port Number RTP Port Number 1 Define the UDP port number for RTCP to use for each DSP 0 65534 Defaults VoIP GW1 10021 VoIP GW2 10053 VoIP GW3 10085 VoIP GW4 10117 VoIP GW5 10149 VoIP GW6 10181 VoIP GW7 10213 VoIP GW8...

Page 846: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 812 IP Multiline Station SIP ML440 Cordless THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 847: ...ol operates in the 1 9 GHZ frequency band that has been cleared specifically for voice applications thus avoiding any interference problems and delivering crystal clear and secure voice conversations The ML440 provides numerous features and conveniences for optimal comfort Its illuminated graphic color LCD display enables use in poorly lit environments while its internal loudspeaker provides hands...

Page 848: ...re Hold Conf Transfer This makes it easy for end users to receive and move calls around Four programmable keys on the base on the handset The keys can be programmed for many of the same features that are supported on the DT7XXX desk sets Line key programming is flexible The following is an example for the first three programmable keys Line Keys 1 and 2 CAP Keys Line Key 3 Intercom Key G566 andG266...

Page 849: ...n interface to download firmware files from a TFTP server Updating base station firmware involves an automatic reboot of the base station at the end of the firmware download This will drop any active calls and in addition updating the handset firmware can take several hours It is recommended updates are performed after normal business hours Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 IP DECT Customer Engineer Ma...

Page 850: ... When used in a CCISoIP system Peer to Peer Program 10 26 04 must be disabled The AP400 AP300 can only be powered using Power over Ethernet PoE 802 3af The ML440 G566 G266 firmware is upgraded over the air to handsets The ML440 G566 G266 and AP400 AP300 system supports seamless roaming between Base Units The ML440 G566 G266 and AP400 AP300 system are not supported for use with UCB Unified Communic...

Page 851: ...rphone mode Yes Yes Yes Bluetooth headset No No No Headset connection Yes Yes Yes Backlit for keys Yes Yes No Volume key up down Yes Yes Yes Mute key Yes Yes Yes Softkeys based on status call Yes Hold Conference Transfer Yes Mute Yes Mute Centralized directory Yes Yes Yes Table 2 46 Supported System Feature List Feature Name ML440 G566 G266 Comments Account Code Forced Verified Unverified Yes Yes ...

Page 852: ...ot use the microphone toggle feature The handset mute button is the only way to mute audio from handset during monitoring G566 G266 Can be barged into but cannot initiate Barge In Call Appearance CAP Keys Yes No No Call Arrival CAR Keys Yes No No Call Duration Timer No No No G566 G266 will show call duration briefly after hanging up More detailed call history information is available on the call h...

Page 853: ...s codes or a function key G566 G266 Call Waiting Camp On can be performed using dial access code only Callback Yes No No G566 G266 handsets can receive a Callback but cannot set one for another phone Caller ID Yes Yes Yes Caller ID Caller Return Yes Yes Yes Function of handset Central Office Calls Answering Yes Yes Yes Central Office Calls Placing Yes Yes Yes Class of Service Yes Yes Yes Clock Cal...

Page 854: ...t Directed Call Pickup Yes No No Directory Dialing No No No This is a function of the ML440 G566 G266 handset Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns No No No Ring tones can be changed on the ML440 G566 G266 handset only Do Not Disturb Yes Yes Yes ML440 Do Not Disturb DND can be set using dial access codes or a function key but no confirmation tones are provided G566 G266 Do Not Disturb DND c...

Page 855: ... for hand piece 20 08 09 Howler Tone Service No No No InMail Yes Yes Yes Voice mail softkeys are not provided to handset Live monitor is not supported Intercom Yes Yes Yes IP Multiline Station SIP Yes No No IP Single Line Telephone SIP No Yes Yes IP Trunk SIP Session Initiation Protocol Yes Yes Yes IP Trunk H 323 Yes Yes Yes ISDN Compatibility Yes Yes Yes K CCIS IP Yes Yes Yes The following progra...

Page 856: ...s not receive MOH G566 G266 does receive MOH Trunk Calls All handsets receive MOH from distant system Name Storing No No No NetLink Yes Yes Yes Night Service No No No Off Hook Signaling No No No Off Premise Extension No No No One Touch Calling Yes No No Must press line key then go Off hook on ML440 for stored number to be dialed Operator No No No A wireless handset should not be used as an operato...

Page 857: ...0 The ML440 does not follow Hotline for speaker 20 08 19 only Hotline for hand piece 20 08 09 G566 G266 The G566 G266 can be a hotline destination but cannot originate a hotline call Ring Groups Yes Yes Yes Room Monitor No No No Save Number Dialed Yes Yes Yes Secondary Incoming Extension Yes No No Secretary Call Buzzer Yes No No Secretary Call Pickup Yes No No Voice announcement is not supported o...

Page 858: ...ce will be disconnected automatically based on Program 24 02 07 TAPI Compatibility No No No Tone Override Yes No No Transfer Yes Yes Yes ML440 Supervised and Unsupervised G566 G266 Supervised only Trunk Group Routing Yes Yes Yes Trunk Groups Yes Yes Yes Trunk Queuing Camp On Yes No No Ml440 must use feature key programmed with Trunk Queue function 35 UM8000 Mail Yes Yes Yes Voice mail softkeys are...

Page 859: ... Site License Voice Over Yes No No ML440 can initiate voice over but cannot respond to a voice from another extension Voice Over Internet Protocol VoIP Yes Yes Yes By nature these are SIP devices Voice Response System VRS Call Yes No No The ML440 can be used to record and erase VRS messages However no beep to record or confirmation beep is provided so it is not recommended Volume Controls Yes Yes ...

Page 860: ...commonly used These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro wizards for feature programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Descr...

Page 861: ... 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 default 172 16 0 10 10 12 10 CD CP00 US Network Setup Subnet Mask Set the Subnet mask of the IPLA IPLB 128 0 0 0 192 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 240 0 0 0 248 0 0 0 252 0 0 0 254 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 255 128 0 0 255 192 0 0 255 224 0 0 255 240 0 0 255 248 0 0 255 252 0 0 255 254 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 128 0 255 255 192 0 255 255 224 0 255 25...

Page 862: ...ving Method Rings extension before receiving Caller ID 1 or after receiving Caller ID 0 Recommended setting is 0 Wait Caller ID 0 Wait Caller ID 1 Immediate Ring default 1 15 02 13 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Redial List Mode Select the type of numbers that are stored in the Redial List Internal and External numbers 0 or External only 1 For the ML440 G566 G266 extensions this should be se...

Page 863: ...ls voice announce This should be set to Signal 1 or each ML440 should be set to Signal manually using dial access code 723 0 Disable Voice 1 Enable Signal default 0 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign ML440 handsets to their own Class of Service Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Default Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 08 11 Class of ...

Page 864: ...ion Assign CO Call Forwarding for busy destinations 1 9 0 R Up to 24 digits default not assigned 24 09 05 Call Forward Split Settings Intercom Call Forwarding Busy Destination Assign Intercom Call Forwarding for busy destinations 1 9 0 R Up to 24 digits default not assigned 24 09 06 Call Forward Split Settings Call Forwarding Destination for CTX PBX for All Call No Answer Assign Call Forwarding fo...

Page 865: ...44 VoIP GW 1 8 172 16 0 20 172 16 0 27 84 26 02 IPL Basic Setup RTP Port Number Assign the RTP port number to be used for each DSP on the IPLA IPLB Only even numbered ports are supported 0 65534 Defaults VoIP GW1 10020 VoIP GW2 10052 VoIP GW3 10084 VoIP GW4 10116 VoIP GW5 10148 VoIP GW6 10180 VoIP GW7 10212 VoIP GW8 10244 84 26 03 IPL Basic Setup RTCP Port Number RTP Port Number 1 Define the TCP p...

Page 866: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 832 IP Multiline Station SIP ML440 G566 G266 with AP400 AP300 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 867: ...dle real time media support industry standard SIP RFC 3261 communication on the WAN side and interface with the PZ IPLA IPLB Enhancements With Version 4000 software FoIP Fax over Internet Protocol with T 38 protocol is supported The SV8100 Version 4000 Enhancement license is required for T 38 to function With Version 4000 4 01 or higher software video codecs H 264 H 263 and H 261 are supported The...

Page 868: ...een remote stations through the IP Network This is an IETF ITU standards based protocol Speech connection audio quality depends greatly on the available bandwidth between the stations in the data network Because Internet is an uncontrolled data network compared to an Intranet using this application in Intranet WAN environment with known or controlled and assured Quality of Service QoS is highly re...

Page 869: ... IP Phone to the SV8100 ToS Support Conditions Documentation for Polycom devices are available at http www polycom com voicedocumentation By default Polycom devices use to initiate dialing Therefore cannot be used in a dial string without a configuration change to the Polycom device For example dialing the default Park access code 6 will not work from a Polycom device because it starts dialing aft...

Page 870: ...le IP Address is located in Program 10 12 09 SV8100 Network Setup IP Address T 38 Fax is not supported for 3rd Party SIP IP Single Line Telephone SIP station ports Version 3100 or lower software T 38 Fax is supported for 3rd Party SIP IP Single Line Telephone SIP station ports Version 4000 or higher software Program 15 03 03 must be set to 1 Special at the receiving terminal in order for T 38 to f...

Page 871: ...s such as RFC2833 This means SIP terminals should send DTMF information by a single method otherwise the system will receive both separately causing double digits NAT or NAPT is only supported on the DT700 series phones NAT or NAPT is not supported on the ML440 MH240 the Wireless DECT SIP or SP310 phones With SV8100 Version 9500 9 5 or higher software the SV8100 now supports NAT for Standard SIP t...

Page 872: ...dministrator desk set and in some cases from the SIP device using dial access codes Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override Yes Call Monitoring No Call Redirect No Call Waiting Camp On No Callback Yes Caller ID Caller Return Yes Caller ID Call Return is a SIP device feature not a system feature Caller ID Yes Caller ID is shown only on ISDN SIP or Analog CO trunks that are directed at the SIP devic...

Page 873: ...Direct Station Selection DSS Console No Directed Call Pickup Yes Directory Dialing No Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns No Do Not Disturb Yes Do Not Disturb DND can be set from the SIP device using dial access codes In some cases Do Not Disturb can be set via the SIP device but is not system side DND Do Not Disturb Call Forward Override Yes Door Box Yes Door Box will not ring a SIP devi...

Page 874: ...andsfree is a feature of the SIP device Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing No Hold Yes Hotel Motel No Hotline Yes A SIP device can be a hotline destination but cannot originate a hotline call Howler Tone Service No Intercom Yes IP Multiline Station SIP No IP Trunk SIP Session Initiation Protocol Yes IP Trunk H 323 No ISDN Compatibility Yes K CCIS IP Yes K CCIS T1 Yes Last Number Redial N...

Page 875: ...device can only initiate an Internal External or All Call Page It cannot receive either Internal or All Call pages or display page information Paging Internal Yes A SIP device can only initiate an Internal External or All Call Page It cannot receive either Internal or All Call pages or display page information Park No PBX Compatibility Yes PC Programming Yes Power Failure Transfer No Prime Line Se...

Page 876: ...ng Extension No Secretary Call Buzzer No Secretary Call Pickup No Selectable Display Messaging No Selectable Ring Tones Yes Selectable Ring Tones is a function of the client device Serial Call No Single Line Telephones Analog 500 2500 Sets No SLT Adapter No SMB8000 Conference Bridge Yes SMB8000 Interactive Voice Response No Softkeys No Speed Dial System Group Station No Station Hunt No Station Mes...

Page 877: ...n Uniform Call Distribution UCD No Uniform Numbering Network Yes UM8000 Yes User Programming Ability Virtual Extensions No Limited user customization available VM8000 InMail Yes Voice Call Signal Switching Yes Can only send voice signal switch Voice Mail Integration Analog Yes Voice Over No Voice Over Internet Protocol VoIP Yes By nature this is a SIP device Voice Response System VRS Call Forwardi...

Page 878: ...nded of draft ietf sipping service examples 15 txt Conditions Program10 26 03 SIP Peer to Peer Mode must be disabled for the Unattended Transfer to be performed A SIP terminal must receive the re Invite message of Session Timer in a state of Unattended transfer When the transfer destination terminal is busy unanswered or the extension number in the Refer To header is wrong or out of service the ca...

Page 879: ...D Group Pilot Number Operator Access Trunk Alternate trunk access code F Route Access Network Access Quick transfer to Voice Mail is not supported when using Unattended Transfer Default Setting None System Availability Terminals Standard SIP Terminal Required Components CD CP00 US PZ 32IPLA IPLB PZ 64IPLA IPLB or PZ 128IPLA IPLB Related Features IP Single Line Telephone SIP Transfer ...

Page 880: ...ams are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned VoIP Settings Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 12 03 CD CP00 US Network Setup Default Gateway Assign the default gateway IP address for the CD CP00 US 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 254 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 default 0 0 0 0 1...

Page 881: ...55 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 default 255 255 0 0 10 19 01 VoIP DSP Resource Selection Select type of IPLA IPLB DSP Resource This program setting has no affect on the terminal trunk port assignment or usage 0 Common use for both IP extensions and trunks 1 IP Extension 2 SIP Trunk 3 CCIS 4 Use for NetLink 5 Blo...

Page 882: ...r The RTCP Port Number is the RTP port number 1 RTP Port Number 1 default 10021 84 06 04 PVA Data Setting Fract Lost Threshold Define the fractional lost threshold this data is sent to the UNIVERGE SV8100 CD CP00 US when the value exceeds the defined value 0 100 default 0 84 06 05 PVA Data Setting Packets Lost Threshold Define the packet lost threshold this data is sent to the UNIVERGE SV8100 CD C...

Page 883: ...ing Define the IP Phone extension number Up to eight digits 1 101 2 102 3 103 99 199 100 3101 512 3513 Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 84 19 01 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup Number of G 711 Audio Frames Define the G 711 audio frame size 1 4 1 10ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 4 40ms default 2 84 19 02 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup G 711 Voice...

Page 884: ...tension CODEC Information Basic Setup G 729 Jitter Buffer min Define G 729 Jitter Buffer minimum accepted value 0 270ms default 20 84 19 10 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup G729 Jitter Buffer average Define G 729 Jitter Buffer average accepted value 0 270ms default 40 84 19 11 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup G729 Jitter Buffer max Define G 729 Jitter Buffer maximum accepted ...

Page 885: ...bility Priority Define Audio Priority Consult the UNIVERGE SV8100 Programming Manual for Transmit Gain scale to set acceptable value 0 G 711_PT 1 G 723_PT 2 G 729_PT 3 G 722 4 G 726 5 Not Used default 0 84 19 31 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup DTMF Payload Number Define the DTMF Payload Number 96 127 default 96 84 19 32 SIP Extension IP CODEC Information Basic Setup DTMF Relay Mode Def...

Page 886: ...er Average Define the average setting for the G 726 Jitter Buffer 0 160ms default 60 84 19 42 SIP Extension IP CODEC Information Basic Setup G 726 Jitter Buffer Max Define the maximum setting for the G 726 Jitter Buffer 0 160ms default 120 84 19 49 SIP Extension IP CODEC Information Basic Setup RTP Filter To avoid incorrect voice pass connection this Program checks the sending side address from re...

Page 887: ...r the network provider 0 Receive TCF signal by VoIPDB 1 Through TCF signal to external FAX default 1 84 19 59 SIP Extension IP CODEC Information Basic Setup Maximum Low Speed Data Packetization Sets the maximum number of bytes of low speed fax data packet into each network packet 1 65535 bytes default 1 84 19 60 SIP Extension IP CODEC Information Basic Setup Transmit Network Timeout Sets the timer...

Page 888: ...he IP address for each DSP on the IPLA IPLB xxx xxx xxx xxx Defaults Slot 1 172 16 0 20 Slot 4 172 16 0 44 VoIP GW Number 1 8 172 16 0 20 172 16 16 0 27 84 26 02 IPL Basic Setup RTP Port Number Assign the RTP port number to be used for each DSP on the IPLA IPLB Only even numbered ports are supported 0 65534 Defaults VoIP GW1 10020 VoIP GW2 10052 VoIP GW3 10084 VoIP GW4 10116 VoIP GW5 10148 VoIP GW...

Page 889: ...c Data Setup CODEC Type Set the registered IP Phone Codec type Reference Program 84 11 Dterm IP Codec Basic Information 1 Type 1 2 Type 2 3 Type 3 4 Type 4 5 Type 5 default 1 15 05 16 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup Authentication Password Assign the authentication password for SIP single line telephones Up to 24 characters default not assigned 15 05 18 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setu...

Page 890: ... from standard SIP phone via SIP INFO message 0 Disable 1 Allowed any time 2 Allowed while RTP is not available default 1 Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 26 03 IP System Operation Setup SIP Peer to Peer Mode Enable Disable the Peer to Peer feature for SIP IP stations 0 Off 1 On default 1 Figure 2 24 Example SIP Phone Program Number Program Name Descrip...

Page 891: ...omments 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 Enter a Static IP Address for the SIP Phone 2 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Enter the Subnet Mask Address 3 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Enter the Default Gateway address 4 IPLA IPLB Address 0 0 0 0 Enter the IPLA IPLB IP Address This information can be located in Program 10 12 09 UNIVERGE SV8100 Network Setup IP Address 5 Extension Number 0 Assign the SIP Phone extension This inform...

Page 892: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 858 IP Single Line Telephone SIP THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 893: ... the same IP Address requires Program 15 05 18 to be set for both extension numbers In the router firewall that the SV8100 resides behind port forwarding is required Port forwarding at the SIP Terminal end is not required as long as Program 15 05 45 Plug and Play is enabled The ports that must be forwarded to the SV8100 are as follows UDP Port 5070 MUST be forwarded to the IP Address assigned in P...

Page 894: ...els are used with PCPro and WebPro wizards for feature programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigne...

Page 895: ...en receiving ICMP redirect messages this determines if the IP Routing Table updates automatically or not 0 Enable 1 Disable default 0 10 12 09 CD CP00 US Network Setup IP Address Assign the IP Address for the VoIPDB If a VoIPDB is installed in the system it is recommended to set Program 10 12 01 to 0 0 0 0 and all connections to the system will be made through the VoIPDB 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 12...

Page 896: ...55 248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 default 255 255 0 0 10 12 11 CD CP00 US Network Setup NIC Setup Define the LAN interface Speed and Mode of the VoIP Application supported IPLB daughter board does not support half duplex connection 0 Auto Detect 1 100Mbps...

Page 897: ...ntrols remote SIP phone via NAT router set this program to 1 Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable default 0 10 37 01 UPnP Setup UPnP Mode Enable Disable UPnP 0 Disable 1 Enable default 0 10 58 01 DT700 Intranet Local Network Area Setup Network Address This program sets the IP or Network address for phones that are not to be routed through the NAPT translations For example if a system had multiple NAPT phones...

Page 898: ...0 255 252 0 0 255 254 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 128 0 255 255 192 0 255 255 224 0 255 255 240 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 default 255 255 0 0 15 05 16 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup Authentication Password Assign the authentication pass...

Page 899: ...default 0 15 05 47 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup Registration Expire Timer for NAT On a per station basis this setting defines the SIP registration expiry timer If this value is set to 0 for a NAPT terminal the value in Program 84 23 01 is applied Version 9000 or higher required With Version 9 5 or higher software when the uMobility client connects via NAT this must be set to 60 seconds 0...

Page 900: ...ber to be used for each DSP on the IPLA IPLB Only even numbered ports are supported 0 65534 Defaults VoIP GW1 10020 VoIP GW2 10052 VoIP GW3 10084 VoIP GW4 10116 VoIP GW5 10148 VoIP GW6 10180 VoIP GW7 10212 VoIP GW8 10244 84 26 03 IPL Basic Setup RTCP Port Number RTP Port Number 1 Define the TCP port number for RTCP to use for each DSP 0 65534 Defaults VoIP GW1 10021 VoIP GW2 10053 VoIP GW3 10085 V...

Page 901: ...PLA IPLB Daughter Board interface can provide IP trunks and Tie Lines that can operate in the following modes COI COID DID TLI DTI Enhancements With Version 4000 software FoIP Fax over Internet Protocol with T 38 protocol is supported The SV8100 Version 4000 Enhancement license is required for T 38 to function With SV8100 Version 5000 5 00 or higher software and PZ IPLB daughter board installed ha...

Page 902: ...does not support fallback to G 711 from G 729 G 726 for data FAX calls A transferred call can not use T 38 at the transferred destination SIP trunks are assigned in increments of four Calling Party Name is not provided for outgoing calls on SIP trunks With SV8100 Version 5000 5 00 or higher software and PZ IPLB daughter board installed half duplex connections are not supported For troubleshooting ...

Page 903: ...ed as the International Access Code For example a normal international SIP call can be dialed and displayed as follows Number dialed 00441202223344 Request URI Invite sip 00441202223344 172 16 18 100 SIP 2 0 With SIP Trunk E 164 Support enabled the SIP call can be displayed once dialed as Request URI Invite sip 441202223344 172 16 18 100 SIP 2 0 This display is a requirement of certain SIP ITSPs I...

Page 904: ...4 support is applied on the SIP trunk interface E 164 is supported for all carrier choices Program 10 29 14 Netlink multi carrier support uses E 164 support across all carrier configurations at the secondary nodes Default Setting Disabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Trunks IP SIP Required Component s CD CP00 US IPLA IPLB IP Trunk License ...

Page 905: ... this numbering scheme This presentation can be a requirement of certain SIP ITSPs Internet Telephony Service Providers so it is necessary the PBX can handle these calls and modify any SIP messages to the correct format accordingly Conditions Minimum of SV8100 main system software Version 7000 or higher is required E 164 Enhancement is applied for the SIP trunk interface Outgoing call from caller ...

Page 906: ...hile in P2P mode cannot be transferred i e an internal call cannot be transferred to a SIP Interconnection trunk A video call cannot be changed to a voice call A voice call cannot be changed to a video call A video caller cannot use CTI OAI at the same time as the CTI OAI feature needs P2P to be set to off When the video interconnection using a SIP trunk is configured other SIP connections such as...

Page 907: ...ith PCPro and WebPro wizards for feature programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned IP Trunk SIP Session Initiation Protocol Program Number Program Name D...

Page 908: ...CP00 US Network Setup NAPT Router IP Address Default Gateway WAN Define the IP Address of the WAN side of the router 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 default 0 0 0 0 10 12 08 CD CP00 US Network Setup ICMP Redirect When receiving ICMP redirect messages this determines if the IP Routing Table updates automatically or not 0 Enable 1 Disable default 0 10 12 0...

Page 909: ...255 248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 default 255 255 0 0 10 12 11 CD CP00 US Network Setup NIC Setup Define the LAN interface Speed and Mode of the VoIP Application supported IPLB daughter board does not support half duplex connection 0 Auto Detect 1 100Mbp...

Page 910: ...23 04 SIP System Interconnection Setup Dial Number Define Dial Number for the SIP System Interconnection Up to 12 digits 0 9 default not assigned 10 28 01 SIP System Information Setup Domain Name Define the Domain name This information is generally provided by the SIP carrier Up to 64 Characters default not assigned 10 28 02 SIP System Information Setup Host Name Define the Domain name This inform...

Page 911: ...ries in Program 10 29 xx must be set back to their default settings Even if Program 10 29 01 is set to 0 off the UNIVERGE SV8100 still checks the settings in the remaining 10 29 programs 0 Off 1 On default 0 10 29 02 SIP Server Information Setup Default Proxy Inbound Define the Default Proxy Inbound 0 Off 1 On default 0 10 29 03 SIP Server Information Setup Default Proxy IP Address Enter the defau...

Page 912: ... 10 29 11 SIP Server Information Setup Registrar Domain Name Define the Registrar Domain Name normally provided by the SIP carrier Up to 128 Characters default not assigned 10 29 12 SIP Server Information Setup Domain Name Define the Proxy Domain Name UNIVERGE SV8100 domain name Up to 64 Characters default not assigned 10 29 13 SIP Server Information Setup Proxy Host Name Define the Proxy Host nam...

Page 913: ...istration 0 Disable 1 Enable default 0 10 36 02 SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup User ID Define the USER ID for the SIP Trunk Up to 32 Characters default not assigned 10 36 03 SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup Authentication User ID Define the Authentication USER ID for the SIP Trunk Up to 64 Characters default not assigned 10 36 04 SIP Trunk Registration Information Setup Authentic...

Page 914: ...p Number Assign trunks to trunk groups Trunks 1 200 Trunk Port 1 200 Group 1 Priority 1 200 15 03 18 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Select Special Terminal Used for selecting Special terminal type FAX or Modem This setting influences how data is transmitted via SIP trunk Program 15 03 03 must be set to 1 Special to use this feature Type 0 FAX 1 Modem default 0 21 17 01 IP Trunk SIP Calling...

Page 915: ...ension Call Own 2 ARS F Route Table F Route 3 Dial Extension Analyze Table Option default 0 44 02 03 Dial Analysis Table for ARS F Route Access Additional Data If a Service Type is selected in Program 44 02 02 set the additional data if required for the Pre Transaction Table for selecting ARS F Route 24 digits max 1 9 0 To enter a wild card don t care digit press Line Key 1 to enter an 1 Delete Di...

Page 916: ...defined value 0 4294967295 seconds default 0 84 06 09 PVA Data Setting Delay LSR Threshold Define the Delay threshold this data will be sent to the UNIVERGE SV8100 CD CP00 US when the value exceeds the defined value 0 4294967295 seconds default 0 84 06 16 VoIP Info IMCP Redirect Set whether or not IPLA IPLB daughter board supports sending the Internet Message Control Protocol IMCP redirect message...

Page 917: ... 711 Jitter Buffer min Set the minimum G 711 Jitter Buffer 0 160ms default 20 84 13 05 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup G 711 Jitter Buffer Average Set the average G 711 Jitter Buffer 0 160ms default 40 84 13 06 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup G 711 Jitter Buffer max Set the maximum G 711 Jitter Buffer 0 160ms default 80 84 13 07 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup Number of G 7...

Page 918: ...on threshold 0 30 19dB 10dB 1 19dB 49dBm 2 0dB 30dBm 29 9dBm 21dBm 30 0dBm 20dBm default 20 84 13 26 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup TX Gain Set the transmit gain 0 40 20dBm 20dBm 0 20dBm 1 19 dBm 20 0dBm 39 19 dBm 40 20dBm default 20 84 13 27 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup RX Gain Set the receive gain 0 40 20dBm 20dBm 0 20dBm 1 19 dBm 20 0dBm 39 19 dBm 40 20dBm default 20 84 13 2...

Page 919: ...age Define the average level for the G 722 Jitter Buffer 0 160ms default 60 84 13 37 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup G 722 Jitter Buffer max Define the Max level for the G 722 Jitter buffer 0 160ms default 120 84 13 38 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup Number of G 726 Audio Frames Define the number of G 726 audio frames 1 4 1 10ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 4 40ms default 3 84 13 39 SIP Trunk COD...

Page 920: ...gth Sets the high speed data packet length v27ter V29 V33 and V17 1 10ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 4 40ms default 4 84 13 56 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup Low Speed Redundancy Sets the number of redundant packets for V 21 0 5 default 0 84 13 57 SIP Trunk CODEC Information Basic Setup High Speed Data Packet Redundancy Sets the number of redundant packets for V 27ter V 29 V33 and V17 0 2 default 0 84 ...

Page 921: ...lled Party Information 0 Request URI 1 To Header default 0 84 14 10 SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup URL Type Define the URL type for SIP trunks 0 SIP URL 1 TEL URL default 0 84 26 01 IPL Basic Setup IP Address Define the IP address for each DSP on the IPLA IPLB daughter board PZ 32IPLA IPLB has 2 DSPs PZ 64IPLA IPLB has 4 DSPs PZ 128IPLA IPLB has 8 DSPs When using a PZ IPLB only 1 IP Address has...

Page 922: ...try Code Enter the country code Dial up to four digits 0 9 default 1 10 02 02 Location Setup International Access Codes Enter the international access code Dial up to four digits 0 9 default not assigned 44 01 02 System Options for ARS F Route Dial Tone Simulation When first dialed digit matches the data set in this Program system sends simulated DT to calling party after receiving first digit Num...

Page 923: ...etup Country Code Enter the country code Dial up to four digits 0 9 default 1 10 02 02 Location Setup International Access Codes Enter the international access code Dial up to four digits 0 9 default not assigned 10 02 03 Location Setup Other Area Access Code Enter the other area access code Dial up to two digits 0 9 default 9 84 14 13 SIP Trunk Basic Information Setup Incoming Outgoing SIP Trunk ...

Page 924: ... then delete both the and country code and add the Caller ID Edit Code from Program 10 02 03 0 Disable 1 Mode 1 2 Mode 2 default 0 Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 12 01 CD CP00 US Network Setup IP Address It is recommended to set this program to 0 0 0 0 All connections to the system are made through the IPLB 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 25...

Page 925: ...etwork Setup Subnet Mask Define the Media Gateway Subnet Mask Address 128 0 0 0 192 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 240 0 0 0 248 0 0 0 252 0 0 0 254 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 255 128 0 0 255 192 0 0 255 224 0 0 255 240 0 0 255 248 0 0 255 252 0 0 255 254 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 128 0 255 255 192 0 255 255 224 0 255 255 240 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 25...

Page 926: ...5 255 254 default 0 0 0 0 10 23 04 SIP System Interconnection Setup Dial Number Define the Dial Number for the SIP System Up to 12 digits 0 9 default not assigned 10 26 03 IP System Operation Setup SIP Peer to Peer Mode Enable Disable the Peer to Peer feature for SIP IP stations For Video Call to function set to 1 On 0 Off 1 On default 1 10 28 04 SIP System Information Setup User ID Define the Use...

Page 927: ...Data Setup Video Mode Enable Disable Video Mode For Video Call via the System Interconnection set to 1 Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable default 0 15 05 43 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup Video Mode Enable Disable Video Mode for Standard SIP terminals For Video Call via the System Interconnection set to 1 Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable default 0 20 08 13 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service IS...

Page 928: ...ID DDI Mode Switching default 0 44 02 01 Dial Analysis Table for ARS F Route Access Dial Set the Dial digits for the Pre Transaction Table for selecting ARS F Route eight digits maximum 1 9 0 To enter a wild card don t care digit press Line Key 1 to enter an Up to eight digits default not assigned 44 02 02 Dial Analysis Table for ARS F Route Access Service Type Set the Service Type 0 3 for the Pre...

Page 929: ... Maximum Digit Input the maximum number of digits to send when using the F Route 0 24 default 0 84 26 01 IPL Basic Setup IP Address Assign the IP address for each DSP on the IPLB xxx xxx xxx xxx Defaults Slot 1 172 16 0 20 Slot 4 172 16 0 44 VoIP GW Number 1 8 172 16 0 20 172 16 16 0 27 Table 2 49 SIP INVITE Header Fields Program 84 14 13 Program 10 02 01 Program 10 02 02 Description Calling Party...

Page 930: ... From header From sip 441509555123 172 16 0 10 2 00 Request URI Invite sip 441202223344 172 16 18 100 SIP 2 0 To header To sip 441202223344 172 16 18 100 From header From sip 441509555123 172 16 0 10 P Asserted Identity P Asserted Identity441509555123 172 16 0 10 P Preferred Identity P Preferred Identity441509555123 172 16 0 10 No Setting No Function Table 2 50 Delete from Incoming SIP INVITE Prog...

Page 931: ...lue in Program 10 02 02 only Or With a SIP INVITE for incoming calls When a is presented as the international access code along with a country code that DOES match the value in Program 10 02 01 then delete the and country code but DO NOT add the international access code value Table 2 52 Delete and Country Code from Incoming SIP INVITE Program 84 14 16 Program 84 14 13 Description 2 Mode 2 1 On Wi...

Page 932: ... from 4902131795770 Program 10 02 02 00 Program 10 02 03 9 Displayed in terminal incoming caller history as Making an outgoing call from history of incoming calls 1 From an idle multiline terminal 2 Press soft key List 3 Press soft key CID 4 Press Speaker Original Program 10 02 01 0 Program 10 02 01 49 ...

Page 933: ... allows connectivity to any H 323 standards compliant voice gateway and gatekeeper This VoIP Trunk Daughter board also allows Registration and Authentication Server RAS support to register with an RAS Server and use Gatekeeper for dynamic call routing The PZ x IPLA IPLB H 323 is an optional interface that can provide IP trunks and Tie Lines It can operate in the following modes COI COID DID TLI DT...

Page 934: ...tgoing calls on H 323 trunks With SV8100 Version 5000 5 00 or higher software and PZ IPLB daughter board installed half duplex connections are not supported For troubleshooting purposes a managed switch capable of port mirroring is required to capture packet data from the SV8100 IPLB Ethernet port All IP trunks SIP CCIS or H 323 must be contiguous If any IP trunks are added to a system that alread...

Page 935: ... properly assigned The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 03 01 ETU Setup IPLA IPLB Pkg Trunk Logical Port Number Displays the port number assigned to the IPLA IPLB 0 200 default 0 10 03 02 ETU Setup IPLA IPLB Pkg Trunk Type Define if the IP Trunks are H 323 or SIP 0 H 323 1 SIP default 1 10 12...

Page 936: ... 255 default 255 255 0 0 10 17 02 H 323 Gatekeeper Setup Gatekeeper IP Address Define the Gatekeeper IP address for H 323 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 default 0 0 0 0 10 17 04 H 323 Gatekeeper Setup Preferred Gatekeeper When 10 17 01 is set to 1 this is used and sets the preferred ID of multiple gatekeepers Maximum 124 characters default not assigned ...

Page 937: ... enabled 0 128 default 0 14 02 01 Analog Trunk Data Setup Signaling Type DP DTMF Set the outgoing signaling type for the tie trunk 0 Dial Pulse 10 PPS 1 Dial Pulse 20 PPS 2 DTMF default 2 14 05 01 Trunk Group Trunk Group Number Assign trunks to trunk groups then go to Program 14 06 01 below to set up Trunk Group Routing Trunks 1 200 Trunk Port 1 200 Group 1 Priority 1 200 14 06 01 Trunk Group Rout...

Page 938: ...Number for each extension The assigned number is sent to the exchange when the caller places an outgoing call Up to 16 digits 1 0 default not assigned 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Assign the incoming trunk type for each trunk Trunks 1 200 0 Normal 1 VRS second dial tone if no VRS installed 2 DISA 3 DID 4 DIL 5 E M Tie line 6 Delayed VRS 7 ANI DNIS 8 DID DDI Mode Switching default 0 44 02 01 ...

Page 939: ...Frames 1 4 default 3 84 01 03 H 323 Trunk Basic Information Setup G 711 VAD mode Enable Disable the G 711 VAD mode for H 323 0 Disable 1 Enable default 0 84 01 04 H 323 Trunk Basic Information Setup G 711 Type Define the G 711 type for H 323 0 A law 1 law default 1 84 01 05 H 323 Trunk Basic Information Setup Number of G 729 audio frames Define the number of G 729 audio frames for H 323 1 6 1 10ms...

Page 940: ... the G 711 jitter buffer maximum for H 323 0 160ms default 120 84 01 19 H 323 Trunk Basic Information Setup G 723 Jitter Buffer min Define the G 723 jitter buffer minimum for H 323 0 270ms default 30 84 01 20 H 323 Trunk Basic Information Setup G 723 Jitter Buffer average Define the G 723 jitter buffer average for H 323 0 270ms default 60 84 01 21 H 323 Trunk Basic Information Setup G 723 Jitter B...

Page 941: ...C setting Priority of voice encoding method 0 3 0 G 711 1 G 723 2 G 729 3 G 722 default 0 84 01 36 H 323 Trunk Basic Information Setup The Maximum FAX Transmission Rate Define the the maximum FAX transmission rate for H 323 0 V 27ter 2400bps 1 V 27ter 4800bps 2 V 29 7200bps 3 V 29 9600bps 4 V 17 12000bps 5 V 17 14400bps default 5 84 01 37 H 323 Trunk Basic Information Setup FAX FIFO Considering De...

Page 942: ...F of the fax is sent over the network default 1 84 01 47 H 323 Trunk Basic Information Setup The Maximum Low speed Signal Data Size of Packet Define the the maximum low speed signal data Size of packet for H 323 1 65535 bytes default 1 84 01 48 H 323 Trunk Basic Information Setup Network Transmission Time out Define the network transmission time out for H 323 10 32000 seconds default 150 84 01 49 ...

Page 943: ...X relay function for H 323 0 Disable 1 Enable 2 Each port mode default 0 84 01 60 H 323 Trunk Basic Information Setup Echo Canceller Type Define the echo canceller type for H 323 0 3 default 0 84 01 61 H 323 Trunk Basic Information Setup Auto Gain Control Use to define the auto gain control for H 323 0 5 default 0 84 01 62 H 323 Trunk Basic Information Setup DTMF Relay Mode Set up information of V...

Page 944: ... G 722 Jitter Buffer average Define the G 722 jitter buffer average for H 323 0 160ms default 60 84 01 67 H 323 Trunk Basic Information Setup G 722 Jitter Buffer max Define the G 722 jitter buffer maximum for H 323 0 160ms default 120 Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 ...

Page 945: ...abase cannot be converted and must be rebuilt The MGN U10 ETU provides a connection between the IPK IPK II and the UNIVERGE SV8100 system The MGN U10 ETU is installed in the CPU EXP slot of the IPK IPK II KSU Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 System Hardware Manual for a complete list of supported packages The IPK IPK II system is limited to 18 slots total MEGACO telephone is not supported An IPK IPK I...

Page 946: ...t SV8100 UC Desktop Suite Applications and UCB are not supported for DTU DTP style terminals in an IPK IPK II Migration system Single SV8100 to IPK IPK II Chassis Connectivity Figure 2 25 Single SV8100 to IPK IPK II Connection illustrates a typical connection layout of the SV8100 and IPK IPK II with Version 4000 or lower software Figure 2 25 Single SV8100 to IPK IPK II Connection IPK IPK II MGN U1...

Page 947: ...yout 1 Refer to Figure 2 26 Multiple SV8100 to IPK IPK II Connection Layout 1 One cable is connected to the MGN U10 ETU Migration Board and two cables are connected to the PZ BS11 Slot Layout Slot 1 6 1st SV8100 chassis slots 1 6 Slot 7 11 1st IPK II cabinet slots 1 5 Slot 13 24 2nd and 3rd SV8100 chassis slots 1 6 each Slot 12 is used for B channel highway and cannot support the hardware Figure 2...

Page 948: ...nected to the MGN U10 ETU and one cable connected to the PZ BS11 Slot Layout Slot 1 6 1st SV8100 chassis slots 1 6 Slot 7 17 1st IPK II cabinet slots 1 8 2nd IPK II cabinet slots 1 3 Slot 19 24 2nd SV8100 chassis slots 1 6 Slot 18 is used for B channel highway and cannot support the hardware Figure 2 27 Multiple SV8100 to IPK IPK II Connection Layout 2 ...

Page 949: ...ssis slots 1 6 Slot 7 11 1st IPK II cabinet slots 1 5 Slot 13 18 2nd SV8100 chassis slots 1 6 Slot 19 24 2nd IPK II cabinet slots 5 8 3rd IPK II cabinet slots 1 2 Slot 12 is used for B channel highway and cannot support the hardware Table 2 53 IPK II Supported Hardware on page 2 916 provides a listing of the IPK II hardware supported Figure 2 28 Multiple SV8100 to IPK IPK II Connection Layout 3 IP...

Page 950: ...e Interface Y SLI 8 U10 8 Port Single Line Interface Y SLIB 4 SLIE 4 U10 F W 1 74 or above 4 Port Single Line Interface Y OPX OPX 2 U10 Off Premise Extension Interface Y COI COI 4 U CO PBX Line Interface Y COI 8 U CO PBX Line Interface Y COID 4 U CO PBX Line Interface Y COID 8 U CO PBX Line Interface Y COIB 4 U10 CO PBX Line Interface Y COIB 4 U20 CO PBX Line Interface Y COIB 4 U30 CO PBX Line Int...

Page 951: ...ce Y HUB Hub 8 U10 Switching Hub Y Table 2 54 Supported Optional Equipment via MGN U10 ETU Description DTU DTP DTH DTR Ancillary Device Adapter ADA U ADA R Analog Port Adapter APA U APA R Analog Port Ringer APR U APR R Single Line Telephone Adapter SLT2 ADP SLT2 ADP Hands Free Unit HF U HF R Attendant Console DCU 60 1 DCR 60 1 Paging Door Box Adapter PGDAD PGDAD Add on Module 16 ADM Computer Telep...

Page 952: ...ipment supported for terminals connected to the SV8100 chassis Default Setting Disabled System Availability Terminals DTU DTP Series E Version 2 51 or higher DTH DTR Series I Table 2 55 Supported Optional Equipment Equipment Name DTH DTR DT300 ADA APR SLT ADP 60DSS Console PGDAD Desi Less VSR 8LK L UNIT BCH L BK UNIT BHA L UNIT PSA L UNIT ...

Page 953: ...0 ETU board requires the CD CP00 US PZ ME50 US and PZ BS10 blades to be installed in the CHS2U US 19 or CHS2U B US 9 5 controlling chassis Related Features None Guide to Feature Programming None Operation Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 System Hardware Manual for installation instructions ...

Page 954: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 920 IPK IPK II Migration THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 955: ...nect to the electric door strike These contacts are used to remotely control the entrance door After answering the chimes a Multiline Terminal user can press the Recall key and activate the Doorphone contacts This in turn releases the electric strike on the entrance door The following table lists the minimum requirement necessary when installing the DR Viewer on a PC Enhancements With Version 9000...

Page 956: ...Video Doorphone A maximum of eight door stations including the normal Door box can be connected The IP Video Doorphone requires one IP extension port per Door station An extension number is required for the setting but is not called using the extension number Calls are placed using the Service code or function key The DR Viewer and IP Video Doorphone should be installed in the same data switch whe...

Page 957: ...a time out occurs between the Doorphone and the system an Error tone is heard on the Doorphone When in the monitoring mode the IP Video Doorphone cannot be called via the doorphone access code Program 11 12 36 Default Setting Disabled System Availability Terminals IP Video Doorphone IP3NE IPCDH Polycom VVX1500 Required Component s Version 9000 or higher system software IPLA IPLB Daughter Board IP3...

Page 958: ...commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 12 09 CD CP00 US Network Setup IP Address VoIPDB Set the IP Address for IPLA IPLB ...

Page 959: ... 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 default 255 255 0 0 10 12 11 CD CP00 US Network Setup NIC Setup Define the LAN interface Speed and Mode of the VoIP Application supported IPLB daughter board does not support half duplex connection 0 Auto Detect 1 100Mbps Full Duplex 2 100Mbps Half Duplex 3 10Mbps Full Duplex 4 ...

Page 960: ...maximum of eight digits for extension numbering Up to eight digits 1 101 2 102 3 103 99 199 100 3101 512 3513 11 10 18 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Off Premise Call Forward by Door Box Set the service code for setting automatic transfer for ISDN SIP 722 default 722 11 12 36 Service Code Access for Service Access Door Box Access Assign the access code used to call the doorphone 702 d...

Page 961: ... Call Forward by Door Box Disconnect Timer Define the conversation time for an Off Premise Call Forward by Door Box call When this timer expires the caller hears busy tone for 3 seconds fixed time and the call is then disconnected 0 64800 seconds default 60 32 02 01 Door Box Ring Assignments Determine which Door Box should ring which extension by entering the extension number Each Door Box can be ...

Page 962: ...10ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 4 40ms default 2 84 19 03 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup G 711 Type Define the G 711 Type law is recommended when in USA 0 A law 1 law default 1 84 20 01 SIP Extension Basic Information Setup Registrar Proxy Port Define SIP station Proxy Port 1 65535 default 5070 84 26 01 IPL Basic Setup IP Address Assign the IP address for each DSP on the IPLA IPLB xxx xxx xxx xxx ...

Page 963: ... recording of IP type calls The 1 Port IP Call Logging Unit IP Tap is a USB device capable of recording SIP audio 1 To record SIP audio the 1 Port Call Logging Unit IP Tap must be installed in line with a SIP phone Only calls sent or received on the connected SIP phone are recorded 2 The 1 Port IP call Logging Unit IP Tap can be put in line with the VoIPDB to record either an extension or a SIP tr...

Page 964: ...rs additional features These additional features make management easier by providing tools to help gather data and generate reports NEC s IP Digital Reporter also provides advanced features which help in gathering data and report generation of usage and performance metrics for analysis and monitoring of the call recording environment Usage analysis provide data metrics on call volume disk usage av...

Page 965: ...ported for the PC hosting Back Office A maximum of four 4 Port Digital Call Logging Units is supported IP Digital Call Logging supports the G 711 CODEC only Licenses for the 1 Port IP Call Logging Unit IP Tap is embedded in the firmware Default Setting None System Availability Terminals NEC DT300 DT700 Series Desktop Terminals NEC IP Digital Call Logging Required Component s 4 Port Digital Call Lo...

Page 966: ...ging Sufficient hard drive space for recording calls Using the default xtr format 168 hours of recording can be stored in 1 gbyte of storage space Windows XP or Windows 7 32 or 64 bit Related Features None Guide to Feature Programming None Operation None ...

Page 967: ...pports the following protocol National ISDN 1 NI 1 ISDN PRI ISDN PRI Integrated Service Digital Network Primary Rate Interface is a Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN service that provides 23 B channels and a single D channel 23B 1D for trunking Caller ID indication displays the calling party telephone number on the LCD of the multiline terminal for CO incoming calls This interface provides vo...

Page 968: ...work A system wide name can be programmed to be sent over the network or the name can be defined on a per station basis If both are programmed the system wide name takes priority over the station name SMDR Includes Dialed Number The SMDR report can optionally print the trunk name entered in system programming or the number the incoming caller dialed i e the dialed ISDN digits This allows you to an...

Page 969: ... split or fit into an empty gap of trunk ports For example if you have a CD 4COT PZ 4COT for Trunks ports 1 8 and 17 24 and the PRI 12 ports was assigned as 25 36 and the PRI is changed to be eight ports instead of 12 ports the new trunk port numbers would be 9 16 because the eight ports can now fix into the gap without being split ports Another example if you have a CD 4COT PZ 4COT for Trunks por...

Page 970: ...stem assigns the Trunk and B Channel association according to the chart below This is based on the Trunk to Trunk Group and Trunk Group Priority assignment in Program 14 05 01 Refer to the charts below for examples Incoming Call Trunk Number B Channel Number StationUser 9 1 Talking on TK009 10 2 11 3 12 4 13 5 14 6 15 7 16 8 17 9 18 10 19 11 20 12 21 13 22 14 31 23 Incoming call from the Network o...

Page 971: ...ferent Terminal Endpoint Identifiers TEIs are assigned to two different Service Profile Identifiers SPIDs The two different SPIDs for each BRI line are related to different trunk logical port numbers One BRI provides two trunk logical ports when it is connected to a CO line Each SPID is assigned to a different TEI This relationship is made in the initialization of the BRI line when it is connected...

Page 972: ...er with the SETUP message and the SPID setup Depending on the system programming this can allow DID calls to be received on BRI trunks and direct them according to the DID Translation Table Program 22 11 Special Conditions Related to Ordering DID Service For ISDN BRI Telcos may refer to this in different ways The reference Verizon uses to order such service is Additional Directory Numbers with no ...

Page 973: ...se of B Channels on an ISDN PRI by allowing a customer to transfer calls without tying up their B Channels for the duration of the call Conditions This feature is available with Version 4000 4 01 or higher CPU software The bearer capability of two calls must be Speech 3 1 kHz Audio Unrestricted Digital Information or compatible This feature is not supported with Automatic Transfer This feature is ...

Page 974: ...nals All Terminals Required Component s To provide ISDN PRI trunk connection CD PRTA To provide ISDN BRI trunk connection CD 2BRIA or CD 2BRIA with PZ 2BRIA NT 1 for each BRI locally provided Related Features Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing Direct Inward Dialing DID Direct Inward Line DIL E911 Compatibility Forced Trunk Disconnect Programmable Function Keys ...

Page 975: ...Setup BRIA PKG ISDN Line Mode Set up and confirm the Basic Configuration data for each CD 2BRIA Use this program to select the ISDN Line Mode 0 Not Used 1 T Point default 1 10 03 03 ETU Setup BRIA PKG Setup Connection Type Set up and confirm the Basic Configuration data for each CD 2BRIA Confirm the connection type for each CD 2BRIA 0 Point to Multipoint 1 Point to Point default 0 10 03 04 ETU Set...

Page 976: ... B Channel 1 Dial up to 20 digits default not assigned 10 06 04 ISDN BRI Setup SPID 2 Assign the SPID Number for B Channel 2 Dial up to 20 digits default not assigned 14 01 36 Basic Trunk Data Setup Sending Caller Name on Outgoing Calls ISDN Trunk Disable Enable sending the Caller Name on outgoing ISDN trunks 0 Disable 1 Enable default 0 15 01 10 Basic Extension Data Setup Sending Caller Name on O...

Page 977: ...Dial Sending Mode ISDN protocol definition Select either enblock or overlap sending 0 Enblock Sending 1 Overlap Sending default 0 10 03 09 ETU Setup PRTA PKG Setup Dial Information Element ISDN protocol definition If Overlap Sending is selected in Program 10 03 08 select either 0 or 1 for the dial information element 0 Keypad Facility 1 Called Party Number default 0 10 03 18 ETU Setup PRTA PKG Set...

Page 978: ...Group Number Assign trunks to trunk groups then go to Program 14 06 01 below to set up Trunk Group Routing Trunk Group Number 0 100 Priority Number 1 200 default Trunk Group 1 with priority in ascending order 21 01 03 System Options for Outgoing Calls Trunk Interdigit Time External The time the system waits for the timer to expire before placing the call in a talk state 0 64800 seconds default 5 2...

Page 979: ... 3 digit DID service enter 3 For additional DID Services refer to Direct Inward Dialing DID on page 2 435 1 8 default 4 22 11 01 DID Translation Number Conversion Received Number For each DID Translation Table entry 1 2000 specify the digits received by the system maximum eight digits default not assigned 22 11 02 Translation Number Conversion Target Number For each DID Translation Table entry 1 2...

Page 980: ...trunk maximum 16 digits per entry When a call is made by an extension which does not have an Extension Calling Number assigned Program 21 13 the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in 21 12 If the Calling Party Number is assigned in both Program 21 12 and Program 21 13 the system sends the data in Program 21 13 maximum 16 digits 1 0 Default All trunks No setting 21 13 01 ISD...

Page 981: ...No 3 National No 4 Network Specific No 5 Subscriber No 6 Abbreviated No default 0 26 12 02 Network Specific Parameter Table for ARS Numbering Plan Identification Define the Numbering Plan Identification Parameter for an ISDN outgoing call 0 System Default 1 Unknown 2 ISDN Plan 3 Data Plan 4 Telex Plan 5 National Standard Plan 6 Private Plan default 0 44 05 11 ARS F Route Table Network Specified Pa...

Page 982: ...m Trunking enter 0 Required for 2 B Channel transfer 0 Disable 1 Enable default 1 15 02 29 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup PB Back Tone Level Adjust the PB Back Tone level when calling an ISDN line 1 63 15 5dB 15 5dB default 32 0dB 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a function key for Caller ID Block for ISDN 63 if required Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 751 by default 00 99 ...

Page 983: ...he Reason for Transfer Select whether or not an extension should display the reason a call is being transferred to their extension Call Forward Busy Call Forward No Answer DND 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 19 04 System Options for Caller ID Wait Facility IE Timer This is the time an ISDN trunks uses to determine the time the system waits for the Caller ID name from the Telco 0 64800 seconds...

Page 984: ...n user ability to use Automatic On Hook Transfer 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 11 14 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction Turn Off or On the Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction If enabled Trunk to Trunk Transfer is impossible 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 11 21 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Restriction for Tandem Trunking...

Page 985: ...UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 13 0 ISDN Compatibility 2 951 5 Dial the outside number and wait for the outside party to answer 6 Hang up 7 LCD returns to idle after the LCD Display Hold timeout Program 20 02 08 ...

Page 986: ...10 03 08 enter 0 In 10 03 08 enter 1 Overlap Enblock In 10 03 09 select either Keypad Facility 0 or Called Party Number 1 for the dial information element Go To A In 14 05 01 assign PRI lines to trunk groups determines available channels for PRI lines Is the amount of time the system waits before placing the call in a talk state sufficient Is the Dial Sending Mode Enblock or Overlap Sending Is the...

Page 987: ...ing the same extensions In 22 02 01 enter 3 Refer to the Elite IPK II Manual for DID programming No In 22 02 01 enter 0 Yes No In 22 05 01 assign all the trunks on a PRI ETU to the same Ring Group In 14 07 01 and 15 06 01 set up the trunk Access Maps for PRI trunks Go to B Should extension ring for incoming calls on PRI trunk In 22 04 01 do not assign extension to PRI trunk s Ring Group In 22 04 0...

Page 988: ... change to a unique alarm sound In 22 01 02 enter 0 In 22 01 02 Enter 1 Also set the interval in 22 01 03 Yes No Do you want to change the way PRI calls ring telephones Change the Ring Tone Range in 22 03 01 and 15 02 02 the tones within each range in 82 01 01 and the ring cadence in 20 15 01 Yes No Do you want line keys or CAP Keys for incoming PRI trunks Consider using CAP Keys Multiple Director...

Page 989: ...lled Party Number 1 for the dial information element Go To A Is the Dial Sending Mode Enblock or Overlap Sending Is the CRC Multi Frame CRC4 used Should system users be able to place outgoing calls on trunks 20 08 02 enter 1 to enable outgoing calls In 20 08 02 enter 0 to disable outgoing calls Yes No In 20 06 01 assign Class of Service to extensions Stop Should telco display the calling number fo...

Page 990: ...u need to restrict certain extensions from placing calls on certain trunks In 14 07 01 for each Access Map select the access options for each trunk In 15 06 01 assign extensions to Access Maps Build an outgoing restriction matrix In the default program extensions have full access to all trunks Yes No Yes Should caller hear DTMF confirmation tones as they are dialing a trunk call In 14 01 10 enter ...

Page 991: ...14 01 03 receive Check the Analog Trunk Timers in 81 01 for compatibility with the telco If desired assign names to trunks in 14 01 01 Do you want to set up an Alternate Trunk Route Access Code Stop In 11 01 01 set up a Service Code for Alternate Trunk Route Access No Yes No Yes Yes No See CAP Key in the Feature Specification manual for more details Trunks No Yes No For example to make 50 the Alte...

Page 992: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 958 ISDN Compatibility THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 993: ...ages The customer is then provided options to confirm the appointment or if they desire to be able to talk to a customer service representative The Appointment Reminder was designed for the following verticals Dentist office Doctor s office Optometrist s office and other medical offices where scheduling is in common use Any other office where appointments are made and need to be reminded The conta...

Page 994: ... minute the call will be marked as NO ANSWER in the database and the call will end This call can be re tried at an interval that is configurable The call will be re tried a configurable amount of times and then the outbound calls to this number will not be tried again Conditions SV8100 CPU software Version 6 02 or higher is required SIP Peer to Peer Program 10 26 03 must be disabled The Appointmen...

Page 995: ...der Server would be 9 123456 2145551111 1 or 2 digit extension numbers are not supported in a system that has IVR Appointment Reminder Server installed Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s CD CP00 US with Version 6 02 or higher installed PZ 32IPLA IPLB PZ 64IPLA IPLB PZ 128IPLA IPLB LK SYS IP TERMINAL SIP1 LIC one license required per Appointme...

Page 996: ...hese programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 12 03 CD CP00 US Network Setup Default Gateway Assign the default gateway IP address for the CD CP00 US 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 254 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 default 0 0 0 0 10 12...

Page 997: ...252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 default 255 255 0 0 10 26 03 IP System Operation Setup SIP Peer to Peer Mode Enable Disable the Peer to Peer feature for SIP IP stations This is a system wide command Once disabled all 3rd party SIP stations no longer use the Peer to Peer...

Page 998: ...ming into it but multiple extensions off of it Assign all the extensions to a group so the CPU knows that the one IP address is assigned to multiple extensions All Appointment Reminder ports must be assigned in a Duplication Group that have no other system ports assigned 0 Not Used 1 Group 1 2 Group 2 3 Group 3 4 Group 4 5 Group 5 6 Group 6 7 Group 7 8 Group 8 9 Group 9 10 Group 10 default 0 16 01...

Page 999: ...for an Appointment Reminder 0 No queuing 1 Hunting When Busy 2 Hunting When Not Answered 3 Hunting When Busy or No Answer default 0 16 02 01 Department Group Assignment for Extensions Use this program to assign all Appointment Reminder ports to the Department Group Department Groups 1 64 Priority 1 999 Default 1 extensions in Department Group 1 with priority in port order Port 1 priority 1 Port 25...

Page 1000: ...Appointment Reminder Server Configuration Guide 84 26 01 IPL Basic Setup IP Address Assign the IP address for each DSP on the IPLA IPLB xxx xxx xxx xxx Defaults Slot 1 172 16 0 20 Slot 4 172 16 0 44 VoIP GW Number 1 8 172 16 0 20 172 16 16 0 27 Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 ...

Page 1001: ...mational messages past due notices reminders and verifications The IVR Broadcast Message solution is designed to call numbers from a managed list and plays a pre recorded message to the call recipient or answering machine Broadcast was designed for the following verticals Medical Offices Utility Companies Emergency Centers Any other office where messages are to be Broadcast to users The contact nu...

Page 1002: ...cast ports must be in the same IP Duplication group Program 15 05 18 The following Web Browsers are supported for configuring the IVR Broadcast Server Internet Explorer 8 Internet Explorer 9 Firefox 3 6 Firefox 4 and Chrome 11 0 The IVR Broadcast Server can be configured for 8 through 16 ports When a external user dials an invalid DTMF digit while listening to a recording the initial message is st...

Page 1003: ...ll Terminals Required Component s CD CP00 US PZ 32IPLA IPLB PZ 64IPLA IPLB PZ 128IPLA IPLB LK SYS IP TERMINAL SIP1 LIC one license required per Broadcast port For 16 ports of Broadcast 16 LK SYS IP TERMINAL SIP1 LIC s must be purchased External IVR Broadcast Server Related Features None ...

Page 1004: ...programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 12 03 CD CP00 US Network Setup Default Gateway Assign the default gateway IP address for the CD CP00 US 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 254 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 default 0 0 0 0 10 12 09 C...

Page 1005: ...252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 default 255 255 0 0 10 26 03 IP System Operation Setup SIP Peer to Peer Mode Enable Disable the Peer to Peer feature for SIP IP stations This is a system wide command Once disabled all 3rd party SIP stations no longer use the Peer to Peer...

Page 1006: ...but multiple extensions off of it Assign all the extensions to a group so the CPU knows that the one IP address is assigned to multiple extensions All IVR Broadcast ports must be assigned in a Duplication Group that have no other system ports assigned 0 Not Used 1 Group 1 2 Group 2 3 Group 3 4 Group 4 5 Group 5 6 Group 6 7 Group 7 8 Group 8 9 Group 9 10 Group 10 default 0 16 01 01 Department Group...

Page 1007: ... Group for a IVR Broadcast 0 No queuing 1 Hunting When Busy 2 Hunting When Not Answered 3 Hunting When Busy or No Answer default 0 16 02 01 Department Group Assignment for Extensions Use this program to assign all Broadcast ports to the Department Group Department Groups 1 64 Priority 1 999 Default 1 extensions in Department Group 1 with priority in port order Port 1 priority 1 Port 256 priority 2...

Page 1008: ...VR Broadcast Server Configuration Guide 84 26 01 IPL Basic Setup IP Address Assign the IP address for each DSP on the IPLA IPLB xxx xxx xxx xxx Defaults Slot 1 172 16 0 20 Slot 4 172 16 0 44 VoIP GW Number 1 8 172 16 0 20 172 16 16 0 27 Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 ...

Page 1009: ...X over IP T 38 between SV8100 and to the SV8500 and SV8300 This feature enables the system to change to the specified CODEC for FAX when the system detects a FAX Tone during conversation Consequently the quality of FAX calls can be secured even if the system uses a low quality CODEC on the call This feature requires the Version 5000 or higher software the PZ IPLB32 64 128 VoIPDB and Version 5000 E...

Page 1010: ... packet is buffered for de jittering decompressed and sent to the circuit switched network Each DSP converts a single speech channel from IP to TDM and vice versa The following are examples of DSP allocation Calling from IP telephone to a TDM telephone uses one DSP Calling from an IP telephone to another IP telephone that is registered to the same CPU uses no DSPs Calling from a TDM telephone to a...

Page 1011: ...e lines for fax machines are set to Special Program 15 03 03 faxing across IP CCIS will always use G 711 codec When using InMail in a CCIS or Netlink network 8 digit extensions and mailboxes are not supported When connecting a SV8100 to a NEAX PBX Link reconnect needs to be turned off in the PBX to the SV8100 The CCISoIP Fax Enhancement feature requires Version 5000 or higher software the PZ IPLB3...

Page 1012: ... 09 the CCIS Call Back is canceled This timer is set on the destination system If the setting extension does not answer the Call Back ring within a specified time Program 20 01 07 the CCIS Call Back is canceled This timer is set on the originating system The called extension has the ability to receive Call Back settings from multiple extensions If this occurs the Call Back requests are returned in...

Page 1013: ...nsfer a second CAP key is accessed When trunks are being shared for outbound calls between CCIS networks all sites must utilize the same trunk access code All IP trunks SIP CCIS or H 323 must be contiguous If any IP trunks are added to a system that already has IP trunks installed and the next set of trunks is not in sequence then all IP trunks are moved to a new set of sequential trunk numbers CC...

Page 1014: ...ides packet size SV8100 K CCIS IP to another SV8100 or to a NEAX PBX SV8300 SV8500 etc for calls from an IP terminal to another IP terminal trunk via Peer to Peer the IP Terminal s Codec must match and the packet size is auto negotiated SV8100 K CCIS IP to a NEAX PBX SV8300 SV8500 etc for calls from an IP terminal to a TDM terminal via Peer to Peer the IP Terminal s Codec and packet size Program 8...

Page 1015: ... and WebPro wizards for feature programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 Networking Manual for programming details Program ...

Page 1016: ... 1 Special default 0 84 21 47 CCIS over IP CODEC Information Basic Setup FAX over IP Type Select FAX over IP type Type1 SV8100 original mode Type2 PBX compatible mode If type2 is selected FAX over IP feature is executed using Program 84 32 settings 0 Type 1 1 Type 2 default 0 84 32 01 FAX over IP Codec Setup FAX Codec Setup FAX over IP codec settings when using CCIS over IP If 4 T 38 UDPTL is sele...

Page 1017: ...ault 15 seconds 20 01 09 System Options Callback Trunk Queuing Cancel Time The system cancels Callback and Trunk Queuing requests after this time The timer is set on the destination system 0 64800 seconds default 64800 seconds 20 09 01 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Second Call for DID DISA DIL E M Override Turn Off or On the extension ability to receive a second call from a DID DI...

Page 1018: ... busy extension to Automatically 1 or Manually 0 receive off hook Signals Allow a busy extension to Automatically 1 or Manually 0 receive off hook signals 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 35 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Block Camp On Turn Off or On extension user ability to block callers from dialing to camp on 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 Program Number Program Name ...

Page 1019: ...one network and communication costs can be reduced This feature is available between UNIVERGE SV8100 Electra Elite IPK II Electra Elite IPK and NEAX PBX systems The following features are provided Automatic Recall Brokerage Hotline Call Forwarding All Calls Call Forwarding Busy No Answer Call Park Retrieve Call Transfer All Calls Calling Name Display Calling Number Display Calling Party Number CPN...

Page 1020: ...ith NEAX PBX Not supported with IPK IPK II Conditions The K CCIS IP with PVA web interface supports Windows Internet Explorer 8 run on any Windows 7 operating system The CD PVAA blade requires the K CCIS IP with PVA with PVA Compact Flash card The K CCIS IP with PVA application can be licensed in increments of four or a single 24 ports Each CD PVAA blade reduces the maximum capacity of trunks in t...

Page 1021: ...Slot 6 Example 1 License Quality 8 Can make or receive a total of eight calls Program 10 54 8 Can assign eight ports and CD PVAA blade starts Example 2 License Quality 8 Cannot assign ports and CD PVAA blade does not start Program 10 54 0 Example 3 License Quality 0 Cannot make or receive calls Program 10 54 8 Can assign eight ports and CD PVAA blade starts Example 4 License Quality 8 Can make or ...

Page 1022: ...for communications across networks where Network Address Translation NAT is performed The audio quality of speech connections depends greatly on the available bandwidth between the CD PVAA blade in the data network As the Internet is an uncontrolled data network compared to an Intranet using this application in an Intranet WAN environment with known or controlled and assured Quality of Service QoS...

Page 1023: ... with the same system The LAN connection is provided by a 10 100 1000 Base T Auto sensing full duplex Ethernet When assigning a Closed Numbering Plan and DID conversion across K CCIS IP with PVA is required the UNIVERGE SV8100 uses the ARS F Route Tables The UNIVERGE SV8100 uses the F Route Tables to assign an Open Numbering Plan When all K CCIS IP with PVA voice channels are busy the UNIVERGE SV8...

Page 1024: ...des the dialed 1 used by the system to identify a long distance call As a result the call is no longer considered long distance and the account code is not required Any calls across CCISoIP station to station or stations transferring trunks that use Quick Transfer to voice mail require an extra CAP key The initial call across the CCSIoIP link uses the first CAP key When the digit 8 is pressed to p...

Page 1025: ...t have the same prefix For an Open Numbering Plan network a user can dial another station by dialing the office location number plus an extension number and the extension number can have the same prefix but the office location cannot be the same An UNIVERGE SV8100 K CCIS network should never have more than five hops tandem connections because of the message delay through each tandem system The max...

Page 1026: ...omatic Recall feature is not supported when the call is originated in the Electra Elite IPK System Centralized Voice Mail is not supported from the Electra Elite IPK when using 5 6 or 7 digit station numbers Refer to the IPK K CCIS Manual for more information In a K CCIS IP with PVA network the Electra Elite IPK must be programmed internally to match the same extension number length of other syste...

Page 1027: ...670918 LK PVA CCISoIP 4 Port LIC license requirements LK PVA CCISoIP 24 Port LIC license LK SYS V3000 Enhancement LIC CD PVAA Blue S S S N S N S N S IP3WW RTU B1 White N S N S N S S S S IP3WW GSWU B1 White N S N S N S S S S LU PVA CONF PORT8 LIC White N S N S N S S S S S Supported N S Not Supported Table 2 62 Migration Supported Blades Continued Blade Color CHS1U US Blue 19 Chassis CHS2U B US Blue...

Page 1028: ... SV8100 2 994 K CCIS IP with PVA Related Features K CCIS IP Guide to Feature Programming None Operation Normal call handling procedures apply Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 Networking Manual for detailed feature information ...

Page 1029: ...all Park Retrieve K CCIS Call Transfer All Calls K CCIS Calling Name Display K CCIS Calling Number Display K CCIS Calling Party Number CPN Presentation from Station K CCIS Centralized Billing K CCIS Centralized BLF K CCIS Centralized Day Night Mode Change K CCIS Centralized E911 K CCIS Dial Access to Attendant K CCIS Enhancements With Version 5000 or higher CPU software the CCIS Call Back feature ...

Page 1030: ...pported with VM8000 InMail Conditions Each UNIVERGE SV8100 system can have up to eight K CCIS routes Eight CD CCTAs can be used to support connect a maximum of eight K CCIS Links The Basic Port Package can have up to 63 T1 trunks for K CCIS voice path The Expanded Port Package can have up to 199 T1 trunks for K CCIS voice path The K CCIS feature shares the CO PBX Tie DID trunks available for the s...

Page 1031: ...y dialing the office location number plus an extension number and the extension number can have the same prefix but the office location cannot be the same When an UNIVERGE SV8100 system is a tandem system in the middle between systems with higher K CCIS feature support including NEAX PBXs only the K CCIS features supported by the UNIVERGE SV8100 tandem system are passed through and supported An UN...

Page 1032: ...ades can be assigned per system Extension numbers cannot start with 0 or 9 Internal Calls transferred calls and K CCIS calls do not provide Caller ID to single line telephones Caller ID Call Return feature is not supported with K CCIS calls Call Park Searching is supported only in the local system When the system searches the Dial Extension Analyze Table Program 11 20 01 it uses prefix searching g...

Page 1033: ...sing a programmed Feature key Softkeys or dialing a service code is not supported CCIS Callback can only be set from a multiline terminal CCIS Call Back target can only be a multiline terminal The following telephones are not supported for either setting or receiving CCIS Callback Single Line Telephones Standard SIP Telephones MH240 Telephones IP DECT Telephones H 323 Telephones ISDN Telephones Fo...

Page 1034: ...ance call As a result the call is no longer considered long distance and the account code is not required Any calls across CCISoIP station to station or stations transferring trunks that use Quick Transfer to voice mail require an extra CAP key The initial call across the CCSIoIP link uses the first CAP key When the digit 8 is pressed to perform the Quick Transfer a second CAP key is accessed When...

Page 1035: ...T1 Trunking with ANI DNIS Compatibility Universal Slots Guide to Feature Programming Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 Key Common Channel Interoffice Signaling K CCIS Manual Operation Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 Key Common Channel Interoffice Signaling K CCIS Manual ...

Page 1036: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1002 K CCIS T1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1037: ...r the initial call However the extension user can preselect a specific trunk if desired When Redial is pressed the display indicates REDIAL SYS The user can then press to redial the number displayed or enter an System Speed Dialing bin number to be dialed Press the Redial key repeatedly to scroll through the last 10 numbers dialed Cursor Key Operation By pressing the Left Cursor Key the user can a...

Page 1038: ...play and single line telephones cannot use this feature When using Automatic Route Selection ARS selects the trunk for the call unless the user preselects Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Automatic Route Selection Repeat Redial Save Number Dialed ...

Page 1039: ... dialed number is displayed Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 12 12 Service Code Setup for Service Access Last Number Dial Assign a service code 5 to use Last Number Dial MLT SLT default 5 11 12 17 Service Code Setup for Service Access Clear Last Number Dialing Data Assign a service code 776 to clear the Last Number Dial MLT SLT default 776 15 02 13 Mult...

Page 1040: ...t the handset optional The system automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call 2 Press Redial OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 3 Dial 5 The system automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call and dials the last number dialed To check the number saved for Last Number Redial 1 Press Redial or the Left Cursor key once The stored nu...

Page 1041: ... software the following features have been added FAX Enhancement Callback to cell phone Memo Display Function VM8000 InMail Automatic Access to VM by Caller ID CID ACD Skill Based Routing Paging External VRS CCIS Call Back With Version 6000 software the following features have been added VM8000 InMail Additionally the following also require Version 6000 Enhancement license 0035 Automatic message p...

Page 1042: ...ion Indicate System Station condition When upgrading to Version 8000 8 01 or higher software four IP Terminal Advanced 5111 licenses are provided If a system with Version 3000 3 01 or lower is upgraded to Version 8000 8 01 or higher software the system gains four IP Terminal Advanced 5111 licenses as soon as it is upgraded With Version 9000 software the following features have been added WebPro Sa...

Page 1043: ... licenses the system to print SMDR reports Remote Software Upgrade This licenses the system to be upgraded remotely InACD This licenses the system to run the In ACD feature Encryption This licenses the SV8100 system to encrypt VoIP calls Identify Dial in call for Mobile Extension or normal Dial in ACD Call Monitor in normal mode Video support over SIP Trunk Video license 0040 IP Trunk license 5001...

Page 1044: ...number of languages that can be used simultaneously for TTS UMS Lite Channel This licenses the number of Voice Channels that can be used in UMS Lite UMS Lite 2 port Upgrade Loading this license enables the upgrade option of the UMS UMS Lite to Full Upgrade This licenses upgrading UMS Lite to UMS full Desktop Application Softphone This licenses the number of Desktop Applications that can be used fo...

Page 1045: ...enses the number of clients that can be monitoring the E911 Security Notifications simultaneously ACD MIS ACD MIS Basic This licenses the SV8100 ACD MIS ACD MIS Add Monitor This licenses the SV8100 ACD MIS for Monitor Report ACD MIS Agent This licenses the SV8100 ACD MIS for Agent Client PVA PVA Conference Channel This licenses the number of Conference Channels that can be used by the PVA PVA IVR ...

Page 1046: ...very License The recovery license turns on all licenses for up to 30 days To request a recovery license go to http eip necunified com Default aspx and then go to the license portal and select the customer and the location of the CD CP00 US This can be done only once per CD CP00 US Conditions The recovery license can be used only once for each UNIVERGE SV8100 CD CP00 US When the recovery license is...

Page 1047: ...n be set to 0 disable only The date counter of the temporary license is decreased one day at twelve o clock midnight of each day When the number of set date expires the temporary license is cleared at twelve o clock midnight of the next day When the system date is changed the date counter of the temporary license is cleared As a result the temporary license is cleared at twelve o clock midnight of...

Page 1048: ...ion License 0030 is installed Default Settings 60 Day Free License is enabled Version 2500 and lower 60 Day Free License is disabled Version 3000 and higher System Availability Terminals None Required Component s Refer to the particular feature for required component s Related Features Programming from Multiline Terminal ...

Page 1049: ...t figure default not assigned 10 49 01 License File Activation Save License File on USB Drive Enable the command to save the license file via USB memory which is issued from the license server Dial 1 TRF Press TRF to cancel default not assigned 10 50 01 License Information License Name Confirm license information that is stored in a system default not assigned 10 50 02 License Information License ...

Page 1050: ...load software 0014 256 Port Yes On Off 0017 Remove License Not Used 0030 Encryption On Off 0031 V3000 Enhanced On Off 0033 V4000 Enhanced On Off 0034 V5000 Enhanced On Off 0035 V6000 Enhanced On Off 0036 V7000 Enhanced On Off 0037 V8000 Enhanced On Off 0038 V9000 Enhanced On Off 0040 SIP Video On Off 0043 Maintenance On Off 0044 Sphericall On Off 0045 Microsoft OCS 2007 CS2010 On Off 0111 1stParty...

Page 1051: ...Multi Languag 1 25 1407 UMS Hosp and PMS On Off 1408 UMS Hosp Languag 1 10 1409 UMS Amis Plus Net On Off 1410 UMS TTS Language 1 10 1424 UMS LITE 2Basic On Off 1425 UMS LITE Ch 1 8 UMS Port License The Lite license does not support Text to speech Networking and will support up to two ports for fax 1426 UMS LITE 2UP On Off 2 Port LITE Upgrade Kit 1427 UMS LITE FULL On Off Upgrade from UMS LITE to F...

Page 1052: ...emote Site 1 999 3005 CA RemoteSiteSoft 1 999 3006 CA Traffic Analys On Off 3007 CA PMS Integratio On Off 3008 CA Web Reporting On Off 3009 CA IPKII CA Migra On Off 3010 CA IPKII CESMigra On Off 3013 CA Add Stations 1 256 3014 CA E911 Reporting 1 999 3200 IP Recorder Basic On Off 3201 REC BASIC SUPV 1 256 3202 REC BASIC PORT 1 256 3300 ESN Registry On Off 3301 ESN Site Monitor 1 999 Table 2 63 Lic...

Page 1053: ...5301 SoftPhone 1 128 5303 SoftPhone Enhance 1 128 5304 Shared Services 1 128 5305 Desktop Client 1 128 5309 DT Enhance 1 999 5310 DT CRM Integrate 1 999 5312 DT InMail Integration 1 999 5313 UC DT Web Client 1 512 6000 PVA CONF Port 1 16 6101 PVA IVR Port 1 16 6200 PVA CCIS Port 1 200 6201 PVA PMS Port 1 200 6300 RGA Conference Port 8 32 6301 RGA Conference Enhancement 1 On Off 7231 DAPS Enterpris...

Page 1054: ...B Drive 1 Manually register the software key 2 Save the License file to the USB Drive 3 Install the USB Drive onto the CD CP00 US 4 In Program 10 49 01 assign to 1 and then hit transfer Multiple License files can be loaded at the same time Upload the License File via WebPro PCPro 1 Manually register the software key 2 Save the license file 3 Connect to the system 4 Go to the Feature Activation scr...

Page 1055: ... the license file to upload Auto Register the License for the System 1 Connect to the system 2 Go to the Feature Activation screen 3 Enter email Address and Password 4 Add Software Key code s If left blank it registers all attached licenses for the Hardware Key code 5 Click on Auto Register ...

Page 1056: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1022 Licensing THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1057: ...ne when they lift the handset If a multiline terminal has Outgoing Trunk Line Preference the user hears trunk dial tone when they lift the handset Outgoing Line Preference also determines what happens at extensions with Idle Line Preference The user hears either trunk dial 9 or Intercom dial tone Auto Answer of Non Ringing Lines With Auto Answer of Non Ringing Lines an extension user can automatic...

Page 1058: ... 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1024 Line Preference Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Direct Inward Line DIL Ring Groups Trunk Groups ...

Page 1059: ...ire an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 14 05 01 Trunk Group Trunk Group Number For Auto Answer of Non Ringing Lines assign trunks to trunk groups This is part of Trunk Group Routing programming Trunk Group Number 0 100 Priority Number 1 200 default Trunk Group 1 with priority in ascendin...

Page 1060: ...extensions 0 Off 1 On default 0 15 02 10 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Ringing Line Preference for Trunk Calls Enable Idle or Ringing Line Preference for trunk calls Program 22 01 01 sets Intercom 0 or trunk 1 call priority 0 Idle 1 Ringing default 1 15 06 01 Trunk Access Map for Extensions For Outgoing Line Preference and Auto Answer of Non Ringing Lines assign trunk Access Maps to extensi...

Page 1061: ...oming Ring Group 1 calls 22 05 01 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment Assign trunks to ring groups Auto Answer for Non Ringing Lines only works for trunks that do not ring an extension Incoming Group Number for Day Night Mode 1 8 0 No Setting 001 100 Incoming Group 102 In Skin External Voice Mail or VM8000 InMail default 1 23 03 01 Universal Answer Auto Answer Let an extension user automatically ...

Page 1062: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1028 Line Preference THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1063: ...for Long Conversation feature the system can provide a warning tone on outgoing trunks calls before the call is disconnected Conditions Long Conversation Cutoff can disconnect incoming and outgoing CO calls after a set time Long conversation cutoff is controlled separately for DISA and Tie Lines Using the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature allows users on outgoing calls to hear a warning t...

Page 1064: ...assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 14 01 14 Basic Trunk Data Setup Long Conversation Cutoff Enable Disable a trunk ability to disconnect incoming and outgoing central office calls automatically 0...

Page 1065: ...onversation Cutoff Outgoing Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Long Conversation Cutoff for outgoing calls 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 21 03 System Options for Long Conversation Long Conversation Cutoff for Incoming Call Enter the time the system waits before disconnecting incoming trunks 0 64800 seconds default 0 20 21 04 System Options for Long Conversation Long Conversatio...

Page 1066: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1032 Long Conversation Cutoff THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1067: ...trunk in the group or from ARS if programmed Outgoing Only loop keys help ensure that an extension will always have a key available for placing calls Both Ways Loop Keys Both Ways loop keys combine the functions of both Incoming Only and Outgoing Only loop keys Both Ways loop keys work well for extension users that handle a moderate amount of calls and don t separate keys for incoming and outgoing...

Page 1068: ...ones are installed CAP key mode must be used When UX telephones are installed Loop key mode must be used Default Settings None System Availability Terminals UX5000 Terminals only Required Component s None Related Features Automatic Route Selection Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing Direct Inward Dialing DID Direct Inward Line DIL Direct Inward System Access DISA Off Hook S...

Page 1069: ...ed programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 14 05 01 Trunk Group Trunk Group Number For Auto Answer of Non Ringing Lines assign trunks...

Page 1070: ...n general loop keys access trunks within specific trunk groups Trunk Access Maps 1 200 default 1 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Program function keys as trunk group loop keys 02 or 05 For additional data enter 0 incoming only 1 outgoing only or 2 both ways Use Programs 15 13 01 or 15 13 02 to define the trunk groups used Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance ...

Page 1071: ...he UNIVERGE SV8100 Programming Manual 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 01 15 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Assign extensions up to 32 to Ring Groups Calls ring extensions according to Ring Group programming There are 100 available ring groups Maximum eight digits Default Extensions 101 108 first eight ports ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls No other extensions ring for incoming ...

Page 1072: ...the call If there are additional calls waiting to be answered your display shows WAITING LOOP KEY To program a loop key 1 Press the SPK key 2 Dial 752 3 Press the key you want to program as a loop key 4 Dial 05 5 Dial the loop key type 0 Incoming only 1 Outgoing only 2 Both ways incoming and outgoing 6 Dial the loop key routing option for incoming outgoing or incoming and outgoing calls If you sel...

Page 1073: ...uestion The SV8100 Maintenance manual contains a number of flow charts to help technicians diagnose and resolve problems that may arise during and after the installation of the UNIVERGE SV8100 system For detailed information on the Maintenance feature refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 System Maintenance Manual Side Tone Auto Setup Per each analog trunk or all analog trunks the most suitable Codec Filte...

Page 1074: ...py the same settings to all analog trunks is shown Side Tone Auto Setup available when the system is in an idle condition Conditions None Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals None Required Component s None Related Features None Guide to Feature Programming None Operation None ...

Page 1075: ... Me Conference code Meet Me Conference lets extension users have a telephone meeting without leaving the office The CD CP00 US provides two blocks of 32 conference circuits allowing each block to have any number of internal or external parties conferenced up to the block limit of 32 Conditions None Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s N...

Page 1076: ...ram Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign function keys for Conference code 07 Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 752 by default 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Default...

Page 1077: ...ker you want to add Single Line Telephone 1 While on a call hookflash and dial 1 2 Dial 703 and the External Paging zone code 1 8 or 0 for All Call OR Dial 1 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1 8 for Internal External Zones 1 8 or 0 for Internal External All Call 3 Announce the zone 4 When a co worker answers your page press hookflash twice 5 Repeat steps 1 4 for each co worker you want to add To ...

Page 1078: ...a call hookflash and dial 1 2 Dial 1 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1 8 for Internal External Zones 1 8 or 0 for Internal External All Call 3 Announce the zone 4 When a co worker answers your page press hookflash twice 5 Repeat steps 1 4 for each co worker you want to add To join a Meet Me Internal Conference 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker or lift the handset OR At the single line te...

Page 1079: ...o worker when their location is unknown If the co worker can hear the Page they can join in the conversation Conditions With Meet Me Paging Transfer a user can page a co worker and have the call automatically transfer when the co worker answers the page An extension access to internal and external page zones affects the Meet Me Paging feature Internal and External Paging keys simplify Meet Me Pagi...

Page 1080: ... Level 1 2 3 11 12 21 Service Code Setup for Service Access Meet Me Answer to Specified Internal Paging Group Customize the Service Codes used for meet me answer to specified internal paging group service access MLT SLT default 764 11 12 22 Service Code Setup for Service Access Meet Me Answer to External Paging Customize the Service Codes used for meet me answer to external paging service access M...

Page 1081: ...ng Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Meet Me Conference and Paging 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 31 02 01 Internal Paging Group Assignment Internal Paging Group Number Assign extensions to Internal Paging Groups i e Page Zones 0 64 0 No Setting Default 0 for IP Station 1 for TDM Station 31 02 02 Internal Paging Group Assignment Internal All Call Paging Receiving Allow Deny All Ca...

Page 1082: ... pick up the handset OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 765 3 Dial the announced External Paging Zone 0 8 You connect to the other party Meet Me Internal Page To make a Meet Me Internal Page 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker or pick up the handset OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 701 and dial the Internal Paging Zone code 0 9 00 32 or 00 64 OR Di...

Page 1083: ...aker or pick up the handset OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 763 if your extension is in the zone called OR Dial 764 and the zone number if your extension is not in the zone called OR Press the Meet Me Conference Paging Pickup key Program 15 07 or SC 751 23 if your extension is in the zone called ...

Page 1084: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1050 Meet Me Paging THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1085: ...ed to a co worker anywhere in the facility Conditions An extension user can set up a conference with their current call and up to 31 other inside parties An extension user can Page a co worker and meet with them on a page zone With External Paging an extension user can broadcast an announcement over paging equipment connected to external paging zones Internal Paging lets extension users broadcast ...

Page 1086: ...y assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 21 04 CD CP00 US Hardware Setup External Source I O Selection on CD CP00 US Def...

Page 1087: ...e Service Code 752 by default 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Default Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 10 06 Class of Service Options Answer Service Meet Me Conference and Paging Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Meet Me Conference and Paging 0...

Page 1088: ...Zone code 1 8 for Internal External Zones 1 8 or 0 for Internal External All Call 3 Announce the call 4 From a multiline terminal when the paged party answers press Transfer or the Transfer softkey OR From a single line telephone when the paged party answers hang up The party is transferred To join a Meet Me External Paging Transfer 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker or pick up handset OR A...

Page 1089: ...n a call hookflash 2 Press Internal Paging Zone key Program 15 07 or SC 751 21 zone or 22 for all internal zones OR Dial 701 and the Internal Paging Zone code 0 9 or 00 64 OR Dial 1 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1 8 for Internal External Zones 1 8 or 0 for Internal External All Call 3 Announce the call 4 From a multiline terminal when the paged party answers press Transfer or the Transfer soft...

Page 1090: ...nsion is not in the zone called OR Press the Meet Me Conference Paging Pickup key Program 15 07 or SC 751 23 if your extension is in the zone called 3 Stay on the line From a multiline terminal when the paged party answers press Transfer or the Transfer softkey OR From a single line telephone when the paged party answers hang up The party is transferred ...

Page 1091: ...Memo Dial number the dialed digits do not output over the trunk Dialing Memo Dial digits does not interfere with a call in progress Conditions When Memo Dial calls out it outdials the entire stored number Memo Dial does not automatically strip out trunk or PBX access codes if entered as part of the stored number Only one number can be stored at a time If a number is already stored in Memo Dial and...

Page 1092: ... are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Operation To store a number while you are on a call 1 While on a call press Memo Dial key Program 15 07 or SC 751 31 2 Dial number you want to store 3 Press Memo Dial key again and continue with conversation...

Page 1093: ...ed number dials out only if you store a trunk access code before the number OR Press the line key The stored number dials out To check to see the stored Memo Dial number 1 Do not lift the handset 2 Press Memo Dial key Program 15 07 or SC 751 31 The stored number displays To cancel erase a stored Memo Dial number 1 Press Speaker 2 Press the Memo Dial key Program 15 07 or SC 751 31 ...

Page 1094: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1060 Memo Dial THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1095: ...nd users that they have Messages Waiting Message Key will Operate as Voice Mail Key The system enhances a telephone Message key function when connected to a system which has voice mail installed When an extension receives a voice mail the Message key can be used to check the number of messages in voice mail and call the voice mail to listen to the messages If no Voice Mail Programmable Function Ke...

Page 1096: ... to the voice mail key in system programming If the following programs are changed while the phone is online a reset of the feature is required before the setting takes effect Program 15 02 35 Message Waiting Lamp Cycle for Calling Extension Program 15 02 36 Message Waiting Lamp Cycle for Called Extension Program 15 02 37 Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp Color Program 15 02 38 Voice Mail Message Wait ...

Page 1097: ...ly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 10 16 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Leaving Message Waiting Requires CPU to be licensed for Hotel Motel Customize the leave message waiting ...

Page 1098: ...ult 7 15 02 36 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Message Waiting Lamp Cycle for Called Extension Select the cycle that the Large LED flashes when the extension has Message Waiting set to the extension 1 Cycle 1 2 Cycle 2 3 Cycle 3 4 Cycle 4 5 Cycle 5 6 Cycle 6 7 Cycle 7 default 3 15 02 37 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp Color Select the Message Waiting flash pa...

Page 1099: ... port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 13 07 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Message Waiting Turn Off or On an extension user ability to leave Message Waiting 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 80 01 01 48 Service Tone Setup Repeat Count Set repeat count for tone 16 Lockout default 0 endless Refer to Table 2 33 Service Tone Setup Defaults Program 80 01 01 on page 2 70...

Page 1100: ...r Message Waiting LED goes out If it continues to flash you have new messages in your Voice Mail mailbox or a new General Message See To check your messages below To cancel all your Messages Waiting This includes messages you have left for other extensions and messages other extension have left for you 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dia...

Page 1101: ...isplay 4 When you find the message you want to answer press Speaker You either Go to your Voice Mail mailbox Listen to the new General Message Automatically call the extension that left you a Message Waiting If you see You have VOICE MESSAGE n MESSAGE New messages in your Voice Mail mailbox CHECK MESSAGE VRS GENERAL MESSAGE A General message in Voice Mail that has not been heard CHECK MESSAGE name...

Page 1102: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1068 Message Waiting THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1103: ...ons com Physical Connections The WL1700 and WL1500 components must be connected to a LAN within the facility The WL1700 and WL1500 components must receive electricity from Power over Ethernet PoE A CAT 5 or better 4 pair 10 100 Base T Ethernet cabling should be used IP Addressing The WL1700 has a statically assigned address and then acts as a DHCP server to issue dynamic addresses to the WL1500 AP...

Page 1104: ...isk for Wi Fi telephony is not limited to the typical wired telephony concerns of eavesdropping on telephone calls or making unauthorized toll calls but is equivalent to the security risk of the data network that connects to the APs Several different security solutions can be implemented with MH240 handset Determining the proper level of security should be based on identified risks corporate polic...

Page 1105: ...on 3000 each IP port required a unique user name and password With Version 3000 all three can be assigned the same user name and password Conditions The WL1700 MS controls additional WL1500 APs and has it s own internal AP Each WL1700 MS can control three additional WL1500 APs If more APs are needed a second WL1700 MS must be added It is recommended to deploy the APs in a 15m square The MH240 has ...

Page 1106: ...r ID history key 08 is not supported on the MH240 as the history is stored internally on the terminal The maximum character length for Caller ID is 10 digits When talking on a MH240 if you walk outside of the coverage area the outside party hears silence for one minute before the trunk call is dropped If the MH240 is on a station call IP or TDM and you walk outside the coverage area the call is no...

Page 1107: ...nternal or external only one MH240 wireless handset can be assigned to ring for the incoming call NAT or NAPT is only supported on the DT700 series phones NAT or NAPT is not supported on the ML440 MH240 the Wireless DECT SIP SP310 or third party SIP phones Refer to Table 2 64 Supported Features for the SV8100 features supported on the MH240 Table 2 64 Supported Features SV8100 Feature Name Support...

Page 1108: ...ry button 08 not supported on first release Also maximum character length on CID name is 10 digits Caller ID Call Return X Central Office Calls Answering X Synchronous ringing is not supported Central Office Calls Placing X Class of Service X Clock Calendar Display X CO Message Waiting Indication X Limited support The light will light up on the MH240 solid it does not flash You will not be able to...

Page 1109: ...igits max where DT300 DT700 can input 64 digits maximum Also when a VRS is installed you do not need to dial an first like you would with a normal phone Digital Trunk Clocking N A Direct Inward Dialing DID X When using a DDI night mode button on the phone the DDI button will not flash accordingly because the LK s do not flash Direct Inward Line DIL X Direct Inward System Access DISA X Direct Stati...

Page 1110: ...p Key X Dterm Cordless II Terminal N A Dterm Cordless Lite II Terminal N A E911 Compatibility X To cancel the E911 alarm from the MH240 press the Hold Key Electra Elite IPK Terminals N A Facsimile CO Branch Connection N A Flash X Flexible System Numbering X Flexible Timeouts X Forced Trunk Disconnect X Group Call Pickup X When using the group call pickup key you do not get caller ID name you just ...

Page 1111: ...s and hangup the call will still be on hold for another 20 seconds before it recalls back to you Hot Key Pad X Not supported at all per bug Hotel Motel X Hotline X Howler Tone Service X Will not play tone Intercom X MH240 cannot be called by a voice call Also if the MH240 has an ICM key programmed on it and they place an internal call on hold the CNF key will not flash anymore It will not flash wh...

Page 1112: ...le Trunk Types X Music on Hold X MH240 listens to local music it cannot use the system MOH Name Storing X Service code 700 is not supported on first release for MH240 s Night Service X MH240 does not display the DAY NIGHT mode info on the LCD Also the DDI mode button does not flash Off Hook Signaling X One Touch Calling X Operator X The MH240 cannot be an operator terminal OPX Off Premise Extensio...

Page 1113: ... Monitor X MH240 cannot initiate a room monitor Save Number Dialed X Secondary Incoming Extension X Secretary Call Buzzer X On a DTERM you press Help and the buzzerkey to see who called you On a MH240 you go off hook dial 751 and then press the key to see who called you Secretary Call Pickup X When using the secretary call pickup feature the MH240 will only get the caller ID number it will not get...

Page 1114: ...ation and change the MH240 name Station Relocation X The code can not be dialed from the MH240 in first release In the future this will be added However you can dial this code from another phone and swap the extensions SV8100 UC Desktop Suite Applications X SV8100 Internal Router N A SV8100 NetLink X SV8100 PoE Gigabit Switch X SV8100 SV8300 Terminals N A Synchronous Ringing X T1 Trunking with ANI...

Page 1115: ...iform Call Distribution UCD X Uniform Numbering Network X Universal Slots N A User Programming Ability X Virtual Extensions X VM8000 InMail X VM8000 InMail Park and Page X Voice Mail Integration Analog X Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys X Voice Over X Added to wishlist Voice Response System VRS X Voice Response System VRS Call Forwarding Park and Page X Volume Controls X The MH240 has lo...

Page 1116: ...t X 06 Transfer Key X 07 Conference Key X 08 Incoming Call Log X 09 Day Night Mode Switch X 10 Call Forward Immediate X 11 Call Forward Busy X 12 Call Forward No Answer X 13 Call Forward Busy No Answer X 14 Call Forward Both Ring X 15 Follow Me X 18 Text Message Setup X 19 External Group Paging X 20 External All Call Paging X 21 Internal Group Paging X 22 Internal All Call Paging X 23 Meet Me Answ...

Page 1117: ...zer X 42 Boss Secretary Call X 43 Series Call X 44 Common Hold X 45 Exclusive X 46 Department Group Log Out X 47 Reverse Voice Over X 48 Voice Over X 49 Call Redirect X 50 Account Code X 51 General Purpose Relay X 52 Automatic Answer with Delay Message Setup X 53 Automatic Answer with Delay Message Start X 54 External Call Forward by Door Box X 55 Extension Name Change X 56 General Purpose LED Ope...

Page 1118: ...Not Used 72 Keypad Facility Key X 73 Keypad HOLD Key X 74 Keypad RETRIEVE Key X 75 Keypad Conference Key X 76 Not Used 77 Voice Mail In Skin X 78 Conversation Recording Voice Mail X 79 Automated Attendant In Skin X 80 Tandem Ringing X 81 Automatic Transfer to Transfer Key X 82 Dterm IP Call Log X 83 Conversation Recording Function VMSU X 84 Drop Key X 85 Directory Dialing X 86 Private Call Refuse ...

Page 1119: ...52 Function Number Function Name Supported Not Supported 00 ICM Key X 01 Trunk Key X 02 Trunk Group X 03 Virtual Extension Key X 04 Park Key X 06 Trunk Access Via Networking X 07 Station Park Hold None X 08 CAP Key X 10 ACD Log In Log Out X 12 ACD Emergency Call X 13 ACD Off Duty Mode X 14 ACD Start End X 15 ACD Terminal Speech Monitor X 16 ACD Waiting X 17 ACD Work Wrap Up Time X Table 2 65 Progr...

Page 1120: ...ling Numbers X 06 Setting the Automatic Transfer for Each Trunk Line X 07 Canceling the Automatic Transfer for Each Trunk Line X 08 Setting the Destination for Automatic Trunk Transfer X 09 Charging Cost Display by the Supervisor X 10 Not Used 11 Entry Credit for Toll Restriction X 12 Night Mode Switching for Other Group X 13 Not Used 14 Not Used 15 Not Used 16 Leaving Message Waiting Requires CPU...

Page 1121: ... Call Refuse X 33 Entry Caller ID Refuse X 34 Set Caller ID Refuse X 35 Dial In Mode Switching X 36 Change the Guidance Message Number on Voice Mail Auto Attendant X 41 Date Setting X 42 Maintenance Service X Table 2 68 Program 11 11 Service Code Setup Setup Entry Operation Function Number Function Name Supported Not Supported 01 Call Forward All X 02 Call Forward Busy X 03 Call Forward No Answer ...

Page 1122: ...ne On Off X 20 Change Incoming CO and ICM Ring Tones X 21 Check Incoming Ring Tones X 22 Extension Name Programming X 23 Second Call for DID DISA DIL X 24 Change Station Class of Service X 25 Automatic Transfer Setup for Each Extension Group X 26 Automatic Transfer Cancellation for Each Extension Group X 27 Destination of Automatic Transfer Each Extension Group X 28 Delayed Transfer for Every Exte...

Page 1123: ... X 46 Set Cancel Call Forward Busy Split X 47 Set Cancel Call Forward No Answer Split X 48 Set Cancel Call Forward Busy No Answer Split X 49 Set Cancel Call Forward Both Ring Split X 50 Set Message Waiting Indication X 51 Cancel Message Waiting Indication X 52 Set Cancel Call Forward All Destination No Split X 53 Set Cancel Call Forward Busy Destination No Split X 54 Set Cancel Call Forward No Ans...

Page 1124: ...vice Access Function Number Function Name Supported Not Supported 01 Bypass Call X 02 Conference X 03 Override Off Hook Signaling X 04 Set Camp On X 05 Cancel Camp On X 06 Switching of Voice Call and Signal Call X 07 Step Call X 08 Barge In X 09 Change to STG Department Group All Ring X 10 Station Speed Dialing X 11 Group Speed Dialing X 12 Last Number Dial X 13 Saved Number Dial X 14 Trunk Group ...

Page 1125: ...cified Group X 27 Call Pickup X 28 Call Pickup for Another Group X 29 Direct Extension Call Pickup X 30 Specified Trunk Answer X 31 Park Hold X 32 Answer for Park Hold X 33 Group Hold X 34 Answer for Group Hold X 35 Station Park Hold X 36 Door Box Access X 37 Common Canceling Service Code X 38 General Purpose Indication X 39 Not Used 40 Station Speed Dialing X 41 Voice Over X 42 Flash on Trunk lin...

Page 1126: ... Shut Off X 57 Tandem Trunking X 58 Transfer into Conference X 59 Trunk Drop Operation for SLT X Table 2 70 Program 11 13 Service Code Setup ACD Function Number Function Name Supported Not Supported 01 ACD Log In Log Out for KTS X 02 ACD Log Out for SLT X 03 Set ACD Wrap Up Time for SLT X 04 Cancel ACD Wrap Up Time for SLT X 05 Set ACD Off Duty for SLT X 06 Cancel ACD Off Duty for SLT X 07 Not Use...

Page 1127: ...er Extension X 05 Set Wake Up Call for Own Extension X 06 Cancel Wake Up Call for Own Extension X 07 Set Wake Up Call for Other Extension X 08 Cancel Wake Up Call for Other Extension X 09 Set Room to Room Call Restriction X 10 Cancel Room to Room Call Restriction Hotel X 11 Change Toll Restriction Class for Other Extension X 12 Check In X 13 Check Out X 14 Room Status Change for Own Extension X 15...

Page 1128: ...e 2 72 Program 11 15 Service Code Setup Special Access Function Number Function Name Supported Not Supported 01 Remote Maintenance X 02 ACD Access in Dial In Conversion Table X 03 Backup Save Data X 04 Not Used 05 System Programming Mode Log On X 06 Wake on LAN to APSU Unit X 07 Not Used 08 Network Message Lamp Control X 09 Transfer to Incoming RingGroup X 10 Not Used 11 Ethernet Port Reset X 12 E...

Page 1129: ...er ID External Ring External Ring External Ring Without Caller ID Non Notification Non Notification Non Notification 4 DIL With Caller ID Non Notification DIL call does not support busy transfer External Ring Without Caller ID Non Notification DIL call does not support busy transfer Non Notification 5 Leased Line With Caller ID It is not assumed to receive Caller ID Without Caller ID Non Notificat...

Page 1130: ...ernal Ring External Ring External Ring Without Caller ID Non Notification Non Notification Non Notification 4 DIL With Caller ID External Ring DIL call does not support busy transfer External Ring Without Caller ID Non Notification DIL call does not support busy transfer Non Notification 6 Delayed VRS With Caller ID External Ring External Ring External Ring Without Caller ID Non Notification Non N...

Page 1131: ...D With Caller ID Internal Ring Internal Ring Internal Ring Without Caller ID Internal Ring Internal Ring Internal Ring 4 DIL With Caller ID Internal Ring DIL call does not support busy transfer Internal Ring Without Caller ID Internal Ring DIL call does not support busy transfer Internal Ring 5 Leased Line With Caller ID It is not assumed to receive Caller ID Without Caller ID Internal Ring Leased...

Page 1132: ... Ring 3 DID With Caller ID Internal Ring Internal Ring Internal Ring Without Caller ID Internal Ring Internal Ring Internal Ring 4 DIL With Caller ID Internal Ring DIL call does not support busy transfer Internal Ring Without Caller ID Internal Ring DIL call does not support busy transfer Internal Ring 6 Delayed VRS With Caller ID Internal Ring Internal Ring Internal Ring Without Caller ID Interna...

Page 1133: ...ireless IP Telephone 2 1099 MH240 Wireless IP Terminals Required Component s CPU with PZ 32IPLA IPLB PZ 64IPLA IPLB or PZ 128IPLA IPLB daughter board installed WL1700 MS WL1500 MS Optional MH240 Wireless IP Handset Related Features None ...

Page 1134: ...owledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 12 02 CD CP00 US Network Setup Subnet Mask The setting of Subnet Mask is invalid when all Host Addresses are 0 If the network section is 0 127 128 0 191 255 192 0 0 223 255 255 The setting of Subnet Mask is invalid 128 0 0 0 192 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 240 0 0 0 248 0 0 0 252 0 0 0 2...

Page 1135: ...en the phone boots up it reports the ext assigned in the phone or chooses the next available extension in the system No password is required Auto mode If set to Auto the SIP user name and password must be entered in the actual IP phone These settings must match 84 22 15 05 27 for the phone to come online Manual mode When the phone boots up it prompts a user to enter a user ID and password before l...

Page 1136: ...Input the User ID for each Personal ID Index 1 512 when using auto or manual registration in 10 46 01 IP multiline terminals only support numerical user IDs not alphanumeric Up to 32 characters default not assigned 84 22 02 DT700 Multiline Logon Information Setup Password Input the Password for each Personal ID Index 1 512 when using manual or auto registration in 10 46 01 Up to 16 characters defa...

Page 1137: ...ther user to login with their own user ID and password To logoff the IP phone Press the Down Arrow Softkey press the Prog Softkey and then press the LOGOFF Softkey 0 Off 1 On default 1 84 22 05 DT700 Multiline Logon Information Setup Nick Name Input the Personal ID from terminal automatically when log on again Up to 32 characters default not assigned 84 26 01 IPL Basic Setup IP Address Assign the ...

Page 1138: ...top the ring without answering the call press the key To place a call on hold 1 Press the key To transfer a call 1 Press the key during the call 2 After hearing the second dial tone enter the telephone number to transfer the call 3 Press the key to complete the transfer OR 4 Press the key before the called party answers Refer to the MH240 User Guide or the UNIVERGE SV8100 Networking Manual for mor...

Page 1139: ...andset or pressing Speaker When using the Handset Transmission Cutoff key during an intercom call with the handset on hook you hear three beep tones and the LED is on solid This also occurs on an outside call When using the Handset Transmission Cutoff key during an intercom call with the handset off hook you hear three beep tones through the handset and the Handset Transmission Cutoff and MIC keys...

Page 1140: ...r Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys If an extension needs handset microphone cutoff program a Handset Transmission Cutoff key code 40 To program a MIC Cutoff key use code 02 as the entry The MIC Cutoff key mutes conversation on a handsfree call but the Handset Transmission Cutoff key mutes the handset transmission on a non handsfree cal...

Page 1141: ...ophone Cutoff key Program 15 07 or SC 751 40 This turns off both the handset and Handsfree microphone To turn your telephone microphone back on 1 Press MIC Use MIC only if you pressed it initially to turn off your Handsfree microphone OR Press the Microphone Cutoff key Program 15 07 or SC 751 40 Use the Microphone Cutoff key only if you pressed it initially to turn off your handset or Handsfree mi...

Page 1142: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1108 Microphone Cutoff THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1143: ...e extension cannot be used as a voice mail port Enhancements With Version 3000 or higher system software the Desktop terminal and the Mobile Extension can both ring If neither extension answers the call can forward to Voice Mail With Version 3000 or higher system software the Calling Party Number CPN can be delivered to the Mobile Extension user Must be coordinated with local Telco With Version 30...

Page 1144: ... calling line identification of the Mobile Extension must match the number in the Speed Dial bin Once internal dial tone is presented the operation is similar to a single line telephone user lifting the handset With Version 9000 or higher any DID with Program 22 11 13 enabled provides internal dial tone to the Mobile Extension must have an incoming calling line identification that matches exactly ...

Page 1145: ...sion they cannot provide an exact indication of busy status if for example the Mobile Extension is active on a call not linked to the UNIVERGE SV8100 The following service codes are supported Table 2 73 Supported Service Codes Type Incoming Feature Program Code Set By Mobile Extension Set to Mobile Extension Night Mode Switching 11 10 01 718 Yes Night Mode Switching for Other Group 11 10 12 618 Ye...

Page 1146: ...Yes Override Off Hook Signalling 11 12 03 709 Yes Set Camp On 11 12 04 750 Yes Yes Cancel Camp On 11 12 05 770 Yes Yes Switching of Voice Call and Signal Call 11 12 06 712 Yes Step Call 11 12 07 708 Yes Yes Barge In 11 12 08 710 Yes Yes Change to STG Department Group All Ring 11 12 09 No Setting Yes Station Speed Dialling 11 12 10 2 Yes Group Speed Dialling 11 12 11 4 Yes Trunk Group Access 11 12 ...

Page 1147: ...onal Extension Park 11 12 35 757 Yes Door Box Access Door Box can also ring the Mobile Extension operates relay 11 12 36 702 Yes Common Canceling Service Code 11 12 37 620 Yes General Purpose Indication 11 12 38 783 Yes Station Speed Dialing 11 12 40 7 Yes Voice Over 11 12 41 690 Yes Flash on Trunk lines 11 12 42 3 Yes Enabled On Hook when Holding SLT 11 12 45 749 Yes Answer On Hook when Holding S...

Page 1148: ... Up Call for Own Extension 11 14 05 631 Yes Cancel Wake Up Call for Own Extension 11 14 06 632 Yes Set Wake Up Call for Other Extension 11 14 07 633 Yes Yes Cancel Wake Up Call for Other Extension 11 14 08 634 Yes Yes Set Room to Room Call Restriction 11 14 09 635 Yes Yes Cancel Room to Room Call Restriction Hotel 11 14 10 636 Yes Yes Change Toll Restriction Class for Other Extension 11 14 11 637 ...

Page 1149: ...Transferred before inter digit timeout Caller ID of incoming call is presented to the Mobile Extension Version 3000 or higher software required Transferred after inter digit timeout CPN of the Transferring Phone is presented to the Mobile Extension Version 3000 or higher software required Transferred Trunk Call without CID Transferred before inter digit timeout CPN of Mobile Extension is presented...

Page 1150: ...cation information to allow the Mobile Extension to dial into the system to access features For the extension DTMF the minimum Detect Level for the DTMF Tone Program 80 03 03 must be set to allow a minimum detection level of 25dBm This entry is dependent on the Detect Level selected in Program 80 03 01 The Mobile Extension uses the to perform a flash so any service codes which begin with must be c...

Page 1151: ...obile Extension can be easily picked up from a telephone in the SV8100 system This is done via a Barge In key 34 Mobile Ext or 34 will Barge in to the Extension that Call Forward Both Ring is set to If no Forward Both Ring is set the key will act as a basic Barge In key Version 5000 or higher required Callback to Cell Phone Description Callback to Cell Phone allows the user to make an incoming cal...

Page 1152: ...after a Callback is made Callback will stop When Calling party number is used Callback follows the Program 21 19 01 outgoing call setting of the Mobile Extension which made the outgoing call The Callback to Cell Phone feature is not supported when using an analog trunk If Flexible ringing is set the Callback to Cell Phone feature works in any type of Program 22 02 01 trunk setting If Flexible ring...

Page 1153: ... 2 1119 System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Speed Dial System Group Station Caller ID Call Forwarding Direct Inward Dialing DID Direct Inward Line DIL Station Message Detail Recording ...

Page 1154: ...bering The Mobile Extension port must be an unequipped extension port on the SV8100 system This extension port is directed to an Abbreviated Dial bin Up to eight digits 1 101 2 102 3 103 99 199 100 3101 512 3513 11 10 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Customize the System Administrator service codes Please refer to the SV8100 Programming Manual for more information on this program 11 11 ...

Page 1155: ...vice Code 752 by default 15 22 01 Mobile Extension Setup Mobile Extension Target Setup For each Mobile Extension number select the Abbreviated Dial bin number to be associated with it 0 1999 0 No setting 1 1999 target of mobile extension default 0 15 22 02 Mobile Extension Setup Connect Confirmation As the Mobile Extension can be a GSM phone it is necessary to be certain a person and not for examp...

Page 1156: ...r ID display at an extension 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 21 12 01 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks Assign Calling Party Numbers for each trunk maximum 16 digits per entry When a call is made by an extension which does not have an Extension Calling Number assigned Program 21 13 the system sends the calling number for the ISDN trunk defined in 21 12 If the Calling Party Number is ass...

Page 1157: ...It is necessary to adjust the DID DISA dial tone tone 44 to a Repeat Count of 250 by default this is set to 0 The system must be reset for this change to take affect 0 255 0 until On Hook Refer to Table 2 33 Service Tone Setup Defaults Program 80 01 01 on page 2 705 80 01 01 Service Tone Setup Tone 54 Progress Tone By default when calling a Mobile Extension the Progress Tone is played to the calle...

Page 1158: ...0 10dBm 0 to 25dBm 15 detect level 1 15dBm 0 to 30dBm 15 detect level 2 20dBm 0 to 35dBm 15 detect level 3 25dBm 0 to 40dBm 15 detect level 4 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 5 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 6 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 7 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 8 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 9 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 10 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 11 65dBm 0 to ...

Page 1159: ...er ID matches the number programmed in the speed dial bin this setting determines the destination of the call Set up the transfer destination number or the IRG number If Transfer mode is Refer to 13 04 03 1 Internal Dial Mode 1 9 0 P R Maximum 24 Characters 2 Incoming Ring Group 0 100 IRG Number P Pause R Recall Additional Digits when using ISDN functionality default not assigned 14 01 30 Basic Tr...

Page 1160: ...nsion Setup Call Back Select whether or not the system will try to call back a mobile extension user 0 Don t call back 1 Call back default 0 20 01 16 System Options Mobile Extension Callback Duration Time Determines the amount of time the system will call back a mobile extension user before abandoning the call 1 64800 seconds default 15 seconds 20 31 24 Timer Class Timer Assignment Answer Time fro...

Page 1161: ... Program 15 22 02 set to 2 No DTMF Confirmation Required The caller is forwarded to the external extension voice mail if available Placing a Call from the Mobile Extension 1 Dial the DID or DIL telephone number for the Mobile Extension If the Caller ID of the Mobile Extension matches the Speed Dial bin entry Program 13 04 and 15 22 internal dial tone is heard by the Mobile Extension user 2 Dial th...

Page 1162: ...ng When setting Call Forwarding from the Mobile Extension the service code s must be defined in Programs 11 11 01 11 11 05 and 11 11 07 To activate or cancel Call Forwarding to from the Mobile Extension 1 When activating Call Forwarding From the Mobile Extension Dial the DID or DIL telephone number for the Mobile Extension If the Caller ID of the Mobile Extension matches the Speed Dial bin entry P...

Page 1163: ...Forwarding condition 1 Set 0 Cancel 4 Dial the destination extension 5 Dial 0 from Mobile Extension only 6 Hang up To cancel Call Forward Follow Me 1 When activating Call Forwarding From the Mobile Extension Dial the DID or DIL telephone number for the Mobile Extension If the Caller ID of the Mobile Extension matches the Speed Dial bin entry Program 13 04 and Program 15 22 internal dial tone is he...

Page 1164: ...0 seconds 1 Call the system Trk1 from the cell phone setting as a mobile extension Ex 150 2 The Cell Phone user hangs up within 3 seconds before system answers 3 System makes the Callback to the cell phone 4 Answer the cell phone within 15 seconds 5 Cell phone hears a dial tone and dials before 30 seconds Receive call from Mobile Extension but system answered 1 Call the system Trk1 from the cell p...

Page 1165: ... from the cell phone setting as a mobile extension Ex 150 2 The Cell Phone user hangs up within 3 seconds before system answers 3 System makes the Callback to the cell phone 4 The Cell Phone answers within 15 seconds 5 The Cell phone hears a dial tone but does not send any DTMF within 30 seconds 6 System disconnects the call ...

Page 1166: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1132 Mobile Extension THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1167: ...nes Ground Start Trunks Ground Start Trunks can be connected to the system Ground and Loop Start Trunks can be mixed in the system per trunk Ground Start Trunks are provided with line supervision to reduce call collisions Loop Start Trunks Loop Start Trunks can be connected to the UNIVERGE SV8100 system Loop Start is assigned per trunk at the associated blade Ground Start and Loop Start Trunks can...

Page 1168: ...gration cabinet Use Program 81 12 to add or remove padding for PRI trunks in a migration cabinet Default Setting None System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s Any Trunk Blade Related Features Automatic Route Selection Call Appearance CAP Keys Caller ID Direct Inward Dialing DID ISDN Compatibility T1 Trunking with ANI DNIS Compatibility ...

Page 1169: ...layed on a multiline terminal for incoming and outgoing calls Up to 12 Characters Default Line 001 Line 002 Line 003 Line 200 25 07 01 System Timers for VRS DISA VRS DISA Dial Tone Time After answering a VRS DISA trunk the system waits this time for the caller to dial the first digit of the DISA password If the caller fails to dial during this time the system drops the call 0 64800 seconds default...

Page 1170: ...ween Dial Pulses 0 Pattern A Pattern A 10pps 650ms 20pps 500ms 1 Pattern B Pattern B 10pps 800ms 20pps 800ms default 1 Pattern B 81 10 02 COT Initial Data Setup Prepause Time Selection Specify the loop open time for a hookflash signal sent to the CO or PBX when Recall on a multiline terminal is pressed A single line telephone generates a hookflash to the CO or PBX line when a single line telephone...

Page 1171: ...ly 2 Trunk Only Default Circuit Resource 01 08 1 Extensions Circuit Resource 09 32 2 Trunks Circuit Resource 33 96 0 Not Used Circuit Resource 97 160 0 Common When PZ BS10 is installed 97 160 are available 14 01 02 Basic Trunk Data Setup Transmit Level Customize the transmit level of the CODEC Gain for each trunk Trunks 1 200 1 63 15 5 15 5dB in 0 5dB intervals default 32 0dB 14 01 03 Basic Trunk ...

Page 1172: ... call the system attaches a DTMF receiver to the Tie Line for this time 0 64800 seconds default 10 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to extensions Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Default Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 09 01 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Second Call for DID DISA DIL E M Ov...

Page 1173: ... Off or On a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to dial 0 for the telephone system operator 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 14 06 Class of Service Options for DISA E M Internal Paging Turn Off or On a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use the telephone system Internal Paging 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 14 07 Class of Service Options for DISA E M External Paging Turn Off or On a DISA ...

Page 1174: ...nassign the International Call Permit Table Program 21 06 02 0 Unassign 1 Assign default 1 3 15 0 2 1 21 05 04 Toll Restriction Class Maximum Number of Digits Table Assignment Select the table Program 21 06 03 to be used to determine the maximum number of digits allowed for outgoing calls 1 4 Table 0 Disable None Default 1 2 6 15 0 3 1 4 2 5 3 21 05 05 Toll Restriction Class Common Permit Code Tab...

Page 1175: ...striction For the Toll Restriction Class you select Enable Disable Intercom Call Restriction If enabled extensions cannot place or receive Intercom calls 0 Disable 1 Enable default 0 21 05 12 Toll Restriction Class PBX Call Restriction Set how the system Toll Restricts calls over PBX trunks If you enable PBX Toll Restriction the system begins Toll Restriction after the PBX access code The user can...

Page 1176: ... Number Intercom 1 Use Conversion Table NTT default 0 34 01 04 E M Tie Line Basic Setup E M Line Dial Tone Enable if the Tie Line should send dial tone to the calling system after the call is set up Disable if the Tie Line should not send dial tone 0 Disable No 1 Enable Yes default 1 34 01 05 E M Tie Line Basic Setup System Toll Restriction Determine if an incoming Tie Line call should be subject ...

Page 1177: ...r E M Tie Line Additional Dial Digits If a Tie Line network requires additional digits to reroute the call to a location enter the digits for the location which should be added to the received digits Up to four digits 0 9 default not assigned 34 07 01 E M Tie Line Timer First Digit Pause E M Immediate Start Define the First Digit Pause E M Immediate Start timer 0 64800 seconds default 3 34 07 02 E...

Page 1178: ...ction for outgoing ARS calls 0 0dBm 25dBm 1 5dBm 30dBm 2 10dBm 35dBm 3 15dBm 40dBm 4 20dBm 45dBm 5 25dBm 50dBm 6 30dBm 55dBm default Type 1 5 0 80 03 02 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Start Delay Time Define the start delay time for DTMF Tone Receiver 0 255 0 25ms 64ms default Type 1 5 0 Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 ...

Page 1179: ... 45dBm 15 detect level 5 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 6 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 7 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 8 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 9 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 10 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 11 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 12 70dBm 0 to 85dBm 15 detect level 13 75dBm 0 to 90dBm 15 detect level 14 80dBm 0 to 95dBm 15 detect level 15 85dBm 0 to 100dBm 1...

Page 1180: ...evel 4 20dBm 0 to 35dBm 15 detect level 5 25dBm 0 to 40dBm 15 detect level 6 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 7 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 8 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 9 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 10 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 11 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 12 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 13 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 14 70dBm 0 to 85dBm 15 detect level 15 75...

Page 1181: ...e On detection time for DTMF Tone Receiver 1 255 15 15ms 3825ms default Type 1 5 1 30ms 80 03 08 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup OFF Detect Time Define the Off detection time for DTMF Tone Receiver 1 255 15 15ms 3825ms default Type 1 5 1 30ms 80 04 01 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Detection Level Define the detection levels for the Call Progress Tone Detector 0 0dBm 25dBm 1 5dBm 30dBm 2 10dBm 35dBm 3...

Page 1182: ... Progress Tone Detector Setup S N Ratio Define the S N ratio for the Call Progress Tone Detector 0 4 0dB 20dB default Type 1 DT 4 20dB Type 2 BT 4 20dB Type 3 RBT 4 20dB Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 04 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup No Tone Time Define the no tone time for the Call Progress Tone Detector 0 255 30 30 7680 ms The formula is 30 30N When set to N 1 it means 30 30 1 60 When set to N 255 it...

Page 1183: ... ON Maximum Time Define the on maximum time for the Call Progress Tone Detector 0 255 30 30 7680ms default Type 1 DT 0 Type 2 BT 20 450ms Type 3 RBT 40 1230ms Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 08 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup OFF Minimum Time Define the off minimum time for the Call Progress Tone Detector 1 255 30 30 7680 ms default Type 1 DT 1 60ms Type 2 BT 12 300 ms Type 3 RBT 83 2520ms Type 4 Type 5 0...

Page 1184: ...4 520ms 81 11 04 Tie Line Initial Setup Tie Line Release Detect Time Selection Specify the before the circuit disconnect detected on the Tie Line on the distant system side is recognized as Tie Line release 0 15 130ms 1950ms 0 No Setting default 4 520ms 81 11 05 Tie Line Initial Setup Incoming Signal Detect Time Selection Specify the time after the incoming signal from another system is detected b...

Page 1185: ...ximum time for receiving an acknowledgment signal from a distant system before sending a busy tone 0 8 1 15 1 15 seconds default 7 81 11 11 Tie Line Initial Setup Disconnect Recognition Time Selection Specify the minimum time before a disconnected circuit can be accessed again 1 15 0 1 1 5 seconds 0 No Setting default 3 0 3 seconds 81 11 12 Tie Line Initial Setup Automatic Release Signal Detection...

Page 1186: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1152 Multiple Trunk Types THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1187: ...rganizations if radio television broadcasts or music other than material not in the public domain are transmitted through the Music on Hold feature of telecommunications systems NEC America NEC Unified Solutions Inc and NEC Infrontia hereby disclaim any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license Conditions A maximum of 97 Music on Hold sources are possible 96 from PGD 2 U10 port...

Page 1188: ...d WebPro wizards for feature programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 04 0...

Page 1189: ...External Speaker CN9 2 External MOH CN8 BGM source CN9 Relationship between CN number and Relay number are as follows CN8 Relay2 CN9 Relay1 default 1 14 08 01 Music on Hold Source for Trunks MOH Type Set the Music on Hold source for each trunk 0 Internal External MOH 1 Customer Provided Source Connected to BGM Port 2 Customer Provided Source Connected to ACI Port default 0 14 08 02 Music on Hold S...

Page 1190: ...e used for the source of music heard on DID trunks When a sound source type is 2 in above 0 96 default 0 80 01 01 Service Tone Setup Music On Hold Tone Service Tone 64 Customize the repeat count for the music on hold tone if Program 10 01 01 is set to 2 0 255 0 Until On Hook Default 0 Refer to Table 2 33 Service Tone Setup Defaults Program 80 01 01 on page 2 705 80 01 02 Basic Tone Number Customiz...

Page 1191: ... Daylight Savings Mode Enable Disable the system ability to adjust the time for daylight savings standard time 0 Disable 1 Enable default 1 11 06 01 ACI Extension Numbering Each ACI port must be assigned an extension number Assign the extension numbers to ACI software ports Select a number outside of the normal extension number range ACI Ports 1 96 default not assigned 11 08 01 ACI Group Pilot Num...

Page 1192: ...og Communications Interface ACI on page 2 49 for additional information 80 01 02 Service Tone Setup Basic Tone Number The following features require that the system tones listed below be changed to match the table After changing these settings the chassis must be reset for the changes to take effect Call Screening Call Holding Busy Greeting Await Answer Transfer 1 33 0 No Tone 33 Default Time Slot...

Page 1193: ...UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 13 0 Music on Hold 2 1159 Communications Interface feature for more ...

Page 1194: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1160 Music on Hold ...

Page 1195: ...UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 13 0 Music on Hold 2 1161 Operation None ...

Page 1196: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1162 Music on Hold THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1197: ...lable When using Name Storing the system now provides additional characters which can be used These characters are available with any option which allows Name Storing Speed Dial System Group Station One Touch Keys Extension Name Trunk Naming Conditions Display telephones use extension names for Directory Dialing Single line extensions cannot program names If a name is not assigned to the Extension...

Page 1198: ...ed programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 11 22 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Extension Name Programming Customize the service code used to edit Extension Name Programming MLT default 700 14...

Page 1199: ...rmine if a station Number is Displayed or Not Displayed in the LCD when the phone is idle 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 48 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Station Name Display Determine if a station Name is Displayed or Not Displayed in the LCD when the phone is idle 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 51 Class of Service Options Suppl...

Page 1200: ...cters G I g i 4 5 Enter characters J L j l 5 6 Enter characters M O m o 6 7 Enter characters P S p s 7 8 Enter characters T V t v 8 9 Enter characters W Z w z 9 0 Enter characters 0 ô Õ ú ä ö ü Enter characters B E S Accepts an entry only required if two letters on the same key are needed ex TOM Pressing again Space In system programming mode use the right arrow Softkey instead to accept and or ad...

Page 1201: ...d SIP extensions This means that up to 24 simultaneous people can be in one Audio Conference or in multiple Audio Conferences at the same time sum total equals 24 This simultaneous audio conferencing is in addition to any web collaboration conferencing as well Each NMC CD SVRU blade comes with eight Audio and eight Web Conference port licenses at default Additional licenses can be added if needed ...

Page 1202: ...VR Forward usage data and associated CDRs to an external billing system via TCP IP based interface Operator assisted conference Secure Audio Conference calls Table 2 76 Feature Support Table for Standard SIP Device Feature How it Works Benefits Ad hoc Meet Me audio conference Moderator and participants agree upon a start time and PIN to use When people dial in and enter their PIN they are placed i...

Page 1203: ... display associated caller name e g Security Alert leading to higher percentage of people picking up a message Control the speed of dialing out Display real time call activity and a progress bar on a Web Portal Table 2 77 Feature Support Table for Standard SIP Device Feature How it Works Benefits Desk Top Sharing Mode Moderator shares his her Desktop with fellow participants Show any document or c...

Page 1204: ...pport Table for Standard SIP Device Feature How it Works Benefits Pre recorded message delivery Pro actively build call out groups Pre record messages and tie groups and messages into Group Alert sessions Trigger dial out from Web Portal or with incoming phone call Make messaging a planned activity No need to search for address books at the time of actual need On the fly Message Delivery Dial into...

Page 1205: ...ted Desk Top sharing travels on port 1270 If that port is not available it will tunnel to port 80 but performance is impacted Each Web Conference participant uses approximately 277Kb s per video stream Web Conference participant video resolution is limited to 640 X 380 Manual registration is not supported for NMC SIP extensions Encryption is not supported on NMC extensions NMC is not supported on ...

Page 1206: ...ommonly used These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro wizards for feature programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Descri...

Page 1207: ...lephone programming identity follows the port number not the extension number Up to eight digits 1 101 2 102 3 103 99 199 100 3101 512 3513 14 02 23 Analog Trunk Data Setup Caller ID Receiving Method Set to 0 Wait for Caller ID for all trunks 0 Wait Caller ID 1 Immediate Ring default 1 15 03 03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Terminal Type Set to 1 Special for all XOP ports 0 Normal 1 Speci...

Page 1208: ...mber Set Payload Number to 101 96 127 default 96 84 26 01 IPL Basic Setup IP Address Set static IP address for each of the DSP s on the local network xxx xxx xxx xxx Defaults Slot 1 172 16 0 20 Slot 4 172 16 0 44 VoIP GW 1 8 172 16 0 20 172 16 0 27 90 61 01 Manual Slot Install Install This can only be set via phone programming For the slot the SVRU is installed in set Program 90 61 01 to 3 Server ...

Page 1209: ...ned Night Answer ANA With Assigned Night Answer ANA Night Service has calls ring extensions directly Assigned Night Answer provides an answering point for Night Service calls For certain applications this may be more appropriate than Universal Night Answer For example you could program trunks to ring the security station telephone during off hours For more information on assigning trunks to ring e...

Page 1210: ... Function Key Program 15 07 01 or SC 751 09 0 to toggle night modes You can determine in programming Program 12 08 01 how many modes through which the user toggles Note that the additional data for the Programmable Function Key must be set to 0 for the toggle function to work Conditions Almost all features are affected by Night Mode except the following Dial Tone Detection External Alarm Sensors F...

Page 1211: ...ent for the Night Mode Group the virtual extension is assigned to default Night Mode Group 1 and not the Night Mode Group of the keyset the virtual is appearing on Default Setting System is always in the Mode 1 System Availability Terminals None Required Component s None Related Features Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing Direct Station Selection DSS Console Paging Externa...

Page 1212: ... used for Day Night mode switching for another Night service group MLT default 618 11 12 43 Service Code Setup for Service Access Answer No Ring Line Universal Answer Customize the service code 0 used to manually answer a Universal Night Answer MLT SLT default 0 11 12 50 Service Code Setup for Service Access General Purpose Relay Define the service code used for turning the general purpose relay o...

Page 1213: ...eekly Night Service Switching Assign one of the 10 Time Patterns programmed in Program 12 02 01 to each day of the week Night Mode Service Group Numbers 01 32 Time Schedule Pattern Number 1 10 Day of Week 01 Sunday default Time Pattern 2 02 Monday default Time Pattern 1 03 Tuesday default Time Pattern 1 04 Wednesday default Time Pattern 1 05 Thursday default Time Pattern 1 06 Friday default Time P...

Page 1214: ... an original text message which is displayed on an LCD of multiline terminal in each Night Mode Night Mode Service Group Number 01 32 Day Night Mode 1 8 Text Message Maximum 12 Characters alphabetic or numeric Default Text Messages for Day Night Modes Mode 1 No Setting Mode 2 Night Mode 3 Midnight Mode 4 Rest Mode 5 Day2 Mode 6 Night2 Mode 7 Midnight2 Mode 8 Rest2 12 08 01 Night Mode Service Range...

Page 1215: ...s 1 200 Default Access Maps 1 200 Trunk Ports 1 200 assigned with option 7 access incoming and outgoing access and access when trunk is on Hold 15 06 01 Trunk Access Map for Extensions For Universal Night Answer UNA answering assign Trunk Access Maps 1 200 to extensions Make one entry for each Night Service mode Trunk Access Maps 1 200 default 1 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign Night Ser...

Page 1216: ...ility to use Universal Auto Answer no service code required 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Assign the incoming trunk type for each trunk There is one item for each Night Service Mode 1 8 0 Normal 1 VRS second dial tone if no VRS installed 2 DISA 3 DID 4 DIL 5 E M Tie line 6 Delayed VRS 7 ANI DNIS 8 DID DDI Mode Switching default 0 22 04 01 Incoming Extension R...

Page 1217: ...s to Ring Groups 1 100 you make a different entry for each Night Service mode Incoming Group Number for Day Night Mode 1 8 0 No Setting 001 100 Incoming Group 102 In Skin External Voice Mail or VM8000 InMail default 1 22 08 01 DIL IRG No Answer Destination If a Universal Answer call rings longer than the DIL No Answer Time Program 22 01 04 it routes to the Ring Group specified in this option 0 No ...

Page 1218: ...ode 2 Night 1 Mode 3 Midnight 1 Mode 4 Rest 1 Mode 5 Day 2 Mode 6 Night 2 Mode 7 Midnight 2 Mode 8 Rest 2 Mode To transfer a call to the Universal Answer External Page zones 1 Place the CO call on hold and dial the Transfer to Trunk Ring Group code assigned in Program 11 15 09 You hear a confirmation tone 2 Hang up The call rings over the External Paging enabling anyone to answer the call ...

Page 1219: ...ng gives the caller the choice of using Off Hook Signaling or activating other features Extensions without automatic signaling have manual signaling The users can dial a service code or press a Programmable Function Key to send Off Hook Signaling to the called telephone Selectable Off Hook Signaling Mode The Off Hook Signal can be muted ringing no off hook ringing or a beep in the handset based on...

Page 1220: ...block a caller s ability to dial to camp on You cannot send off hook signals to an extension busy on a Handsfree Speakerphone call The called extension large LED flashes fast with no ringing The setting of Program 20 13 06 affects the BLF display for Hotline and Reverse Voice Over Refer to Hotline and Reverse Voice Over features for additional information You cannot send off hook signals to an ext...

Page 1221: ...ltiline Terminals and Single Line Telephones Required Component s None Related Features Callback Call Waiting Camp On Direct Inward Dialing DID Handsfree and Monitor Hotline Intercom One Touch Calling Programmable Function Keys Reverse Voice Over Single Line Telephones Analog 500 2500 Sets ...

Page 1222: ...g Override MLT SLT default 709 11 16 04 Single Digit Service Code Setup Intercom Off Hook Signaling Assign a one digit service code to be used for off hook signaling default 15 02 12 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Off Hook Ringing For each extension set off hook Ringing type 0 muted 1 none 3 beep in speaker 4 beep in handset 5 Speaker Handset Beep DID DNIS and DIL trunks can use any of the o...

Page 1223: ...e Block Manual Off Hook Signaling Turn Off or On an extension user ability to block off hook signals manually sent from a co worker 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 18 06 Service Tone Timers Interval of Call Waiting Tone Set the time between off hook Signaling alerts 0 64800 seconds default 10 80 01 01 39 Service Tone Setup Repeat Count Customize the system basic tones and system service tones...

Page 1224: ... hear ringback To have your call voice announce dial 1 Receiving Off Hook Signaling on a single line telephone while engaged on an internal or external call 1 When Off Hook Signaling is heard in the receiver press the Flash Key to answer the call The first call is placed on hold 2 Press the Flash Key again to toggle between the two calls If the single line phone hangs up with the active call the o...

Page 1225: ... user presses key 1 to call the company then one of keys 2 5 to ring the employee to which they want to speak An extension user or system administrator can optionally store a Flash command under a One Touch key This is helpful for One Touch Keys used as Station Speed Dial bins The stored Flash may be helpful to access features of the connected Telco PBX or Centrex Conditions One Touch keys provide...

Page 1226: ...n and then sends the rest of the digits Entering a P pause in a DSS One Touch dial string can be used for CO calls Intercom calls or after the for ISDN calls ARS with Max Digits is not supported when entering the or a P pause in the dial string of a DSS One Touch button Default Setting None System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals and DSS Consoles Required Component s None Related Fea...

Page 1227: ...mal Function Code default Service Code 751 00 99 Appearance Function Code default Service Code 752 11 11 17 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Programmable Function Key Programming 2 Digit Service Codes Set the service code default 751 to assign 2 digit function codes to the Function keys MLT default 751 20 13 18 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Programmable Function Key Pr...

Page 1228: ... Personal Speed Dial a Dial the general trunk access code 9 OR Dial the Specific Trunk Service Code 9 plus the trunk number e g 005 OR Dial the Trunk Group Service Code 704 plus the trunk group number e g 1 b Dial the number you want to store The total of the digits stored in steps 3 and 4 cannot exceed 24 Valid entries are 0 9 and To enter a pause press MIC To store a Flash press Redial c Press H...

Page 1229: ... number e g 1 b Dial the telephone number to be stored c Press Hold d Press Speaker For Service Codes a Dial the Service Code you want stored For example if you want a One Touch Key to automatically clear your Last Number Redial enter 776 b Press Hold c Press Speaker Checking the One Touch Keys To check the function of a One Touch key 1 Press the Help key 2 Press the One Touch key The stored funct...

Page 1230: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1196 One Touch Calling THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1231: ... have up to 32 incoming calls queued before additional callers hear busy tone The operator extension cannot be a CAR Key or virtual extension When dialing 0 from the in skin Voice Mail across CCIS and CCISoIP it follows what is in the operator set up Extensions and trunks can be assigned to an operator group A call to an operator that is busy rolls to the next operator in the operator group Defaul...

Page 1232: ...riority of a call when calling an operator telephone 0 Step 1 Circular 0 Step 1 Circular default 0 20 17 01 Operator Extension Operator s Extension Number Designate an extension an operator When an extension user dials 0 or 9 defined by Program 11 01 Type 5 calls go to the operator selected in this program If you do not assign an extension in Program 90 11 01 system alarms appear on the extension ...

Page 1233: ...UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 13 0 Operator 2 1199 Operation Refer to the individual features for operation ...

Page 1234: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1200 Operator THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1235: ... four off premise circuits The maximum loop resistance between a CD 4DIOPA and an Off Premise Extension Single Line Telephone is 1600ohms including single line telephone set resistance The CD 4DIOPA has a built in ringer RSG This blade supports Synchronous Ringing and detects Dial Pulse DTMF tones The CD 4DIOPA does not support an interface to a Voice Mail unit Default Setting None System Availabi...

Page 1236: ...ata depending on the blade installed in the slot Please refer the SV8100 Programming Manual for a more detailed description of this program The assigned data varies depending on the blade installed in the slot Please refer to the SV8100 Programming Manual for a more detailed description of the 10 03 XX programs 10 09 01 DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup Allocate the circuits on the CD CP00 US ETUs ...

Page 1237: ...nable Disable Answer on hook when Holding for SLT 0 Disable No 1 Enable Yes default 1 15 03 09 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Caller ID Function For External Module Enable Disable the Caller ID FSK signal for an external Caller ID module or a 3rd Party vendor telephone with Caller ID display Important If voice mail is used this setting must be disabled for the system integration codes to b...

Page 1238: ...than the time in Program 20 03 04 the system considers all digits received Type 1 The system passes the received digits from the single line telephone to the trunk immediately If the single line telephone has a Last Number Dial key without a pause this key may not be able to use the Last Number Dial key with the Type 1 setting When using a third party external paging device set this option to 1 In...

Page 1239: ...nued Dialing DTMF Signal on ICM Call Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Continued Dialing which allows DTMF signal sending while talking on extension 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 15 01 Ring Cycle Setup Normal Incoming Call on Trunk Define the ring cycle for INcoming Internal calls Ringing Cycle 1 13 default 2 20 15 03 Ring Cycle Setup Incoming Internal Call Define the incoming...

Page 1240: ...to 45dBm 15 detect level 5 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 6 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 7 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 8 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 9 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 10 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 11 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 12 70dBm 0 to 85dBm 15 detect level 13 75dBm 0 to 90dBm 15 detect level 14 80dBm 0 to 95dBm 15 detect level 15 85dBm 0 to 100dBm...

Page 1241: ...t level 4 20dBm 0 to 35dBm 15 detect level 5 25dBm 0 to 40dBm 15 detect level 6 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 7 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 8 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 9 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 10 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 11 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 12 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 13 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 14 70dBm 0 to 85dBm 15 detect level 15...

Page 1242: ...er 0 9 1dB 10dB default Type 1 0 1dBm Type 2 0 1dBm Type 3 0 1dBm Type 4 0 1dBm Type 5 0 1dBm 80 03 07 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup ON Detect Time Define the On detection time for DTMF Tone Receiver 1 255 15 15ms 3825ms default Type 1 1 30ms Type 2 1 30ms Type 3 1 30ms Type 4 1 30ms Type 5 1 30ms 80 03 08 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup OFF Detect Time Define the Off detection time for DTMF Tone Receiver 1 2...

Page 1243: ...ounce Protect Time Specify a time for detection of a valid 0ff Hook indication that is long enough to prevent an unintentional bounce of the receiver from being detected as a new off hook indication from a single line telephone 0 No Setting 1 15 100ms 1 5sec default 3 82 11 02 LCA Initial Setup HookFlash Start Time Specify the minimum hookflash time from a Single Line Telephone or analog Voice Mai...

Page 1244: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1210 OPX Off Premise Extension THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1245: ...r example you can Page your company warehouse and outside loading dock at the same time Combined Paging is available for zones 1 8 and All Call Refer to Paging Internal on page 2 1223 for more on setting up Combined Paging In addition you can program a Function Key as a Combined Paging key Using the External Page Function Key when an All Call External Page Function Key is programmed it includes bo...

Page 1246: ...l for more information which describes how many of the 56 can be for paging door box or Music on Hold MOH Phones that have an APR APA installed do not pass voice to a trunk used for paging until the interdigit timer expires Program 21 01 03 If a Central Office CO trunk port is used for external paging a Multiline Terminal with an AP A R Unit installed or the DTR 2DT 1 multiline telephone does not ...

Page 1247: ...Pro wizards for feature programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 05 01 Gen...

Page 1248: ... 99 Normal Function Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 752 by default 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Default Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 13 29 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Paging Display Turn Off or On an ...

Page 1249: ...nal Paging Speaker Zones 1 9 0 No Ringing No 1 Ringing Yes default 0 31 06 01 External Speaker Control Broadcast Splash Tone before Paging Paging Start Tone Enable Disable splash tone before Paging over an external zone If enabled the system broadcasts a splash tone before the External Paging announcement 0 No Tone None 1 Splash Tone 2 Chime Tone default 2 31 06 02 External Speaker Control Broadca...

Page 1250: ...Internal Page Zone is busy or if there are no extensions in a page group the page may be announced as an External Page only 3 Make an announcement 31 07 01 Combined Paging Assignments Assign an External Paging Group 0 8 to an Internal Paging Zone 0 All Call Zones 1 64 for Combined Paging When an extension user makes a Combined Page they simultaneously broadcast into both the External and Internal ...

Page 1251: ...r All Call OR Dial 1 and the Combined Paging Group code 1 8 or 0 for Internal External All Call Display indicates the Combined Paging as an External Page If the Internal Page Zone is busy or if there are no extensions in a page group the page may be announced as an External Page only 5 Make an announcement ...

Page 1252: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1218 Paging External THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1253: ...e paging telephone hangs up during paging VRS External paging stops If an invalid VRS number is dialed or there is no recorded VRS greeting the caller hears an error tone Paging External VRS will not play the starting and ending tone if enabled If the starting and ending tones are needed they must be recorded in the VRS message itself After the recorded VRS message is finished the paging telephone...

Page 1254: ...DN Terminals H 323 Terminals Standard SIP Terminals Required Component s PZ VM21 VM8000 InMail Compact Flash CPU license for VRS CD 8DLCA CD 16DLCA or CD LTA for PGD 2 U10 ADP PGD 2 U10 ADP for Zone Paging 1 or 2 way amplifier and speakers locally provided Related Features Paging External Voice Response System VRS Embedded VRS Voice Response System VRS ...

Page 1255: ...or press Speaker at multiline terminal 2 Dial 703 and then the External Paging Zone code 1 8 0 for all call Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 10 20 Service Code Setup for System Administrator VRS Record Erase Message Define the service code to record or erase a VRS message MLT SLT default 616 11 12 20 Service Code Setup for Service Access External Paging...

Page 1256: ...ng To Program One Touch Key The following example shows how to program a On Touch key for External Paging zone 2 to play VRS greeting number 099 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 7 5 1 3 Press Line Key to be programmed 4 Dial 0 1 Function Code for DSS One Touch Key 5 Dial 7 0 3 2 0 9 9 6 Press Speaker When using the Paging External VRS feature FC 20 External All Call Paging code cannot be used as a programma...

Page 1257: ... All Call External Page Function Key is programmed it includes both the external zones and the assigned internal zone s If the internal page zone is busy or there are no extensions in a page group the announcement is made on the external zones only Conditions Internal Paging does not require a PGD 2 U10 ADP A maximum of 50 extensions is supported for Internal or All Call Paging Group A maximum of ...

Page 1258: ...y device does not exist on the network a dummy gateway address on the same subnet must be defined When a paging group contains all IP phones the page is sent via a multicast message from the initiating IP phone If a paging group has IP and TDM phones when and IP phone initiates the page a message is sent to the CPU and the CPU sends the multicast message for the IP phones To receive the All Call P...

Page 1259: ...tup MLT SLT default 1 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign function keys for Internal Paging Zones code 21 page zone and Internal All Call Paging code 22 Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 752 by default 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of...

Page 1260: ...nternal Paging Group Assignment Internal All Call Paging Receiving Turn Off or On All Call Internal Paging for each extension If allowed extensions can make and receive All Call Internal Paging announcements If prevented extension can make only All Call Internal Paging announcements 0 Off 1 On default 0 31 03 01 Internal Paging Group Settings Internal Paging Group Name Program names for the Intern...

Page 1261: ...ned Paging as an External Page If the Internal Page Zone is busy or if there are no extensions in a page group the page is announced as an External Page only 3 Make an announcement 4 Press Speaker to hang up Single Line Telephone 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 701 and the Paging Zone number 0 9 or 00 64 Dialing 0 or 00 calls All Call Internal Paging Dial 1 and the Combined Paging Group code 1 8 or 0 fo...

Page 1262: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1228 Paging Internal THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1263: ...k Recall Class of Service option parks a call it recalls after the Extended Park Orbit Recall time When an extension with the Normal Park Orbit Recall Class of Service option parks a call it recalls after the normal Park Orbit Recall time however the call remains in the park orbit until it is answered Programmable Function Key and Service Code Available for Personal Park The Personal Park feature ...

Page 1264: ...p Call is supported in the local system only A parked call cannot be retrieved from Hold Dial Tone Second dial tone When a call is parked from a virtual extension the virtual extension is released When parking a call from a virtual extension Programs 15 02 21 and 15 18 01 must be set to 1 Park Group assignment is by the terminal extension not the virtual extension When a call parked from a virtual...

Page 1265: ...is unplugged the Personal Park is cancelled and the held caller hears a busy tone This feature does not work when calling a Networked or virtual extension If an extension already has a call in their Personal Park Orbit the Personal Park for a Co Worker s Extension will not work until the first call is retrieved from Park A Personal Park Programmable Function Key or the Soft Key must be used to par...

Page 1266: ...re Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 12 31 Service Code Setup for Service Access Park Hold Set the service code used for placing a call in Park MLT SLT default 6 11 12 32 Service Code Setup for Service Access Answer for Park H...

Page 1267: ... Release 1 Land On the Key default 0 15 18 02 Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options Display Mode when pacing a call on Virtual Extension Key Define whether calls to or from a Virtual Extension Key display the Virtual Extension Key name or the name of the extension on which it resides 0 Secondary Extension Name 1 Actual Station Name default 0 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class...

Page 1268: ...old or Park rings an extension for this time After this time the system invokes the Hold recall time again Cycling between Hold recall time and callback time and normal or extended Recall Park Hold time continues until a user answers the call 0 64800 seconds default 30 24 01 06 System Options for Hold Park Hold Time Normal Set the Park Hold Time A call left parked longer than this time recalls the...

Page 1269: ...m 20 11 27 Call Park AutoSearching to search for an idle park location in ascending order 3 Use Paging to announce the call 4 Press Speaker to hang up If not picked up the call recalls to you The parked call recalls after the Park Hold Time Program 24 01 06 The call rings the extension to which it recalled for the Hold Recall Callback Time Program 24 01 02 The call then goes on Hold for the Park H...

Page 1270: ...ransfer Hold Version 4000 or lower or Version 5000 or higher with Program 20 11 26 0 for an extension s Class of Service required 2 Dial a co worker s extension number The co worker does not answer 3 Press the Personal Park key Program 15 07 or SC 752 07 OR Dial the Personal Park single digit code Program 11 16 11 The Intercom call to the co worker is dropped A confirmation tone is heard and the o...

Page 1271: ... Program 11 16 11 cannot be used in this operation To answer a call parked at a co worker s extension 1 Press Speaker dial plus the co worker s extension number At a single line telephone do not press Speaker To display Caller ID for a call in Park With Program 15 02 08 set to 0 preselect for this feature 1 With Program 15 02 08 set to 0 preselect and a call in Park press the Park key Program 15 0...

Page 1272: ...0 2 1238 Park 4 Press Speaker to hang up If not picked up the call will recall to you OR 1 Press Hold or Transfer 2 Press the DSS BLF key programmed as 6 The Park location will be displayed in the LCD 3 Press Speaker to hang up ...

Page 1273: ...can be handled solely by the connected PBX If the telephone system provides the restriction it restricts the digits dialed after the PBX access code PBX Call Restriction When the telephone system does the Toll Restriction it can further restrict users from dialing PBX extensions In this case the only valid numbers are those dialed after the PBX trunk access code The only PBX facility telephone sys...

Page 1274: ... connected PBX The system does not provide automatic Pulse to Tone Conversion after outdialing the PBX trunk access code You can program incoming DISA trunks to be outgoing PBX trunks All PBX Compatibility restrictions and programming apply PBX trunks can follow normal system Toll Restriction Users can get outbound access to PBX trunks through Trunk Groups and or Trunk Group Routing All PBX Compat...

Page 1275: ...re most commonly used These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro wizards for feature programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Na...

Page 1276: ...ging default 1 14 04 01 Behind PBX Setup For each PBX trunk port enter 1 Make a separate entry for each Night Service mode 0 Stand Alone Trunk 1 Behind PBX PBX 2 Not Used 3 CTX assume 9 default 0 21 04 01 Toll Restriction Class for Extensions Assign a Toll Restriction Class 1 15 to each extension Day Night Mode 1 9 9 Power Failure Mode 1 15 default 2 21 05 12 Toll Restriction Class PBX Call Restri...

Page 1277: ...07 or SC 752 02 group 2 Dial PBX access code and number OR 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker and dial 9 OR At the single line telephone lift the handset and dial 9 2 Dial the PBX access code and number OR 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 9 3 Dial the PBX trunk number e g 005 for line 5 4 Dial the PBX access code and number OR...

Page 1278: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1244 PBX Compatibility THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1279: ...ebPro is enhanced to include the Maintenance Debug option This allows the WebPro user to enable and disable debug traces for troubleshooting With Version 5000 5 00 or higher software and PZ IPLB daughter board installed half duplex connections are not supported For troubleshooting purposes a managed switch capable of port mirroring is required to capture packet data from the SV8100 IPLB Ethernet p...

Page 1280: ... established using the RS232 serial port COM Port 1 on the side of the system Modem remote connections are established via the internal CD CP00 US modem To access the modem dial a trunk that is directed to the modem access service code DIL or DID or dial an extension that is redirected to the modem access service code When connecting with a Modem a Dial Up Connection PPP must be set up in Windows ...

Page 1281: ... Optional Load a defined Connection Account can skip steps 1 3 by using this option 1 Select Connection Type If connecting to an IPK II system select either Direct or Modem Connection Type 2 To login specify the User Name and Password 4 To make the connection to the system click Connect ...

Page 1282: ...ess of the switch refer to Figure 2 34 WebPro Login Screen WebPro System Programming WebPro can be used to edit system programming from a Web browser System Data License Information and Modification History are among the items that can be viewed in WebPro refer to Figure 2 35 WebPro Home Page Figure 2 34 WebPro Login Screen Figure 2 35 WebPro Home Page ...

Page 1283: ...s for their own extension They can program Function keys Virtual Extension ringing assignment Station Speed Dial InMail features Station Name Call Forwarding Display Language Ring Tone and End User Password To login to the WebPro End User Programming point to the IP address of the system in a web browser like you would logging into WebPro Use the extension number as the User Name refer to Figure 2...

Page 1284: ...ion a Dial Up Connection PPP must be configured in Windows Network Connections When uploading via a Dial Up connection uploading card configuration Hardware Upload is not supported The hardware software requirements for the host PC running the PCPro application are Figure 2 37 WebPro End User Screen Item Requirement CPU Pentium III 598MHz minimum Pentium 4 2 5GHz recommended Memory 128MB of RAM 25...

Page 1285: ...ro Handset can be programming the switch anytime When programming via WebPro PCPro some data requires you to logout before the switch fully applies the changes These Programs are 10 21 2 11 02 for directory dial 11 04 for directory dial 13 04 for directory dial 14 04 15 05 15 15 16 02 23 02 31 02 41 02 41 17 47 02 47 03 82 11 and 83 11 Disk Space 35MB for PCPro minimum TCP Port TCP port 8000 must ...

Page 1286: ...10 84 06 11 84 09 and 84 10 PCPro converts an Electra Elite IPK II PCPro database file into a SV8100 PCPro database file PCPro Software Version 3 00 or higher is required The system data to be converted is limited to the system data listed below PRG No Name 10 23 IP System Interconnection Setup 11 01 System Numbering 11 02 Extension Numbering These caution statements do not apply to Version 2 0 or...

Page 1287: ...Trunk Group Routing 15 01 Extension Basic Data Setup 15 07 Programmable Function Key 21 02 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions 22 02 Incoming Service Type Setup 22 04 Incoming Ring Group Setup 22 05 IRG Assignment for Normal Ring Trunk 22 07 DIL Assignment 22 11 Dial In Conversion Table Data Setup 26 01 Automatic Route Selection Service 26 02 Dial analysis Table for ARS LCR 26 03 ARS Dial Treatment...

Page 1288: ... System Administrator 1 SA1 level logins Outbound IP Connection Description Outbound IP Connection for PC Programming allows the system to make a PC Pro Connection via an outgoing call over IP to a pre programmed IP Address upon receipt of an incoming CO call matching a pre programmed CLI When the target number of DID incoming call matches with the service code of Outbound IP Connection the SV8100...

Page 1289: ...sting WebPro PCPro or station programming session is active SV8100 changes the port number of TCP at each connection The range used is 61050 61099 Outbound IP Connection Service code can be dialed across CCIS Outbound IP Connection to a secondary side of Net Link is not supported Default Setting None System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Software None Required Component s CPU PC Pro...

Page 1290: ...ture programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned PC Programming Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 12 01 CD CP00...

Page 1291: ...55 255 224 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 default 255 255 255 0 10 12 03 CD CP00 US Network Setup Default Gateway Assign the default gateway IP address for the CD CP00 US 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 254 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 25...

Page 1292: ... Password Setup User Name Set the system passwords Maximum 10 characters Refer to the SV8100 Programming Manual for default settings 90 02 02 Programming Password Setup Password Configure the administrator accounts that are used when connecting to the KTS via PCPro WebPro If using PCPro these are the accounts that are used to connect If using WebPro these are the accounts that are used to login If...

Page 1293: ... Default Refer to the Level indication for each individual program located in the upper left corner at the beginning of each program 90 28 01 User Programming Password Setup Password Use to set the password to enter the user programming mode Up to eight digits Fixed four digits default 1111 Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 03 01 ETU Setup Set up and con...

Page 1294: ... IP Connection Adding parameter 01 Programming session is already active 02 Not setting of IP Address or Port 03 Caller ID is not match 10 Failure of getting IP Address 11 Socket Open Error 12 Socket Port Setting Error 13 TCP Session Timeout 90 69 01 Outbound IP Connection Setup Port Number Define the port number used for Outbound IP Connection for Programming 1 65535 default 8000 90 69 02 Outboun...

Page 1295: ...d WebPro Comparison The table below gives a quick feature comparison of PCPro and WebPro For further details refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 PC Programming Manual Table 2 79 PCPro and WebPro Comparison Feature Feature Application Comments PCPro WebPro Installation Program Y File Handling File New Open Save Save As Y File Properties Y PCPro supports save view modify UNIVERGE SV8100 Site Information pa...

Page 1296: ...ontrols Y WebPro has more simplified controls than PCPro Validation Y Y Multi Assignments Extension Numbers Y PCPro provides special screens that allow multiple values to be set easily This applies mainly to table data These screens shorten the programming time Line Keys CAP Y Line Keys General Y Account Codes Y Defaults View Y Copy System Data Level Y Y Copy items in an individual program Group L...

Page 1297: ...n generate various reports based on values in the database Verify Y Maintenance Y CAP Keys Y Numbering Plan Y Class of Service Y Modification History Y Simulators LCR ACR Y Import Export Speed Dials Y PCPro allows import export of speed dials csv file It can also import converted IPK databases IPK Converted File Y Program Help Help Pages Y Y WebPro has more simplified help than PCPro Context Sensi...

Page 1298: ... a system databases It also tracks uploads downloads System Initialize Y Y This is the ability to initialize the UNIVERGE SV8100 System Time Setting Y Y This sets the time on the UNIVERGE SV8100 Software Updates Firmware Upload Y The UNIVERGE SV8100 CD CP00 US firmware can be upgraded via PCPro Licensing Feature Activation KTS Feature Activation Y Y Licensed UNIVERGE SV8100 features can be activat...

Page 1299: ...e to one Single line telephones must be equipped with a ground start button for use with Ground Start Trunks System features cannot be activated from single line telephone or multiline telephone with PSA L adapter when Power Failure Transfer is in operation When power is restored to the system one of the following happens dependant on whether a single line telephone or multiline telephone with PSA...

Page 1300: ...e CD 4COTB has Power Failure circuits on the first two ports The PZ 4COTF daughter board does not have Power Fail or Fax Branch Exchange circuits Default Setting None System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s PSA L Handset Adapter CD 4COTB Related Features None ...

Page 1301: ...e Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Operation None Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 14 02 09 Analog Trunk Data Setup Busy Tone Detection Set the basic options for each analog trunk port ...

Page 1302: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1268 Power Failure Transfer THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1303: ...rence may be affected by Incoming Prime Line Preference refer to the Programming section of this feature Incoming Prime Line Preference When the Prime Line rings the extension lifting the handset answers the call Incoming Prime Line Preference could benefit the Service Department dispatcher who must quickly answer customer s service calls and then dispatch repair technicians When a customer calls ...

Page 1304: ... wizards for feature programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 14 05 01 Trunk ...

Page 1305: ... access to all trunks except the Prime Line trunk 0 No access 1 Outgoing access only 2 Incoming access only 3 Access only when trunk on Hold 4 Outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold 5 Incoming access and access when trunk on Hold 6 Incoming and Outgoing access 7 Incoming access outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold Trunk Access Maps 1 200 Default Access Maps 1 200 Trunk Ports 1 200 ...

Page 1306: ...up Routing for Extensions Assign extension s to a Prime Line route for outgoing Prime Line access Trunk Groups 1 100 Day Night Mode 1 8 Route Table Number 0 100 0 No Setting default 1 22 01 01 System Options for Incoming Calls Incoming Call Priority Determine if Intercom calls or trunk calls have answer priority when both are ringing simultaneously 0 Intercom call priority 1 Trunk call priority de...

Page 1307: ...reference programming you either answer the Prime Line or get dial tone on the idle line appearance 20 08 21 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Automatic Trunk Seizing by Pressing Speaker Key Enable Disable an extension user ability to automatically access Trunk Route when going Off hook via the Speaker key 0 Disable 1 Enable default 0 for COS 1 15 Program Number Program Name Descripti...

Page 1308: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1274 Prime Line Selection THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1309: ...ming and outgoing calls Private Lines do not follow Call Forwarding if not Direct Inward Line DIL Other programmed options for outgoing calls also affect a Prime Line Calls to extensions with DND active do not follow Call Forwarding programming Direct Inward Line DIL calls ring an idle Department Group member then follow Program 22 08 then Program 22 05 An extension user can have Line Preference o...

Page 1310: ...minals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Call Forwarding Central Office Calls Placing Do Not Disturb Line Preference Prime Line Selection Programmable Function Keys Single Line Telephones Analog 500 2500 Sets Toll Restriction Transfer VM8000 InMail ...

Page 1311: ...el 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 14 01 09 Basic Trunk Data Setup Private Line Determine if a trunk should be used as a Normal or Private line A Private Line reserves a trunk for a multiline terminal for placing and answering calls ...

Page 1312: ...ss outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold Trunk Access Maps 1 200 Default Access Maps 1 200 Trunk Ports 1 200 assigned with option 7 access incoming and outgoing access and access when trunk is on Hold 15 06 01 Trunk Access Map for Extensions Assign extension to have Private Line to an unused Private Line Access Map Trunks 1 200 default 1 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Make sure extens...

Page 1313: ...n 1 for Incoming or Both Way Private Lines Use option 0 for Outgoing Private Lines Do not assign any other extensions to the Private Line ring group Maximum eight digits Default Extensions 101 108 first eight ports ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls No other extensions ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls 22 05 01 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment Assign Private Line to an unused Private Line...

Page 1314: ... the Private Line key then press Speaker or lift the handset 2 Dial the number To answer a call from your multiline terminal on your Private Line 1 Press Private Line key or press Speaker or lift handset To place a call on your Private line from a single line telephone 1 Pick up handset Private Line dial tone is heard 2 Dial the number To answer a call on you Private Line from a single line teleph...

Page 1315: ...ver key by dialing 751 48 Using Program 92 01 to copy a multiline terminal Programmable Function Keys copies all the keys whether or not they exist on the telephone to which the programming is being copied This may cause confusion when trying to define a key which is already defined but which does not exist on the telephone displays as DUPLICATE DATA It is recommend to either clear these non exist...

Page 1316: ...fter the for ISDN calls DSS One Touch keys can be used for one touch transfer DSS keys can distinguish whether the telephone is set for DND Call Forward All Calls of if the telephone is off hook When a Ring Group call rings a station a BLF Indication for this station shows idle or busy based on Class of Service option 20 13 49 All features programmed under one touch keys are still subject to class...

Page 1317: ...e key programming does follow In order for a station to retrieve a held ICM call the station must have an ICM key assigned in 15 07 00 Default Setting The first eight keys on a telephone are line keys e g key 1 line 001 The remaining keys are unassigned System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s D16 LD R ADM Related Features Direct Station Selection DSS Console One ...

Page 1318: ...a Level 1 2 3 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign the functions of a multiline terminal Programmable Function Keys When using Program 15 07 01 to program the function keys 17 32 on the D16 LD R ADM start with key 17 Service codes 751 and 752 can also be used to program these keys Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 752 by defaul...

Page 1319: ...vel Turn Off or On an extension user ability to program the Appearance function keys using Service Code 752 When programming a feature as a Programmable Function Key refer to Program 15 07 01 in the UNIVERGE SV8100 Programming Manual 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 01 15 20 13 18 Class of Service for Options Supplementary Service Programmable Function Key Programming General Level Turn Off or On an e...

Page 1320: ...fine a key enter 000 When a key is programmed using service code 752 that key cannot be programmed with a function using the 751 code until the key is undefined 000 For example with a Park Key programmed by dialing 752 04 must be undefined by dialing 000 before it can be programmed as a Voice Over key by dialing 751 48 To check the function of a programmable key 1 Press the Help key 2 Press the pr...

Page 1321: ... via PCPro no other user can log in through PCPro WebPro or Phone Programming Programming from a multiline terminal can require a password to enter programming Temporary License can be activated only from a multiline terminal not PCPro or WebPro When activated the system is temporarily licensed for ACD CTI Firmware Upgrade Hotel 256 MEGACO stations and SMDR Each time the temporary license is activ...

Page 1322: ...mmonly used These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro wizards for feature programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Descrip...

Page 1323: ...d by an Auto attendant first instead of the DIL setup on Program 22 01 and Program 22 07 set the transfer destination in the Auto Attendant to the Modem Access Service Code Up to eight digits Please refer to the SV8100 Programming Manual for default settings 90 02 03 Programming Password Setup User Level Set the system password user levels 0 Prohibited User 1 MF Manufacturer Level 2 IN Installer L...

Page 1324: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1290 Programming from a Multiline Terminal THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1325: ...ccess dial up OCCs Other Common Carriers such as MCI from their DP area The user can for example Place a call to an OCC over a DP trunk Depending on programming Manually implement Pulse to Tone Conversion OR Wait 10 seconds Dial the OCC security code and desired number The system dials the digits after the conversion as DTMF Conditions Pulse to Tone Conversion is valid only for Dial Pulse trunks P...

Page 1326: ...he most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 14 02 01 Analog Trunk Data setup Signaling Type DP DTMF At default ...

Page 1327: ...00 Issue 13 0 Pulse to Tone Conversion 2 1293 Operation To convert your telephone dialing to tone after placing your call on a pulse line 1 Place a call over pulse line 2 Dial to switch the DP trunk to DTMF dialing ...

Page 1328: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1294 Pulse to Tone Conversion THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1329: ...lay telephone This feature is not supported on multiline cordless phones UNIVERGE SV8100 telephones only support redial using Softkey or Navigation key Stored name for Redial Function is cleared when the system is reset Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Enhancements With Version 5000 V5 00 or higher software names and numbers stored as a common or group ...

Page 1330: ... displayed along with the last dialed number 2 Press the up or down arrow to view the number to dial For SV8100 Telephones Only 1 Press the left Navigation key REDIAL SYS is displayed along with the last dialed number 2 Press the up or down arrow to view the number to dial 3 Press or press Speaker or lift the handset or press an idle trunk key OR For SV8100 and Elite IPK Telephones 1 Press the Lis...

Page 1331: ...aker or lift the handset To access a System Speed Dial bin For Elite IPK Telephones Only 1 Press Redial REDIAL SYS is displayed along with the last dialed number 2 Dial the System Speed Dial bin number The number stored in that bin is displayed for your preview 3 Press the key or press Speaker or lift the handset or press an idle trunk key OR For SV8100 Telephones Only 1 Press the left Navigation ...

Page 1332: ...r down to refresh the list if the redialed number has a matching common or group speed dial bin associated with it the name information from Program13 04 02 is displayed 3 Press Speaker or lift the handset to dial the number The name information will not display after dialing ...

Page 1333: ...experiences sluggishness until the file transfer is complete When the time turns to 12 00AM the telephone system resets and switches to the new firmware The Package file needed is provided by NEC at the time the new version of main system software is released Use files found in the Field Upgrade Folder to upgrade the system with or without MEMDB For Version 6000 or higher you can use file found in...

Page 1334: ...me zone differences when using this feature The time to upload a firmware package file is directly related to the file size Generally it takes a few minutes Remote Upgrade is supported only via LAN connection A modem or serial connection is not supported for Remote Upgrade For Version 6000 or higher USB is not needed if the system has MEMDB You do still need to obtain a new version of the main sys...

Page 1335: ...ocation of the Firmware Package file For example the file name might be SV8100_v5 01RemoteUpgrade mem SV8100_v6 0RemoteUpgrade mdu or SV8100_v5 01RemoteUpgrade usb File extension mdu is for Version 6000 or higher upgrade method USB less 6 Select the schedule type Immediately after upload At the time If you choose At the time select the date and time you want the CD CP00 US to reset and switch over...

Page 1336: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1302 Remote System Upgrade THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1337: ...d party answers the number of retries is based on system programming Conditions Lifting the handset during a callout cycle cancels Repeat Redial Other programmed options for outgoing calls can affect how a Repeat Redial call is placed Refer to Central Office Calls Placing options as needed For systems with Automatic Route Selection ARS ARS selects the trunk for the Repeat Redial call Single line t...

Page 1338: ...ms for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a function key for Repeat Redial code 29 Line Key 1 48 0...

Page 1339: ...1 Repeat Dial Setup Repeat Redial Count Set how many times Repeat Redial automatically repeats if the call does not go through 0 255 default 3 21 08 02 Repeat Dial Setup Repeat Redial Interval Time Set the time between Repeat Redial attempts 0 64800 seconds default 60 21 08 03 Repeat Dial Setup Repeat Dial Calling Timer Set the time the system waits for the called party to answer after a Repeat Re...

Page 1340: ...sue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1306 Repeat Redial To cancel Repeat Redial 1 Press Feature 2 Press Redial OR 1 Press Repeat Redial key Program 15 07 or SC 751 29 Also refer to Last Number Redial on page 2 1003 ...

Page 1341: ...ltiline terminals are LK 01 LK 08 corresponds to CO 01 CO 08 DSS Console to Extension assignments for Attendant Add On Consoles are not assigned Default Attendant Add On Console key assignments are DSS Keys 001 060 Stations 101 160 First Initialization of the system returns all programming values to default Without a PC ATA Compact Flash card installed press and hold the SW1 Load Switch and toggle...

Page 1342: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1308 Resident System Program Related Features None Guide to Feature Programming None Operation None ...

Page 1343: ...ions the same as a Hotline or One Touch key A multiline terminal Reverse Voice Over key also shows at a glance the status of the associated extension When the destination extension is idle the Reverse Voice Over provides one button calling to the associated extension like a Hotline key An extension user cannot however use the Reverse Voice Over key to Transfer calls by one touch operation Conditio...

Page 1344: ...en a Reverse Voice Over call is placed to a destination station while the originator is on a CO call the Reverse Voice Over is dropped if the destination station is involved in another call and this call is terminated Default Setting Disabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Do Not Disturb Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing ...

Page 1345: ... talk with the programmed Reverse Voice Over destination Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a function key for Reverse Voice Over code 47 destination extension Assign a function key for Voice Over to the destination extension code 48 This allows the user at the destination to switch between calls if they were busy w...

Page 1346: ...tial call and the Reverse Voice Over Call To return to your initial caller 1 Press the Reverse Voice Over key again If the co worker you call hangs up you return to the initial call automatically When the telephone is idle To place a call to your Reverse Voice Over destination 1 Press your Reverse Voice Over key Program 15 07 or SC 751 47 destination extension You can optionally lift the handset a...

Page 1347: ...ing Groups 1 100 In Skin Voice Mail 102 Centralized Voice Mail 103 If an extension has a line key for the trunk Ring Group calls ring the line key If the extension does not have a line key the trunk rings the line appearance key If an extension has a key for a trunk that is not in its ring group the trunk follows Access Map programming Conditions DIL trunks disregard ring group programming until D...

Page 1348: ... for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign function keys as line code 01 trunk number or Call Appeara...

Page 1349: ...M Tie line 6 Delayed VRS 7 ANI DNIS 8 DID DDI Mode Switching default 0 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment Assign extensions to ring groups Maximum eight digits Default Extensions 101 108 first eight ports ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls No other extensions ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls 22 05 01 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment Assign trunks to ring groups Incoming Gr...

Page 1350: ...g Group 102 In Skin External Voice Mail or VM8000 InMail default 1 25 03 01 VRS DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing Set the transfer destination for each DISA and Automated Attendant OPA trunk The destination can be a Ring Group or Voice Mail Make a separate entry for each Night Service mode For incoming calls Ring Group programming Program 22 04 Program 22 05 overrides Access Map prog...

Page 1351: ... 3 X X Trunk assigned to indicated Ring Group 1 Make the same Program 22 04 entry for all Night Service modes Program 22 05 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment Ring Group 1 2 3 Ext 301 1 01 01 Ext 302 01 1 01 Ext 303 01 01 1 1 Extension rings 0 Extension does not ring 1 To allow extension user to answer flashing line be sure to give extension incoming access to the trunk in Program 14 07 and Prog...

Page 1352: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1318 Ring Groups THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1353: ... If the Ringdown Hotline destination is a speed dial bin the appropriate service code must precede the bin number Ringdown Extension can use Speed Dial System Group Station numbers and follow their trunk routing as the destination number Ringdown Extension follows Call Forwarding For example the ringdown destination can forward their calls When the Ringdown Extension user lifts the handset ringdow...

Page 1354: ...nly on ISDN outbound calls Internal calls and analog outbound calls are not supported Default Setting Disabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Call Arrival CAR Keys Callback Call Forwarding Call Waiting Camp On Do Not Disturb Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing Off Hook Signaling Speed Dial System Group Station Virtual Extensions ...

Page 1355: ...xtensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Default Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 08 01 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Intercom Calls Turn Off or On Intercom calling for the extension 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 08 09 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Hotline ...

Page 1356: ...tension ringdown destination 1 Speak toward telephone to answer incoming voice announcement OR Lift the handset or press Speaker to answer ringing Intercom call 21 11 01 Extension Ringdown Hotline Assignment Program the ringdown Hotline source and destination target number up to 24 digits 512 Hotline assignments Remember to include the trunk access code usually 9 in front of the number when dialin...

Page 1357: ...off hook and dials a service code and the extension number of the monitored telephone The activity of the area where the monitored telephone is placed can then be heard at the monitoring telephone This service is available until the handset of the monitored telephone is placed on hook Conditions Room Monitor is for listening only It does not allow conversation between the monitoring and monitored ...

Page 1358: ...39 Room Monitor for single line telephones can be used with the Hotel Motel feature For a multiline terminal Room Monitor requires uniquely programmed function keys Default Setting Disabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals and Single Line Telephones Required Component s None Related Features Hotel Motel Programmable Function Keys ...

Page 1359: ...ys Assign a function key as a Room Monitor key code 39 for both the extension being monitored and the extension initiating Room Monitor Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 752 by default 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Default...

Page 1360: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1326 Room Monitor Multiline Room Monitoring ...

Page 1361: ...n initiating the monitor and at the extension you want to monitor You can only listen to one extension at a time Multiline Terminals To activate Room Monitor from an idle Multiline Terminal initiating extension 1 Press the Room Monitor key Program 15 07 or SC 751 39 Single Line Telephone Room Monitoring ...

Page 1362: ...monitored extension Single Line Telephones To activate Room Monitor at the initiating extension 1 Lift the handset at the telephone which is monitoring another telephone 2 Dial 675 3 Dial 2 4 Dial number of extension number which will be monitored You cannot place or answer other calls while Room Monitor is active To activate Room Monitor at the extension to be monitored 1 Lift the handset at the ...

Page 1363: ...saves in system memory a dialed number of up to 24 digits The number can be any combination of digits 0 9 and The system remembers the digits regardless of whether the call was answered unanswered or busy The system normally uses the same trunk group as for the initial call However the extension user can preselect a specific trunk if desired Conditions For systems with Automatic Route Selection AR...

Page 1364: ...ommonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 12 13 Service Code Setup for Service Access Saved Number Dial Customize the service code used for dialing a saved number MLT SLT default 715 11 12 18...

Page 1365: ...2 Dial 715 To redial a saved number Multiline Terminal 1 Press an idle trunk line key This selects a specific trunk for the call 2 Press the Save Number Dialed key Program 15 07 or SC 751 30 The stored number dials out OR 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 715 OR Press Save Number Dialed key Program 15 07 or SC 751 30 Save Number Dialed automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call T...

Page 1366: ...ed key Program 15 07 or SC 751 30 The stored number displays for 10 seconds The stored number dials out if you Lift the handset Press an idle line key Press the Speaker key 2 Press the Exit key To clear your saved number Multiline Terminal 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 785 3 Press Speaker to hang up Single Line Telephone 1 Lift the handset and dial 785 2 Hang up ...

Page 1367: ...on can have more than one SIE key assigned Up to 32 calls can be queued waiting on an SIE key When a Secondary Incoming Extension call is received and answered while the user is on an outside line the first call can be automatically put on hold If a trunk call rings a Secondary Incoming Extension to answer the call the station must be programmed with the direct trunk appearance key or an available...

Page 1368: ...goes idle or when it has answered a call DT300 DT700 terminals installed in a SV8100 with the IPK IPK II Migration system do not support the DESI Less page switching and blinking DESI Less screen page switching only applies to idle terminals If a terminal is not idle the screen will not switch if another call comes in until the phone goes idle Default Setting None System Availability Terminals All...

Page 1369: ... 15 01 01 Basic Extension Data Setup Extension Name Define the extension virtual extension name Up to 12 characters Default STA 101 Ext 101 STA 102 Ext 102 etc 15 02 07 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Automatic Hold for CO lines When talking on a CO call and another CO line key is pressed place the original trunk on Hold or Disconnect it 0 Hold 1 Disconnect Cut default 1 15 02 21 Multiline Te...

Page 1370: ...ne Pattern 8 default 0 15 09 01 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment Assign the ring options for an extension Virtual Extension Key or Virtual Extension Group Answer Key which is defined in Program 15 07 Mode 1 0 No Ring 1 Ring default 0 15 10 01 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup When two or more virtual extensions are set on a function key on the telephone and the tone pattern by whic...

Page 1371: ... 752 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 01 15 20 10 08 Class of Service Options Answer Service Virtual Extension Off Hook Answer Turn Off or On an extension user ability to answer an incoming call on a Call Arrival CAR Secondary Incoming Extension SIE Virtual Extension by lifting the handset 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 27 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Busy on Seizing Virtual...

Page 1372: ...Speaker 2 Dial 752 3 Press the key you want to program 4 Dial 03 5 Dial the number of the extension you want to appear on the key 6 Press Hold once for Immediate Ring skip to step 8 for Delayed Ring 7 Dial the mode number in which the key rings 8 Press hold a second time for Delayed Ring or Skip to step 10 9 Dial the mode number in which the key delays ringing 10 Press Speaker ...

Page 1373: ...ash tone is heard until either user cancels the Secretary Call A secretary could use this feature for example to get a message through to the boss in an important meeting After being alerted the boss could call the secretary when it is most convenient An extension can have a Secretary Call key for any number of extensions limited only by the available number of programmable keys Conditions Secreta...

Page 1374: ... expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Operation To buzz your secretary or boss 1 Do not lift the handset 2 Press the buzzer key Program 15 07 or SC 751 41 secretary extension Your boss or secretary hears ringing Your buzzer key lights steadily Your boss s or secretary s buzzer key flashes fast The telephone continues to ring until the Secretary Call key is pressed P...

Page 1375: ...e Secretary Call key that flashed 4 Press the Exit key To answer your Secretary Call indication 1 Place an Intercom call to the extension that called you To cancel a Secretary Call you left at another extension 1 Press the lit Secretary Call key To cancel a Secretary Call left at your extension 1 Do not lift the handset 2 Press the flashing Secretary Call key ...

Page 1376: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1342 Secretary Call Buzzer THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1377: ...s When a representative leaves their desk an associate could press the Secretary Call Pickup key to intercept all their calls An extension can have a Secretary Call Pickup key for any number of extensions limited only by the available number of programmable keys Conditions Secretary Call Pickup is not available to single line telephone users A Call Arrival CAR Key virtual extension cannot be progr...

Page 1378: ... Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Operation To activate Secretary Call Pickup 1 Press your Secretary Call Pickup key Program 15 07 or SC 751 42 boss extension Your Secretary Call Pickup key lights and the boss s telephone display shows BOSS FWD Calls intended for covered extension ring your telephone i...

Page 1379: ...y Call Pickup 1 Press your lit Secretary Call Pickup key Program 15 07 or SC 751 42 boss extension To check a key Secretary Call Pickup assignment 1 Press the Help key 2 Press your Secretary Call Arrival CAR key Program 15 07 or SC 751 42 boss s extension 3 Press the Exit key ...

Page 1380: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1346 Secretary Call Pickup THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1381: ...ing message in a preprogrammed interval via internal paging group terminals during defined schedule such as night time When connected to the system the security sensor will receive sensor detections and send a prepared warning message or emergency call to a pre programmed destination When connecting security sensor set Program 20 46 01 Sensor mode to 1 On the security sensor can be connected to th...

Page 1382: ...ge when the targeted terminal is in an Idle state If an ordinary Internal Paging message is sent the message is aborted and the watching message is played A Warning message has a higher priority than a Watch message when both occur at same time When using an external speaker start and end tones are not supported When the security sensor detects a signal the following options can be set A Warning m...

Page 1383: ...rmal paging normal paging stops and the Watch or Warning message is sent A Warning message has a higher priority than a Watch message when both occur at same time Activating or stopping sensor operations need to be set according to sensor specifications If an outgoing call restriction is set in a system the number for the emergency call needs to be pre registered in the restriction allow table Aut...

Page 1384: ...if Program 14 02 18 is invalid the call cannot disconnect by trunk side An emergency call does not provided over Aspire Net trunks In case of an emergency call the trunk key status is red It is also red while monitoring or speaking An emergency call goes through even if no trunk key is assigned to the terminal In case of using internal and external paging group same time message will provided when...

Page 1385: ...ed by using Service Code Program 11 10 49 Outside call routing follows the settings in Program 13 05 1 Abbreviated Dialing When Program 13 05 01 set to 0 an outside call route is referring to Program 14 06 01 setting and search data from route table 100 of order 4 in descending order If Program 14 06 01 set to 0 no outside call is provided If outgoing call restriction is set in a system an emergen...

Page 1386: ...ot be disconnected on the trunk side If the cable was disconnected while ringing the ring does not restart once the cable is reconnected An emergency call does not provided over Aspire Net trunks In case of an emergency call trunk key status is red It is also red while monitoring or speaking An emergency call goes through even if no trunk key is assigned to the terminal If the cable is disconnecte...

Page 1387: ...below sentence to terminal which set Program 20 08 24 data to 1 Press Exit display returns to idle Emergency Call 1 Emergency calls when Security Sensor or Remote Inspection performed SMDR can record these call class as follows Security Sensor SAD Remote Inspection WAD Emergency Call 2 When Security Sensor or Remote Inspection performs an Emergency call alarm reports are recorded and the alarm dis...

Page 1388: ...tting None System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s CD 8DLCA CD 16DLCA PZ VM21 with CF PGDAD Version 7000 Enhancement License 0036 Related Features Paging External Speed Dial System Group Station Voice Response System VRS ...

Page 1389: ...ng Message Setting Service Code setting for Warning message recording to VRS MLT SLT default 615 NA AT 719 OT 11 10 48 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Auto Dial for Security Sensor Service Code setting for destination number when Warning mode detected MLT default 617 NA AT 748 OT 11 10 49 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Auto Dial for Remote Inspection Service Code setting f...

Page 1390: ...to make an emergency call when the inspection target is in off hook status 0 Not Call 1 Call default 0 20 08 23 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Display Indication for Security Sensor Detection Enable 1 or Disable 0 an extension s ability to display indication for security sensor detection 0 Disable 1 Enable default 0 20 08 24 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Display In...

Page 1391: ...ote Watch Setup Ring Timer Assign Ringing continue time for inspected extension Terminal No 1 6 0 60 default 0 20 45 04 Remote Watch Setup Auto Dial Number Area Setting Assign Speed dial area number when detect no answer at extension and make emergency call Terminal No 1 6 Speed Dial Area 0 1999 default 0 20 45 05 Remote Watch Setup VRS Message for Answer Assign VRS message number when inspected e...

Page 1392: ...urity Sensor No 1 8 0 No External Paging 1 8 External Paging Group Number default 0 20 46 04 Security Sensor Setup VRS Message for Warning Define VRS number used for Warning message Security Sensor No 1 8 0 Send Warning Tone 1 100 VRS Message Number default 0 20 46 05 Security Sensor Setup Auto Dial Number Area Setting Define Speed dial area number when sensor detects warning Security Sensor No 1 ...

Page 1393: ...rpose Relay Contact Detector Circuit Setup Define general purpose relay contact detector circuit number programmed in Program 10 41 for connect security sensor Security Sensor No 1 8 0 Not Used 1 8 Detect Circuit Number default 0 20 47 01 Time Pattern Setting for Watch Mode Watch Mode Define watch mode on off against time pattern 1 8 Time Pattern 1 8 0 Off 1 On default 0 20 48 01 Time Pattern for ...

Page 1394: ...o Dialing Select whether the system should display the WAD Warning Auto Dialing on SMDR report SMDR Port 1 8 0 No Output 1 Output default 0 90 10 01 System Alarm Setup Alarm Type Set the alarm type 31 32 33 Alarm 31 Auto dialing after sensor detection Alarm 32 Auto Dialing for Remote Watch function Alarm 33 Fail to auto dialing of security function 0 Not Set 1 Major Alarm 2 Minor Alarm default 0 9...

Page 1395: ...d external page group 1 every five minutes To Stop Watch mode 1 Press Speaker and dial 717 0 OR Press the red lit function key 32 the function keys turn off OR Wait for Watch mode pattern 1 to end Warning Message Use Security Sensor and Warning Message Program Program 10 41 01 Index 1 2 Slot Number connected with 2PGDAD Program 10 41 02 Index 1 8 Port Number connected with 2PGDAD Program 10 41 03 ...

Page 1396: ...al purpose relay contact detector circuit 1 Program 20 48 01 1 Security sensor time pattern 1 Program 20 55 01 60 sec default Sensor delay timer Set up Warning message 1 Press Speaker and dial 615 2 Dial the Security sensor number 1 3 Dial the Internal paging group number 01 4 Dial the external paging group number 1 5 Dial the VRS message number for the warning 001 6 After the beep record message ...

Page 1397: ...ion keys turn off 3 Security Sensor time pattern 1 stops When Detect Security Sensor is On 1 A Warning message sent to internal page group 1 and external page group 1 2 An outgoing call is automatically sent according to setting in speed dial bin 1999 3 When destination answers VRS sends a second message 4 Once received extension 200 can be used for monitoring To have a two way conversation dial T...

Page 1398: ...ial calling time 30 sec Program 20 45 09 30 Interval of Auto Dial 30 sec Set Up Remote Inspection 1 Press Speaker and dial 619 2 Dial the Remote Inspection terminal number 1 6 3 Dial 1 to set 4 Dial the Remote Inspection extension number 200 5 Dial the Ring start time 1200 6 Dial ring length time 03 7 Dial the Speed dial bin number to be used 1999 8 Dial the emergency call destination number xxx x...

Page 1399: ...hing second VRS message finishes called destination can automatically monitor extension 200 6 Press to enable two way conversation Emergency Call Record Program Example Program 10 20 01 Index 5 10000 Program 14 01 06 1 Program 35 01 01 3 LAN Program 35 02 22 1 Program 35 02 23 1 In above setting make sensor mode or remote inspection emergency call record to SMDR Alarm Report Program Example Progra...

Page 1400: ...VERGE SV8100 2 1366 Security Security Report Program Example Program 10 20 01 Index 12 20000 Program 90 20 11 1 In the above settings use the sensor mode or remote inspection emergency call to record a traffic report ...

Page 1401: ...haracters For example an extension user could select the message ON VACATION UNTIL and then enter the date Callers see the original message followed by the appended date They could then tell when the user is coming back from vacation The system allows all telephones to use the Selectable Display Messaging feature at the same time All telephones can use Selectable Display Messaging at one time The ...

Page 1402: ... Selectable Display Messaging is canceled The Selectable Display Message will not display to the calling party s phone if there is forwarding on the phone that set the Selectable Display it will just follow the forwarding Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals with Display Required Component s None Related Features Do Not Disturb Programmable Function Keys ...

Page 1403: ...n Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 11 14 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Text Message Setting Define the service code used when setting a text message MLT default not assigned 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a function key for Text Message code 18 The Text Message key automatically selects the message used when programming the key Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Cod...

Page 1404: ...lt 3 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Default Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 13 19 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Selectable Display Messaging Text Messaging Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Selectable Display Messaging 0 Off ...

Page 1405: ...format Table 2 81 Selectable Display Message Character Entry Chart Use this keypad digit When you want to 1 Enter characters 1 _ 2 Enter characters A C a c 2 3 Enter characters D F a f 3 4 Enter characters G I g i 4 5 Enter characters J L j l 5 6 Enter characters M O m o 6 7 Enter characters P S p s 7 8 Enter characters T V t v 8 9 Enter characters W Z w z 9 0 Enter characters 0 space Enter charac...

Page 1406: ...h and have the message displayed on the calling extension display cancel DND by pressing DND 0 To cancel a message 1 Press Speaker and the Text Message key Program 15 07 or SC 751 18 2 Press Speaker to hang up Using the Text Message Service Code to select a message 1 Press Speaker and dial the Text Message service code Program 11 11 14 2 Dial the Selectable Display Message number to be used 01 20 ...

Page 1407: ...ing for their calls This is important in a crowded work area where several telephones are close together Because their telephone has a characteristic ring the user always can tell when their telephone is ringing Conditions None Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Enhancements With Version 8000 or higher software the number of Tone...

Page 1408: ... Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Change Incoming CO and ICM Ring Tones If required change the service code used for changing the incoming ring tones heard for CO and ICM calls MLT default 720 11 11 21 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Check Incoming Ring Tones If required change the service code used for checking how the incoming ring tones sound MLT default 711 15 02 02 Mu...

Page 1409: ... Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup When two or more virtual extensions are set on a function key on the telephone and the tone pattern by which the sound of each extension differs the priority of ring sound is set up Default Priority order 1 0 Tone Pattern 1 2 1 Tone Pattern 2 3 2 Tone Pattern 3 4 3 Tone Pattern 4 22 03 01 Trunk Ring Tone Range Select the ring tone range for the tru...

Page 1410: ...o listen to the incoming ring choices 1 Press idle Speaker 2 Dial 711 3 Dial 1 to listen to Intercom ring 2 to listen to trunk ring 4 For Intercom Ring Dial the code for the ring pattern you want to hear 1 8 OR For Trunk Ring Dial code for the ring pattern you want to hear Ring 1 3 Melody 4 8 If you select Ring 1 3 a second screen prompts for the tone pattern 1 4 5 Press Speaker to hang up ...

Page 1411: ...ll back and forth the CSR can use Serial Call to Technical Service and announce I have Ted on the telephone I need to talk to him again Just hang up when you re done and I ll get him back Conditions The transferring extension can remain off hook to auto receive the callback or hang up and it rings back to them Serial Call requires a uniquely programmed function key Program 15 07 or SC 751 43 or as...

Page 1412: ...feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 15 02 05 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Transfer Key Operation Mode Set the operating mode of the extension Transfer key The keys can be for Call Transfer Serial Calling or Flash Wh...

Page 1413: ...nsion number Co worker must lift the handset to respond to your announcement 4 Press the Serial Call key Program 15 07 or SC 751 43 OR 5 Press Transfer key if Program 15 02 05 is set to Call Back Serial Call 6 When MLT Display shows WAIT TRF extension can hang up When your co worker hangs up the call the system makes an automatic live transfer back to your extension ...

Page 1414: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1380 Serial Call THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1415: ...he purpose of monitoring SV8100 alarms via SNMP When any of the alarms are triggered on the SV8100 they can be reported in the SNMP application Details of the available alarms reports are available in Alarm Reports on page 2 31 A MIB Management Information Base file has been created that can be loaded into an SNMP application An OID Object ID of 14399 has been registered for use by NEC for its sys...

Page 1416: ...re is available via SNMP The data for each of the items can be read or write Read is data that can be requested from the system Write requires that a value be entered in the SNMP application For example the slot number would need to be entered when querying a card Common MIB OID information is as follows these OIDs will be seen at the beginning of the NEC portion of each OID used by the SV8100 143...

Page 1417: ...rsion 1 CPU Version Read 2 CPU Main Software Build Version Read 3 System Date and Time Read 4 DSP Version Read Table 2 85 Feature Licenses Type Description Read or Write 30 CPU 2 Main 2 Licenses 0002 Cygnus Link Read 0003 Aspire Net Read 0007 Hotel Motel PMS Read 0008 SMDR Read 0009 Remote Upgrade Read 0013 Q Sig Read 0016 K CCIS Read 0018 SIP T 38 FAX Relay Read 0030 Encryption Read 0031 V3000 En...

Page 1418: ...Read 5012 K CCIS over IP Read 5091 Aspire Net over IP Read 5101 IP Terminal SIP MLT SP Read 5102 IP Terminal SP only Read 5111 IP Terminal SIP SLT 3rd Party Read 5201 Mobile Extension Read Table 2 87 Network Interface Trapset and Trap Type Description Read or Write 30 CPU 2 Main 3 Network 1 CPU Card Address Read 2 CPU Subnet Mask Read 3 CPU Default Gateway Read 4 CPU MAC Address Read 4 Interface 1...

Page 1419: ...cription Read or Write 40 VOIPDB 1 Hardware 1 VOIP Type Read 2 Status 1 VOIP Card Address Read 2 VOIP Subnet Mask Read 3 VOIP Card MAC Address Read 4 Gateway 1 Gateway 1 IP Address Read 2 Gateway 2 IP Address Read 3 Gateway 3 IP Address Read 4 Gateway 4 IP Address Read 5 Gateway 5 IP Address Read 6 Gateway 6 IP Address Read 7 Gateway 7 IP Address Read 8 Gateway 8 IP Address Read Table 2 89 20 Comm...

Page 1420: ...Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 12 13 CD CP00 US Network Setup DNS Primary Address Set the IP Address of the Primary DNS server 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 default 0 0 0 0 10 1...

Page 1421: ...lication default 0 0 0 0 90 64 07 SNMP Setup Target Host 5 Enter the IP Address of the PC running the SNMP application default 0 0 0 0 90 64 08 SNMP Setup Domain Name Enter the Domain name 255 Characters Maximum default 0 0 0 0 90 64 09 SNMP Setup Trap Set Message When Disabled the trap message is sent to the SNMP application for Major and Minor Alarms When Enabled all trap messages set to the SNM...

Page 1422: ...he CPU IP address First the SNMP user can make a request in the application to retrieve the hardware key code This request is received by the SV8100 and in turn sends back the hardware key code via SNMP Similarly the SNMP user can make a request for the CPU IP address This is received and sent back via SNMP Using SNMP Traps Example SNMP Traps can be used to provide notifications to an SNMP applica...

Page 1423: ...ccurs an SNMP message is sent out that the SNMP application picks up and displays The details of the alarm is sent in the trap message displayed in the SNMP application Refer to Figure 2 44 SNMP Trap Alarm Details for information available in the alarm display Figure 2 43 SNMP Set Trap Alarm 64 Figure 2 44 SNMP Trap Alarm Details ...

Page 1424: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1390 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1425: ... 20 03 07 System Options for Single Line Telephones Trunk Call Dial Forced Sending Start Time Forced Dial When Program 20 03 03 System Options for Single Line Telephones SLT DTMF Dial to Trunk Lines is set to 0 receive all digits before sending the system follows the timer in Program 20 03 04 and Program 20 03 07 The timer in Program 20 03 04 System Options for Single Line Telephones Dial Sending ...

Page 1426: ...ways allocated to analog trunks not analog extensions However if Program 14 02 10 Caller ID is set to 0 No all DTMF Dial Tone Detection resources can be used for both analog trunks and analog extensions The Exclusive Hold Recall Timer is used when an internal call from a Single Line Telephone is placed on hold Default Setting Single line telephones function as soon as they are installed and proper...

Page 1427: ...llow Me Call Forwarding DND Override Call Waiting Camp On Callback Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing Conference Department Calling Department Step Calling Directed Call Pickup Do Not Disturb Door Box Flash Forced Trunk Disconnect Group Call Pickup Hold Intercom Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing Last Number Redial Line Preference Meet Me Conference Meet Me Pagin...

Page 1428: ...ly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 03 01 ETU Setup DLCA PKG Setup Terminal Type B1 Program all on premise 500 2500 type single line telephones with circuit type 2 Set the DIOPU trunk to type 1 when trunks should be defined for off premise extension OPX use 0 Not set 1 Multiline Terminal 2 SLT Adapter 3 Bluetooth Cordless Handset 6 PGD Paging 7...

Page 1429: ...an be used for both analog trunks and analog extensions 0 Common Use 1 Extension Only 2 Trunk Only Default Circuit Resource 01 08 1 Extensions Circuit Resource 09 32 2 Trunks Circuit Resource 33 96 0 Not Used Circuit Resource 97 160 0 Common When PZ BS10 is installed 97 160 are available 15 03 01 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup SLT Signaling Type Enter 0 if single line telephone is a 500 ty...

Page 1430: ... default 0 15 03 10 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Caller ID Name Determine if an extension user telephone should display the Caller ID name 0 Disable 1 Enable default 1 15 03 11 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Caller ID Type Determine whether the Caller ID type is FSK or DTMF 0 FSK 1 DTMF default 0 15 03 14 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Forwarded Caller ID Display Mode Det...

Page 1431: ...phone is off hook the system sets the single line telephone to headset ringing mode 0 64800 seconds default 5 20 03 07 System Options for Single Line Telephones Trunk Call Dial Forced Sending Start Time Forced Dial Define the Trunk Call Dial Forced Sending Start Time 0 64800 seconds default 0 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a unique Class of Service for Dual OPX telephones only whe...

Page 1432: ...al tone detection for outgoing ARS calls 0 0dBm 25dBm 1 5dBm 30dBm 2 10dBm 35dBm 3 15dBm 40dBm 4 20dBm 45dBm 5 25dBm 50dBm 6 30dBm 55dBm default Type 1 5 0 80 03 02 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Start delay time Define the start delay time for DTMF Tone Receiver 0 255 0 25ms 64ms default Type 1 5 0 Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 ...

Page 1433: ... 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 5 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 6 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 7 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 8 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 9 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 10 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 11 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 12 70dBm 0 to 85dBm 15 detect level 13 75dBm 0 to 90dBm 15 detect level 14 80dBm 0 to 95dBm 15 detect level 15 85dBm 0 ...

Page 1434: ... 15 detect level 4 20dBm 0 to 35dBm 15 detect level 5 25dBm 0 to 40dBm 15 detect level 6 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 7 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 8 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 9 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 10 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 11 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 12 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 13 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 14 70dBm 0 to 85dBm 15 detect...

Page 1435: ...Tone Receiver 1 255 15 15ms 3825ms default Type 1 1 30ms Type 2 1 30ms Type 3 1 30ms Type 4 1 30ms Type 5 1 30ms 80 03 08 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup OFF detect time Define the Off dectection time for DTMF Tone Receiver 1 255 15 15ms 3825ms default Type 1 1 30ms Type 2 1 30ms Type 3 1 30ms Type 4 1 30ms Type 5 1 30ms 80 04 01 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Detection Level If required modify the cr...

Page 1436: ... of a valid off hook indication that is long enough to prevent an unintentional bounce of the receiver from being detected as a new off hook indication from a Single Line Telephone 0 No Setting 1 15 100ms 1 5sec default 3 82 11 02 LCA Initial Setup HookFlash Start Time Specify the minimum hookflash time from a Single Line Telephone or analog Voice Mail system before it is detected as the beginning...

Page 1437: ...IVERGE SV8100 system Conditions A maximum of 64 SLTII 1 U ADPs can be used in the UNIVERGE SV8100 system Dial Pulse and Dual Tone Multifrequency Single Line Telephones are supported The SLTII 1 U ADP does not support voice mail Message Waiting LED is not supported A single line telephone connected to an SLTII 1 U ADP cannot perform a Trunk to Trunk Transfer or support a 1 terminal to 2 outside par...

Page 1438: ... system to be properly assigned The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 03 01 ETU Setup DLCA PKG Setup Terminal Type B1 The system automatically assigns terminal type 2 for the port which has an SLT Adapter installed 0 Not set 1 Multiline Terminal 2 SLT Adapter 3 Bluetooth Cordless Handset 6 PGD...

Page 1439: ...ult 1 for COS 1 15 20 07 04 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Storing Speed Dialing Entries Turn Off or On an extension to store System or Group Speed Dialing numbers 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 07 05 Class of Service Options Administrator Level Set Cancel Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use the Trunk to Trunk Forwarding service cod...

Page 1440: ...he General Message 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 14 default 1 for COS 15 20 07 18 Class of Service Options Administrator Level SMDR Printout Accumulated Extension Data Define if the Accumulated Extension Data is included in the SMDR printout for each COS 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 14 default 1 for COS 15 20 07 19 Class of Service Options Administrator Level SMDR Printout Department Group STG ...

Page 1441: ... for COS 1 15 20 08 02 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Trunk Outgoing Calls Turn Off or On outgoing trunk calling for the extension 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 08 03 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service System Speed Dialing Turn Off or On an extension user ability to make outbound calls using system speed dial numbers 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 08 04 Cla...

Page 1442: ...tment Group Step Calling 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 08 13 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service ISDN CLIP Determine if the ISDN calling line identity presentation and screening indicators are to be allowed 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 08 14 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Call Address Information Enable Disable Call Address Information for each COS 0 Disab...

Page 1443: ...to make Voice Over to Busy Virtual Extension 0 Disable 1 Enable default 0 for COS 1 15 20 09 01 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Second Call for DID DISA DIL E M Override Turn Off or On extension ability to receive a second call from a DID DISA DIL or tie line caller With this option set to 1 the destination extension must be busy for a second DNIS caller to ring through If the desti...

Page 1444: ...ervice Code 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 10 02 Class of Service Options Answer Service Group Call Pickup Another Group Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup for calls ringing outside a group Service Code 769 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 10 03 Class of Service Options Answer Service Group Call Pickup for Specific Group Turn Off or On Group Call Pickup for a specific group using service c...

Page 1445: ...xtension user ability to set Call Forwarding when Busy 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 03 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding When Unanswered Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set Call Forwarding when Unanswered 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 04 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding Both Ringing Turn Off or On an extens...

Page 1446: ...er After Hold Callback Turn Off or On an extension user ability to have a call which recalls from hold transfer to the operator 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 11 14 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction Turn Off or On the Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction If enabled Trunk to Trunk Transfer is impossible 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 11 15...

Page 1447: ... extension user ability to initiate an unsupervised conference 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 11 23 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service CAR VE Call Forward Set Cancel Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set or cancel Call Forwarding for a Virtual Extension 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 24 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Trunk Park Hold Mode Set the...

Page 1448: ...1 for COS 1 15 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Automatic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override Allow a busy extension to Manually 0 or Automatically 1 receive off hook signals 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 07 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Message Waiting Turn Off or On an extension user ability to leave Message Waiting 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS...

Page 1449: ... 20 13 17 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Tone Display Intrusion Tone Turn Off or On the Barge In Intrusion Tone If disabled this also turns off the Barge In display at the called extension 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 18 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Programmable Function Key Programming General Level Turn Off or On an extension user ability to ...

Page 1450: ... to 1 a busy extension can be called while someone is talking on a virtual extension key Program 20 13 06 Call Waiting must be set to off for this option to work 1 On 0 Off default 1 for COS 01 15 20 13 28 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Allow Class of Service to be Changed Turn Off or On an extension user ability to change an extension COS via Service Code 677 0 Off 1 On default 0 ...

Page 1451: ...sion user ability to use Headset ringing 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 39 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service ACD Queue Status Display Turn Off or On the ACD Queue Status Display for an extension COS Any extension with this option enabled also hears the queue alarm 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 40 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Do Not Disturb Turn Off...

Page 1452: ...des shows the queue where the call originates 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 51 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Number and Name Appear in the Directory Determine if an extension name and number are Listed 1 or Unlisted 0 in the directory 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 14 01 Class of Service Options for DISA E M First Digit Absorption Delete First Digit Dialed For Tie ...

Page 1453: ... DISA or tie trunk caller ability to use Direct Trunk Access Service Code 715 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 14 09 Class of Service Options for DISA E M Forced Trunk Disconnect Not for ISDN T point Enable Disable a tie trunk caller ability to use Forced Trunk Disconnect Service Code 26 This option is not available to DISA callers 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 14 10 Class of Service Op...

Page 1454: ...where call is to be transferred 3 Hang up To perform a Trunk to Trunk Transfer with an outside call in progress 1 Provide hookflash The call is placed on Exclusive Hold Receive internal dial tone 2 Dial the Trunk Access Code for the applicable trunk 3 Dial the applicable number 4 Hang up To initiate a conference with a call in progress 1 Provide hookflash and dial 1 2 Dial the applicable number an...

Page 1455: ...alyze your telephone as a critical business communication tool improve its business effectiveness and reduce your telephone costs A report can be generated showing calling patterns by volume or duration on a color coded United States map This can help Customer Support Sales Order or Telemarketing business become more focused more productive and more cost effective SMB8000 Communications Analyst ke...

Page 1456: ...e automatic emailing of reports to predetermined destinations Real time inbound outbound call monitoring Changes can now be made to the call record such as Account Code Entry DNIS and comments field Call costing and user configurable rate plans Time billing Included Reports Date and time summaries Most frequently called numbers Department summaries Extension and line summaries Longest and most exp...

Page 1457: ...ccess to many of the available reports over the internet using a web browser Monitors for emergency 911 calls made by the SV8100 and provides detailed automatic location information to monitoring agents refer toSMB8000 E911 Security Notification on page 2 1431 Refer to the SMB8000 Communications Analyst Installation Guide installed with the software for more detailed information SMDR does not prin...

Page 1458: ...ty Terminals All Terminals Incoming CO PBX Call Outgoing CO PBX Call Conference CO PBX Call Transferred CO PBX Call Required Component s LAN connection for SMDR over Ethernet and connection to the SV8100 license server Minimum PC Requirements For a detailed list of PC Requirements and Operating Systems supported refer to the SMB Communication Analyst Installation and Configuration Guide for the ve...

Page 1459: ... are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 14 01 06 Basic Trunk Data Setup SMDR Printout Have the system Include 1 or Exclude 0 the trunk you are programming from the SMDR printout Refer to Program 35 01 and 35 02 for SMDR printout options 0 No Print Out 1 Pri...

Page 1460: ...ing Time For Incoming Calls A call must ring for at least this time to be included in the SMDR report 0 65535 seconds 0 All default 0 35 01 08 SMDR Options Format Selection Set the SMDR Station Message Detail Recording format for each of the eight SMDR ports 0 NA Type North America 1 G J Type Overseas Japan default 0 35 02 01 SMDR Output Options Toll Restricted Call Determine if SMDR can include o...

Page 1461: ...t Options All Lines Busy ALB Output Determine if the All Lines Busy ALB indication should be displayed 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed default 0 35 02 11 SMDR Output Options Walking Toll Restriction Table Number Set the SMDR Station Message Detail Recording walking toll restriction table number output options for each of the eight SMDR ports 0 Not Output 1 Output default 1 35 02 12 SMDR Output Options...

Page 1462: ...f the Caller Name on the same line as the call record 0 or if a line feed should be added and up to 24 characters of the Caller Name are displayed on the following line 1 If the line feed option is selected the Caller Name is displayed on the next line as NEXT Caller Name This setting works regardless of the setting in Program 35 02 15 With this option set to 1 if your communications program such ...

Page 1463: ...S Network Setup IP Address When using an IP connection set up the IPLA IPLB IP address used to connect from the CommAnalyst PC to the system 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 254 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 default 192 168 0 10 10 20 01 LAN Setup for External Equipment TC Port When using an IP connection define the TCP port used for communicating to the CommAnalyst External Device 5 SMDR...

Page 1464: ...ansferred calls since the system displays the DNIS number when a call is received and displays the DNIS name for transferred calls This setting has no impact on outgoing calls which display the trunk name instead of the DNIS name Caller ID name can be displayed in SMDR records Program 35 02 17 must be set to 0 and Program 35 02 18 set to 1 Operation Refer toCentral Office Calls Answering on page 2...

Page 1465: ...latest full build of SMB8000 Communications Analyst to be installed as a prerequisite Conditions ESN setup requires SMB800 Communications Analyst build 5242 or higher and SMB patch1 to be installed prior to running the ESN installation ESN Alarm and ESN ALI Lookup works with Adobe Acrobat Reader version 7 0 and above only The EOMS Service needs to be restarted after SQL Server restarts the PC rest...

Page 1466: ...fication solution installation For a detailed list of PC Requirements and Operating Systems supported refer to the E911 Security Notification ESN Installation Setup ESN Administrator Guide for the version being installed These recommendations are to be used as a minimum requirements guideline only The actual requirements may vary based on the specific needs such as the call volume number of remote...

Page 1467: ...uite installation setup and ESN administrator guide for detailed instructions Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 20 01 LAN Setup for External Equipment TC Port When using an IP connection define the TCP port used for communicating to the CommAnalyst External Device 5 SMDR Entries 0 65535 This entry must match the entry made in the CDM setup with the CommA...

Page 1468: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1434 SMB8000 Communications Analyst THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1469: ...served at all times for preset conference Preset conference password length may set from 1 5 digits Password protection for each conference this allows a user or group to have a personal conference by keeping the password confidential Scheduled Conferences Create instant conference calls one time for ad hoc meetings and provide more flexibility allowing you to configure advanced conference functio...

Page 1470: ...in group may Create View Edit Delete conferences for any user Edit the conference application settings and create new admin and user members View and modify the blade configuration options Download new firmware to the blade and reset the blade from the web interface User Group Restricted group A member of the user group may create conferences only under their username and view conferences that are...

Page 1471: ...the telephone dial pad A conference organizer has access to set all DTMF access codes that conference participants support Conference Participants Conference participants can adjust the transmit volume level by pressing 16 increase volume or 17 decrease volume on the telephone dial pad Conference participants can adjust the receive volume level by pressing 18 increase volume or 19 decrease volume ...

Page 1472: ...e Pilot number is needed put all eight ports in one hunt group using Program 16 02 01 Department Group Assignment for Extensions When the password is entered the conference selected is the conference you enter The administrator must perform the Setting Procedures before the Conference Bridge can be used Each CD PVAA blade reduces the number of stations by eight or 16 depending on license Each PVAA...

Page 1473: ...y the number of preset conferences Email Notification N A Selected by organizer per conference Host Required N A Selected by organizer per conference Conference scheduled by date and time N A Selected by organizer per conference Assign unique password per conference N A Selected by organizer per conference Table 2 91 Migration Supported Blades Blade Color CHS1U US Blue 19 Chassis CHS2U B US Blue 9...

Page 1474: ... 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1440 SMB8000 Conference Bridge System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s CD PVAA AKS Conference Bridge Application Compact Flash Media Related Features None ...

Page 1475: ...sions are used for DTMF receivers for single line telephones Trunks are used as DTMF receivers for dial tone and busy tone detection for analog trunks Assign at least one circuit for DTMF reception 0 or 1 Use the following as a guide when allocating DTMF receivers In light traffic sites allocate one DTMF receiver for every 10 devices that use them In heavy traffic sites allocate one DTMF receiver ...

Page 1476: ...cognizes the CD PVAA Blade Refer to Program 10 50 01 in SV8100 Programming Manual 10 55 01 Package Network Setup IP Address Define the IP Address for the CD ETIA When the blade is deleted from the system using Program 90 05 the programming for the slot in 10 55 is set back to default 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 default 172 16 1 100 10 55 03 Package Ne...

Page 1477: ...55 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 default 255 255 0 0 10 55 05 Package Network Setup Default Gateway Define the default gateway for the CD ETIA 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 default 0 0 0 0 11 02 01 Extension Numbering Assign extension numbers to extension...

Page 1478: ...Assign a name to the Extension Department Groups Maximum 12 characters default No Setting 16 01 02 Department Group Basic Data Setup Department Calling Cycle Set the call routing for Department Calling Routing can be either circular cycle to all phones in a group or priority cycle to highest priority extension first 0 Normal Routing Priority 1 Easy UCD Routing Circular default 0 16 01 03 Departmen...

Page 1479: ...Data Setup Department Hunting No Answer Time Set the time a call rings a Department Group extension before hunting occurs 64800 seconds default 15 16 01 10 Department Group Basic Data Setup Enhanced Hunt Type Set the type of hunting for each Extension Department Group 0 No queuing 1 Hunting When Busy 2 Hunting When Not Answered 3 Hunting When Busy or No Answer default 0 16 02 01 Department Group A...

Page 1480: ...e line 6 Delayed VRS 7 ANI DNIS 8 DID DDI Mode Switching default 0 22 07 01 DIL Assignment Assign the destination extension or Department Calling Group for each DIL incoming trunk Assign the master pilot number of the Conference group from Program 11 07 01 as the DIL destination If all Conference ports are in the same unique Extension Department Group see Program 16 02 above the DIL rings another ...

Page 1481: ...ng Conference Set the number of participants and ports required for a conference Set advanced meeting options Set number of participants Announce Participant Allow Early Entry Conference password Provide a Unique password to each participant Organizer required Organizer authentication Configure the Conference mode Lecture Discussion View and Edit a scheduled conference in the Outlook calendar Dele...

Page 1482: ... NEC Conference Bridge user account must match the email address configured for that user in Outlook The organizer must be the first email address listed for a meeting created in Outlook The conference plug in automatically populates this address when creating the meeting invitation in Outlook When changing a meeting from the Outlook calendar the meeting with the conference ID must be used for the...

Page 1483: ...ack 26_10 or higher PVA Conference Compact Flash version 2 0 or higher SV8100 System Software 8 00 or higher PC Hardware Pentium 1 6 GHz core 2 duo At least 2 4GB of available RAM 1 GB of Hard disk space SVGA monitor 1024X 768 resolution PC Software Microsoft Outlook 2007 or Microsoft Outlook 2010 Microsoft Net Framework 4 Extended Microsoft Net Framework 4 Client Profile Microsoft Visual Studio 2...

Page 1484: ...evel 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Refer to the SMB8000 Conference Bridge feature for basic programming The programs identified below must be configured to add the PVA Conference Enhancement License 6004 for Outlook integration support Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1...

Page 1485: ...nnect to the Conference Bridge 2 From the main menu click on Download Outlook Plugin refer to Figure 2 46Conference Bridge Schedule New Conference on page 2 1452 10 54 02 License Configuration for Each Package License Quantity Assign the number of licenses to the Conference Application per slot For the slot the CD PVAA blade is installed in assign the number of licensed conference bridge ports For...

Page 1486: ...SV8100 2 1452 SMB8000 Conference Bridge Outlook Integration 3 On the displayed page select Click here to download Figure 2 46 Conference Bridge Schedule New Conference Figure 2 47 Conference Bridge Download Outlook Plugin ...

Page 1487: ...lation completes from the Control Panel Add Remove Programs verify the required applications are installed Microsoft Net Framework 4 Extended Microsoft Net Framework 4 Client Profile Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Tools for Office Runtime x86 OR Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Tools for Office Runtime x64 To support conference invitations being sent from Outlook requires a SMTP relay server set up for ...

Page 1488: ...e the Outlook add in has successfully installed the new options Schedule NEC Meeting and NEC Bridge Settings are available For Outlook 2010 refer to Figure 2 51New Toolbars Added Outlook 2010 on page 2 1455 Figure 2 49 Add or Remove Programs Currently Installed Programs Example Figure 2 50 New Toolbars Added Outlook 2007 ...

Page 1489: ...king directory for example C Work 3 Find the setup exe file in the working directory 4 Right click on setup exe select Properties 5 Select the Digital Signatures tab 6 Select Purna PC purna 7 Click Details 8 Click View Certificate 9 Click Install Certificate the install certificate wizard will start 10 Click Next but DO NOT let it automatically choose where to store the certificate 11 Choose Place...

Page 1490: ...gration Setting NEC Conference Bridge Login Information 1 Click on the NEC Bridge Settings icon and configure the Conference Bridge URL IP Address User Name and Password Figure 2 52 NEC Bridge Settings Screen Outlook 2007 Figure 2 53 NEC Bridge Settings Screen Outlook 2010 ...

Page 1491: ...NEC Meeting Using Default Options shows scheduling a conference with default meeting options The default number of participants is two and no advanced meeting options are selected The meeting organizer is also considered a participant and is included in the total 1 Click on Schedule NEC Meeting 2 Enter a Subject 3 Enter the email addresses of the other participant 4 Configure the Start time and En...

Page 1492: ...s stored in the outlook calendar For each conference meeting Conference Bridge sends two emails to each participant The first with conference details and the second as an iCalendar event When changing a meeting from the Outlook calendar the meeting with the Meeting ID must be used for the change to affect the conference bridge settings Scheduling NEC Meeting with Advanced meeting options The defau...

Page 1493: ...icipant on Entry Set the Conference Password Provide a Unique password to each participant Organizer Required Organizer Authorization Configure the Conference mode Discussion or Lecture 7 Click Apply and when prompted confirm setting changes 8 Set conference Date Start Time and End Time 9 Click on the Send button to schedule the NEC meeting 10 After processing the request an appropriate success or...

Page 1494: ...o Figure 2 58 Schedule a Recurring NEC Meeting 1 Click on Schedule NEC Meeting 2 Enter a Subject 3 Click on the Reoccurrence icon 4 Click on NEC Meeting Options from here you can change the following settings Start time End time Duration Daily Weekly Monthly Start date End date or number of occurrences 5 Click OK 6 Click on the Send button to schedule a NEC meeting 7 After processing the request a...

Page 1495: ...arly recurring appointment A Monthly recurring appointment with an interval value of 2 or higher For example the 5th day of the 3rd Week of every month A Weekly recurring appointment for multiple days of a week For example on Tuesday and Friday A Daily recurring appointment for multiple times on the same day For example at 9 00 a m and 3 00 p m Figure 2 58 Schedule a Recurring NEC Meeting ...

Page 1496: ...er to Figure 2 59 Editing a NEC Meeting After processing the request an appropriate success or error message is displayed and updated information is sent to all participant email addresses 1 Go to Outlook Calendar 2 Locate the NEC meeting you would like to edit 3 Open the NEC meeting by double clicking on the appointment 4 On the appointment window make the necessary changes 5 Click on Save Send t...

Page 1497: ...ting Delete illustrates one method right click and select delete of deleting an appointment Make sure you select the calendar entry that has the Meeting ID You are asked to confirm the deletion If OK is selected the meeting is deleted in both Outlook and the Conference Bridge Figure 2 60 NEC Meeting Delete Figure 2 61 NEC Meeting Delete Confirmation Figure 2 62 Delete NEC Meeting ...

Page 1498: ...ing is not deleted from the outlook calendar Limitations It is not possible to delete edit a particular instance of a NEC recurring meeting from the Conference Bridge All recurring instances must be deleted or edited in order to delete edit the NEC Meeting from Conference Bridge Email Invitation and iCalendar Integration For each conference meeting the Conference Bridge sends two emails to each pa...

Page 1499: ...ting Scheduled Example on page 2 1465 iCalendar for Deleted Canceled Meeting When a NEC meeting is cancelled participants receive an email with the cancellation and the event is marked as CANCELLED in the calendar The cancelled appointment can be removed from calendar by clicking the Remove from Calendar icon in the received iCalendar email refer to Figure 2 67Cancelled Conference Scheduled from W...

Page 1500: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1466 SMB8000 Conference Bridge Outlook Integration Figure 2 67 Cancelled Conference Scheduled from Web UI ...

Page 1501: ...ditions If a feature is restricted by an extension Class of Service though the Softkey menu still displays the option the user cannot set the feature Using the Directory Dialing Softkeys Recall can toggle the language display from English to Japanese The feature must be active to change the volume e g telephone must be ringing page being heard etc Press the volume keys when the telephone is idle t...

Page 1502: ...Pro wizards for feature programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 11 13 Ser...

Page 1503: ...y language for a multiline terminal 0 Japanese 1 English 2 German 3 French 4 Italian 5 Spanish 6 Dutch 7 Portuguese 8 Norwegian 9 Danish 10 Swedish 11 Turkish 12 Latin American Spanish 13 Romanian 14 Polish default 1 15 02 71 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Disable Softkey Disable 1 softkey buttons and limit the softkey display Also limits the Menu key left and right buttons 0 Off 1 On defaul...

Page 1504: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1470 Softkeys THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1505: ... Groups are available Each extension has 10 Station Speed Dial bins Each Speed Dialing bin can store a number with up to 24 digits When placing an Speed Dialing call the system normally routes the call through Trunk Group Routing or ARS whichever is enabled Or the user can preselect a specific trunk for the call Also the system can optionally force System Speed Dialing numbers to route over a spec...

Page 1506: ...Touch Key Storing a Flash To enhance compatibility with connected Centrex and PBX lines Speed Dialing bin can have a stored Flash command For example storing 9 Flash 926 5400 causes the system to dial 9 flash the line and then dial 926 5400 The Flash can be stored by the user from their telephone or by the system administrator during system programming Using a Programmable Function Key To streamli...

Page 1507: ...ch Key for Speed Dial operation If you enter a PBX trunk access code in a Speed Dial bin the system automatically inserts a pause after the bin Single line telephones can dial only System and Group Speed Dial numbers Toll Restriction may prevent a user from using a stored Speed Dial number Unless a user preselects a trunk Trunk Group Routing selects the trunk Speed Dial uses for trunk calls If the...

Page 1508: ...phone book the menu is skipped and the next menu will appear For DT3XX or DT7XX terminals use the Feature Key to clear the characters one at a time when entering the name Default Settings Available No Speed Dialing bins are assigned System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Account Code Entry Automatic Route Selection Central Office Calls Placing Code R...

Page 1509: ... is enabled allocate at least one circuit for dial tone detection Type 0 or 2 0 Common Use 1 Extension Only 2 Trunk Only Default Circuit Resource 01 08 1 Extensions Circuit Resource 09 32 2 Trunks Circuit Resource 33 96 0 Not Used Circuit Resource 97 160 0 Common When PZ BS10 is installed 97 160 are available 11 10 04 Service Code Setup for System Administrator Storing Common Speed Dialing Numbers...

Page 1510: ... 13 03 01 Speed Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions For Group Speed Dialing assign extensions to Speed Dialing groups 01 64 default 1 13 04 01 Speed Dialing Number and Name Speed Dialing Data Enter the System and Group Speed Dialing numbers and names 1 9 0 Pause Press line key 1 Recall Flash Press line key 2 Code to wait for answer supervision in ISDN Press line key 3 maximum 24 digits default...

Page 1511: ...all Incoming Ring Pattern 0 Normal Pattern 1 4 Tone Pattern 1 4 5 9 Scale Pattern 1 5 10 13 Tone Pattern 5 8 default 0 13 05 01 Speed Dialing Trunk Group Trunk Group Number For each System Speed Dialing number enter the routing option Trunk Group Number 1 100 to dial out on 0 No setting 1 100 default 0 14 02 06 Analog Trunk Data Setup Pause at 1st digit after Line Seize in Manual Dial Mode Enable ...

Page 1512: ...ssigned 15 14 02 Programmable One Touch Keys Station Speed Dial Name Assign the name associated with the extension Speed Dial Bin 1 10 Name default not assigned 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Default Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 07 04 Class of Service O...

Page 1513: ...ional data 1 8 Door Box No 00 99 Appearance Functional Level 80 03 01 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Detect Level Define the detect levels for the DTMF Tone Receiver 0 0dBm 25dBm 1 5dBm 30dBm 2 10dBm 35dBm 3 15dBm 40dBm 4 20dBm 45dBm 5 25dBm 50dBm 6 30dBm 55dBm default Type 1 5 0 80 03 02 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Start delay time Define the start delay times for the DTMF Tone Receiver 0 255 0 25ms 64ms ...

Page 1514: ...m 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 5 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 6 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 7 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 8 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 9 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 10 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 11 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 12 70dBm 0 to 85dBm 15 detect level 13 75dBm 0 to 90dBm 15 detect level 14 80dBm 0 to 95dBm 15 detect level 15 85dBm 0 to 10...

Page 1515: ...etect level 4 20dBm 0 to 35dBm 15 detect level 5 25dBm 0 to 40dBm 15 detect level 6 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 7 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 8 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 9 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 10 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 11 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 12 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 13 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 14 70dBm 0 to 85dBm 15 detect leve...

Page 1516: ...etect timer for the DTMF Tone Receiver 1 255 15 15ms 3825ms default Type 1 5 1 30ms 80 04 01 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Detection Level Define the detection levels for the Call Progress Tone Detector 0 0dBm 25dBm 1 5dBm 30dBm 2 10dBm 35dBm 3 15dBm 40dBm 4 20dBm 45dBm 5 25dBm 50dBm 6 30dBm 55dBm default Type 1 DT 0 25dBm Type 2 BT 0 25dBm Type 3 RBT 0 25dBm Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 02 Call Prog...

Page 1517: ...t means 30 30 1 60 When set to N 255 it means 30 30 255 7680 0 not detect default Type 1 DT 132 3990 ms Type 2 BT 132 3990 ms Type 3 RBT 132 3990 ms Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 05 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Pulse Count Define the pulse count for the Call Progress Tone Detector 1 255 default Type 1 DT 1 Type 2 BT 1 Type 3 RBT 1 Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 06 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup ON minimum ...

Page 1518: ... on ISDN 80 04 07 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup ON maximum time Define the on maximum time for the Call Progress Tone Detector 0 255 30 30 7680ms default Type 1 DT 0 Type 2 BT 20 450ms ET Type 3 RBT 40 1230ms Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 08 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup OFF minimum time Define the off minimum time for the Call Progress Tone Detector 1 255 30 30 7680ms default Type 1 DT 1 60ms Typ...

Page 1519: ...Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó 2 Enter characters A C a c 2 3 Enter characters D F d f 3 4 Enter characters G I g i 4 5 Enter characters J L j l 5 6 Enter characters M O m o 6 7 Enter characters P S p s 7 8 Enter characters T V t v 8 9 Enter characters W Z w z 9 0 Enter characters 0 ô Õ ú ä ö ü Enter characters B E S Accepts an entry only required if two letters on the same key are needed ex TOM Pressing again Spa...

Page 1520: ...rammable Function Key 1 At multiline terminal press Speaker 2 Dial 751 3 Press the key where the number is to be stored 4 Dial 27 5 Dial System Speed Dial Bin number to put under the key 6 Press Speaker to hang up To dial a System Speed Dialing number under a Programmable Function Key 1 At the multiline terminal press Speaker 2 Press the key which has the stored number to be dialed The number seiz...

Page 1521: ...For Group Speed Dialing press the Group Speed Dialing key OR For System Speed Dialing key press the System Speed Dialing key 3 Press the Exit key To display additional numbers repeat from step 1 OR Press the Right Cursor key until the appropriate Telephone Book System or Group Speed Dial menu appears Use the Volume Down and Volume Up keys to scroll through the stored numbers To store a Station Spe...

Page 1522: ...When you want to 1 Enter characters 1 _ Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó 2 Enter characters A C a c 2 3 Enter characters D F d f 3 4 Enter characters G I g i 4 5 Enter characters J L j l 5 6 Enter characters M O m o 6 7 Enter characters P S p s 7 8 Enter characters T V t v 8 9 Enter characters W Z w z 9 0 Enter characters 0 ô Õ ú ä ö ü Enter characters B E S Accepts an entry only required if two letters on the s...

Page 1523: ...bin 5 Hang up To dial a Station Speed Dialing number multiline terminal 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 7 default Service Code OR Press the System Speed Dialing key Service Code 751 27 To preselect press a line key in step 1 instead of Speaker 3 Dial the Station Speed Dial buffer number 0 9 1 Station Speed Dial buffer 1 2 Station Speed Dial buffer 2 0 Station Speed Dial buffer 10 The stored number dials ou...

Page 1524: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1490 Speed Dial System Group Station 3 Dial the Speed Dial Memory Location Station Speed Dial 0 9 Group Speed Dial xxx none at default System Speed Dial 000 999 4 Converse ...

Page 1525: ... Telephone Book 1 represents equipment manufacturer ABC Corporation The ABC Corporation is divided into three groups Sales Service and Parts When a user needs to search the ABC Corporation Telephone Book for a Sales number the search from all 300 entries in the ABC Corporation Telephone Book can be narrowed to the entries in the Sales Group only Conditions A maximum of 100 Telephone Books is suppo...

Page 1526: ...assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 11 56 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Telephone Book Lock Service Password to unlock telephone book Dial the password then it prompts you for an extension number to unlock Type in the ext number you want to unlock th...

Page 1527: ...al Number and Name Group Number Assign each entry in the telephone book to a group if needed In the telephone book you can break it down further and have specific groups to search on For example you could have sales support personal finance etc groups to narrow your search A name and number can be assigned to an entry and each entry can be assigned to a group 1 20 default 1 13 08 01 Telephone Book...

Page 1528: ... for Extension Telephone Book 1 Assign a station to the first telephone book A station can have a maximum of two telephone books assigned Up to eight digits 0 100 Default Port 1 1 Port 2 2 Port 100 100 15 19 02 System Telephone Book Setup for Extension Telephone Book 2 Assign a station to the second telephone book A station can have a maximum of two telephone books assigned Up to eight digits 0 10...

Page 1529: ...yping the search criteria press the down pad to initiate the search Search Using Softkey Press the Menu softkey and choose one of the following search types Select the NAME softkey to search by name Use the same search criteria explained in the Search by Name section Select the GRP softkey to search by groups within that phone book Use the Up Down arrow to search through groups 1 20 Select the gro...

Page 1530: ...y memory is displayed If you want to change the Registry Memory Area 0 299 type the new number using the telephone dial pad keys and press the center button on the cursor pad To accept the number change press the center button on the cursor pad again If you do not want to change the Registry Memory Area press the center button on the cursor pad again The registry memory area is displayed If you se...

Page 1531: ...ne Book 2 1497 3 Press the softkey associated with the first or second book OR Press the Right cursor key 4 Search to select the telephone name telephone number or registry entry 0 299 to change 5 Press the Dial softkey to dial the selected number ...

Page 1532: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1498 Speed Dial Telephone Book THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1533: ...t extension called is unavailable Conditions If required use this option to change the Department Step Calling Single Digit Service Code default code 2 A function key for Department Step Calling can be assigned code 36 In Program 20 08 12 enable 1 or disable 0 an extension user ability to use Department Step Calling Default Setting Disabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Comp...

Page 1534: ...ation Hunts 1 or Not Hunts 0 to the next available member of the Hunt Group Department Group ReferDepartment Calling on page 2 403 to set up the Department Group 0 Normal Intercom caller to busy department member hears busy 1 Circular Intercom callers to busy department member routes to idle member default 0 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to an extension Da...

Page 1535: ...UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 13 0 Station Hunt 2 1501 Operation To make a Step Call 1 Place a call to a busy extension ...

Page 1536: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1502 Station Hunt THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1537: ... of calls With Blocked Call Reporting you can better customize Toll Restriction for the site application Customized Date Format The SMDR header can show the report date in one of three formats American European or Japanese Set the format for your preference Transferred Call Tracking SMDR shows each extension share of a transferred call If an outside call is transferred among four extensions SMDR s...

Page 1538: ...onger duration Extension Exclusion You can selectively exclude extensions from the SMDR report This ensures privacy for high profile callers For example the company attorney negotiating a merger may not want his calls to show up on an in house report PBX Call Reporting If your system is behind a PBX you can have SMDR monitor all traffic to the PBX or just calls placed over PBX trunks The SMDR reco...

Page 1539: ...arty C after talking to party C there are 2 records at this point 1 for the A to B call and 1 for the A to C call A 3rd record is printed once party B or C goes idle Unscreened Transfer If party A calls Party B and transfers to party C without talking to party C there is 1 record at this point A 2nd record is printed once party B or C goes idle Mobile Extension An internal call to a mobile extensi...

Page 1540: ...ller ID name information depending on the view option selected in Program 35 02 18 You can select to display the Caller ID number or name or the DID number If you want to display the Caller Name in the DIALLED NO CLI and ACCOUNT area select 2 in the updated Program 35 02 15 and 1 in Program 35 02 17 If the Caller ID name is not received the area for Caller ID Name is blank Sample SMDR Report Trunk...

Page 1541: ...tware this has been enhanced with the addition of a tag to any part of the call that is routed through the virtual loopback to enable complete tracking of the call When a call is routed through the Virtual Loopback or more precisely its S point it will return as a new incoming call on the Loopback T point trunk port CLASS TIME DATE LINE DURATION STATION DIALLED No CLI ACCOUNT POT 10 52 12 09 002 0...

Page 1542: ...s two functions First by using an encoding that is not a usual number or trunk port index the SMDR software gets the information that a virtual loopback channel is used Additionally on the Virtual Loopback s S points the station s phone number isn t used but the trunk port index of the associated T point again marked as virtual This way the SMDR software can directly use the mark as tag to link th...

Page 1543: ...site order occurs if the calling party clears first This special tagging applies anytime Virtual Loop ports are used If an extension uses a Virtual Loop T point to dial out this port is tagged in the SMDR report accordingly as well the associated S point The same applies if internal SMDR is enabled and the S point is called Then the S point is printed as tagged associated T point Here is an exampl...

Page 1544: ...onality Program 35 02 16 must be set to 1 Trunk Name Number otherwise the received dialed number not the trunk port information is printed Figure 2 77 Example of Twice Through Virtual Loop Reverse Direction Table 2 93 SMDR Report Definitions Report Headings Definitions Call Record Number SMDR record number consecutive CLASS Type of call see Class Definitions below TIME Time call placed or answered...

Page 1545: ...ming trunk calls ALB All lines in group are busy group number follows TIME field BRD Call blocked due to Toll Restriction PTRS Transferred call IVIN BRI PRI inbound trunk call ICM Extension call Table 2 94 SMDR Report Format with Program 35 02 14 Set to 0 Character Position Field Definition Header Line 1 1 60 Spaces 61 70 MM DD YYYY 71 Space 72 75 PAGE 76 Space 77 79 Report page number e g 001 CR ...

Page 1546: ...return and line feed LF Line feed SMDR Record 1 4 Call type e g POT for outgoing 5 Space 6 10 Time in 24 hour clock HH MM 11 Space 12 21 LINE 22 Space 23 30 Call Duration HH MM SS 31 Space 32 41 Station number or name 42 Space 43 62 Number dialed 20 digits maximum 63 Space 64 79 Account number or NO ANSWER Table 2 94 SMDR Report Format with Program 35 02 14 Set to 0 Continued Character Position Fi...

Page 1547: ...Spaces 61 70 MM DD YYYY 71 Space 72 75 PAGE 76 Space 77 79 Report page number e g 001 CR LF Carriage return and line feed Header Line 2 1 5 CLASS 6 Space 7 10 TIME 11 Spaces 12 15 DATE 16 17 Spaces 18 21 LINE 22 Space 23 30 DURATION 31 32 Spaces 33 39 STATION 40 44 Spaces 45 51 DIALLED 52 Space 53 59 No CLI 60 63 Spaces 64 70 ACCOUNT CR LF Carriage return and line feed LF Line feed ...

Page 1548: ... NO ANSWER Table 2 96 SMDR Summary Report OUTGOING CALL COST SUMMARY FOR DAY OF nn nn nn TOTAL NO OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS 0 TOTAL NO OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS 0 NO OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS COSTED 0 COST 0 NO OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS COSTED 0 COST 0 OUTGOING CALL COST SUMMARY FOR WEEK ENDING nn nn nn TOTAL NO OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS 49 TOTAL NO OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS 0 NO OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS COSTED 0 COS...

Page 1549: ...ts to print SMDR requires a connection to the CD CP00 US LAN or a RS232 serial connection to a CT A R adaptor on a DTH DTR style phone When using a CT A R unit connected to a DTH DTR style terminal for SMDR output SW1 1 and SW1 2 should be set to ON and SW1 3 SW1 8 set to OFF on the CT A unit The CT A R unit should be connected to the DTH DTR terminal and connected to power before the line cord is...

Page 1550: ...between those two stations When using internal SMDR screened transfers generate three records and the duration overlaps between those three extensions CCIS Centralized Billing will only buffer 320 calls The SMDR call records will be buffered when the system cannot output the SMDR information due to the lost connection When the connection is active the SMDR information will be immediately output an...

Page 1551: ...PCPro and WebPro wizards for feature programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3...

Page 1552: ...g in the SMDR printout Refer to Programs 35 01 and 35 02 for SMDR printout options 0 No Print Out 1 Prints Out default 0 14 04 01 Behind PBX Setup For ANI DNIS the following additional setting is recommended Behind PBX 0 Stand Alone 0 Stand Alone Trunk 1 Behind PBX PBX 2 Not Used 3 CTX assume 9 default 0 15 01 03 Basic Extension Data Setup SMDR Printout For each extension enter 1 if extension call...

Page 1553: ... for COS 15 20 07 19 Class of Service Options Administrator Level SMDR Printout Department Group STG Data Determine if Department Group STG Data is included in the SMDR report for each COS 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 14 default 1 for COS 15 20 07 20 Class of Service Options Administrator Level SMDR Printout Accumulated Account Code Data Determine if Accumulated Account Code Data is included in ...

Page 1554: ...efault 0 35 01 07 SMDR Options Minimum Ring Time For Incoming Calls A call must ring for at least this time to be included on the SMDR report Enter 0 to allow all calls to print 0 65535 seconds 0 All default 0 35 01 08 SMDR Options Format Selection Do not change This option is added to allow an increased account code field from eight to 16 when used in the U K This allows 16 characters of the Call...

Page 1555: ...ll Enable this option 1 to have the SMDR report include incoming calls If you disable this option 0 incoming calls do not print 0 Not Displayed 1 Displayed default 1 35 02 09 SMDR Output Options Extension Number or Name Set this option to 1 to have the SMDR report include extension numbers Set this option to 0 to have the SMDR report include extension names 0 Name 1 Number default 1 35 02 10 SMDR ...

Page 1556: ...nt Account Code or Caller Name of Incoming Call Determine whether the Account Code or Caller ID name should print in the SMDR record Program 35 01 08 must be set to 0 for this entry to be followed 0 ACC 1 CNAME default 0 35 02 18 SMDR Output Options Print Mode for Caller Name of Incoming Call Determine how SMDR should print Caller Name of incoming call Select whether to display up to 16 characters...

Page 1557: ...ed via the ISDN Virtual Loopback are tagged 0 Don t Mark 1 Mark default 0 35 03 01 SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group Assign the SMDR port for each trunk group For each Trunk Group select the SMDR port to which the incoming SMDR information should be sent Trunk Groups 1 100 SMDR Ports 1 8 default 1 35 04 01 SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups Assign the SMDR port for each Department Group...

Page 1558: ... 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1524 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR flowcharts are located on the following pages SMDR with a CD CP00 US Ethernet or Serial Connection via CT A R Adapter on a DTH DTR Terminal ...

Page 1559: ...UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 13 0 Station Message Detail Recording 2 1525 SMDR Flowchart ...

Page 1560: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1526 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Flowchart Continued ...

Page 1561: ...UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 13 0 Station Message Detail Recording 2 1527 SMDR Flowchart Continued ...

Page 1562: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1528 Station Message Detail Recording Operation Once installed and programmed SMDR operation is automatic SMDR Flowchart Continued ...

Page 1563: ...n or any extension in the system The name is displayed on the multiline terminal LCD when an intercom or K CCIS call is placed Conditions Display telephones use extension names for Directory Dialing Single line telephone extensions cannot program names Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals with Display Required Component None Related Features Directory Diali...

Page 1564: ...vice Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Extension Name Programming Customize the extension name programming used for registration and setup MLT default 700 15 01 01 Basic Extension Data Setup Extension Name Define the extension virtual extension name Up to 12 characters Default STA 101 Ext 101 STA 102 Ext 102 etc 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign an Extension Name Change key 55 to exten...

Page 1565: ...d 6 Press Speaker to hang up To program any extension name 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 700 OR Press the Extension Name Change key Program 15 07 or SC 751 55 3 Enter the extension number to be named 4 Enter a name Refer to Table 2 97 Keys for Entering Names The name can be have to 12 digits maximum 5 Press Hold 6 Press Speaker to hang up Table 2 97 Keys for Entering Names Use this keypad digit When you ...

Page 1566: ...r characters B E S Accepts an entry only required if two letters on the same key are needed ex TOM Pressing again Space In system programming mode use the right arrow Softkey instead to accept and or add a space Conf Clear the character entry one character at a time Hold Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right Table 2 97 Keys for Entering Names Continued Use th...

Page 1567: ...e is dialed from an extension that does not have an extension swap password programmed busy tone is heard If the Extension Swap service code is dialed from an extension whose Class of Service does not allow Extension Data Swap busy tone is heard If the destination extension entered is not a valid extension busy tone is heard The following user setting data is relocated with the extension All other...

Page 1568: ...st commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 15 12 Service Code Setup Administrative for Special Access Extension ...

Page 1569: ...ing Tone Order Setup Program 15 11 Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment Program 15 12 Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions Program 15 14 Programmable One Touch Keys Program 15 20 LCD Line Key Name Assignment Program 16 02 Department Group Assignment for Extensions Program 20 06 Class of Service for Extensions Program 21 02 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions Program 21 04 Toll Res...

Page 1570: ...Extension Assignment Program 31 02 Internal Paging Group Assignment Program 41 02 ACD Group and Agent Assignments Program 41 17 ACD Login Mode Setup Program 42 02 Hotel Motel Telephone Setup Operation To exchange two terminals 1 Pick up the handset or press Speaker 2 Dial the Extension Data Swap Service Code not assigned at default Program 11 15 12 3 Dial the Extension Data Swap Password not assig...

Page 1571: ...m office connectivity Fully integrated CSU DSU T1 support Fractional T1 support Layer 2 protocol support for HDLC Cisco HDLC PPP Frame Relay On board RJ 48 connector for easy direct connection T1 E1 framer and transceiver B8ZS HDB3 zero suppression Response to Inband Loop codes Manual payload loop through the GUI External transmit clock input and receive clock output headers Timing internal or ext...

Page 1572: ...ncreased call performance It is the ideal platform for service providers offering DIA hosted VoIP and managed security services or enterprises migrating to converged voice and data networks Conditions The SV8100 Internal Router Blade CD RTB occupies a slot in the SV8100 chassis CHS2U US The SV8100 Internal Router receives power from the backplane of the CHS2U US chassis For SV8100 systems with Ver...

Page 1573: ...ot available for SV8100 Internal Router It receives power from the CHS2U US chassis Programming is done via a web interface through one of the LAN ports on the board LU PVA CONF PORT8 LIC White N S N S N S S S S S Supported N S Not Supported Table 2 98 Migration Supported Blades Continued Blade Color CHS1U US Blue 19 Chassis CHS2U B US Blue 9 5 Base Chassis CHS2U E Blue 9 5 Exp Chassis IP3NA 6KSU ...

Page 1574: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1540 SV8100 Internal Router Operation Reference Edgemar Internal router board Manual Operating procedures depend on the application ...

Page 1575: ...ng over With Version 4000 software DT700 terminals connected via NAPT can be registered to either the primary or a secondary system in a NetLink environment With Version 5000 software NetLink Multi SIP carrier has been added With Version 7000 or higher software the SV8100 can recognize each system where the DT700 extension s are connected and provide an Automatic Route Selection COS based on the S...

Page 1576: ...o change the ports on a per system basis when connecting IP phones via NAPT The Primary System Main Site requires the appropriate NetLink licenses dependant upon the number of nodes in the NetLink network Up to 16 Nodes can be supported in a NetLink network A maximum of 240 Virtual slots are supported Port assignment is performed sequentially by the requested order from the Secondary Systems All n...

Page 1577: ...l Soft Phone IP K CCIS The following Programs are not updated by the Primary System during fail over Program 10 01 Program 10 02 Program 10 12 Program 10 13 Program 10 14 Program 10 15 Program 10 16 Program 10 45 Program 51 01 Program 90 01 or Program 90 09 Data in SRAM area is not transferred to the Secondary Systems during fail over therefore when fail over occurs DND and Caller ID History may b...

Page 1578: ...twork to be suitable for VoIP it must pass specific requirements To ensure the site meets these requirements an IP ready check and a site survey must be completed at each site before VoIP implementation One way delay must not exceed 100ms Round Trip delay must not exceed 200ms Packet loss must not exceed 1 Data switches must be manageable Routers must provide QOS Adequate bandwidth for estimated V...

Page 1579: ...t after making a change using PCPro WebPro or Handset programming Secondary System 2 TDM Terminal P 1 S2 1 S2 1 P 2 P 1 S2 1 P 2 S2 1 S1 1 S2 1 S1 1 S2 1 0 0 P Primary S1 Secondary System 1 S2 Secondary System 2 Table 2 100 CPU Reset Programs Program When Changed Using 10 12 01 Handset WebPro PCPro 10 12 02 Handset WebPro PCPro 10 12 09 Handset WebPro PCPro 51 01 01 Handset WebPro PCPro 51 15 WebP...

Page 1580: ...and provide an Automatic Route Selection COS based on the System System ID when using NetLink When NetLink is enabled synchronous ringing Program 14 02 17 is automatically disabled Synchronous ringing is not supported in a NetLink environment All nodes in a NetLink network should have the same setting in Program 51 01 04 Restrictions All IP Trunks must be connected to the Primary System Version 40...

Page 1581: ...2 78Example Version 4000 or Earlier on page 2 1547 If the secondary system calls for using a SIP Trunk a total of three DSPs are required One DSP from the secondary and two DSPs from the Primary system Also only 32 Register ID s are available which are programmed in the Primary system When the Secondary NetLink system calls out using its own SIP Trunk no DSPs are used from the Primary system The N...

Page 1582: ...rogram14 12 must be in the same system In order to use CPN in a secondary system Program 51 19 must be turned on for those extensions Once enabled CPN may be sent on a per station basis using Program 21 19 Once NetLink is established PCPro or WebPro must be used to change the system data related to the SIP trunks Any SIP trunks that are built in a system before establishing NetLink will be deleted...

Page 1583: ...time Program 51 01 04 selects the packet sending method whether each packet is sent immediately or after buffering some packets across the network This program needs to be set at each system and it is recommended all systems have same setting Default Setting None System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s CD CP00 US Blade with PZ 32 64 128IPLA or PZ 32 64 128IPLB and PZ ME50 ...

Page 1584: ...ature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 12 03 CD CP00 US Network Setup Default Gateway Define the default gateway to be used by the IPLA interface 0 0 0 0 126 2...

Page 1585: ... 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 default 255 255 0 0 51 01 01 NetLink System Property Setting NetLink System ID This is the ID of each NetLink system Set to insure that no overlap occurs between nodes 0 50 0 No operation default 0 51 01 02 NetLink System Property Setting Primary Candidate Order When the Primary system is turned off or disconnect from network this value is used ...

Page 1586: ...maller data packets will be buffered and then sent across as larger data packets decreasing the number of packets sent across the network When the number of packets sent across the network decreases the amount of bandwidth also decreases 0 Immediate 1 Buffering default 0 Version 8000 or lower default 0 Version 9000 or higher default 1 51 02 01 NetLink System Individual Setting System Name Enter th...

Page 1587: ...p Alive Sending Interval This is the Keep Alive sending time from the Secondary system to confirm communication with the Primary system 1 3600 seconds default 5 51 05 02 NetLink Timer Settings Keep Alive Response Waiting Time This is the time the Secondary system waits for a response from the Primary system before cutting off communication 0 5 10800 seconds 0 infinity default 20 51 05 03 NetLink T...

Page 1588: ... Setting Forced Change Primary System Enabling Set this item whether the Forced Change Primary is available or not 0 Disable 1 Enable default 1 51 07 02 NetLink Primary Compulsion Specification Setting Package Reset Timing Option When Forced Change Primary System is done all packages reset This option can select the timing of package reset 0 Reset when all packages are idle otherwise reject Primar...

Page 1589: ...lly 0 65535 default 0 51 09 06 NetLink Communication Port Settings Database Replication Communication Listening Port Set the port used to replicate database 0 65535 default 58002 51 09 07 NetLink Communication Port Settings Database Replication Primary Detection Port Set the port used to replicate database If 0 is specified temporary port is selected dynamically 0 65535 default 0 51 10 01 Virtual ...

Page 1590: ...o 0 the following features are affected Clock Display Incoming Outgoing History List When set to 1 the following features are affected VRS Time Announce Date and Time Setting Service Code Alarm Clock setting 0 Disable Off 1 Enable On default 0 51 13 03 NetLink Options MAC Address Authorization Enable Refer to Program 51 02 04 for setting MAC address 0 Disable Off 1 Enable On default 0 51 14 01 Net...

Page 1591: ...cation Wait Time Set the wait time until replication starts when NetLink is created 1 86400 seconds default 180 51 16 06 NetLink System Data Replication Mode Setting System Data Replication Interval Set an interval time to start replication to the next node after replication to one node is completed 0 86400 seconds default 1 51 17 01 NetLink DT700 Server Individual Information Setup Registrar Port...

Page 1592: ...d for each DSP on the IPLA Only even numbered ports are supported 0 65534 Defaults VoIP GW1 10020 VoIP GW2 10052 VoIP GW3 10084 VoIP GW4 10116 VoIP GW5 10148 VoIP GW6 10180 VoIP GW7 10212 VoIP GW8 10244 84 26 03 IPL Basic Setup RTCP Port Number RTP Port Number 1 Assign the RTCP Port number to used for each DSP on the IPLA 0 65534 Defaults VoIP GW1 10021 VoIP GW2 10053 VoIP GW3 10085 VoIP GW4 10117...

Page 1593: ...t PoE ports However the real advantage with this card is that additional cards can be stacked by external daisy chain connections to provide up to 76 contiguous ports all on the same managed domain network Below are the primary features of the card set Switches unlike hubs use microsegmentation to create collision domains one per connected segment This way only the Ethernet devices which are direc...

Page 1594: ...ign the Main card by issuing an IP address and configuring the Main Card assignment to the GSWU via data program All other GSWU cards detected in the system will not be assigned an IP address and will be configured as Add on signifying them as Add on cards A PBX system can have up to 12 GSWU cards per system However only three GSWU units can be grouped together to form a single 20 port switch When...

Page 1595: ...y other means will assign a Board Type to the Add on card This will automatically assign its port numbers On power up all GSWU boards are assigned as Main boards or generic Add on boards by no IP address or IP address of 0 In order to include the Add on boards as part of the managed stack and assign port numbers the CCPU will send a Board Type message to the Add on card This will identify the port...

Page 1596: ...S Blue 19 Chassis CHS2U B US Blue 9 5 Base Chassis CHS2U E Blue 9 5 Exp Chassis IP3NA 6KSU A1 White 19 Chassis IP3NA 3KSU B1 White 9 5 Base Chassis IP3WW 3KSU E1 White 9 5 Exp Chassis CD RTB Blue S S S N S N S N S CD ETIA Blue S S S N S N S N S CD PVAA Blue S S S N S N S N S IP3WW RTU B1 White N S N S N S S S S IP3WW GSWU B1 White N S N S N S S S S LU PVA CONF PORT8 LIC White N S N S N S S S S S S...

Page 1597: ...r this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 55 01 Package Network Setup IP Address Define the IP Address for the CD ETIA When the blade is deleted from the system using Program 90 05 the programming for the slot in 10 55 ...

Page 1598: ...4 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 default 255 255 0 0 10 55 05 Package Network Setup Default Gateway Define the default gateway for the CD ETIA 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 default 0 0 0 0 84 26 01 IPL Basic Setup IP Address Assign the IP add...

Page 1599: ...UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 13 0 SV8100 PoE Gigabit Switch 2 1565 Operation None ...

Page 1600: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1566 SV8100 PoE Gigabit Switch THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1601: ...ighlight a phone number within any Windows application and have it automatically dialed by the Desktop Application Recalled calls to a Desktop Station show as recalled calls instead of a new ringing call The same user name and password can be assigned to IP Multiline Station MH240 and Desktop ports when automatic or manual registration is used Version 3000 or higher software UC Desktop Application...

Page 1602: ...r users and reformatted columns and menus Collaboration support for Windows 7 via the Data Conference Module for Chat Application Sharing and Video Data Conference requires an Enhancement Bundle license 5303 and is not available in the Deskset Only configuration Group Phone Messaging adds the ability to send a phone message to multiple recipients Group Quick Messaging adds the ability to send a qu...

Page 1603: ...the soft phone audio device had to support a sample rate that is a multiple of 8000Hz Headsets that do not support this could not be used With UC Desktop Suite Version 6 0 0 0 headsets that do not support multiples of 8000Hz sample rates can now be used on new operating systems Pinning Directory Call Log and Voice Messages windows can be pinned to appear as a tab on the BLF DSS Window View Part nu...

Page 1604: ...Virtual Machine VM Ware and Hyper V support Shared Services Concurrent Connection Licensing the Web Client and Desktop Client license will release when the session is closed SV8100 UC Desktop Suite Applications Version 6 1 4 0 software provides the following enhancements Version 9000 or higher system software is required Provides support for up to 256 clients Clients with Shared Services on the In...

Page 1605: ...phone number directly Answer incoming call End active call Hold active call Retrieve a Held call Transfer active call Additionally with an Enterprise or Unlimited account the Salesforce integration module also provides the following feature Pop contact on incoming call that matches phone number With UC Desktop Suite Version 5 0 0 0 or higher and Salesforce Adapter Version 4 or higher Salesforce co...

Page 1606: ...oves the mouse to the edge of the display In addition to quick access to these SV8100 features the Desktop Client provides a call log for easy viewing of recent received missed or made calls just like your cell phone It also includes a directory to keep your commonly dialed numbers close at hand and optional features like voice recording personal greeting and screen pops using Microsoft Outlook AC...

Page 1607: ... initiate Emergency Call functions from the Desktop Application With UC Desktop Application Version 6 5 0 0 or higher and ACD MIS 2 0 or higher Desktop users that are ACD Agents can receive alerts when callers hang up while waiting in an ACD queue An Abandon Call Alert icon will flash with the number of abandoned calls that are currently included in the Abandon Call List If the user has selected t...

Page 1608: ...d in UC Desktop With UC Desktop Suite Version 6 0 0 0 or higher headsets that do not support multiples of 8000Hz sample rates can be used on Vista and Windows 7 SV8100 InMail Integration With UC Desktop Suite Version 5 0 0 0 or higher Desktop can integrate to the SV8100 InMail providing the following features Message Status View new messages View archived messages Message Access Play new archived ...

Page 1609: ...message status to archive Delete a message Return call Presence Voice Mail Greetings Assign a Voice Meeting Greeting to A presence change A scheduled presence change An Outlook appointment presence change Users must have a mailbox in the voicemail system and have UM8000 integration configured in order to change the Voicemail Greeting for other users UM8000 support requires Part numbers 670786 6707...

Page 1610: ...wnloaded For more information on the InServer blade refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 InServer Configuration Guide The Desktop Shared Services manage shared resources and provide communication facilities between user endpoints The functionality implemented by the third party services includes the following Access to Operator or Receptionist Type Functions An operator or receptionist type user can easil...

Page 1611: ...hared Services Directory or the Window view DSS BLF pane Presence status is manually set by each Desktop user or users with appropriate permissions can update the Presence settings for other users The toolbar and window views support the Presence feature UC Desktop Applications Version 2 0 0 0 with main CPU software Version 2000 or higher is required for Presence With UC Desktop Applications Versi...

Page 1612: ... monitor all 64 park orbits in the SV8100 A Park area at the bottom of the Window view shows the current status of the park orbits The user can configure which park orbits are of interest to them and Desktop will only show these orbits Each monitored park orbit will indicate when it is in use and hovering the mouse over this icon will display a pop up box that shows the name extension of the perso...

Page 1613: ...nses Stock Number Name Description 670184 LK DT Enhancement 4 0 LIC Enables Desktop Suite 4 0 features 670421 CD INSERVER InServer Blade 670636 LK DT Enhancement 5 0 LIC Enables Desktop Suite 5 0 features 670638 LK DT Enhancement 6 0 LIC Enables Desktop Suite 6 0 features 670727 LK SYS 1st CTI 1 Lic 1st Party CTI License note not used by Desktop Suite 670731 LK SYS 3rd CTI Client LIC 3rd Part CTI ...

Page 1614: ... Servers Refer to Table 2 103 Exceptions to Firewall for Ports for exceptions to be made in the firewall for ports and Table 2 104 Exceptions to Windows Process for windows processes Table 2 103 Exceptions to Firewall for Ports Desktop Component TCP and or UDP Port Numbers Related Program SIP UDP 5070 5197 Audio RTP UDP 60000 60254 Video Control TCP 6000 Video RTP UDP 61000 61019 File Transfer TCP...

Page 1615: ... 7 32 bit Environment 2 Applications UC Desktop Shared Services version 6 1 Host Windows 2012 Server running VMWare ESXI 5 1 Virtual Windows 7 32 bit Environment 3 Applications UC Desktop Shared Services version 6 1 Host Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise running Hyper V 6 1 Virtual Windows 7 32 bit and 64 bit Conditions UC Desktop Suite does not support the Cordless DTL 8R 1 terminal The UC Deskto...

Page 1616: ...remote Desktop Applications like SP310 soft phone this can be achieved by a VPN connection to the network the SV8100 resides on The UC Desktop Applications require a ADA L Adapter installed on the multiline terminal with connection directly to the client PC for Call Recording and Personal Greeting voice functions when running in deskset mode With Version 1100 or lower software the CD CP00 US must ...

Page 1617: ...ll similar to the IPK II PC Attendant TAPI does not monitor all the system park orbits Therefore TAPI errors can occur in the application if the Desktop user attempts to park a call in an orbit that is already occupied by a call manually parked in that orbit by another user With UC Desktop Applications Version 3 7 0 0 or higher Desktop users can park calls in the next available park orbit by choos...

Page 1618: ... 3rd Party CTI connection to the SV8100 is supported If an SV8100 system has UCB Unified Communications for Business the 3rd Party Shared Services feature of SV8100 UC Desktop Suite Applications cannot be used If an SV8100 system has SV8100 UC Desktop Suite Applications with the 3rd Party Shared Services UCB cannot be used If the desktop is launched for a phone that is on a call the desktop will n...

Page 1619: ...l in the Desktop Configuration Wizard with the Shared Services option checked call control is handled by the Telephony Service Provider on the Shared Services Server The new Voice Message notification by Windows Toast is only supported in Softphone mode and not in Desktop mode The new Voice Message notification by Windows Toast is only supported with VM8000 InMail The UM8000 Mail does not support ...

Page 1620: ...ed when using InMail Integration If an Outlook appointment is set for less than 30 minutes and you open the Presence Form the duration is changed to 30 minutes Using up or down arrows in the Presence State fields in Web Client is not supported ACT 2001 2012 and 2013 are supported with the following conditions In Act Tools Preferences Communications Dialer Preferences choose NEC Single Line Device ...

Page 1621: ...Recording Personal Greeting in deskset mode The desktop system supports the following operation systems Windows Server 2003 SP2 Windows XP Professional SP2 Windows Vista Business 32 bit Windows 7 Professional 32 bit and 64 bit Windows Server 2008 32 bit and 64 bit Windows Server 2012 Windows 8 Professional and Enterprise 32 bit and 64 bit Refer to the Conditions section for Windows 7 32 bit and 64...

Page 1622: ...l 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 12 03 CD CP00 US Network Setup Default Gateway Define ...

Page 1623: ... 0 0 0 255 128 0 0 255 192 0 0 255 224 0 0 255 240 0 0 255 248 0 0 255 252 0 0 255 254 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 128 0 255 255 192 0 255 255 224 0 255 255 240 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 default 255 255 0 0 Program Number Program Name Descripti...

Page 1624: ...word is required If set 1 the SIP user name and password must be entered on the actual IP phone These settings must match 84 22 15 05 27 or the phone does not come on line If set to 2 when the phone boots up it prompts user to enter a user ID and password before logging in It checks this user ID password against 84 22 15 05 27 If there is no match the phone does not come on line 0 Normal 1 Auto 2 ...

Page 1625: ...0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 default 0 0 0 0 0 30 01 01 DSS Console Operating Mode Set the DSS system Console mode 0 Business Mode 1 Hotel Mode 2 ACD Monitor Mode 3 Business ACD Mode default 0 30 02 01 DSS Console Extension Assignment Extension Number Set the extension number for the multiline terminal connected with the DSS console up to eight digits Up ...

Page 1626: ...lue for the SIP session timer 0 65535 seconds default 180 84 22 01 DT700 Multiline Logon Information Setup User ID Input the User ID for each Personal ID Index 1 512 when using auto or manual registration in 10 46 01 Up to 32 characters default not assigned 84 22 02 DT700 Multiline Logon Information Setup Password Input the Password for each Personal ID Index 1 512 when using auto or manual regist...

Page 1627: ...ssion on CCIS over IP or Remote Unit over IP Remote Unit over IP is available only for the SV8300 The SV8100 SV8300 can provide legacy line trunk interfaces to support the existing Time Division Multiplexing TDM based infrastructure such as analog telephones digital telephones DT300 series analog networks and digital networks T1 E1 ISDN etc Encryption This feature is supported with main software V...

Page 1628: ...to the page the incoming call is on Furthermore a default page can be defined for the DESI Less terminal to change to when it goes idle or when it has answered a call DT700 DT700 S MH240 without MH240 DT700 PSTN S DT700 VoIPDB Encrypt between DT700 and VoIPDB DT700 IP Network SIP H323 CCIS S DT700 VoIPDB Encrypt between DT700 and VoIPDB DT700 Encryption On DT700 Encryption Off N S Supported N Not ...

Page 1629: ...L 2E DTL 6DE DTL 12E Economical terminal providing access to basic telephony and messaging service Fully functional keypad providing standard business functions such as hold transfer speaker microphone and other features 2 button terminal is non display 6 button terminal equipped with LCD and full featured keypad 12 button terminal is non display Available in black DT 330 Value DTL 8LD DTL 12D DTL...

Page 1630: ...users a Busy Lamp Field BLF and 1 button access to extensions trunks and system features ITL 12PA Power Save Adapter provides backup for analog trunk connection DT 730G Value ITL 12CG ITL 12DG Provides access to more sophisticated system features allowing room for growth DT 730G terminals come with a standard backlit LCD display full duplex speakerphone capability module support for expansion and ...

Page 1631: ...des a quick reference of the Series i terminals Table 2 107 Terminal Category Reference Chart Dterm Series i Terminals Series Name Equipment ID System Compatibility Comments IPK II SV8100 SV8300 Dterm Series i 80 85 DTH 8 TEL DTR 8 TEL DTH 8D TEL DTR 8D TEL DTH 16D TEL DTR 16D TEL DTH 16LD TEL DTR 16LD TEL DTH 32D 1 TEL DTR 32D 1 TEL ...

Page 1632: ...E 1 ITL 8LDE 1 Value DTL 8LD 1 DTL 12D 1 DTL 24D 1 DTL 32D 1 Economy DTL 2E 1 DTL 6DE 1 DTL 12E 1 Key Kit Ten Key Kit 12LK Kit N A Built in Except 8LD 1 Unit N A Except 8LD 1 Unit N A 8LK Unit N A N A EHS Except 32D 1 Unit N A Except 32D 1 Unit N A Common ADA Analog Recording Adapter N A N A PSA PSTN Adapter for analog N A N A DSS 60 Button DSS Console N A Connect to Digital Port on KTS Digital AP...

Page 1633: ...D BK WH TEL DTL 12BT 1 BK TEL DTL 12D 1 BK WH TEL DTL 12PA 1 BK TEL DTL 24D 1 BK WH TEL DTL 32D 1 BK WH TEL IP Terminals ITL 2E 1 BK TEL ITL 6DE 1 BK TEL ITL 8LDE 1 BK TEL ITL 8LD 1 BK WH TEL ITL 12D 1 BK WH TEL ITL 12CG 3 BK TEL 1 2 ITL 12DG 3 BK TEL 1 2 ITL 12PA 1 BK TEL ITL 24D 1 BK WH TEL ITL 32D 1 BK WH TEL ITL 320C 1 BK TEL Console DCL 60 1 BK WH CONSOLE Option Not Available Optional Availab...

Page 1634: ...switches 2 3 5 7 and 8 are OFF Switches 1 4 and 6 are ON To Send and Receive to the Terminal Not supported Dip switches 1 2 3 5 7 and 8 are OFF Switches 4 and 6 are ON Dip switches 1 2 3 5 7 and 8 are OFF Switches 4 and 6 are ON Lot Numbers I J Hardware Revision Lot Numbers L M S Software Revision To verify DT 330 terminal firmware hold down keypad buttons 1 2 and 3 while plugging the line cord in...

Page 1635: ...LKD LD L 8LKI LD L 12LK L LCD BL L DCL 60 Digital Terminals DTL 2E 1 BK TEL DTL 6DE 1 BK TEL DTL 12E 1 BK TEL DTL 8LD BK WH TEL DTL 12BT 1 BK TEL DTL 12D 1 BK WH TEL DTL 12PA 1 BK TEL DTL 24D 1 BK WH TEL DTL 32D 1 BK WH TEL IP Terminals ITL 2E 1 BK TEL ITL 6DE 1 BK TEL ITL 8LDE 1 BK TEL ITL 8LD 1 BK WH TEL ITL 12D 1 BK WH TEL ITL 12CG 3 BK TEL ITL 12DG 3 BK TEL ITL 12PA 1 BK TEL ITL 24D 1 BK WH TE...

Page 1636: ...tel BS S Hotel Digital Terminals DTL 2E 1 BK TEL DTL 6DE 1 BK TEL DTL 12E 1 BK TEL DTL 8LD BK WH TEL DTL 12D 1 BK WH TEL DTL 12BT 1 BK TEL DTL 12PA 1 BK TEL DTL 24D 1 BK WH TEL DTL 32D 1 BK WH TEL IP Terminals ITL 2E 1 BK TEL ITL 6DE 1 BK TEL ITL 8LDE 1 BK TEL ITL 8LD 1 BK WH TEL ITL 12D 1 BK WH TEL ITL 12CG 3 BK TEL ITL 12DG 3 BK TEL ITL 12PA 1 BK TEL ITL 24D 1 BK WH TEL ITL 32D 1 BK WH TEL ITL 3...

Page 1637: ... all terminals using encryption will be logged off Terminals will then need the 1 time password to be reentered Encryption is not supported on DT700 series phones that are connected via NAPT Encryption is not supported on DT700 series phones that are registered to a secondary NetLink system With Version 4000 or higher main software DT700 series phones that are registered to a primary NetLink can f...

Page 1638: ...h SRTP 32VoIP DB G 711 32 32 G 722 32 24 G 726 32 24 G 729ab 32 24 G 723 1 24 16 iLBC 24 16 T38 32 28 64VoIP DB G 711 64 64 G 722 64 48 G 726 64 48 G 729ab 64 48 G 723 1 48 32 iLBC 48 32 G3 Fax 64 56 128VoIP DB G 711 128 128 G 722 128 96 G 726 128 96 G 729ab 128 96 G 723 1 96 64 iLBC 96 64 G3 Fax 128 112 ...

Page 1639: ...2 32 32 G 726 32 32 G 729ab 32 32 G 723 1 32 32 iLBC 32 32 T 38 UDPL 32 32 T 38 RTP 32 32 64VoIP DB G 711 64 64 G 722 64 64 G 726 64 64 G 729ab 64 64 G 723 1 64 64 iLBC 64 64 T 38 UDPL 64 64 T 38 RTP 64 64 128VoIP DB G 711 128 128 G 722 128 128 G 726 128 128 G 729ab 128 128 G 723 1 108 96 iLBC 128 128 T 38 UDPL 128 128 T 38 RTP 128 128 ...

Page 1640: ...wizards for feature programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed Encryption Program Number...

Page 1641: ...e the page to be automatically displayed when a DESI Less terminal becomes idle 0 Disable 1 Display page 1 2 Display page 2 3 Display page 3 4 Display page 4 default 0 15 25 04 DESI less Page Setup Answer Automatic Screen Switching Define or Disable the page to be automatically displayed when a DESI Less terminal answers a call 0 Disable 1 Display page 1 2 Display page 2 3 Display page 3 4 Display...

Page 1642: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1608 SV8100 SV8300 Terminals Operation Refer to individual features ...

Page 1643: ... ringing at Secondary Extension SE Virtual Extension VE key Synchronous Ring works Synchronous Ringing is not supported for Tie DID incoming calls Off Hook Ringing or CO PBX Ring Transfers If Synchronous Ringing is enabled the VRS Preamble Message cannot be used Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals All Terminals except Single Line Telephones connected to AP R R or APR U Unit Requi...

Page 1644: ...up PBX CES Incoming Call Define the ring cycle for PBX and CES incoming trunk calls Ringing Cycle 1 13 default 8 20 15 04 Ring Cycle Setup DID DISA VRS Define the ring cycle for DID DISA VRS incoming calls Ringing Cycle 1 13 default 8 20 15 05 Ring Cycle Setup DID DDI Define the ring cycle for DID DDI incoming calls Ringing Cycle 1 13 default 8 20 15 06 Ring Cycle Setup Dial In in the E M Tie Line...

Page 1645: ...g Tone Ranges to trunks Trunks ring extensions according to the Ring Tone Range selected in Program 22 03 0 and the settings made with either Service Code 720 or Program 15 02 02 0 12 Ring Tone Pattern 1 4 Melody 1 Melody 5 Ring Tone Pattern 5 8 default 0 Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 ...

Page 1646: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1612 Synchronous Ringing THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1647: ... automatically uses trunks 9 32 If you have CD 4COTB with PZ 4COTF installed for trunks 1 8 and 17 24 the T1 PRI uses trunks 25 48 The T1 PRI Interface cannot use trunks 9 16 even if available since they are not part of a consecutive block of 24 trunks Each T1 PRI requires that 24 consecutive ports be available in the system even if not all the ports are used otherwise the blade does not function ...

Page 1648: ...the System Hardware Manual for additional details ANI DNIS Compatibility requires using system DTMF receivers When all receivers are busy the incoming ANI DNIS call waits for a receiver to become available The ANI DNIS Address data received from the Telco can have up to 10 digits An extension Class of Service Program 20 09 02 determines whether ANI information is displayed Refer to Digital Trunk C...

Page 1649: ...for trunk ports 1 8 and 17 24 and the T 1 12 ports was assigned as ports 25 36 the number of T 1s change to eight ports instead of 12 The new trunk port numbers are assigned as 9 16 because the eight ports can fit into the gap between ports 8 and 17 without splitting the numerical port number sequence The CD 4COTB with PZ 4COTF is assigned for trunk ports 1 8 and 17 24 and the T 1 eight ports was ...

Page 1650: ...th ANI DNIS Compatibility Required Software None Related Features Caller ID Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing Code Restriction Dial Tone Detection Direct Inward Dialing DID ISDN Compatibility Station Message Detail Recording ...

Page 1651: ... recommended Item 02 Frame Type 0 D4 Item 03 Zero Suppression 1 AMI ZCS Item 04 Distance Between ETU and CSU 0 0 133 Item 05 Clock Select 1 Internal Item 06 DTI No of Ports 0 Auto 24 1 4 Ports 2 8 Ports 3 12 ports 4 16 ports and 5 20 Ports The start port number of a T1 line is displayed and 24 logic ports are automatically assigned to a DTI T1 line 0 200 default 0 10 03 02 ETU Setup DTI T1 PKG Set...

Page 1652: ... Default Circuit Resource 01 08 1 Extensions Circuit Resource 09 32 2 Trunks Circuit Resource 33 96 0 Not Used Circuit Resource 97 160 0 Common When PZ BS10 is installed 97 160 are available 10 39 01 Fractional Setup Fractional Enable Disable T1 PRI fractional function 0 Disable 1 Enable default 0 14 01 02 Basic Trunk Data Setup Transmit Level Select transmit level of CODEC Gain signal amplificati...

Page 1653: ...Detect or Immediate Ring Detect For T1 loop ground start trunks set this option to 1 for the trunks to ring and light correctly Trunks 1 200 0 Normal delayed 1 Immediate Ringing default 1 14 04 01 Behind PBX Setup For ANI DNIS Stand Alone Trunk setting is recommended Behind PBX 0 Stand Alone Trunk 1 Behind PBX PBX 2 Not Used 3 CTX Assume 9 default 0 14 05 01 Trunk Group Trunk Group Number For ANI ...

Page 1654: ...tie trunk compatible with 3 and 4 digit Tie Line service This option does not apply to DISA 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 14 02 Class of Service Options for DISA E M Trunk Group Routing ARS Access Enable Disable a DISA or tie trunk caller ability to dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or Automatic Route Selection 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 14 03 Class of Service Options for DISA E M Tr...

Page 1655: ...nk user from using the Barge In feature 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 14 12 Class of Service Options for DISA E M Retrieve Park Hold Turn Off or On the ability for a DISA caller to retrieve parked or held calls 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Incoming Type For each T1 trunk set the Trunk Service Type to match the Telco connected T1 service For each T1 tr...

Page 1656: ...incoming Tie Line call should be directed as an intercom call 0 or if it should follow the DID Translation Table in Program 22 11 1 0 Specify Extension Number Intercom 1 Use Conversion Table NTT default 0 34 01 04 E M Tie Line Basic Setup E M Line Dial Tone Enter 1 if the Tie Line should send dial tone to the calling system after the call is set up Enter 0 if the Tie Line should not send dial tone...

Page 1657: ...is routed using the DID table up to eight digits can be matched The number of expected digits set in Program 22 09 01 must match the ANI digits defined in Program 22 11 01 For example if an ANI DNIS number received was 2035551234 3001 and Program 22 09 01 4 then the entry in Program 22 11 01 must be 1234 with the defined target extension If the call is routed using the ABB table 0 up to 24 digits ...

Page 1658: ...t COS 1 15 Start 0 End 0 34 09 07 ANI DNIS Service Options Routing on ANI DNIS Error Determine how the system handles an ANI DNIS call if a data error is detected in the incoming data string 0 Play Busy Tone to Caller 1 Route Caller to Ring Group Specified in Program 25 03 Transfer default 0 for COS 1 15 34 09 08 ANI DNIS Service Options Routing When Destination Busy or No Answer Determine how the...

Page 1659: ...0 Issue 13 0 T1 Trunking with ANI DNIS Compatibility 2 1625 Operation Refer to the operation for the following features Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing Direct Inward Dialing DID Tie Lines ...

Page 1660: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1626 T1 Trunking with ANI DNIS Compatibility THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1661: ...em Ringing Extension numbers up to eight digits can be registered on the Tandem Ringing key Extension numbers over nine digits cannot be registered If Tandem Ringing is enabled and one of the extensions is busy no additional calls can be received or placed from either telephone Tandem Ringing can support up to 128 pairs of Tandem Ringing extensions The extension user which enables Tandem Ringing i...

Page 1662: ...ing Disabled System Availability Terminals Master Telephone TDM Multiline Terminals or Single Line Telephones Slave Telephone Single Line Telephones Required Component s None Related Features Call Forwarding Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override Direct Station Selection DSS Console Do Not Disturb Hold Intercom Message Waiting Ring Groups Multiple Trunk Types ...

Page 1663: ...Press Speaker at the extension considered to be the master telephone optional 2 Press the Tandem Ringing key Program 15 07 or SC 751 80 3 Dial 1 to set the feature Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 11 41 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Tandem Ringing Define a service code to be used to set up Tandem Ringing MLT SLT default not assigned 15 07...

Page 1664: ...up if the key is lit While the feature is active if either the master or slave telephone is on a call no calls can be placed or answered at the other extension until the busy telephone has hung up Multiline terminals indicate TANDEM IN USE in the display and single line telephone users hear a busy signal when the handset is lifted To cancel Tandem Ringing 1 Press the Tandem Ringing key Program 15 ...

Page 1665: ...els used does not exceed the block limit of 32 Tandem Trunking could help an office manager for example put two outside sales people in touch The office manager could Answer a call from one salesperson Place a call to the second salesperson Set up the Trunk to Trunk Conference Drop out of the call The office manager could terminate the conference anytime Tandem Trunking methods include Method A Ta...

Page 1666: ...tinue Code Program 20 28 02 No Setting No Conversation Disconnect Code is entered Program 20 28 03 180 Conversation Continue Time Program 24 02 07 600 Only used with Trunk to Trunk Transfer Release Warning Tone Program 24 02 10 30 Only used with Disconnect Trunk to Trunk Program 25 07 07 600 Long Conversation Warning Tone Timer Program 25 07 08 30 Long Conversation Disconnect 1 An external call co...

Page 1667: ...ndled Refer to Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing and check or program these options as needed DISA calls also use the same Continue Disconnect codes After initiating an unsupervised conference selecting one of the CAP keys or line keys allows you to barge in to the conference If the station that barges into an unsupervised conference hangs up the conference is terminated ...

Page 1668: ...t often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Method A Tandem Trunking from Conference Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 12 57 Service Code Setup for Service Access Tandem Trunking If the default service code 8 for Tandem Trunking is not acceptable change the code as required MLT SLT default 8 14 01 ...

Page 1669: ...4 default 1 for COS 15 20 11 14 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction Turn Off or On the Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction If enabled Trunk to Trunk Transfer is not possible 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 11 21 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Restriction for Tandem Trunking on Hang Up Allow Deny an extension user ability to set up...

Page 1670: ...ation can talk before the Long Conversation tone is heard 0 64800 seconds default 3600 25 07 08 System Timers for VRS DISA Long Conversation Disconnect Time Determine the time the system waits before disconnecting a DISA caller or any trunk to trunk such as Tandem Trunking conversation call after the Long Conversation tone is heard 0 64800 seconds default 10 Program Number Program Name Description...

Page 1671: ... Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction If enabled Trunk to Trunk Transfer is not possible 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 11 21 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Restriction for Tandem Trunking on Hang Up Allow Deny an extension user ability to set up a tandem call automatically when they hang up 0 Allow 1 Deny default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 10 Class of Service Options Supplementary ...

Page 1672: ...ls Select the Transmit CODEC gain level used by the trunk when it is part of an Unsupervised Conference 1 63 15 5dB 15 5dB in 0 5dB intervals default 32 0dB 14 01 05 Basic Trunk Data Setup Receive Gain Level for Conference and Transfer Calls Select the Receive CODEC gain level used by the trunk when it is part of an Unsupervised Conference 1 63 15 5dB 15 5dB in 0 5dB intervals default 16 8dB 14 01...

Page 1673: ...ther trunk for example Trunk to Trunk Transfer outgoing from trunk Tandem Trunking When this time expires a warning tone is heard If Program 24 02 10 is set the conversation disconnects after time expires This time is set again when the external digit time expires One of the trunks used must be an analog trunk or leased line 0 64800 seconds default 1800 24 02 10 System Options for Transfer Disconn...

Page 1674: ...ervice Code Setup for System Administrator Setting the Destination for Automatic Trunk Transfer If the default service code 735 for setting the destination of the Automatic Tandem Trunking feature is not acceptable change the code as required MLT default 735 13 04 01 Speed Dialing Number and Name Speed Dialing Data Enter the number and name for the bins used to hold the Automatic Tandem Trunking d...

Page 1675: ...he trunk when it is part of an Unsupervised Conference 1 63 15 5dB 15 5dB in 0 5dB intervals default 32 0dB 14 01 05 Basic Trunk Data Setup Receive Gain Level for Conference and Transfer Calls Select the Receive CODEC gain level used by the trunk when it is part of an Unsupervised Conference 1 63 15 5dB 15 5dB in 0 5dB intervals default 16 8dB 14 01 13 Basic Trunk Data Setup Trunk to Trunk Transfe...

Page 1676: ...runks used must be an analog trunk or leased line 0 64800 seconds default 1800 24 02 10 System Options for Transfer Disconnect Trunk to Trunk This timer starts after the Trunk to Trunk warning tone is heard 0 64800 seconds default 0 24 04 01 Automatic Trunk to Trunk Transfer Target Setup Assign the Speed Dialing number 0 1999 to be used as the destination for the Trunk to Trunk Transfer Trunks 1 2...

Page 1677: ...ds when the Conversation Continue Code is dialed 0 64800 seconds default 0 24 02 07 System Options for Transfer Trunk to Trunk Transfer Release Warning Tone This timer starts when a trunk begins talking with another trunk for example Trunk to Trunk Transfer Tandem Trunking When this time expires a warning tone is heard If Program 24 02 10 is set the conversation disconnects after time expires This...

Page 1678: ... Conference continues To end the Tandem Call 1 Press either flashing line key The line keys light steadily green You can listen i e monitor to the call or rejoin the conversation based on the setting in Program 20 13 10 25 07 08 System Timers for VRS DISA Long Conversation Disconnect Time Determine the time the system waits before disconnecting a DISA or any trunk to trunk such as Tandem Trunking ...

Page 1679: ...e first trunk call on hold 3 Place a second trunk call 4 Press Transfer This sets up an Unsupervised Conference with both outside parties The line keys for the trunks light solid red To disconnect the Conference use Forced Trunk Disconnect i e Press the line key 3 or the service code set of Forced Trunk Disconnect in Program 11 10 26 must be used by an extension other than the originating extensio...

Page 1680: ...Dial the trunk access code 9 trunk number 3 or the service code set of Forced Trunk Disconnect in Program 11 10 26 Method D Automatic Tandem Trunking Using Speed Dialing To set Automatic Tandem Trunking 1 Dial service code 733 or the service code set for Set Automatic Transfer per Trunk 2 Dial the desired trunk number Trunk Number 001 200 3 Hang up The line key for the trunk is solid red as long a...

Page 1681: ...ss Hold 6 Hang up To disconnect the Conference use Forced Trunk Disconnect i e Press the line key or 9 plus the trunk number 3 Continue Disconnect Codes To use the Continue code to extend a Tandem Trunk call 1 An external call connects to an external number either by transferring with Tandem Trunking or by DISA caller 2 After the programmed time Program 24 02 07 a warning tone is heard and the use...

Page 1682: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1648 Tandem Trunking Unsupervised Conference THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1683: ...inal Prior to Version 3000 software if a 3rd Party CTI connection is used on the SV8100 the Override function for IP multiline terminals and Softphones is not supported The Bluetooth Cordless Handset BCH is not a supported terminal when using 1st Party CTI 3rd Party CTI or with the Desktop Suite A maximum of 128 1st Party CTI over ethernet connections is supported Any Desktop Application connectio...

Page 1684: ...ation for Call Forward Both Ring or Tandem Ringing SOAI controlled extensions cannot have direct CO line keys 752 01 SOAI controlled extensions do not support Park Holding Table 2 117 TAPI Commands lineAddProvider lineAnswer lineConfigDialog lineBlindTransfer lineGetAddressCaps lineCompleteCall lineGetDevCaps lineCompleteTransfer lineGetDevConfig lineDevSpecific lineGetIcon lineDial lineGetID line...

Page 1685: ...orted when SOAI and 3rd Party TAPI are used in the same system Default Setting Disabled System Availability Terminals SV8100 Multiline Terminals and SV8100 SIP Multiline Terminals Required Component s CD CP00 US should have LAN connection ability Compatible system software version PC Driver for the 1st Party TAPI over Ethernet CTE PC running Windows XP Vista or Windows 7 A TAPI compatible Windows ...

Page 1686: ...vel 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 12 01 CD CP00 US Network Setup IP Address Assig...

Page 1687: ...5 224 0 0 255 248 0 0 255 252 0 0 255 254 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 128 0 255 255 192 0 255 255 224 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 default 255 255 255 0 10 12 03 CD CP00 US Network Setup Default Gateway Assign the default gateway IP address for th...

Page 1688: ... With the multiline terminal in an idle state press the Help key 2 Press the Headset key Program 15 07 or SC 751 05 twice 3 Press the Exit key to return the display to idle The Headset key blinks when Automatic Headset is activated To cancel Automatic Headset repeat these steps 4 Press the Headset key Program 15 07 or SC 751 05 to go off hook 10 20 01 LAN Setup for External Equipment TCP Port Defi...

Page 1689: ...ting call on hold to answer the Override Conditions One Tone Override at a time can be received at a multiline terminal Tone Override can be accomplished only after receiving a BUSY tone Tone Override originate is allowed from a single line telephone until the PBR times out Virtual Extensions do not support Tone Override Default Setting None System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Re...

Page 1690: ...de MLT SLT default 709 11 16 04 Single Digit Service Code Setup Intercom Off Hook Signaling Assign the one digit service code used for off hook Signaling default 15 02 12 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Off Hook Ringing Set the telephone off hook signaling that occurs when a telephone user receives a second call while busy on a handset call To enable or disable off hook signaling for an exten...

Page 1691: ...fault 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Automatic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override Allow a busy extension user to Manually 0 or Automatically 1 receive off hook signals 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 34 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Block Manual Off Hook Signaling Turn Off or On an extension user ability to block off hook signals ...

Page 1692: ...xtension may send Off Hook signals automatically 1 Dial Program11 16 04 OR Dial 709 Program 11 12 02 OR Press the Off Hook Signaling key Program 15 07 01 code 33 You hear Ring Busy Tone The called extension hears Call Alert Notification To answer Tone Override 1 Receive Tone Override 2 Press Hold and talk with the party ...

Page 1693: ... trunk number This information is used by the SMDR feature The extension which is totaled is determined by system programming The system outputs this data to the PC for the total period Conditions The SMDR call buffer stores 320 calls The buffer stores calls when the SMDR device is unavailable When the buffer fills the oldest record is deleted to allow the new record to be saved If connected to th...

Page 1694: ...4 84 01 58 31 00 04 19 LINE001 79 71 01 05 26 8 Term Definition Terminal Terminal Number Called Party Number maximum 24 digits OTG Outgoing Call Frequency number of outgoing calls maximum 65535 calls Duration Call Duration for an Outgoing Call Cost Call Charge Not Used ICM Incoming Call Frequency number of incoming calls maximum 65535 calls Answer Answer Frequency maximum 65535 calls Duration Call...

Page 1695: ...the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Operation None Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 90 20 01 Traffic Report Data Setup Call Traffic Output Determine whether or not the Call Traffic Output should be measured...

Page 1696: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1662 Traffic Reports THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1697: ...Without Holding A user presses a busy line key or the same busy CAP key and waits for the call to complete The system automatically sends them the call when the internal caller hangs up Automatic On Hook Transfer Operation With Automatic On Hook Transfer a transfer goes through as soon as the transferring user hangs up For example extension 104 can answer a trunk press Transfer dial 105 and hang u...

Page 1698: ...ogram 11 15 09 Service Code Setup Administrative for Special Access Transfer to Trunk Ring Group Code not assigned at default When a call is transferred using this service code it is transferred to the ring group destination for that incoming trunk For example trunk 2 is in Ring Group 4 When the call is transferred using this service code the trunk rings all extensions programmed for Ring Group 4 ...

Page 1699: ...hen a multiline terminal user is on a call they can transfer to another station by pressing a DSS key for that station It is not necessary to press Transfer to transfer to another station with a DSS key When a multiline terminal user is on a call they must press transfer to transfer a call off site with a DSS key The following features require certain tones be changed in Program 80 01 02 Refer to ...

Page 1700: ...ng Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Barge In Call Waiting Camp On Caller ID Call Forwarding Conference Meet Me Paging Transfer One Touch Calling Quick Transfer to Voice Mail Serial Call ...

Page 1701: ...g Ring Group When a call is transferred using this service code it is transferred to the ring group destination for that incoming trunk For example trunk 2 is in Ring Group 4 When the call is transferred using this service code the trunk rings all extensions programmed for Ring Group 4 or ring the External Paging Group for Ring Group 4 depending on how the system is programmed default not assigned...

Page 1702: ...101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 09 07 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Call Queuing Turn Off or On an extension user ability to have calls queued if a call rings the extension when it is busy 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 06 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Unscreened Transfer Ring Inward Transfer Turn Off or On an extension user ability to us...

Page 1703: ...3 16 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Receive Turn Off or On an extension user ability to have other extensions Barge In on calls 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 17 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Tone Display Intrusion Tone Turn Off or On the Barge In Tone If set to 1 callers hear an alert tone and their display indicates the Barge In when an...

Page 1704: ...ine a trunk ring group When transferring a DID or trunk call to the trunk defined ring group the trunk then rings the defined extensions for the ring group Incoming Group Number for Day Night Mode 1 8 0 No Setting 001 100 Incoming Group 102 In Skin External Voice Mail or VM8000 InMail default 1 22 08 01 DIL IRG No Answer Destination Assign the DIL No Answer Ring Group where an unanswered call shou...

Page 1705: ...rred call waits at an extension forwarded to Voice Mail before routing to the called extension mailbox 0 64800 seconds default 10 24 02 04 System Options for Transfer Transfer Recall Time Set the Transfer Recall Time An unanswered transferred call recalls to the extension that initially transferred it after this time 0 64800 seconds default 30 24 02 05 System Options for Transfer Message Wait Ring...

Page 1706: ...ned for each Automated Attendant message 0 100 0 No Setting 101 Voice MAil Answers 104 Refer to 25 04 VRS DISA Transfer Ring Group with No Answer Busy 105 Dial the other extension default 0 25 06 02 VRS DISA One Digit Code Attendant Setup Destination Number Define the digit used by a VRS caller which allows their call to be transferred to the external page Up to eight digits default not assigned 3...

Page 1707: ...ce the call and press Transfer Program 15 07 or SC 751 06 or hang up If you do not have Automatic On Hook Transfer you must press Conf Program 15 02 24 1 or your Transfer Programmable Function Key to Transfer the call If your co worker does not want the call press the flashing line key to return to the call Single line telephone users can press hookflash to retrieve the call If a call was transfer...

Page 1708: ...unscreened press your Transfer Programmable Function Key and hang up without making an announcement Transferring a Call Into a Conference Existing Call 1 While on a call press Transfer and dial service code 624 The display shows the Transfer to Conf ICM Dial 2 Enter the extension number of the co worker currently on a Conference call to which the call should be transferred To cancel the transfer p...

Page 1709: ...p defined in Program 22 05 01 and all assigned extensions in the group Program 22 04 01 ring or it rings the External Paging enabling anyone to answer the call Transferring an Intercom or Trunk Call using a DSS One Touch Key 1 While on a call press the DSS One Touch key 2 Announce the call or hang up ...

Page 1710: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1676 Transfer THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1711: ...lines use Trunk Group Routing to route calls to the WATS lines first There are 100 available Trunk Groups and 100 Routes Conditions DISA Program 25 10 and Tie Lines Program 34 03 have separate Trunk Group Routing programs The system uses Trunk Group Routing programming Program 14 06 when setting up Ringing Line Preference Use trunk group programming to set the order in which users access trunks wi...

Page 1712: ...Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Automatic Route Selection Central Office Calls Placing Direct Inward Dialing DID Dial Tone Detection Multiple Trunk Types Programmable Function Keys Prime Line Selection Trunk Groups ...

Page 1713: ...2 3 11 01 01 System Numbering Service Code Set up a Service Code for Alternate Trunk Route Access Refer to UNIVERGE SV8100 System Program Manual 11 09 01 Trunk Access Code Trunk Access Code If required change the single digit Trunk Access Code normally 9 This is the code extension users dial to access Automatic Route Selection If you change this code you must make corresponding changes in Program ...

Page 1714: ...options 0 No access 1 Outgoing access only 2 Incoming access only 3 Access only when trunk on Hold 4 Outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold 5 Incoming access and access when trunk on Hold 6 Incoming and Outgoing access 7 Incoming access outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold Trunk Access Maps 1 200 Default Access Maps 1 200 Trunk Ports 1 200 assigned with option 7 access incoming and...

Page 1715: ...p Routes 1 100 0 100 0 No Setting default 0 23 03 01 Universal Answer Auto Answer Let an extension user automatically answer trunk calls that ring other extensions When the user lifts the handset they automatically answer the ringing calls based on Trunk Group Routing programming defined in Program 14 06 Maximum eight digits Day Night Mode 1 8 Route Table Number 0 100 default 0 25 10 01 Trunk Grou...

Page 1716: ...er dials the Alternate Trunk Access Code assigned in Program 11 09 02 The route selected is based on the DISA caller Class of Service which is in turn determined by the password the caller dials Program 14 06 is used to set up the Trunk Group Routing Trunk Group Routes 1 100 Day Night Mode 1 8 Route Table Number 0 100 0 No Setting default 1 34 03 01 Trunk Group Routing for E M Tie Lines Assign the...

Page 1717: ...oups help you minimize the expense of toll calls For example if your system has outbound WATS lines OCC lines and DDD lines program the trunk group to route to the WATS lines first Conditions Unless a user preselects a trunk Trunk Group programming selects the trunk Speed Dialing used for trunk calls If a user dials a number that is not programmed in ARS the system can route the call to a trunk gr...

Page 1718: ...ls All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Automatic Route Selection Call Appearance CAP Keys Central Office Calls Placing Dial Tone Detection Direct Inward Dialing DID Programmable Function Keys Ring Groups Speed Dial System Group Station Trunk Group Routing ...

Page 1719: ... receiving or dial tone detection 0 Common Use 1 Extension Only 2 Trunk Only Default Circuit Resource 01 08 1 Extensions Circuit Resource 09 32 2 Trunks Circuit Resource 33 96 0 Not Used Circuit Resource 97 160 0 Common When PZ BS10 is installed 97 160 are available 11 12 14 Service Code Setup for Service Access Trunk Group Access If the service code for Trunk Group Access 704 by default is not ac...

Page 1720: ... access 1 Outgoing access only 2 Incoming access only 3 Access only when trunk on Hold 4 Outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold 5 Incoming access and access when trunk on Hold 6 Incoming and Outgoing access 7 Incoming access outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold Trunk Access Maps 1 200 Default Access Maps 1 200 Trunk Ports 1 200 assigned with option 7 access incoming and outgoing ac...

Page 1721: ...ntries for this Program one for each Night Service Mode This entry includes virtual extension numbers 0 15 0 Not assigned default 0 20 31 04 Timer Class Timer Assignment Intercom Interdigits Time Intercom I D Timer When placing Intercom calls extension users must dial each digit in this time 0 64800 seconds default 10 21 01 02 System Options for Outgoing Calls Intercom Interdigit Time When placing...

Page 1722: ...elephone press Speaker OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 704 3 Dial trunk group number 1 9 or 001 100 4 Dial number OR 1 Press the Trunk Group key Program 15 07 or SC 752 02 group 2 Dial the number To answer an incoming trunk group call 1 Lift the handset 2 Press the flashing Trunk Group key ...

Page 1723: ...onnects to the trunk when the trunk becomes free As with Trunk Queuing the user does not have to manually retry the trunk later Any number of extensions may simultaneously queue or Camp On for the same trunk or trunk group When a trunk becomes free the system connects the extensions in the order that the requests were left Conditions With Automatic Route Selection ARS Trunk Queuing automatically q...

Page 1724: ...ccess Set Camp On Customize the Service Code used for setting Camp On MLT SLT default 750 11 12 05 Service Code Setup for Service Access Cancel Camp On Customize the Service Code used for cancelling Camp On MLT SLT default 770 11 16 05 Single Digit Service Code Setup Camp On Customize the 1 digit Service Code used for setting Camp On default 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign a function ke...

Page 1725: ...of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Transfer Without Holding Turn Off or On an extension user ability to use Transfer Without Holding 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 29 01 Timer Class for Extensions Assign the timer class 0 15 to each extension for each Night mode This entry includes virtual extension number 0 15 0 Not assigned default 0 20 31 01 Timer Class Timer Assignment Trunk Queuin...

Page 1726: ...Camp On To cancel a Trunk Queuing Camp On request 1 At the multiline terminal press idle Speaker OR At the single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 770 3 At the multiline terminal press Speaker to hang up OR At the single line telephone hang up ...

Page 1727: ...telephone system Enhancements This feature added with Version 1100 1 10 or higher UCB Fax is supported with UCB software Version 5 00SP2 UCB functionality has been enhanced with SV8100 Version 5000 UCB 5 1 and TSP 4 00 or higher software Virtual Extensions are supported for Queues Agent and Operator and pilot numbers Voice Mail Hold Executive Conference Mobile Extension is supported in the same sy...

Page 1728: ...tration tool on their PC desktop Queue specific delay messages can be prerecorded and real time customer announcements can be made An example follows When you are calling about a problem with your email please be aware that we are currently working to resolve a problem with the email server we expect to have this resolved by midday When you require assistance for another matter please hold for the...

Page 1729: ... module provides web users an Internet form that generates the request for either an agent callback or a web chat Q Web Callback presents the agent with a text message to initiate a telephone call back to the web user Q Web Chat is a direct text based interaction between the agent and the external web user Both modules allow customer contacts from an Internet Web site to be blended with other cust...

Page 1730: ...application and in some cases the physical telephone set The Voice Messaging Module This module adds a voicemail function to the UCB suite Voice messaging allows the user to customize voicemail greetings based on current availability personalize greetings for specific callers inform callers about their availability based on an Outlook Calendar receive voicemail notification in Microsoft Outlook re...

Page 1731: ... access The server leaves the factory configured for DHCP and therefore automatically gets this access for most customer installations Application keys 76 XX are used instead of blank keys for the Dterm functions of the SV8100 Version 5000 UCB 5 1 and TSP 4 00 or higher software UCB supports a maximum of 1500 BHCA Supported Capacities A maximum of 30 CC Agents A maximum of 120 UC users Executive D...

Page 1732: ... remote sites are not supported for UCB with Version 2500 2 50 or lower When using Netlink and UCB the trunks and extensions on the remote sites are supported for UCB with Version 2500 2 51 or higher Table 2 118 SV8100 Configuration SV8100 Configuration Change UCB TSP Reset Required PC Reset Required No Reset Required New Station Card Added X New Trunk Card Added X New IP Trunks SIP H 323 K CCIS a...

Page 1733: ...Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys for UCB UCB does not support the use of Virtual Extensions as Queues Agents and Operators and Pilots Voice Mail Hold and Executive Conference SV8100 Version 4000 4 01 UCB 5 0 SP4 and TSP 3 03 or lower software Only one Codec can be assigned for SIP extensions Different SIP extensions cannot use different Codecs Virtual Extensions are supported for Queues ...

Page 1734: ...rmal station ACD agent or supervisor can be transferred to an ACD queue Calls must be blind transferred to the queue the transferring party cannot wait with the caller on line and announce the caller In some cases transferred calls may create an extra call record to ensure accuracy of reporting the transfer timer or minimum abandon timer must be configured in the Administrator Queuing When no agen...

Page 1735: ...sfer or redirect to an internal extension number after hours mailbox Call Center supervisors can change the queue mode in real time to reflect current activity Maximum programming assignments for ACD queues and agents are listed below 9999 Agent and Supervisor IDs can be assigned 9999 Agents and Supervisors can be assigned to one Queue The UCB schedule can be programmed per queue to automatically ...

Page 1736: ...n or off using the Q Desktop application Operating statistics are collected until the agent logs off Agent hot seating is supported because UCB tracks agent skill profile and statistics against the agent logon ID instead of the station number When hot seating is not required the agent extension can be set to also log non queue activity when logged on and report inbound outbound calls for the agent...

Page 1737: ... the analog login number and is answered and prompted for the Agent login ID Restrictions Incoming ACD queue calls cannot be received when the agent is on break a queue depth parameter allows calls to deliver through Worktime when callers have been waiting longer than the prescribed threshold When an ACD queue call is being offered to an agent and the agent receives a non ACD call the queue call i...

Page 1738: ...waiting for agents at one time Voicemail Function Description User mailboxes are assigned to a mailbox class that defines a maximum number of new saved and deleted messages that the mailbox can contain and the number of days before purging each type of message There are Company and User mailboxes The company mailbox defines the main greeting company schedule and available default one touch keys Us...

Page 1739: ...nothing is defined there the system does what is defined in the company mailbox currently active profile 4 When nothing is defined there the system does what is defined in the company mailbox default one touch keys Conditions General To access the UCB Voicemail the caller dials the Voice Messaging Pilot number Unheard and saved voicemails are deleted when they exceed the number of days before purg...

Page 1740: ...ted on InUCB InUCB can be migrated to an external UCB Executive Conference is not supported with InUCB The IP address for the InUCB is provided by the OS Embedded XP on the Blade and does not follow SV8100 system programming Program 10 55 01 Locally provided Keyboard Monitor and Mouse will be required for initial setup of the InUCB IP Address Locally provided Keyboard Monitor and Mouse can be used...

Page 1741: ...ectional Mirror Queues No One to One Mirror Queues No Many to One Mirror Queues No Routing to Longest Idle Agent Round Robin Delivery No Function Name Description Supported Yes No Lines Analog Line Yes PSII Remote N A Dterm Functions Yes Trunk Yes Line Appearance No Dynamic Monitoring No Tenant No Default UCD Agent No Function Name Description Supported Yes No Message Waiting Light Yes ...

Page 1742: ...ation Yes Login Logout Yes Select Break Type No Enter Break Duration Yes Enter Worktime Yes Callback Wrap up Yes Demand Call Yes Enter Worktime Yes Login Logout Yes 20 1 Supervisor Remote Login Yes Supervisor Mode Override Yes Keys Supervisor Set predefined Emergency Mode Yes Supervisor Monitor Agent Yes Supervisor Record Monitored Agent Conversation No Function Name Description Supported Yes No ...

Page 1743: ...age Yes Display Queue Name Delivery Message Yes Display Query Information Yes Display Callback Number Yes Use Message Key No NEC Phone LCD Display Use Soft Keys No NEC Phone 1 Maximum configuration allows 20 agents including 20 agents running Agent Desktop or via the telephone 2 Only displays one mailbox at a time Function Name Description Supported Yes No Presence Display Display Phone Status Yes...

Page 1744: ... Call to External Number Yes Busy Tone Mode Yes Mode Transfer to Voice Messaging Yes Allow Networking No Administration Change Mode via Digital Phone Yes 1 If a wrapup is performed while the call is still connected the caller hears the DTMF tones 2 Emergency mode is set from Dterm function key Function Name Description Supported Yes No WAV Editor Play Yes Record Yes Function Name Description Suppo...

Page 1745: ...ients Administrator Application Manager Reports Yes Alert Notification Yes Autodial Uses IVR No Callback Queuing Yes 1 Custom Reporting No Executive Conference Licensed Audio Conference Module No Mobility Intelligent Mobility Call Handoff and Retrieval No Intelligent Mobility One Mailbox No Executive Mobile No Mobility Call Screening2 No Post Call Survey No SDK PA Applications Software Development...

Page 1746: ... agent for desktop applications A server PC loaded with the UCB application OR SV8100 InUCB Blade Version 5000 or higher Related Features Call Forwarding Mobile Extension Park Programmable Function Keys Unified Messaging Exchange Includes mailbox synchronization and Calendar integration Yes 100 SMTP Notification no license required Yes 200 1 Agent Desktops take away from the 100 Desktops limit 2 R...

Page 1747: ...t commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 12 0...

Page 1748: ... 255 192 0 255 255 224 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 default 255 255 255 0 10 12 03 CD CP00 US Network Setup Default Gateway Assign the default gateway IP address for the CD CP00 US 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 254 255 254 192 0 0 1 22...

Page 1749: ...5 0 0 0 255 128 0 0 255 192 0 0 255 224 0 0 255 240 0 0 255 248 0 0 255 252 0 0 255 254 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 128 0 255 255 192 0 255 255 224 0 255 255 240 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 default 255 255 0 0 Program Number Program Name Descript...

Page 1750: ...ode Enable Disable the Peer to Peer feature for SIP IP stations Set Peer to Peer to 0 when using UCB 0 Off 1 On default 1 10 26 03 IP System Operation Setup SIP Peer to Peer Mode Enable Disable the Peer to Peer feature for SIP IP stations Set Peer to Peer to 0 when using UCB 0 Off 1 On default 1 11 02 01 Extension Numbering Assign extension numbers to extension ports The telephone programming iden...

Page 1751: ...Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Caller ID Function For External Module Enable Disable the Caller IFD FSK signal for an external Caller ID Module or a 3rd Party vendor telephone with Caller ID display If voice mail is used set this to 0 for the system integration code to be correct 0 Disable Off 1 Enable On default 0 15 05 18 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup IP Duplication Allowed Group If an...

Page 1752: ...ting is stopped 1 Circular default 0 16 01 09 Department Group Basic Data Setup Department Hunting No Answer Time Set the time a call rings a Department Group extension before hunting occurs 64800 seconds default 15 16 01 10 Department Group Basic Data Setup Enhanced Hunt Type Set the type of hunting for each Extension Department Group Needs to be set to Busy 0 No queuing 1 Hunting When Busy 2 Hun...

Page 1753: ...ort 101 Class 15 All other extension ports Class 1 20 08 05 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Dial Number Preview Preset Dial Turn Off or On extension user ability to use Dial Number Preview SV8100 Version 4000 4 01 UCB 5 0 SP4 and TSP 3 03 or lower 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 08 09 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Hotline Extension Ringdown Turn Off or On Ringd...

Page 1754: ...alls 4 Call Forwarding busy or no answer 5 Call Forwarding when busy default 0 24 09 02 Call Forward Split Settings CO Call Forwarding Destination for Both Ring All Call No Answer Assign CO Call Forwarding Destination for ring all call and no answer 1 9 0 R Up to 24 digits default not assigned 24 09 03 Call Forward Split Settings Intercom Call Forwarding Destination for Both ring All Call No Answe...

Page 1755: ...Outdial and Voice Messaging for a more detailed review of specific functions Alternately refer to the online help for configuration information 24 09 07 Call Forward Split Settings Call Forwarding Destination for CTX PBX for Busy Assign Call Forwarding destinations for busy CTX PBX calls 1 9 0 R Up to 24 digits default not assigned 84 19 32 SIP Extension IP CODEC Information Basic Setup DTMF Relay...

Page 1756: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1722 UCB Unified Communications for Business THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1757: ...d an A B and C option Starting with Version 11 5 0 54 UM8000 Mail software a maximum of 99 custom schedules are available in addition to the three standard schedules Each custom schedule can support a maximum of nine time intervals These schedules can be applied to Opening Boxes Transaction Boxes and Voice Detect Boxes You can also assign a supported box type to inherit its schedule from the previ...

Page 1758: ...a co worker s mailbox After the Transfer goes through the caller can leave a message in the mailbox Live Record While on a CO Trunk call an extension user can have Voice Mail record the conversation The multiline terminal user presses the Voice Mail Record key the single line telephone user dials a code Once recorded the Voice Messaging System stores the conversation as a new message in the user s...

Page 1759: ...er is dialed while performing a screened transfer or during intercom calls The user simply calls the extension and then dials the quick transfer dial access code default 8 and hangs up The call is placed in the mailbox and the caller hears the personal greeting Voice Mail Queuing When accessing the voice mail the system provides a voice mail queue If all the voice mail ports are busy any call tryi...

Page 1760: ...as a Screened or Unscreened transfer depending on programming For callers to use Directory Dialing the system must have a name programmed for each extension Each extension should also have a name recorded in their Subscriber Mailbox In addition each extension used by Directory Dialing must be installed Optional UM8000 Mail TeLANophy Module Features Text to Speech Using Nuance RealSpeak The UM8000 ...

Page 1761: ... all telephone activity and manage data about each call With a click of the mouse you can take a call ask a caller to hold route the call to another extension or send the call to voice mail Hospitality Package The Hospitality package is used specifically by hotels and resorts to provide guests with personal accurate and timely messages Features include personal greetings security codes guest direc...

Page 1762: ... delivered to the text to speech engine to convert the text into audio for playback MIME Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension MIME ensures that the voice messaging system can read the message header and body information Multipart MIME messages enable the email system to send enhanced versions of the message for messaging clients such as Lotus Notes or Microsoft Outlook In addition multipart MIME m...

Page 1763: ...cally lower time interval is followed Constant Message Count requires SV8100 Version 3000 or higher software Constant Message Count is displayed on a telephone s display until another activity needs the display For instance if a call is made or received on the telephone To get the message count to display again the telephone needs to receive a new voice mail message or call into the voice mailbox ...

Page 1764: ...ted The Live Record feature is supported only for Multiline telephones Single Line Telephones do not support this feature The following databases can be migrated to the UM8000 OS 2 based EliteMail CTI DOS based EliteMail Q51731 or higher Linux based EliteMail CTI LX Linux based EliteMail CTI LX Lite Voice messages forwarded to an email address using email integration can be set to be automatically...

Page 1765: ...re not transmitted If the End softkey is used to stop the Conversation Record DTMF to the outside party is restored If you press the Conversation Record button to end the recording DTMF is not restored Stutter Dial Tone is supported to Single Line Telephones SLTs for Voice Mail Message Waiting When a Department Group is assigned as the VM Department Group in Program 45 01 01 it works only as prior...

Page 1766: ...orate or Workgroup version The following versions of Microsoft Outlook work with VMM Outlook 2000 with Service Pack 3 Outlook 2002 XP with Service Pack 3 Outlook 2003 with Service Pack 2 Outlook 2007 Vista 32 bit only Outlook 2007 XP Outlook 2010 Windows 7 32 and 64 bit Only 32 bit email clients are supported The supported TeLANophy applications include ViewMail ViewMail for Microsoft Messaging VM...

Page 1767: ...UM8000 Mail 2 1733 Related Features Barge In Call Forwarding Caller ID Central Office Calls Answering Central Office Calls Placing Direct Inward Line DIL Hold Message Waiting One Touch Calling Programmable Function Keys Transfer ...

Page 1768: ...rcuit for DTMF reception type 0 or 1 Use the following as a guide when allocating DTMF receivers In light traffic sites allocate one DTMF receiver for every 10 devices that use them In heavy traffic sites allocate one DTMF receiver for every five devices that use them 0 Common Use 1 Extension Only 2 Trunk Only Default Circuit Resource 01 08 1 Extensions Circuit Resource 09 32 2 Trunks Circuit Reso...

Page 1769: ...55 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 default 255 255 0 0 10 55 05 Package Network Setup Default Gateway Define the default gateway for the CD ETIA 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 255255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 default 0 0 0 0 11 07 01 Department Group Pilot Numbers Dial Assign a Department Group pilot...

Page 1770: ... Lamp Color Determine whether an extension Message Waiting Lamp lights Green or Red when a message is received 0 Green 1 Red default 1 15 02 37 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp Color Set up various message wait lamp cycle options for lamp color 0 Green 1 Red default 1 15 02 38 Multiline Telephone Basic Data Setup Voice Mail Message Wait Lamp Cycle Select the cycle ...

Page 1771: ...ng up a Message Center key for an uninstalled extension Optional Assign a Voice Mail Record key to an extension code 78 Optional Assign a Personal Answering Machine Emulation key code 16 Optional Use a Call Redirect key 49 to allow a user to transfer a call to another extension or voice mail without answering the call Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Function...

Page 1772: ... for COS 1 15 20 11 03 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding When Unanswered Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set Call Forwarding when Unanswered 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 04 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding Both Ringing Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set Call Forwarding with Both Ringing 0 Off 1 On defaul...

Page 1773: ...15 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Initiate Turn Off or On an extension user ability to barge in on other s calls 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 16 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Receive Turn Off or On an extension user ability to have other extensions Barge In on calls 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 28 Class of Service Options Sup...

Page 1774: ...evel 1 2 3 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Assign Service Type 4 to each trunk you want to ring into Voice Mail as a Direct Inward Line DIL 0 Normal 1 VRS second dial tone if no VRS installed 2 DISA 3 DID 4 DIL 5 E M Tie line 6 Delayed VRS 7 ANI DNIS 8 DID DDI Mode Switching default 0 22 07 01 DIL Assignment Assign the destination extension or Department Calling Group for each DIL incoming trun...

Page 1775: ...ing Group 1 calls No other extensions ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 12 42 Service Code Setup for Service Access Flash on Trunk Lines Program the dial access code used for sending a hook flash to Telco This code is used for Centrex Transfer using Digital Voice Mail ports If this code starts with Program 45 01 05 mu...

Page 1776: ... 0 entry means no voice mail is installed 0 64 0 No Voice Mail default 0 45 01 02 Voice Mail Integration Options Voice Mail Master Name Enter the Voice Mail master name Up to 12 Characters default Voice Mail 45 01 04 Voice Mail Integration Options Park and Page Enable Disable the system ability to process the Voice Mail Park and Page commands You should normally enable this option 0 Off 1 On defau...

Page 1777: ...ne Number Customize the systems service tones 1 33 0 No Tone 33 Default Time Slot refer to the SV8100 Programming Manual for default values 80 03 01 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Detect Level Customize the Detect Level for DTMF Tone Receivers 0 0dBm 25dBm 1 5dBm 30dBm 2 10dBm 35dBm 3 15dBm 40dBm 4 20dBm 45dBm 5 25dBm 50dBm 6 30dBm 55dBm default Type 1 5 0 80 03 02 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Start Delay T...

Page 1778: ...m 15 detect level 5 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 6 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 7 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 8 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 9 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 10 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 11 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 12 70dBm 0 to 85dBm 15 detect level 13 75dBm 0 to 90dBm 15 detect level 14 80dBm 0 to 95dBm 15 detect level 15 85dBm 0 to 100dBm 15 def...

Page 1779: ... 4 20dBm 0 to 35dBm 15 detect level 5 25dBm 0 to 40dBm 15 detect level 6 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 7 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 8 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 9 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 10 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 11 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 12 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 13 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 14 70dBm 0 to 85dBm 15 detect level 15 75dBm ...

Page 1780: ...ne Receiver 1 255 15 15ms 3825ms default Type 1 5 1 30ms 80 03 08 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup OFF Detect Time Define the Off detection time for DTMF Tone Receiver 1 255 15 15ms 3825ms default Type 1 5 1 30ms 80 04 01 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Detection Level Define the various levels and timers for the Call Progress Tone Detector Use this option to set the Detection Level 0 0dBm 25dBm 1 5dBm ...

Page 1781: ...one Detector Setup S N Ratio Define the various levels and timers for the Call Progress Tone Detector 0 4 0dB 20dB default Type 1 DT 4 20dB Type 2 BT 4 20dB Type 3 RBT 4 20dB Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 04 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup No Tone Time Define the various levels and timers for the Call Progress Tone Detector Use this option to set No Tone Time 0 255 30 30 7680ms The formula is 30 30N Whe...

Page 1782: ...rious levels and times for the Call Progress Tone Detector Use this option to set the maximum On time 0 255 30 30 7680ms default Type 1 DT 0 Type 2 BT 20 450ms ET Type 3 RBT 40 1230ms Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 08 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup OFF Minimum Time Define the various levels and times for the Call Progress Tone Detector Use this option to set the minimum Off time 1 255 30 30 7680ms defau...

Page 1783: ...UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 13 0 UM8000 Mail 2 1749 Operation Refer to VM8000 InMail on page 2 1843 for complete telephone operation procedures ...

Page 1784: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1750 UM8000 Mail THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1785: ...required Access work voice mail directly from your smart phone Stop juggling between the cell phone and the office desktop telephone or home telephone The uMC Server is the gateway for uMobility mobile devices to access the SV8100 system It also knows when the mobile device is in the Wi Fi or Cellular domain and will direct CO and internal calls to the mobile device using the appropriate method Re...

Page 1786: ...Wi Fi domain Only Supervised Announce Call Transfer of CO or internal calls is supported from any uMobility client device Direct Blind Unsupervised Call Transfer of CO or internal calls is not supported from any uMobility client device When using code restriction for uMobility client devices the following conditions apply to all client devices Code Restriction should be applied to the uMobility cl...

Page 1787: ...cellular network Internal calls from an uMobility mobile device displays the station name as assigned in Program15 01 01 not on the uMobility telephone For station name display to work on internal calls to a uMobility mobile device that resides in the Wi Fi domain set all station names including IP and TDM telephones in Program 15 05 04 Emergency calls 911 and E911 from uMobility client devices sh...

Page 1788: ...e uMobility device uMobility client software must be downloaded from the Google Play store or iTunes App Store Call Move or Fetch cannot be performed during hand off between Wi Fi and Cellular Mobile network carriers may prohibit or restrict voice over 3G 4G on their network Or carriers may add additional charges to use this functionality NEC is not responsible for any charges or quality issues be...

Page 1789: ...m RAM 2 GB minimum Network Interface Card 100 1000 Mbps Operating System CentOS 5 x 32 bit If CentOS is already installed please ensure that IPTables are turned off SELinux is disabled Firewall is disabled Automatic updates are disabled The uMC Linux server should be dedicated to the uMC software Do not install other programs or server software on the Linux server being used for uMobility Related ...

Page 1790: ...204 with account code 12345 would be 9 12345 2142620204 Account Code Entry Yes Yes Wi Fi Yes Yes Account code must be entered after trunk access code but prior to outgoing number and must be part of the dial string For example call to 2142620204 with account code 12345 would be 9 12345 2142620204 Alarm No No No No No Alarm Reports No No No No No Alphanumeric Display Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Time Date a...

Page 1791: ... Forwarding Off Premise Wi Fi Yes Yes Yes Wi Fi Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Call Monitoring No No No No No Call Redirect No No No No No Call Waiting Camp On No No No No No Callback No No No No No A uMobility device only supports voice mail MWI Caller ID Yes Yes Wi Fi Yes Yes Caller ID only provided when in Wi Fi domain Caller ID Call Return Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Centr...

Page 1792: ...o No A uMobility client device can be a member of a Department Group but cannot log in out of the group Dial Pad Confirmation Tone No No No No No This is a function of the uMobility client device and not the phone system Dial Tone Detection No No No No No Dialing Number Preview Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes This is a function of the uMobility client device and not the phone system Direct Inward Dialing DID ...

Page 1793: ...en using uMobility application DND option internal callers are shown busy when calling the client device Door Box No No No No No Drop Key No No No No No E911 911 No No No No No Flash No No No No No Flexible System Numbering Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes If changing extension numbers the uMobility user must be deleted and re created with a new extension number in the uMC server Flexible Timeouts Yes Yes Yes ...

Page 1794: ...ine call Howler Tone Service No No No No No Intercom Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes IP Multiline Station SIP No No No No No IP Single Line Telephone SIP Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes IP Trunk SIP Session Initiation Protocol Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes IP Trunk H 323 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes ISDN Compatibility Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Last Number Redial Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes This is a function of the uMobility client device and not the ph...

Page 1795: ...o No No No Night Service Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Off Hook Signaling No No No No No Off Premise Extension No No No No No One Touch Calling No No No No No Operator No No No No No It is not recommended that a uMobility client device be used as an operator phone Paging External Wi Fi Yes Yes Yes Wi Fi A uMobility device can only initiate an External or All Call Page It cannot receive either Internal or Al...

Page 1796: ...Over No No No No No Ringdown Extension Internal External Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A uMobility device can be a Ring Down destination but cannot originate a Ring Down call Ring Groups Wi Fi Yes Wi Fi Yes Wi Fi Room Monitor No No No No No Save Number Dialed No No No No No This is a function of the uMobility client device and not the phone system Secondary Incoming Extension No No No No No Secretary Call B...

Page 1797: ...Synchronous Ringing No No No No No T1 Trunking with ANI DNIS Compatibility Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Tandem Ringing No No No No No Tandem Trunking Unsupervised Conference No No No No No TAPI Compatibility No No No No No Tone Override No No No No No Transfer Wi Fi Wi Fi Wi Fi Wi Fi Yes Blackberry only supports unsupervised transfer in cellular domain Trunk Group Routing Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Trunk Groups Y...

Page 1798: ...y DTMF mode must be set to SIP Info to pass DTMF correctly Voice Mail Integration Analog Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Blackberry DTMF mode must be set to SIP Info to pass DTMF correctly Voice Over No No No No No Voice Over Internet Protocol VoIP Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes By nature these are SIP devices Voice Response System VRS Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Voice Response System VRS Call Forward Park and Page No No No No ...

Page 1799: ...ly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 12 01 CD CP00 US Network Setup IP Address If required change the IP Address so it does not conflict with Program 10 12 09 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 254 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 default 192 168 0 10 10 12 03 CD CP00 US Network Setup Default Gateway Assign the default gateway IP address for...

Page 1800: ...192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 default 255 255 0 0 11 07 01 Department Group Pilot Numbers Dial Assign pilot numbers to each Department Group set up Up to eight digits default not assigned 11 12 29 Service Code Setup for Service Access Direct Extension Call Pickup Customize the Service Codes for direct extension call pickup For t...

Page 1801: ...If using authentication for the uMobility Client devices the password should be entered here Up to 24 characters default not assigned 15 05 18 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup IP Duplication Allowed Group For an adapter that has one IP address coming into it but multiple extensions off of it Assign all the extensions to a group so the CPU knows that the one IP address is assigned to multiple...

Page 1802: ...1 0 Last extension is called and hunting is stopped 1 Circular default 0 16 02 01 Department Group Assignment for Extensions Set up the Department Group called by the pilot number and the extension priority when a group is called Call Pickup Groups are set up in Program 23 02 Department Group Assign uMC Server pilot and Reserve users only to this hunt group Do not assign uMobility client devices P...

Page 1803: ...h ring 2 Call Forwarding when no answer 3 Call Forwarding all calls 4 Call Forwarding busy or no answer 5 Call Forwarding when busy default 0 24 09 02 Call Forward Split Settings CO Call Forwarding Destination for Both Ring All Call No Answer Assign CO Call Forwarding Destination for ring all call and no answer Set all uMobility client phones to forward BNA to SV8100 voice mail 1 9 0 R Up to 24 di...

Page 1804: ...n Reserve User There should be three reserve pool users for every 10 uMobility users that are connected to your IP PBX system For example if you have 25 uMobility users then you should create 8 reserve pool users both in the IP PBX and in uMobility The exact number of reserve pool users for your particular system depends on call profiles and feature usage Registration With SIP PBX On uMC IP Set uM...

Page 1805: ... calls on the SV8100 set this field to 0 Long Distance Digits Set this field to the longest local number dialed For example in a 10 digit dialing area set this 10 Any dialed number longer than this setting is considered long distance and a 1 will automatically added If using ARS to route calls on the SV8100 set this field to 0 HO Cell Auto Answer CLID Set to inbound DID pilot phone number of uMC s...

Page 1806: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1772 uMobility Server Based THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1807: ... for a complete list of supported system features Conditions This feature requires Version 7000 7 00 or higher SV8100 Software Voice quality is dependent on the network infrastructure when in the Wi Fi domain As such voice quality can vary between locations The maximum number of uMobility Wi Fi Client devices that can be supported is dictated by the PZ XXIPLA IPLB and the number of desk IP Phones ...

Page 1808: ...igured so the Message Waiting Indication is provided for desk phone If an extension has Call Forward with Both Ring set to another extension it will only continue to forward if the Both Ring destination is forwarded B NA or NA to VM only For uMobility client devices to utilize dial access codes for system features the dial access codes must be all numbers and cannot contain or Internal calls from ...

Page 1809: ... setting Blackberry SIP and RTP packet Fixed Default 0x00 NON AVAILABILITY of TRADITIONAL EMERGENCY ACCESS SERVICES EAS The software does not support traditional EAS for example 911 or E911 in the US or 999 in the UK Therefore the user must route emergency calls through the cellular network rather than Voice over IP VoIP facilities The user of the software and any such parties shall inform all use...

Page 1810: ... for Remote SIP Access For a remote SIP connection from outside to inside the SIP server it is necessary to consider NAT for SIP The diagrams below show typical scenarios when connecting SIP soft phones remotely from outside Figure 2 81 VPN Between Smart Device and Office LAN ...

Page 1811: ...UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 13 0 uMobility Wi Fi Client 2 1777 Figure 2 82 Port Forwarding without Session Boarder Controller ...

Page 1812: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1778 uMobility Wi Fi Client Default Setting Disabled Figure 2 83 Port Forwarding with Session Boarder Controller ...

Page 1813: ...s Related Features Call Forwarding IP Single Line Telephone SIP UM8000 Mail Table 2 120 Mobile Device Requirements Device Required OS Tested Device iPhone Version 5 5 1 or higher iPhone 3GS iPhone 4 iPhone 4S iPhone 5 See Note 1 Android phone Version 2 3 0 or higher Motorola MB865 LG Nitro HD Samsung Galaxy SII See Note 2 Blackberry phone Version 7 or higher Blackberry Bold 9900 Note 1 The iPhone ...

Page 1814: ... No Conference Call Yes Participant Only Calling Line Identification Calling Name Yes Abbreviated extension dialing Yes Mid call DTMF Numeric keys excluding and Yes Basic Telephony Device Dependent Speed Dial No Missed Call Indication Yes Call Logs Yes Contact Dialing Yes Mute Unmute Yes Speakerphone Yes Volume Control Yes Do Not Disturb DND Yes Bluetooth Yes See Conditions Presentation PBX CM Dep...

Page 1815: ...ly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 12 01 CD CP00 US Network Setup IP Address If required change the IP Address so it does not conflict with Program 10 12 09 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 254 255 254 192 0 0 1 223 255 255 254 default 192 168 0 10 10 12 03 CD CP00 US Network Setup Default Gateway Assign the default gateway IP address for...

Page 1816: ...4 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 default 255 255 0 0 10 33 02 SIP Registrar Proxy Information Basic Setup Authentication Mode Enable if a password is desired for the uMobility clients to register When checked Program 15 05 16 must have a password entered and the uMobility client must ha...

Page 1817: ...5 04 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup Nickname Assign nick name to all system phones This is the name displayed on internal calls to a uMobility client device Station Name default not assigned 15 05 16 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup Authentication Password Assign the authentication password for SIP single line telephones If using authentication for the uMobility Client devices the pa...

Page 1818: ...h ring 2 Call Forwarding when no answer 3 Call Forwarding all calls 4 Call Forwarding busy or no answer 5 Call Forwarding when busy default 0 24 09 02 Call Forward Split Settings CO Call Forwarding Destination for Both Ring All Call No Answer Assign CO Call Forwarding Destination for ring all call and no answer Set all uMobility client phones to forward BNA to SV8100 voice mail 1 9 0 R Up to 24 di...

Page 1819: ...xx xxx Defaults Slot 1 172 16 0 20 Slot 4 172 16 0 44 VoIP GW 1 8 172 16 0 20 172 16 0 27 99 01 60 Options 60 This setting affects SIP messages when using the Call Forward with Both Ring feature For the uMobility and Desk phone to work properly this must be set to 1 On 0 Off 1 On default 0 Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 ...

Page 1820: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1786 uMobility Wi Fi Client THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1821: ...e DT7XX terminal is in the same subnet as the IPLA then it will receive the Internal Page via a Multicast Packet If the DT7XX terminal is in a different subnet than the IPLA the DT7XX will receive the Internal Page via a Unicast Packet When phones are set to receive Unicast packets the IPLA will send a separate RTP stream to each phone that is set to receive the page E g If there are five DT7XX IP...

Page 1822: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1788 Unicast Multicast Paging Mode Figure 2 84 Multicast Mode Example Figure 2 85 Unicast Mode Example ...

Page 1823: ...ion 3000 software three additional IPLA DSP resource assignments are available The new assignments are Common without Unicast Paging Multicast Paging and Unicast Paging The new assignments assist with keeping IP phones from using all available DSP resources when utilizing Unicast Paging When the DSP resource is set to Common without Unicast Paging the resource can be accessed by anything but a Uni...

Page 1824: ...itor cannot utilize Unicast For an IP terminal to utilize the Multicast feature the IP terminal must have a gateway programmed to accomplish the multicast transmission When an actual gateway device does not exist on the network a dummy gateway address on the same subnet must be defined When utilizing Multicast mode and a page group consists of all IP phones the page is sent via a multicast message...

Page 1825: ...st commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 19 01 VoIP DSP Resource Selection Select type of VoIP ETU DSP Resource This program setting has no affect on the terminal trunk port assignment o...

Page 1826: ...s 1 15 Default Extension port 101 Class 15 All other extension port Class 1 20 13 29 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Paging Display Turn Off or On an extension user ability to display paging information 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 31 01 01 System Options for Internal External Paging All Call Paging Zone Name Assign a name to the All Call Internal Paging Zone The name shows on ...

Page 1827: ... an External Page only 2 Make announcement 3 Press Speaker to hang up 31 02 02 Internal Paging Group Assignment Internal All Call Paging Receiving Turn Off or On All Call Internal Paging for each extension If allowed extensions can make and receive All Call Internal Paging announcements If prevented extension can make only All Call Internal Paging announcements 0 Off 1 On default 0 31 03 01 Intern...

Page 1828: ...ingle Line Telephone SIP DECT Wireless 1 Lift the handset 2 Dial 701 and the Paging Zone number 0 9 or 00 64 Dialing 0 or 00 calls All Call Internal Paging Dial 1 and the Combined Paging Group code 1 8 or 0 for Internal External All Call 3 Make announcement 4 Hang up ...

Page 1829: ...ent Group pilot number cycles through the members of the group The hunting choices are Busy A call to the pilot number only hunts past a busy group member to the first available extension A call rings on an unanswered extension until it is answered or the caller hangs up Not Answered A call to the pilot number cycles through the idle members of a UCD Department Calling group The call continues to ...

Page 1830: ... on setting up the VRS The system prevents hunting to a UCD Department group extension if it is Busy on a call In Do Not Disturb Call Forwarded Logged Out Conditions When a DIL rings to a UCD Department groups the DIL may follow overflow programming Program 22 01 04 and Program 22 08 01 If an extension has Call Forwarding set the system does not hunt to the forwarded extension Default Setting Disa...

Page 1831: ... 1797 Priority Routing Figure 2 87 Uniform Call Distribution UCD Priority Call Routing Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 2 Priority 3 CALL Telephone on a call Telephone on a call Priority 1 Priority 1 CALL Telephone on a call CALL ...

Page 1832: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1798 Uniform Call Distribution UCD Circular Routing Figure 2 88 Uniform Call Distribution UCD Circular Routing CALL 1 CALL 2 CALL 3 CALL 4 ...

Page 1833: ... 1799 System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s PZ VM21 and VRS Compact Flash for Delay Announcements Related Features Automatic Call Distribution ACD Call Forwarding Call Arrival CAR Keys Transfer VM8000 InMail Voice Response System VRS ...

Page 1834: ... keys can also be assigned for Department Group features Automatic Transfer 56 immediate calling destination 58 delayed calling destination 59 and DND destination 60 Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 752 by default 16 01 01 Department Group Basic Data Setup Department Name Assign a name to the Extension Department Groups Maximum 12 c...

Page 1835: ...Basic Data Setup Call Recall Restriction for STG Determine whether or not an unanswered call transferred to a Department Group should recall the extension from which it was transferred 0 Disable Recall 1 Enable No Recall default 0 16 01 09 Department Group Basic Data Setup Department Hunting No Answer Time Set how long a call rings a Department Group extension before hunting occurs 0 64800 seconds...

Page 1836: ... Group Trunk to Trunk Transfer Each Telephone Group Transfer Turn Off or On an extension user ability in a Department Group to use the Trunk to Trunk Forwarding service codes 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Automatic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override Allow a busy extension to Manually 0 or Automatically 1 receive off hook Signals 0 Off ...

Page 1837: ...on as the Department Group pilot number as assigned in Program 11 07 01 Department Groups 1 64 Extension Number maximum eight digits default not assigned 24 02 05 System Options for Transfer Message Wait Ring Interval Time For Single Line Telephones SLTs without message waiting lamps this is the time between intermittent ringing If this value is 0 the system rings once 0 64800 seconds default 30 2...

Page 1838: ...log back in to your UCD Department Calling Group While you log back in Uniform Call Distribution routes calls to your extension 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 650 and 0 OR Press UCD Department Calling Log In key Program 15 07 or SC 751 46 The key goes out when you log back in ...

Page 1839: ...for each extension in each network node These tables are easily customized to meet the requirements of each networking configuration Users may place an intercom call or transfer a call to any extension at any location by dialing an extension number The system analyzes each extension number received and determines how to route the call to its final destination The feature which handles this route s...

Page 1840: ...form Numbering Network Default Setting None System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s CD 4ODTA OR CD PRTA Related Features Automatic Route Selection Flexible System Numbering K CCIS IP K CCIS T1 Multiple Trunk Types ...

Page 1841: ... affects the digits an extension user must dial to access other extensions and features such as service codes and trunk codes If the default numbering plan does not meet the site requirements use this program to tailor the system numbering to the site Caution Improperly programming this option can adversely affect system operation Make sure you thoroughly understand the default numbering plan befo...

Page 1842: ...ccess Dial Set the number of digits to be analyzed by the system for ARS routing Up to eight digits Use line key 1 for a Don t Care digit default not assigned 44 02 02 Dial Analysis Table for ARS F Route Access Service Type Select the Service Type 0 No Setting None 1 Extension Call Own 2 ARS F Route Table F Route 3 Dial Extension Analyze Table Option default 0 44 02 03 Dial Analysis Table for ARS ...

Page 1843: ...04 is checked default 0 44 03 03 Dial Analysis Extension Table ARS F Route Select Table Number If the received digits are not identified in tables 1 250 the F Route selection table number 0 500 defined in table 251 is used 0 500 ARS F Route Table Number With Program 44 01 set to 0 Program 44 05 is checked With Program 44 01 set to 1 Program 44 04 is checked default 0 44 03 04 Dial Analysis Extensi...

Page 1844: ...For each ARS F Route table 1 500 assign a priority number 1 4 Select the gain table number used for the tandem call defined in Program 44 07 0 500 0 No Setting default 0 44 05 07 ARS F Route Table ARS Class of Service For each ARS F Route table 1 500 assign a priority number 1 4 Select the Class of Service used for ARS An extension ARS COS is determined in Program 26 04 01 0 16 default 0 44 05 08 ...

Page 1845: ...ogram 44 05 is activated The Tandem Gain Table follows the Incoming transmit and Incoming receive settings for incoming line and Outgoing transmit and Outgoing receive settings for the outgoing line For ARS F Route calls the CODEC gains defined in Program 14 01 02 and Program 14 01 03 are not activated 1 63 15 5 15 5dB default 32 44 07 02 Gain Table for ARS F Route Access Incoming Receive 1 63 15 ...

Page 1846: ... default Pattern 1 4 Wednesday Pattern 1 10 default Pattern 1 5 Thursday Pattern 1 10 default Pattern 1 6 Friday Pattern 1 10 default Pattern 1 7 Saturday Pattern 1 10 default Pattern 1 44 10 01 Holiday Schedule for ARS F Route Define a yearly schedule for ARS F Route This schedule is used for setting special days such as national holidays pattern numbers 1 10 The pattern number is defined in Prog...

Page 1847: ...5 Expansion Chassis 4 CHS2U US 19 Chassis 0 CHS2U B US CHS2U E 9 5 Base Chassis 9 5 Expansion Chassis Conditions Two software packages Basic Port Package and Expanded Port Package are available for the UNIVERGE SV8100 system using the CD CP00 US Refer to Table 2 122 SV8100 Maximum System Capacities Trunks Ports Channels on page 2 1814 for maximum system capacities for each software package Enhance...

Page 1848: ... 200 BRI 16 40 88 136 184 PRI 1 5M 48 96 192 192 192 IP Trunk SIP 200 DTMF Receivers 32 32 32 32 96 2 VoIP Channels 128 128 Voice Mail Channels on CPU 16 channels 16 V34 Modem 1 channel 1 1 For law countries 104 timeslots per chassis are assigned the G 711 PCM communications e g voice communications and 7 timeslots per chassis are assigned for the Data communications e g HDLC over ISDN Thus the si...

Page 1849: ...84 Total 200 BRI 16 40 88 136 184 PRI 1 5M 48 96 192 192 192 IP Trunk SIP K CCIS IP 200 DTMF Receivers 32 32 32 32 96 2 VoIP Channels 128 128 Voice Mail Channels on CPU 16 channels 16 V34 Modem 1 channel 1 1 For law countries 104 timeslots per chassis are assigned the G 711 PCM communications e g voice communications and 7 timeslots per chassis are assigned for the Data communications e g HDLC ove...

Page 1850: ...ce Blades Table 2 125 Maximum System Capacities for Trunk Interface Blades and Table 2 126 Maximum System Capacities for Application Interface Blades Table 2 124 Maximum System Capacities for Station Interface Blades Station Interface Units Description Maximum Capacities Notes Basic Port Package Expanded Port Package PZ VM21 with InMail Compact Flash card installed This unit is a daughter board th...

Page 1851: ... 1 CD 4DIOPA This 4 port Analog DID or Off Premise Extension blade provides termination and operation of four analog DID trunks or four off premise extensions Each blade has a built in ringer signal generator RSG Up to 1600 ohms of resistance including the single line instrument is acceptable between the blade and the single line telephone This blade is installed in slots 2 6 of a chassis with CPU...

Page 1852: ...ion ports in the system 5 23 Note 1 CD 8LCA This 8 port Single Line Interface blade supports eight Single Line Telephones and or analog voice mail ports Each blade provides a built in ringer signal generator RSG and Message Waiting MW LED voltage to single line telephones This blade is installed in slots 2 6 of a chassis with CPU and slots 1 6 of expansion chassis The maximum number depends on oth...

Page 1853: ...tion ports in the system 4 23 Note 1 Note 1 Calculating maximum capacities is based on the system having a minimum of eight Digital Line DLC ports four trunk ports Note 2 A maximum of 32 Digital Voice Mail ports are available Note 3 Refer to the Board Power Factor Chart Note 4 The PZ VM21 with an VM8000 InMail Compact Flash is installed on the CD CP00 US it does not use any ports from the maximum ...

Page 1854: ...e Interface has built in fuses posistors supports four outside CO PBX lines and provides circuitry for ring detection holding and dialing The outside lines must be Loop Start DTMF trunks This blade is installed in slots 2 6 of a chassis with CPU and slots 1 6 of expansion chassis The maximum number depends on other trunk blades installed This blade shares the total number of CO PBX lines in the sy...

Page 1855: ...ported This blade is installed in slots 2 6 of a chassis with CPU and slots 1 6 of expansion chassis The maximum number depends on other trunk blades installed This blade shares the total number of CO PBX lines in the system 4 16 Note 1 CD CCTA The CD CCTA Common Channel Handler is an optional blade that provides a common channel signal through the CD CCTA to a K CCIS network and controls the sign...

Page 1856: ...system having a minimum of eight Digital Line DLC ports four trunk ports Note 2 Refer to Table 2 127 Board Power Factor on page 2 1823 Table 2 126 Maximum System Capacities for Application Interface Blades Application Interface Blades Description Maximum Capacities Notes Basic Port Package Expanded Port Package CD VM00 This CD VM00 is a PC platform that contains data storage for voice recording an...

Page 1857: ...OE 1 1 Note 1 CD PVAA The CD PVAA is a 16 port blade for the Multimedia Conference Bridge or IVR applications 2 2 Note 1 Note 1 Refer to Table 2 127 Board Power Factor Table 2 127 Board Power Factor Board Power Factor Total 7 Item Power Factor CD CP00 US 1 CD RTB 2 CD VM00 2 CD ETIA 2 CD PVAA 1 PZ 32IPLA 1 PZ 64IPLA 2 PZ 128IPLA 2 CD SVRU 2 Table 2 126 Maximum System Capacities for Application Int...

Page 1858: ...TL 8LD 1 TEL 0 8 BHA L UNIT 2 ADA L UNIT 2 APR L UNIT DT300 series 2 Dterm series i 3 BCH L BK UNIT 2 PSA L UNIT 1 2 8LK L UNIT 0 DCL 60 1 CONSOLE 2 ITL 320C 1 TEL 6 ITL 24D 1 TEL 4 ITL 12CG 3 TEL 4 ITL 12DG 3 TEL 4 ITL 2E 1 TEL 4 ITL 6DE 1 TEL 4 SLT 24V 0 8 SLT 48V 2 PGD 2 U10 ADP 2 SLT Adapter 5 ITL factors are calculated using the CD ETIA blade Power requirements for the 9 5 chassis are the sam...

Page 1859: ...CCPU 19 inch with CCPU 19 inch without CCPU 4 x 19 inch CD ETIA 2 2 3 3 12 CD PVAA 1 2 5 6 23 CD RTB 2 1 2 2 8 Table 2 130 Migration Supported Application Blades Blade Color CHS1U US Blue 19 Chassis CHS2U B US Blue 9 5 Base Chassis CHS2U E Blue 9 5 Exp Chassis IP3NA 6KSU A1 White 19 Chassis IP3NA 3KSU B1 White 9 5 Base Chassis IP3WW 3KSU E1 White 9 5 Exp Chassis CD RTB Blue S S S N S N S N S CD ET...

Page 1860: ...ams for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned The items highlighted in gray are read only and cannot be changed Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 03 01 ETU Setup Set up and confirm the basic configuration data for each blade This program represents di...

Page 1861: ...type and firmware for the packages installed The data varies depending on the card in the slot 90 34 02 Firmware Information Firmware Version Number View the package name and firmware for each blade The data varies depending on the card in the slot Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 ...

Page 1862: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1828 Universal Slots THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1863: ...ust two features programmable from a station Conditions Multiline terminals must be idle and Off Hook and have entered the service code when programming any function Default Setting None System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Clock Calendar Display Code Restriction One Touch Calling Programmable Function Keys Speed Dial System Group Station ...

Page 1864: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1830 User Programming Ability Guide to Feature Programming None Operation None ...

Page 1865: ... the extension the key is assigned on is not supported Enhancements With Version 3000 or higher system software the appropriate line key page automatically displays for incoming calls on the DTL 8LD 1 DESI Less and ITL 320C 1 terminals Calls can be parked from a virtual extension Version 3000 or higher software With Version 7000 or higher software A special ringtone is provided when a pre assigned...

Page 1866: ...ss of service feature Program 20 11 20 No Call Back transfer recall disable is not supported for calls from a physical extension to a virtual extension In Version 3000 or higher software the system can be programmed to blink the page number of a DT300 DT700 DESI Less terminal when it receives an incoming call or switch to the page the incoming call is on Also a default page can be defined for the ...

Page 1867: ... premise will always follow ARS Class 1 routing properties Calls made from Virtual Extensions will show up in SMDR as calls made from the physical extension the VE resides on Virtual Extension Ring Assignment command 15 09 will follow the ring assignment for the Night Mode Group the virtual extension is assigned to default Night Mode Group 1 and not the Night Mode Group of the keyset the virtual i...

Page 1868: ...w system data Tone Patterns 5 8 downgrading to Version 7000 or lower may cause incoming rings to not function properly Default Settings Extensions 201 299 and 3301 3457 are the default for CAR VE System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Call Waiting Camp On Call Arrival CAR Keys Secondary Incoming Extension ...

Page 1869: ...umber for the Virtual Extensions 1 256 Up to eight digits 1 201 2 202 3 203 99 299 100 3601 256 3857 14 02 17 Analog Trunk Data Setup Sync Ringing Enable or Disable ringing per trunk 0 Disable 1 Enable default 1 15 01 01 Basic Extension Data Setup Extension Name Define the extension virtual extension name Up to 12 characters Default STA 101 Ext 101 STA 102 Ext 102 etc 15 02 02 Multiline Telephone ...

Page 1870: ...utbound calls from the VE 0 Vir Ext Virtual Extension Class 1 Real Ext Real Extension Class default 1 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign Virtual Extension function keys on Multiline telephones code 03 extension number Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 752 by default 15 08 01 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup When an ...

Page 1871: ... Virtual Extension Key Operation Mode Assign if a call to a VE Holds 1 on the VE or Releases to the phone that answered the VE 0 Release 1 Land On the Key default 0 15 18 02 Virtual Extension Key Enhanced Options Display Mode when pacing a call on Virtual Extension Key Define if calls to or from a Virtual Extension Key display the Virtual Extension Key name or the name of the extension where it re...

Page 1872: ... ability of a DESI Less terminal to switch to the page that has an incoming call on one of the keys 0 Disable 1 Enable default 1 15 25 03 DESI less Page Setup Idle Automatic Screen Switching Define or Disable the page to be automatically displayed when a DESI Less terminal becomes idle 0 Disable 1 Display page 1 2 Display page 2 3 Display page 3 4 Display page 4 default 0 15 25 04 DESI less Page S...

Page 1873: ...al extension key Program 20 13 06 Call Waiting must be Off for this option to work 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 01 15 20 15 03 Ring Cycle Setup Incoming Internal Call Define ringing cycle for incoming Internal calls 1 13 Ringing Cycle default 12 21 01 15 System Options for Outgoing Calls Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line Toll Restriction Enable Disable the Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line feature...

Page 1874: ... To place a call from a Virtual Extension 1 Press the Virtual Extension key The operation depends on the setting in Program 15 02 21 2 Place an intercom call or dial a trunk access code to seize an outside line and place your call To program a Virtual Extension key on a telephone 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 752 3 Press the key you want to program 4 Dial 03 5 Dial the number of the extension you want to...

Page 1875: ...l Extensions 2 1841 8 Press Hold for a second time for Delayed Ring or Skip to step 10 9 Dial the mode number in which the key delay rings 1 Day 1 2 Night 1 3 Midnight 1 4 Rest 1 5 Day 2 6 Night 2 7 Midnight 2 8 Rest 2 10 Press Speaker ...

Page 1876: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1842 Virtual Extensions THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1877: ...g Find Me Follow Me supports day of week scheduling in addition to time of day This applies to station and group subscriber mailboxes This feature requires Version 6000 Enhancement License 0035 Message Notification supports day of week scheduling in addition to time of day This applies to station and group subscriber mailboxes This feature requires Version 6000 Enhancement License 0035 Email Notif...

Page 1878: ...calls or only when the extension is busy When a user transfers a call to an extension forwarded to Voice Mail the call waits for the Delayed Call Forwarding time before routing to the called extension mailbox This gives the transferring party the option of retrieving the call instead of having it go directly to the mailbox Leaving a Message Voice Mail lets a multiline terminal extension user easil...

Page 1879: ...rminal user can then Choose Exit to let the call go through to their mailbox Choose ANSW to intercept the call before it goes to their mailbox Choose MON to monitor the message being left by the caller Personal Answering Machine Emulation A multiline terminal user can have their idle extension emulate a personal answering machine This lets In Mail screen their calls just like their answering machi...

Page 1880: ...n the order in which they were received As the Voice Mail Queue follows Department Hunting programming the queue can hold a maximum of 10 calls If the queue is full or if the voice mail ports are not assigned to a Department Group the calls are handled as though no voice mail queuing feature was enabled The calls either access voice mail if a port is available or they receive a busy signal The Voi...

Page 1881: ...stem abandons the call and decrements the Ring No Answer RNA count VM8000 InMail Directory Dialing Directory Dialing allows an Automated Attendant caller to reach an extension by dialing the first few letters in the extension user s name With Directory Dialing the caller does not have to remember the extension number of the person they wish to reach just the name The following conditions apply to ...

Page 1882: ...aller to dial a digit 1 3 to reach one of the announced matches Additionally the caller can dial 4 to hear additional matches if any 6 The caller dials the digit for the extension they wish to reach and VM8000 InMail sends the call to that extension The call is sent as a Screened or Unscreened transfer depending on programming For callers to use Directory Dialing the system must have a name progra...

Page 1883: ... Once Live Record is started dialed DTMF digits are no longer sent to the outside system for the duration of that call Remote CCIS extensions are not supported in a centralized directory When set for Unscreened Transfer calls from the InMail ring at the extension like other transferred calls and display the incoming Caller ID data if provided by Telco and enabled in programming while the phone is ...

Page 1884: ...supported on VM8000 InMail Audible tones are not provided to the multiline terminal when using Live Monitor only visual notifications are provided for incoming monitored calls The Quick Transfer to Voice Mail feature is allowed when Listening to the Ring Back Tone RBT Listening to the Call Waiting Tone CWT In Handsfree Answerback Mode In Voice Over Mode When Quick Transfer to Voice Mail is accesse...

Page 1885: ...alls to their voice mail Call Forwarding does not have to be programmed manually by each user Off premise notification and external extensions require access to outside lines When the voice mail places a call on hold it uses Group Hold Any line appearances for the trunk shows the hold flash rate however a user cannot pick up this call a busy signal is heard Updating the system time also updates th...

Page 1886: ...rom the 64 port license There can still be a combination of 64 trunks TDM phones and IP phones When a PZ ME50 US is mounted to CCPU US The first port of VM8000 InMail can be assigned above port 64 The number of licensed VM8000 InMail ports do not take away from the 64 port license There can still be a combination of 64 trunks TDM telephones and IP telephones The number of speech path channels on t...

Page 1887: ...als All Terminals Required Component s PZ VM21 VM8000 InMail CF CPU License Related Features Automatic Call Distribution ACD Barge In Caller ID Call Forwarding Central Office Calls Placing Clock Calendar Display Direct Inward Line DIL Hold Message Waiting One Touch Calling Programmable Function Keys ...

Page 1888: ...e DTMF receiver for every 10 devices that use them In heavy traffic sites allocate one DTMF receiver for every five devices that use them 0 Common Use 1 Extension Only 2 Trunk Only Default Circuit Resource 01 08 1 Extensions Circuit Resource 09 32 2 Trunks Circuit Resource 33 96 0 Not Used Circuit Resource 97 160 0 Common When PZ BS10 is installed 97 160 are available 11 07 01 Department Group Pil...

Page 1889: ...hether an extension Message Waiting Lamp lights Green or Red when a message is received 0 Green 1 Red default 1 15 03 01 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup SLT Signaling Type For each UNIVERGE SV8100 voice mail extension set this option to 0 0 DP 1 DTMF default 1 15 03 03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Terminal Type Enter 1 for this option to allow a single line port to receive DTMF to...

Page 1890: ... mail without answering the call Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code 751 by default 00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 752 by default 16 02 01 Department Group Assignment for Extensions Set up the Department Group called by the pilot number and the extension priority when a group is called Call Pickup Groups are set up in 23 02 Department Groups 1 64 Priority 1 999 Default 1 extension...

Page 1891: ...er Service Call Forward When Busy Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set Call Forwarding when Busy 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 03 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding When Unanswered Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set Call Forwarding when Unanswered 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 04 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service ...

Page 1892: ...mentary Service Barge In Initiate You should set this option to 1 for voice mail 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 01 15 20 13 16 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Barge In Receive Turn Off or On an extension user ability to have other extensions barge in on calls 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 01 15 20 13 28 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Allow Class of Service to be Changed...

Page 1893: ...me Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 22 02 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Assign Service Type 4 to each trunk you want to ring into Voice Mail as a Direct Inward Line DIL Trunks 1 200 0 Normal 1 VRS second dial tone if no VRS installed 2 DISA 3 DID 4 DIL 5 E M Tie line 6 Delayed VRS 7 ANI DNIS 8 DID DDI Mode Switching default 0 22 07 01 DIL Assignment Assign the master pilot number of t...

Page 1894: ...xtensions 101 108 first eight ports ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls No other extensions ring for incoming Ring Group 1 calls Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 22 04 01 Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment To enable Voice Mail Overflow assign selected extensions to a Ring Group that rings for unanswered DILs to Voice Mail ports In Program 22 06 ente...

Page 1895: ... voice mail and centrex transfer this option should be disabled or the service code 3 in Program 11 12 42 must be changed 0 Off 1 On default 1 45 01 06 Voice Mail Integration Options Record Alert Tone Interval Time Set the time between Voice Mail Conversation Record alerts 0 64800 seconds default 30 45 01 14 Voice Mail Integration Options CCIS Centralized Voice Mail Number Assign the pilot number ...

Page 1896: ...t InMail The system substitutes the port number for the when calling the port 47 01 03 SV8100 InMail System Options Subscriber Message Length Set the maximum time for recorded messages for Subscriber Mailbox users dialing RS to record and send a message Extension users leaving a message in a Subscriber Mailbox Outside Automated Attendant callers accessing a mailbox via a GOTO command and then dial...

Page 1897: ...s Digital Pager Callback Number Set the Digital Pager Callback Number part of the message Notification callout number for a digital pager This part of the callout number is appended to the pager service telephone number Normally this option should be X M where X is the number of the extension that generated the notification is a visual delimiter to make the pager display easier to read M is the nu...

Page 1898: ...l Dials the number entered in 47 01 07 Digital Pager Callback Number The system assumes that the notification number completes dialing approximately four seconds after trunk seizure This means that by default the Digital Pager Callback Number is dialed into the pager service about 13 seconds after trunk seizure 0 99 seconds default 9 47 01 09 SV8100 InMail System Options Wait Between Digital Pager...

Page 1899: ...npager callouts If the callout rings the destination longer than the 47 01 13 Wait for Answer Non Pager Callout Attempts option If the destination answers says Hello or the system detects answer supervision and then hangs up without dialing 1 to log onto their mailbox This typically happens if someone unfamiliar with notification answers the callout or if the callout is picked up by an answering m...

Page 1900: ...option is set to 1 VM8000 InMail continues to retry a digital pager Message Notification callout until the notification is acknowledged If this option is set to 0 VM8000 InMail retries a digital pager Message Notification the number of times specified in 47 01 14 Number of Callout Attempts This option does not apply to Message Notification callouts to telephone numbers A digital pager notification...

Page 1901: ... first port of VM8000 InMail can be assigned above port 64 0 497 The first port of In Mail must start with one of the following ports 1 5 9 12 16 237 241 245 249 and uses the first port assigned next three consecutive ports default 0 47 02 01 SV8100 InMail Station Mailbox Options Mailbox Type Enable Disable the mailbox An extension mailbox is not accessible when it is disabled even though its stor...

Page 1902: ...k order When a subscriber listens to their messages VM8000 InMail can play the oldest message or the newest message first 0 FIFO first in first out or oldest messages first 1 LIFO last in first out or newest messages first default 0 47 02 05 SV8100 InMail Station Mailbox Options Auto Erase Save of Messages Determine what happens when a Subscriber Mailbox user listens to a complete new message and ...

Page 1903: ...l Conversation Record beep This beep repeats according to the setting of Program 45 01 06 Voice Mail Integration Options Record Alert Tone Interval Time 0 Disable 1 Enable default 1 47 02 08 SV8100 InMail Station Mailbox Options Message Waiting Lamp Enable Disable Message Waiting lamp at the extension associated with the Subscriber mailbox For Subscriber Mailboxes you should enable this option For...

Page 1904: ...s after logging into their mailbox 0 No Disable 1 Yes Enable Default Mailbox 1 101 1 Other mailboxes 0 47 02 13 SV8100 InMail Station Mailbox Options Dialing Option Dialing Option provides additional dialing options for Next Call Routing Mailbox calls see Next Call Routing Mailbox below If enabled a caller who accesses the Subscriber Mailbox to leave a message can dial any option in the Next Call ...

Page 1905: ...9 No Setting entered by pressing Hold default not assigned 47 03 03 SV8100 InMail Group Mailbox Options Mailbox Type Set the Master Mailbox type 0 None 1 Subscriber 2 Routing default 1 47 06 01 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Number of Messages Set the maximum number of messages that can be left in the Subscriber Mailbox If a caller tries to leave a message after this limit is reached they hear T...

Page 1906: ...s If a message is left in a Subscriber Mailbox longer than this interval VM8000 InMail deletes it 1 90 days 0 Indefinite default 0 47 06 05 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Recording Conversation Beep Enable Disable the Conversation Record beep If enabled all parties on a call hear the voice prompt Recording followed by a single beep when the extension user initiates Conversation Record If disable...

Page 1907: ...Unscreened Transfer Enable Disable Automated Attendant Forced Unscreened Transfer for the Subscriber Mailbox If enabled each Screened Transfer TRF to the extension is converted to an Unscreened Transfer UTRF If disabled Screened Transfers from the Automated Attendant occur normally 0 Disable 1 Enable default 0 47 06 09 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Auto Time Stamp Enable Disable Auto Time Stamp...

Page 1908: ...LEAR default 1 Call Routing Mailbox 01 By default Call Routing Mailbox numbers are 01 16 47 06 13 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Directory List Number Specify the Directory List Number to which the Group Mailbox belongs Use to set up a Master Mailbox assigned as a Subscriber Mailbox in 47 03 03 0 None 1 8 List Number All default 0 47 06 24 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Auto Play Use this opti...

Page 1909: ...g to dial When the associated Dial Action Table has a Timeout action programmed the caller routes to that destination When the associated Dial Action Table does not have a Timeout action programmed the Instruction Menu repeats three times and then VM8000 InMail hangs up 0 99 seconds Entering 0 causes the Automated Attendant to immediately route callers to the Timeout destination programmed in the ...

Page 1910: ...acts with Next Call Routing Mailbox and Hang Up After when providing routing options For more detail on this interaction refer to Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing and Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing in the VM8000 InMail System Guide 0 No Repeats 1 10 Announcement repeats 1 10 times default 0 47 09 03 Announcement Mailbox Options Hang Up After Use this option along with Next Call Routing Mai...

Page 1911: ...le Override Enable Disable Answer Schedule Override for the selected Answer Table If enabled and you make an entry for Override Mailbox below the active Answer Table routes calls to the Override Mailbox 0 Disable 1 Enable default 0 Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 ...

Page 1912: ...orded announcement Depending on how the Announcement Mailbox is programmed InMail then hangs up reroutes the call or provides additional dialing options If the Override Mailbox is a Call Routing Mailbox the outside caller hears the instruction menu and can dial any option allowed by the associated Dial Action Table If any Input Data value is entered the terminal displays the Override Mailbox Numbe...

Page 1913: ...s a Call Routing Mailbox the outside caller hears the instruction menu and can dial any option allowed by the associated Dial Action Table If any Input Data value is entered the terminal displays the Default Mailbox Number selection below 0 Undefined 1 Subscriber Mailbox STA 2 Group Mailbox 3 Routing Mailbox Default Answer Table 1 3 Answer Table 2 8 0 VM8000 InMail Answer Table Options Default Mai...

Page 1914: ...r this type of schedule you select The day of the week the schedule should start The day of the week the schedule should stop The time on the start day the schedule should start The time on the stop day the schedule should stop The Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox used to answer the calls 3 Date A type 3 Answer Schedule runs only on a specific day of the year For this type of schedule you sele...

Page 1915: ...hen hangs up reroutes the call or provides additional dialing options If the Answering Mailbox is a Call Routing Mailbox the outside caller hears the instruction menu and can dial any option allowed by the associated Dial Action Table 0 Undefined 1 Subscriber Mailbox STA 2 Group Mailbox 3 Routing Mailbox default 3 Answering Mailbox Number Set the number of the Answering Mailbox the Automated Atten...

Page 1916: ...1 Schedule 1 6 All Other Answer Schedules 1 47 12 06 VM8000 InMail Answer Schedules Date For Date Type 3 Answer Schedules select the date the Answer Schedule should be active MMDD For example 0101 January 1 1231 December 31 0000 No date set default 0000 47 12 07 VM8000 InMail Answer Schedules Schedule Start Time Specify the time the Answer Schedule should start It applies to Day of the Week Type 1...

Page 1917: ...es Refer to the UNIVERGE SV8100 InMail System Guide for complete programming details 80 03 01 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Detect Level Set the criteria for DTMF dial ringback and busy tones 0 0dBm 25dBm 1 5dBm 30dBm 2 10dBm 35dBm 3 15dBm 40dBm 4 20dBm 45dBm 5 25dBm 50dBm 6 30dBm 55dBm default Type 1 5 0 80 04 01 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Detect Level Define the various levels and timers for t...

Page 1918: ...g 41 19 05 ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement 2nd Delay Message Sending Count Determine the 2nd Delay Message Sending Count This entry must be set to 1 or higher for the message to play 0 No message is played 1 255 default 0 41 19 06 ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement Wait Tone Type at Message Interval Determine what the caller hears between the messages 0 Ring Back Tone 1 Music On Hold Tone 2 Backg...

Page 1919: ...onally dial a co worker s mailbox or use this procedure to call your mailbox from a co worker s telephone OR Press Speaker and dial 8 2 If requested by Voice Mail enter your security code Ask your Voice Mail system administrator for your security code Normally your Message Waiting MW LED goes out if applicable If it continues to flash you have unanswered Message Waiting requests or a new General M...

Page 1920: ...ift the handset The voice mail is called The voice mail is only called if there are new messages If the display indicates Check Messages No Messages press the Exit key to return the telephone to idle If Program 15 02 26 1 Voice Mail Key 1 Press the Message key once The voice mail is called When there are new messages the Message Waiting LED on the telephone flashes red With this option set the MSG...

Page 1921: ...s the Voice Mail key Program 15 07 or SC 751 code 77 VM8000 InMail pilot OR Press the Message key on the telephone if equipped 3 Dial the number of mailbox to receive the transfer This number can be a mailbox number or a co worker s mailbox number OR Press the DSS Console or One Touch key for extension user s mailbox which receives the transfer If the Transfer destination is an extension forwarded...

Page 1922: ...tive call in your mailbox Multiline Terminal 1 Press the Voice Mail Record key Program 15 07 or SC 751 code 78 You hear a beep and your Record key flashes The system beeps periodically to remind you that you are recording To stop recording press the Voice Mail Record key again You can restart and stop recording as required OR 1 Press Hold 2 Dial 654 The system automatically reconnects you to your ...

Page 1923: ...ng up or hang up handset at the single line telephone When Personal Answering Machine Emulation broadcasts your caller s message you can Your telephone must be idle not on a call 1 Do nothing The message is automatically being recorded in your mailbox The broadcast stops when your caller hangs up OR 1 Lift the handset to intercept the call You connect to the caller The system records the first par...

Page 1924: ...s 0 to play a Help message 2 Select Instruction Menus I 4 3 Enter the Directory Dialing Mailbox number or press to go back to the System Administrator Options 4 Select one of the following options L 5 Listen to the current Directory Dialing Message if any Exit listen mode R 7 Record a new Directory Dialing Message Pause or restart recording E 3 Erase recording Exit recording mode E 3 Erase the Dir...

Page 1925: ...u wish to reach The Directory Dialing Message tells you how many letters you need to dial and whether you should enter the person s first name or last name To exit Directory Dialing without selecting a name dial 3 The Automated Attendant announces the name matches and tells you which digit to dial 1 3 to reach each of the announced names To hear additional name matches if any dial 6 instead 4 Afte...

Page 1926: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1892 VM8000 InMail THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1927: ...to voice mail via forwarding or overflow including transferred calls Direct Inward Lines and Direct Inward Dialing Park and Page is also available for Automated Attendant Screened STRF and Unscreened UTRF Transfers Optionally an extension can have calls from the Automated Attendant immediately Park and Page without trying their extension first When VM8000 InMail Park and Page intercepts the call i...

Page 1928: ...ransferred outside calls to an extension work normally Conditions The Park and Page feature uses the extensions personal park location only Enabling Automated Attendant Direct to Voice Mail DVM for a mailbox bypasses the Park and Page feature The Park and Page feature uses the All Zone paging only this cannot be changed or configured Virtual extensions are not supported for Park and Page Default S...

Page 1929: ...x Table 2 133 Park and Page Call Handling Park and Page Call Handling For Automated Attendant Unscreened UTRF and Screened STRF Transfers 47 02 17 Enable Park and Page 47 02 18 Paging Option 47 02 09 Auto Att Direct to VM Result 0 No 0 RNA 0 No If unanswered caller hears greeting and can leave a message 0 No 0 RNA 1 Yes Caller immediately hears greeting and can leave a message 0 No 1 IMM 0 No If u...

Page 1930: ...curs immediately 1 Yes 1 IMM 1 Yes Caller immediately hears greeting and can leave a message 1 For an Unscreened Transfer UTRF with a Next Call Routing Mailbox assigned caller can dial 1 to leave a message 2 to Park and Page and 4 for other options Table 2 133 Park and Page Call Handling Continued Park and Page Call Handling For Automated Attendant Unscreened UTRF and Screened STRF Transfers 47 02...

Page 1931: ...s directly to the mailbox For Subscriber Mailboxes you should enable this option For Guest Mailboxes you should disable this option 0 Disable 1 Enable default 0 47 02 14 SV8100 InMail Station Mailbox Options Next Call Routing Mailbox Assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox This provides callers with additional dialing options while listening to a subscriber Mailbox recording o...

Page 1932: ...box to the Subscriber Mailbox This provides additional dialing option while listening to a Subscribe Mailbox recording or default greeting The digits the caller can dial depends on the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox or alternate Next Call Routing Mailbox options 1 32 default 1 By default Call Routing Mailbox numbers ar 01 16 47 06 15 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Enable Paging Enable ...

Page 1933: ...y dial PG 74 3 Do one of the following a Lstn Select to listen to the current Paging Message if any Alternately dial L 5 Exit the listen mode b Rec Select to record the Paging Message Alternately dial R 7 Pause Select to pause recording Alternately dial Resume Select to resume recording if paused Alternately dial Cncl Select to erase the recording Alternately dial E 3 Done Select to confirm the re...

Page 1934: ...ge 1 Log onto your Subscriber Mailbox 2 More Setup Select Mailbox Options You are at the Mailbox Options Menu Alternately dial OP 67 CallH Select Call Options You are at the Call Handling Options Menu Alternately dial CO 26 3 Do one of the following a DVM Select to turn Automated Attendant Direct to Voice Mail on or off Alternately dial O 6 Paging Select to turn Park and Page on or off Alternately...

Page 1935: ...dio Format CCiTT u law User Pro Access Options There are two different User Pro logins available to make changes To login open an Internet browser and enter the IP of the SV8100 LAN port in the address line At default the IP address is 192 168 0 10 User Admin Mode UA Mode This mode allows the user admin to access any telephone and mailbox in the system This mode must be used to change VRS and Rout...

Page 1936: ...er the message was left in type of message the message number and the date and time to the second the message was left The table below shows how to interpret the message name to determine this information Figure 2 89 VM8000 InMail User Pro Login Diagram Table 2 137 Default Incoming Ringing Tone File Name Format BTNNN_YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS wav maximum 32 characters B Mailbox number maximum eight digits o...

Page 1937: ... be accessible when opening the telephone setup screen of extension XXX by UA or UB mode in User Pro Mailbox XXX will not be accessible when selecting the extension XXX on the file upload download screen of UA mode User Pro Mailbox XXX will be inaccessible when logging in the UB mode User Pro for extension XXX While uploading an audio file via User Pro the greeting is not accessible by telephone W...

Page 1938: ...will be displayed and the download delete icon will not be displayed The User Pro message page does not refresh automatically to see new messages the page must be refreshed For instance if a new message is received via regular operation on the system while a user is viewing the upload download screen the new message is not shown until the page is reloaded by clicking the icon At default Microsoft ...

Page 1939: ...sed These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro wizards for feature programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Com...

Page 1940: ...word user levels 0 Prohibited User 1 MF Manufacturer Level 2 IN Installer Level 3 SA System Administrator Level 1 4 SB System Administrator Level 2 5 UA User Programming Level 1 Refer to the SV8100 Programming Manual for default settings Table 2 138 Error Messages and Causes Error Message Cause VMDB is not attached The PZ VM21 is not attached Mailbox XXX does not exist XXX mailbox number The mailb...

Page 1941: ...g on browser settings a security prompt may appear Click on the menu and choose to allow the file to download Depending on Windows configuration you may be prompted again to either Open or Save the message To listen click Open and the default WAV file player will play the message To save the message click on the Save icon and browse to the location where the message will be saved on a local PC Lis...

Page 1942: ...ey must be in the proper format Audio files not recorded in the proper format may not playback on the Inmail The proper format is Bit Rate 64kbps Sampling Size 8 bits Channel 1 Mono Sampling Rate 8 KHz Audio Format CCiTT u law 1 To login open an Internet browser and enter the IP of the SV8100 LAN port in the address line At default the IP address is 192 168 0 10 2 At the login screen enter usernam...

Page 1943: ...92 168 0 10 2 At the login screen enter username Extension Number and password 1111 3 You will then see the main menu click on the InMail Audio Up Download icon The greeting numbers correspond to the same greeting number when accessed via the telephone Greeting 1 is GR1 greeting 2 is GR2 and greeting 3 is GR3 Greeting 7 is the paging greeting used with the park and page feature 4 To delete a greet...

Page 1944: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1910 VM8000 InMail Upload Download Audio THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1945: ...nhancement improves VM accessibility for outside callers allowing them to simply dial the main voice mail number and be automatically logged into their mailbox Two types of voice mail access modes exist for this feature 1 Specifying the VM Pilot number as a DID DIL DISA VRS destination OR Dialing the VM pilot number after calling in from a Mobile Extension 2 Program to forward a call to VM 102 by ...

Page 1946: ...s only supported for external calls to the InMail Mobile Extension users can use this feature by setting the VM box number in Program 13 04 11 which corresponds to the Speed Dial number registered in Program 15 22 01 Common Speed Dial area is used for this feature Group or Station Speed Dial areas are not supported with this feature When a number in the Common Speed Dial includes a trunk access co...

Page 1947: ...s The following Trunks support sending Caller ID Analog Line ISDN Line BRI ISDN Line PRI SIP Line H 323 Line Required Component s PZ VM21 VM8000 InMail Compact Flash CPU license for VM Related Features Speed Dial System Group Station Caller ID Flexible Ringing Mobile Extension VM8000 InMail ...

Page 1948: ...Data This program stores Speed Dial data into the Speed Dial areas and defines the Speed Dial names 1 9 0 Pause Press line key 1 Recall Flash Press line key 2 Code to wait for answer supervision in ISDN Press line key 3 maximum 24 digits default not assigned 13 04 02 Speed Dialing Number and Name Name Assign a name to each System Speed Dial bin Maximum 12 Characters Use dial pad to enter name defa...

Page 1949: ...2 01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Assign the incoming trunk type for each trunk Incoming Type for Day Night Mode 1 8 0 Normal 1 VRS second dial tone if no VRS installed 2 DISA 3 DID 4 DIL 5 E M Tie line 6 Delayed VRS 7 ANI DNIS 8 DID DDI Mode Switching default 0 22 05 01 Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment Assign trunks to incoming Ring Groups Use this program to assign Normal Ring Trunks Program 22...

Page 1950: ...ble Number Conversion Transfer Destination Number 2 25 03 01 VRS DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing For each trunk port set what happens to a call when the DISA or Automated Attendant caller dials incorrectly or waits too long to dial The call can either disconnect 0 or Transfer to an alternate destination a ring group In Skin External Centralized When setting the DISA and DID Operati...

Page 1951: ...o Answer Busy For each trunk port 001 200 set the operating mode of each DISA trunk This sets what happens to the call when the DISA or Automated Attendant caller calls a busy or unanswered extension The call can either disconnect 0 or Transfer to an alternate destination a ring group In Skin External Centralized When setting the DISA and DID Operating Mode you make an entry for each Night Service...

Page 1952: ...y number 214 555 1212 Program 22 02 01 Trunk 1 DID Program 22 11 05 Set transfer destination 102 InMail Program 13 04 01 Speed Dial area No 0 2145551212 Program 13 04 11 Speed Dial area No 0 001 VM BOX number not extension number 1 Call the main number from 214 555 1212 2 After the VM answers the user can listen to and manage voice messages or change mailbox settings ...

Page 1953: ... it is unanswered The system cancels notification callouts for this entry when the RNA Attempts number is met Enhancements This feature added with Version 4000 Version 6000 or higher software provides the following Message Notification supports day of week scheduling in addition to time of day This applies to station and group subscriber mailboxes This feature requires Version 6000 Enhancement lic...

Page 1954: ...8000 or higher software and the Version 8000 Enhancement license 0037 The Message Notification Queue feature can be changed using system programming only The Message Notification Queue feature is set on a per mailbox basis Main software Version 4000 4 00 or higher and the Version 4000 Main Version license are required to support this feature The InMail language prompts installed on the CF must be ...

Page 1955: ...sion 6000 or higher software and Version 6000 Enhancement license 0035 If language prompt Version 2 30 or higher is not installed on the InMail CF Cascade Message Notification schedule options can only be changed from WebPro PCPro or system programming for either station subscriber or group subscriber mailboxes When language prompt Version 2 30 or higher is installed on the InMail CF Cascade Messa...

Page 1956: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1922 VM8000 InMail Cascade Message Notification Figure 2 91 Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart 1 ...

Page 1957: ...UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 13 0 VM8000 InMail Cascade Message Notification 2 1923 Figure 2 92 Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart 2 ...

Page 1958: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1924 VM8000 InMail Cascade Message Notification Figure 2 93 Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart 3 ...

Page 1959: ...uncement by dialing 1 to log onto their mailbox after answering the callout without saying Hello or The notification is to a system extension 4 Once the recipient logs onto the mailbox the notification is considered acknowledged and will not reoccur until the subscriber receives new messages 5 If the recipient doesn t answer the system follows the Cascading Message Notification retry attempt setti...

Page 1960: ... considered acknowledged if the subscriber logs onto their mailbox If the notification is not acknowledged within a programmable time frame 47 01 12 the pager notification is repeated up to the RNA attempts count 47 20 07 If the pager service doesn t answer the system follows the Cascading Message Notification rules and notification will eventually stop if the call is not answered Default Settings...

Page 1961: ...r This part of the callout number is appended to the pager service telephone number Normally this option should be X M where X is the number of the extension that generated the notification is a visual delimiter to make the pager display easier to read M is the number of new messages in the extension mailbox is the digit normally used by the pager service for positive disconnect Digits 12 maximum ...

Page 1962: ...time SV8100 InMail waits after it dials a busy non pager callout destination before retrying the callout number 1 255 minutes default 15 47 01 12 SV8100 InMail System Options Wait Between RNA Non Pager Callout Attempts Wait Between RNA Non Pager Callout Attempts Notify RNA Intvl Set the time SV8100 InMail waits after it dials an unanswered non pager callout destination before retrying the callout ...

Page 1963: ...23 SV8100 InMail Station Mailbox Options All Message Notification Enabled Use this option to enable or disable notification for the subscriber mailbox If disabled enabling the individual notification entries has no effect 0 Disabled 1 Enabled default 1 47 02 28 SV8100 InMail Station Mailbox Options Message Notification Queuing Option Use this option to enable or disable message notification queuin...

Page 1964: ... new messages received between this setting and the End Hour setting This entry is in 24 hour military time For example 08 is 8 00 AM and 20 is 8 00 PM For 24 hour notification make the Start Hour the same as the End Hour There are five separately programmed Message notification entries for each Subscriber Mailbox 0 23 24 Hour Clock default 0 47 20 03 Station Mailbox Message Notification Notificat...

Page 1965: ...u want the system to dial it including a leading 1 for toll calls if required but do not include a line access code such as 9 If the number you enter is extension number it will be an Intercom call Otherwise it will be an outside call The system decides by referring its numbering plan There are five separately programmed Message notification entries for each Subscriber Mailbox Valid number up to 1...

Page 1966: ...ot required There are five separately programmed Message notification entries for each Subscriber Mailbox 0 Security code not required 1 Security code required default 0 47 20 09 Station Mailbox Message Notification Day of Week Sunday For the selected entry 1 5 use this option to enable or disable Message Notification on Sunday There are five separately programmed Message notification entries for ...

Page 1967: ...essage Notification on Friday There are five separately programmed Message notification entries for each Subscriber Mailbox 0 Disabled 1 Enabled default 0 47 20 15 Station Mailbox Message Notification Day of Week Saturday For the selected entry 1 5 use this option to enable or disable Message Notification on Saturday There are five separately programmed Message notification entries for each Subscr...

Page 1968: ...Message Notification will stop Notification will occur only for new messages received between the Start Hour and this setting This entry is in 24 hour military time For example 08 is 8 00 AM and 20 is 8 00 PM For 24 hour notification make the Start Hour the same as the End Hour There are five separately programmed Message notification entries for each Group Mailbox 0 23 24 Hour Clock default 0 47 ...

Page 1969: ...y Attempts For the selected entry 1 5 use this option to set how many times InMail will retry an incomplete Message Notification callout to a busy destination This option applies to pager and non pager callouts If the Busy Attempts and RNA Attempts are both met the notification callout to the selected entry is cancelled There are five separately programmed Message notification entries for each Gro...

Page 1970: ...Subscriber Mailbox 0 Disabled 1 Enabled default 0 47 22 10 Group Mailbox Notification Options Day of Week Monday For the selected entry 1 5 use this option to enable or disable Message Notification on Monday There are five separately programmed Message notification entries for each Subscriber Mailbox 0 Disabled 1 Enabled default 0 47 22 11 Group Mailbox Notification Options Day of Week Tuesday For...

Page 1971: ... Options Day of Week Friday For the selected entry 1 5 use this option to enable or disable Message Notification on Friday There are five separately programmed Message notification entries for each Subscriber Mailbox 0 Disabled 1 Enabled default 0 47 22 15 Group Mailbox Notification Options Day of Week Saturday For the selected entry 1 5 use this option to enable or disable Message Notification on...

Page 1972: ...cations off Dest Destinations Proceed to Notification Destination Selection menu Back Back Go back to Notification Type Selection menu Key Operation Key 3 Proceed to Notification Destination Selection menu Key 6 Toggle All Notifications on off Key 9 Exit from mailbox Key Go back to Notification Type Selection menu M e s s a g e N o t i f i c a t i o n P h o n e E m a i l B a c k P h o n e N o t i ...

Page 1973: ...oceed to Phone Notification Destination 1 menu Key 2 Proceed to Phone Notification Destination 2 menu Key 3 Proceed to Phone Notification Destination 3 menu Key 4 Proceed to Phone Notification Destination 4 menu Key 5 Proceed to Phone Notification Destination 5 menu Key 9 Exit from mailbox Key Go back to All Message Notifications Setting menu 4 Message Notification main menu InMail plays a summary...

Page 1974: ...tification setting menus Key 3 Toggle destination x notifications on off Key Go back to Notification Destination Selection menu 5 Message Notification Programming Begin Hour 6 Message Notification Programming End Hour 7 Message Notification Programming Notification Type 8 Message Notification Programming Number D e s t 1 E n a b l e d 0 8 A M 0 6 P M P h o n e 2 0 3 9 2 6 5 4 0 0 E n b l D i s b l...

Page 1975: ...t key Operation 3 Line Phone Super Display Phone Next Next Keep current setting and proceed to RNA Attempt menu Exit Exit Keep current setting and return to main Notification menu Key Operation Key 0 9 Set Busy Attempt count Key Keep current setting and proceed to RNA Attempt count menu Key Keep current setting and return to main Notification menu 11 Message Notification Programming RNA Attempt co...

Page 1976: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1942 VM8000 InMail Cascade Message Notification Figure 2 94 Cascade Message Flow Chart 1 ...

Page 1977: ...UNIVERGE SV8100 Issue 13 0 VM8000 InMail Cascade Message Notification 2 1943 Figure 2 95 Cascade Message Flow Chart 2 ...

Page 1978: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1944 VM8000 InMail Cascade Message Notification THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1979: ...he email and visa versa If Email Notification tries to deliver an email and it doesn t go through because of a connection problem i e no connection or a dropped connection it will retry every 15 minutes for 24 hours If the email still can t go through Email Notification cancels the delivery Email deliveries that fail because authentication fails or the encryption mode is incorrect are immediately ...

Page 1980: ...that will handle notifications sent from the VM8000 e g yourname emailserver com SMTP Server Name The SMTP server email provider that will handle email for the SMTP email account The SMTP server name is typically similar to smtp emailserver com SMTP Port Number The port the SMTP server uses for SMTP delivery SMTP Encryption Determines whether or not the SMTP server accepts plain text unencrypted o...

Page 1981: ...ers the provider allows in each text message typically 120 160 characters SMS will not send the wav file attachment even if enabled in programming SMS Text Message Notification The following shows a typical SMS Text Message when the VM8000 InMail is set up to provide email notification only no wav file of the actual message In this case the provider divided the message into two parts one for the m...

Page 1982: ...GE Text Message Body 1 MESSAGE FROM XXXX SUBJ VOICE MESSAGE FROM XXXX 0M6S VOICE MESSAGE ARRIVED ON MONDAY SEPT 17 3 51 PMDURATION 0M 6S NEC 1 OF 2 SENT 3 51PM 09 17 1 Your cell phone display will automatically break the text lines to best fit the screen Table 2 141 Common Email Notification SMTP Server Settings Provider Server Name and Account 1105 02 08 SMTP Port 1105 03 Encryption 1105 04 Authe...

Page 1983: ...x Delete A forwarded voice message is deleted from the Mail Box No Change A forwarded voice message is kept as New in the mailbox Table 2 142 Some Common Mobile Telephone Service Provider SMS Portals Provider Email Address for SMS Text Message Some Popular Provider Specific SMS Portals Alltel yourcellphonenumber message alltel com AT T Wireless yourcellphonenumber mobile att net OR yourcellphonenu...

Page 1984: ...lboxes Email Notification options can only be changed from UserPro WebPro PCPro or system programming for station subscriber mailboxes Default Settings Disabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s PZ VM21 PZ ME50 US VM8000 InMail CF Licensing for InMail voice ports 1002 and the Email Notification feature 1013 and 1014 Related Features None ...

Page 1985: ...Determines if the email notification includes the voice message as a WAV file attachment This should be set to 0 if sending an SMS text message to a cell phone 0 Off 1 On default 0 47 02 27 SV8100 InMail Station Mailbox Options Email Message Save Delete Option When email notification is enabled use this option to set how notification handles new voice mail message content If No Change is selected ...

Page 1986: ...rver port 0 65535 default 25 47 18 04 VM8000 InMail SMTP Setup Encryption Enable SSL Encryption 0 Off 1 On default 0 47 18 05 VM8000 InMail SMTP Setup Authentication Enables authentication when set to 2 POP3 refer to Programs 47 19 xx 0 Off 1 On 3 POP3 default 0 47 18 06 VM8000 InMail SMTP Setup User Name Set the user name for SMTP authentication Up to 48 characters default No Setting 47 18 07 VM8...

Page 1987: ... DNS IP Address If this setting is not assigned the IP Address must be used in Program 47 18 02 and 47 19 01 instead of the name 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 default 0 0 0 0 90 11 12 System Alarm Report DNS Secondary Address Assign the secondary DNS server IP Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 default 0 0 0 0 Table 2 143 Turn Email Notification On or Off To Turn Email Notification On or Off 1 Log onto Sub...

Page 1988: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1954 VM8000 InMail Email Notification THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1989: ... time i e in schedule The system will not try any entries that are disabled or are not in schedule When trying the destinations Find Me Follow Me skips an active in schedule number that is busy in DND or is unanswered If a destination is answered the party must dial 1 and if enabled enter the security code to hear new messages If the system is forwarded to a voice mail system since the destination...

Page 1990: ...Follow Me does not work for internal callers Find Me Follow Me does not work for calls forwarded to InMail this includes DID DIL calls Find Me Follow Me requires that Tandem Trunking be enabled on the line that rings into the Automated Attendant If Tandem Trunking is not enabled the Find Me Follow Me options are not available The Find Me Follow Me schedule by day or week requires Version 6000 or h...

Page 1991: ...iption Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 14 01 13 Basic Trunk Data Setup Trunk to Trunk Transfer Enable Disable loop supervision for the trunk 0 Disabled 1 Enabled default 1 20 11 14 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction Make sure this option is disabled or Find Me Follow Me will not work for CO calls 0 Disabled 1 Enabled default 0 47 02 24 SV8100 InMa...

Page 1992: ... 47 21 04 Station Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Options Find Me Follow Me Number Use this option to set the telephone number Find Me Follow Me will dial Enter the number exactly as you want the system to dial it including a leading 1 for toll calls if required but do not include a line access code such as 9 If the number you enter is extension number it will be an Intercom call Otherwise it will be an...

Page 1993: ... entries for each Subscriber Mailbox 0 Disabled 1 Enabled default 0 47 21 10 Station Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Options Day of Week Friday For the selected entry 1 5 use this option to enable or disable Find Me Follow Me on Friday There are three separately programmed Find Me Follow Me entries for each Subscriber Mailbox 0 Disabled 1 Enabled default 0 47 21 11 Station Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Opti...

Page 1994: ...ou enter is extension number it will be an Intercom call Otherwise it will be an outside call The system decides by referring its numbering plan Up to 16 digits default not assigned 47 23 05 Group Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Options Day of Week Sunday For the selected entry 1 5 use this option to enable or disable Find Me Follow Me on Sunday There are three separately programmed Find Me Follow Me en...

Page 1995: ...ely programmed Find Me Follow Me entries for each Subscriber Mailbox 0 Disabled 1 Enabled default 0 47 23 10 Group Mailbox Find Me Follow Me Options Day of Week Friday For the selected entry 1 5 use this option to enable or disable Find Me Follow Me on Friday There are three separately programmed Find Me Follow Me entries for each Subscriber Mailbox 0 Disabled 1 Enabled default 0 47 23 11 Group Ma...

Page 1996: ...r 12039265400 OR For Pager Numbers Notify On 8am 5pm Pager 12039265400 O 6 Turn Message Notification on or off On Off C 2 Change your Message Notification setup Chnge When you see Notification Begin Enter the hour you want Message Notification to begin Enter 2 digits for the hour A 2 Select AM AM P 7 Select PM PM Skip this option without changing your entry Next Back up to the previous level witho...

Page 1997: ... Number Enter the Message Notification callout number 16 digits max o Enter the number exactly as you want the system to dial it including a leading 1 for toll calls if required o If the number you enter is 4 digits or less it is an Intercom call If it is more than 4 digits it is an outside call Accept the number entered and back up to the previous level OK Clear Erase the number you just entered ...

Page 1998: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1964 VM8000 InMail Find Me Follow Me THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 1999: ... The InMail prompt version must be 2 10 or higher to support this feature The telephone display language can be changed using dial access codes or softkeys only The InMail language can be changed using dial access codes or softkeys only The ability to change other extensions language options is allowed on a class of server basis in Program 20 13 53 The system will not allow an InMail language to b...

Page 2000: ...anish 11 Norwegian 12 Parisian French 13 Brazilian Portuguese 14 Japanese 15 Mandarin Chinese 16 Korean 17 Iberian Portuguese 18 Greek 19 Danish 20 Swedish 21 Thai 22 Taiwan 23 Flemish 24 Turkish Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None ...

Page 2001: ... Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 11 13 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation Display Language Selection for Multiline Terminal If needed redefine the service code used to select the language for display multiline terminals MLT default 678 11 11 68 Service Code Setup for Setup Entry Operation IntraMail Language Selection for own Extension This setting is needed if the dial access code to this f...

Page 2002: ... English 2 UK English 3 AU English 4 CA French 5 Dutch 6 Mex Spanish 7 LA Spanish 8 Italian 9 German 10 ES Spanish 11 Norwegian 12 ParisFrench 13 BR Portugue 14 Japanese 15 MandChinese 16 Korean 17 IB Portugue 18 Greek 19 Danish 20 Swedish 21 Thai 22 Taiwan 23 Flemish 24 Turkish 25 Arabic 26 Russian default 1 Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 ...

Page 2003: ...ension display language press Other softkey Ext Enter the extension number to be changed Choose Lang Select desired language press down arrow to advance to next page Press softkey for desired language Press Speaker Exit VMail To change spoken InMail mailbox language press VMail Softkey Own To change your own extension display language press Own Softkey Choose Lang Select desired language press dow...

Page 2004: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 1970 VM8000 InMail Language Setting THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 2005: ...ation depending on the application blade used This adapter is for use with IP or digital multiline terminals It cannot be used to record VoIP phone conversations in a Netlink or CCIS configuration Two options are available for playing back calls recorded by your VSR s The first is the Desktop Player which is used by an individual user to play back their own archive of calls or to play back NEC Dte...

Page 2006: ...ion included with the Dterm VSR P N 780275 for details on setting up and using the Desktop Player Conditions The PC hosting Back Office should have the power save functionality turned off Encryption is only supported at 256 bit setting Does not support recording of VoIP phone conversations in a Netlink or CCIS configuration No Wireless terminal support Encryption Feature Requires VSR Manager or VS...

Page 2007: ... Software 4 Port Digital Call Logging Unit Pentium 4 processor 512 Mb RAM One USB Controller Card for each four devices powered USB hubs can be used however no more than four devices should be connected to a USB Controller Card An available PCI slot for each USB Controller Card LAN connection for remote access to stored calls NEC BackOffice Recorder software Supported Operating Systems Windows XP ...

Page 2008: ...ID Name Determine whether or not a single line telephone should display the Caller ID name 0 Disable 1 Enable default 1 20 08 15 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Block Outgoing Caller ID Turn Off or On a user Class of Service from automatically blocking outgoing Caller ID information when a call is placed If block is enabled the system automatically inserts the Caller ID block code 6...

Page 2009: ...cView application to run in conjunction with a web server It adds tools for configuration and management but can also be configured by editing configuration files that are normally XML formatted Tomcat includes its own internal HTTP server Refer to the NEC IP Recorder SonicView User Guide and Installation Manual located on the AK System PC Apps CD P N 670830 for additional Information Database Ser...

Page 2010: ... additional Information SonicView On Demand Recording ODR Client The SonicView On Demand Recording client is a convenient tool to record and view calls as they happen in real time This standalone desktop application can be downloaded and installed from the login page of the main application For instructions to download and install this client refer to the NEC IP Recorder SonicView installation and...

Page 2011: ...rroring setup is mandatory to enable call capturing over the network The server hosting the recording engine should be connected to a managed switch customer provided such that the PBX s traffic mirrored to the port on which the recording engine server is connected Default Settings Not Installed System Availability Terminals NEC DT700 IP Terminals NEC SonicView IP Recorder Required Component s Har...

Page 2012: ...quirements both features on same server Hardware Pentium 2 66 GHz core 2 duo A minimum of 4 GB RAM 250 GB of free hard disk space 30000 hours of continuous recording SVGA monitor 1024 X 768 resolution Network Interface Card NIC Supported Operating Systems Windows Server 2003 with SP2 Windows Vista Business Edition with SP1 Windows XP Professional with SP3 Client Side Requirements Pentium 4 class m...

Page 2013: ...r stations one Supervisor and up to four On Demand Recording clients 670864 LKS IP Recorder Basic Port Add on 4 LIC Feature Code Quantity Included Comments 3202 4 Additional Stations Provides the ability to record four additional stations over the initial four received with 670863 670865 LKS IP Recorder Basic Port Add on 1 LIC Feature Code Quantity Included Comments 3202 1 Additional Station Provi...

Page 2014: ... 1 200 0 No 1 Yes default 0 15 03 10 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Caller ID Name Determine whether or not a single line telephone should display the Caller ID name 0 Disable 1 Enable default 1 20 08 15 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Block Outgoing Caller ID Turn Off or On a user Class of Service from automatically blocking outgoing Caller ID information when a call is pla...

Page 2015: ... reporting analysis and monitoring The different components that make up the SonicView application are Application Server Database Server Recording Engine Network Infrastructure to Enable Call Recording Web Server The SonicView application uses the Apache Tomcat server as a web container or web server Apache Tomcat implements the necessary Java Servlet and Java Server Pages JSP specifications from...

Page 2016: ...ary network infrastructure and configurations are in place For a detailed description of the network infrastructure required for call capture refer to the Network Infrastructure section To make the necessary configurations on the recording engine to enable call capturing refer to Configuring the Recorder subsection under the Administrative tasks section Refer to the NEC IP SonicView Recorder User ...

Page 2017: ...etwork The server hosting the recording engine should be connected to a managed switch customer provided such that the PBX s traffic mirrored to the port on which the recording engine server is connected Recording Digital terminals is now possible after adding the NEC 4 port digital call logging device via USB to the system that has the Digital recorder installed See the SonicView Installation and...

Page 2018: ...of free hard disk space 30000 hours of continuous recording SVGA monitor 1024 X 768 resolution Network Interface Card NIC Supported Operating Systems Windows Server 2008 Windows 7 Windows Server 2003 with SP2 Windows Vista Business Edition with SP2 Windows XP Professional with SP3 Application Recording Server both components on same server Hardware Pentium 2 66 GHz core 2 duo or above A minimum of...

Page 2019: ...Recorder Basic Pkg LIC Feature Code Quantity Included Comments 3200 4 Stations 1 Supervisor 4 ODRs On Demand Recording Provides the ability to have four stations one Supervisor Login and up to four On Demand Recording clients 670864 LKS Recorder Basic Port Add on 4 LIC Feature Code Quantity Included Comments 3202 4 Additional Stations Provides the ability to record four additional stations over th...

Page 2020: ... 1 200 0 No 1 Yes default 0 15 03 10 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Caller ID Name Determine whether or not a single line telephone should display the Caller ID name 0 Disable 1 Enable default 1 20 08 15 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Block Outgoing Caller ID Turn Off or On a user Class of Service from automatically blocking outgoing Caller ID information when a call is pla...

Page 2021: ...inistrator account Administrator is required to install the application The user must enable the Windows Vista Windows 7 Professional Ultimate Master Administrator account and log into this account to perform the installation The Apache Tomcat web server Apache Derby Database server and Recording Engine will not be installed correctly in non master administrator accounts 1 2 A Windows 7 Profession...

Page 2022: ...is is identified as a new conference call 3 4 Answering multiple calls within intervals of 5 seconds causes the calls to display with incorrect caller ID 3 5 Participant s details are missing in the conference For example if a In call is landed on 101 later 101 consulted with 102 and initiated 3 party conference then the call details are shown as 3 6 When a call is being transferred multiple times...

Page 2023: ... then the call will not be captured in the application even if it was established via the PBX 3 12 Recording Rules The application will not permit creation of more than one active Recording Rule per extension You may create a rule for STA 131 and enable the rule However if another rule is created for STA 131 then this rule will be disabled by default The user will have to disable the first rule to...

Page 2024: ... and also user cannot play back this call 3 24 Initiating Outbound and internal calls from ODR toolbar able to record and playback calls even though they were not actually established For example if a call is established between STA131 and 503 429 8643 even if the outbound party does not answer the call clicking on ODR s recording button at STA131 will record the voice file of the ODR user 3 25 Wh...

Page 2025: ...d SonicView reports to be delivered as EXCEL sheet But user cannot able to play the recording using this option 3 34 The Recording Engine will not record calls over a NAT environment in case of SV8300 Phone system Not supported in this release 4 Required Configuration Settings 4 1 The server hosting the recording engine software should be configured to have the same subnet as that of the PBX 4 2 S...

Page 2026: ...te locations etc 4 4 Archiving data to a remote destination will not work unless the database server service PostgreSQL or Microsoft SQL server as the case may be has domain credentials to write to the particular location in question If a user is trying to archive calls to a system other than the system on which PostgreSQL or Microsoft SQL server is installed then the archive file will not be crea...

Page 2027: ...re Matrix for Hardware Specifications ID Note 2 Refer to Table 2 152 Supported Operating Systems on page 2 1995 for Operating Systems ID Table 2 149 Server Hardware Matrix ID Hardware Specifications 1 Processor Intel Core 2 Duo 2 8 GHz or higher Harddrive 200 GB hard disk space 138 hours of recording per GB Other Refer to Table 2 150 Common Hardware Requirements on page 2 1994 2 Processor Quad Cor...

Page 2028: ...cView with Digital Recorder units VSR Hardware for Digital Station recording mixing different phone models within a single installation of SonicView is not recommended The PC and Digital Recorder units need to be installed within at least six feet of the pbx mdf tap points This is to avoid distortion in the recordings when not installed to specification SonicView Supervisor Agent Recommendations T...

Page 2029: ...1 or above NET 3 0 and above Operating Systems 1 2 3 4 5 Note 1 Refer to Table 2 152 Supported Operating Systems for Operating Systems ID Table 2 152 Supported Operating Systems Operating System ID Windows Server 2008 with SP1 1 Windows 7 Professional 2 Windows Vista Business Edition with SP2 3 Windows Server 2003 with SP2 4 Windows XP Professional with SP3 5 Table 2 153 Supported Databases Databa...

Page 2030: ...LIC Feature Code Quantity Included Comments 3202 1 Additional Station Provides the ability to record one additional station over the initial four received with 670863 670862 LKS Recorder Basic SUPV Add on 1 LIC Feature Code Quantity Included Comments 3201 1 Additional Supervisor Provides one additional Supervisor Login 670889 LKS Recorder Call Scoring 1 LIC Feature Code Quantity Included Comments ...

Page 2031: ... 1 200 0 No 1 Yes default 0 15 03 10 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Caller ID Name Determine whether or not a single line telephone should display the Caller ID name 0 Disable 1 Enable default 1 20 08 15 Class of Service Options Outgoing Call Service Block Outgoing Caller ID Turn Off or On a user Class of Service from automatically blocking outgoing Caller ID information when a call is pla...

Page 2032: ...peration Refer to the SonicView User Guide for operational details Refer to the following manuals for detailed information regarding the NEC SonicView Recorder NEC SonicView Recorder Installation and Setup Manual NEC SonicView Recorder Application User Guide ...

Page 2033: ...he call instead of having it go directly to the mailbox Leaving a Message Voice Mail lets a multiline terminal extension user easily leave a message at an extension that is unanswered busy or in Do Not Disturb The caller can press their Voice Mail key to leave a message in the called extension mailbox There is no need to call back later Transferring to Voice Mail By using Transfer to Voice Mail a ...

Page 2034: ...hart below to determine what leading and trailing digits are sent to the Analog Voice Mail System Program Program 45 01 15 0 Fixed Program 45 01 17 1 Yes or 0 No Program 45 01 15 1 Program Program 45 01 17 1 Yes Program 45 01 15 1 Program Program 45 01 17 0 No Description 45 04 01 Remote Logon Internal Up to four digits Default not assigned 1XXX Up to four digits XXX Up to four digits XXX Remote L...

Page 2035: ...e Waiting UCB is not supported in conjunction with Analog Voice Mail 45 04 05 Forward Busy Up to four digits Default not assigned 4UUUZZZ Up to four digits UUUZZZ Up to four digits ZZZ Forward Busy Extension or Trunk UUU that called extension ZZZ and was forwarded to the Voice Mail Box of extension ZZZ 45 04 06 Forward RNA Up to four digits Default not assigned 5UUUZZZ Up to four digits UUUZZZ Up ...

Page 2036: ...ilability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s CD 4LCA 4 Port main blade PZ 4LCA 4 Port daughter board CD 8LCA 8 Port main blade PZ 8LCE 8 Port daughter board Related Features Barge In Caller ID Direct Inward Line DIL Hold Message Waiting One Touch Calling Programmable Function Keys Transfer ...

Page 2037: ... 0 Common Use 1 Extension Only 2 Trunk Only Default Circuit Resource 01 08 1 Extensions Circuit Resource 09 32 2 Trunks Circuit Resource 33 96 0 Not Used Circuit Resource 97 160 0 Common When PZ BS10 is installed 97 160 are available 11 07 01 Department Group Pilot Numbers Dial Assign a Department Group pilot number for the Voice Mail The extensions are assigned to the group in Program 16 02 01 Up...

Page 2038: ...xtension has a VM Message Waiting set to an extension 1 Cycle 1 2 Cycle 2 3 Cycle 3 4 Cycle 4 5 Cycle 5 6 Cycle 6 7 Cycle 7 default 3 15 03 01 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup SLT Signaling Type For each UNIVERGE SV8100 voice mail extension set this option to 0 0 DP 1 DTMF default 1 15 03 03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup Terminal Type Enter 1 for this option to allow a single line p...

Page 2039: ...00 99 Appearance Function Code Service Code 752 by default 16 01 01 Department Group Basic Data Setup Department Name Assign a name to the Extension Department Groups Maximum 12 characters default No Setting 16 01 02 Department Group Basic Data Setup Department Calling Cycle Set the call routing for Department Calling Routing can be either circular cycles to all phones in a group or priority cycle...

Page 2040: ... or not an unanswered call transferred to a Department Group should recall the extension from which it was transferred 0 Disable Recall 1 Enable No Recall default 0 16 01 09 Department Group Basic Data Setup Department Hunting No Answer Time Set the time a call rings a Department Group extension before hunting occurs 64800 seconds default 15 16 01 10 Department Group Basic Data Setup Enhanced Hunt...

Page 2041: ...red Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set Call Forward when Unanswered 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 04 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding Both Ringing Turn Off or On an extension user ability to set Call Forward with Both Ringing 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 11 05 Class of Service Options Hold Transfer Service Call Forwarding with Follow Me ...

Page 2042: ...extension user ability to leave Message Waiting 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 12 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Room Monitor Extension Being Monitored Turn Off or On an extension user ability to be monitored by other extensions 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 13 13 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Continued Dialing DTMF Signal on ICM Call Turn Off or On...

Page 2043: ...Extension Number maximum eight digits default not assigned 22 08 01 DIL IRG No Answer Destination For Voice Mail Overflow enter the Ring Group that unanswered DILs to Voice Mail ring after the DIL Call Waiting time Program 22 01 04 0 No Setting 001 100 Incoming Ring Group 102 In Skin External Voice Mail or VM8000 InMail default 1 24 02 02 System Options for Transfer MOH or Ringback on Transferred ...

Page 2044: ... 45 01 01 Voice Mail Integration Options Voice Mail Department Group Number Assign which Extension Department Group number is assigned as the voice mail group An entry of 0 means no voice mail is installed Department Groups 0 64 0 No Voice Mail default 0 45 01 02 Voice Mail Integration Options Voice Mail Master Name Enter the Voice Mail master name up to 12 characters Up to 12 Characters default V...

Page 2045: ...the SLT port when a call is forwarded Up to four digits default not assigned 45 01 17 Voice Mail Integration Options Reply Mail Box Number Set whether or not to include the mailbox number in the analog voice mail protocol 0 No 1 Yes default 1 45 01 18 Voice Mail Integration Options Trunk Number Mapping Assign the digits of trunk number mapping 2 3 default 2 45 04 01 Voice Mail Digit Add Assignment...

Page 2046: ...s set to Program 0 Off 1 On default 0 45 05 05 Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits Forward Busy Send trunk number and or station number information if integrating to Voice Mail when Program 45 04 XX is left blank and 45 01 15 is set to Program 0 Off 1 On default 0 45 05 06 Voice Mail Send Protocol Signal Without Additional Digits Forward RNA Send trunk number and or station n...

Page 2047: ...Tone Receiver 0 0dBm 25dBm 1 5dBm 30dBm 2 10dBm 35dBm 3 15dBm 40dBm 4 20dBm 45dBm 5 25dBm 50dBm 6 30dBm 55dBm default Type 1 5 0 80 03 02 DTMF Tone Receiver Setup Start Delay Time Customize the Start delay time for DTMF Tone Receivers 0 255 0 25ms 64ms default Type 1 5 0 Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 ...

Page 2048: ...0dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 5 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 6 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 7 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 8 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 9 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 10 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 11 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 12 70dBm 0 to 85dBm 15 detect level 13 75dBm 0 to 90dBm 15 detect level 14 80dBm 0 to 95dBm 15 detect level 15 85dBm 0 to...

Page 2049: ...5 detect level 4 20dBm 0 to 35dBm 15 detect level 5 25dBm 0 to 40dBm 15 detect level 6 30dBm 0 to 45dBm 15 detect level 7 35dBm 0 to 50dBm 15 detect level 8 40dBm 0 to 55dBm 15 detect level 9 45dBm 0 to 60dBm 15 detect level 10 50dBm 0 to 65dBm 15 detect level 11 55dBm 0 to 70dBm 15 detect level 12 60dBm 0 to 75dBm 15 detect level 13 65dBm 0 to 80dBm 15 detect level 14 70dBm 0 to 85dBm 15 detect l...

Page 2050: ...e off detect time for the DTMF Tone Receiver 1 255 15 15ms 3825ms default Type 1 5 1 30ms 80 04 01 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Detection Level Define the detection levels for the Call Progress Tone Detector 0 0dBm 25dBm 1 5dBm 30dBm 2 10dBm 35dBm 3 15dBm 40dBm 4 20dBm 45dBm 5 25dBm 50dBm 6 30dBm 55dBm default Type 1 DT 0 25dBm Type 2 BT 0 25dBm Type 3 RBT 0 25dBm Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 02 Cal...

Page 2051: ...t means 30 30 1 60 When set to N 255 it means 30 30 255 7680 0 not detect default Type 1 DT 132 3990ms Type 2 BT 132 3990ms Type 3 RBT 132 3990ms Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 05 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup Pulse Count Define the pulse count for the Call Progress Tone Detector 1 255 default Type 1 DT 1 Type 2 BT 1 Type 3 RBT 1 Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 06 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup ON Minimum Tim...

Page 2052: ...ss Tone Detector Setup OFF Minimum Time Define the off minimum time for the Call Progress Tone Detector 1 255 30 30 7680ms default Type 1 DT 1 60ms Type 2 BT 12 300ms Type 3 RBT 83 2520ms Type 4 Type 5 0 80 04 09 Call Progress Tone Detector Setup OFF Maximum Time Define the off maximum time for the Call Progress Tone Detector 0 255 30 30 7680ms default Type 1 DT 1 60ms Type 2 BT 20 450ms Type 3 RB...

Page 2053: ...r your security code Normally your Message Waiting LED goes out if applicable If it continues to flash you have unanswered Message Waiting requests or a new General Message Refer to Checking Messages on page 2 1886 Single Line Telephone 1 Lift the handset and dial 8 If you are at a co worker s telephone you can dial the Voice Mail master number and your mailbox number instead You can also use this...

Page 2054: ... that you are recording To stop recording press the Voice Mail Record key again You can restart and stop recording as required OR 1 Press Hold 2 Dial 654 The system automatically reconnects you to your call To stop recording place the call on hold then pick the call back up You can restart and stop recording as required Single Line Telephone 1 Hookflash 2 Dial 654 The system automatically reconnec...

Page 2055: ...he VM and logs into the mail box If a VM Message key for extension A is placed on extension A the Large LED does not light on extension A for new message indication Instead the VM Message key flashes green VM message LED is a higher priority then any other status for the DSS BLF key The enabling or disabling of Voice Mail Indication on BLF enables the station with the message to show up on other t...

Page 2056: ...ure Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 15 07 01 Programmable Function Keys Assign DSS BLF function keys on Multiline telephones code 01 extension number or Message Key Code 77 mailbox number Line Key 1 48 0 99 Normal Function Code...

Page 2057: ...ble ACD Agent Busy Define the LED patterns for ACD agent busy functions on the DSS consoles 0 7 default 7 On 30 05 05 DSS Console Lamp Table Out of Schedule ACD DSS Define the LED patterns for out of schedule ACD DSS functions on the DSS consoles 0 7 default 0 Off 30 05 06 DSS Console Lamp Table ACD Agent Log Out ACD DSS Define the LED patterns for ACD agent log out ACD DSS functions on the DSS co...

Page 2058: ...ons on the DSS consoles 0 7 default 6 IW 30 05 16 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 8 Hotel DSS Define the LED patterns for hotel status code 8 hotel DSS functions on the DSS consoles 0 7 default 4 IR 30 05 17 DSS Console Lamp Table Hotel Status Code 9 Hotel DSS Define the LED patterns for hotel status code 9 hotel DSS functions on the DSS consoles 0 7 default 3 RW 30 05 18 DSS Console Lamp...

Page 2059: ...cation on Line Keys 2 2025 6 Press Hold 7 Press Speaker To program a VM Message key on a telephone 1 Press Speaker 2 Dial 751 3 Press the key you want to program 4 Dial 77 5 Dial the number of the extension you want to appear on the key 6 Press Speaker ...

Page 2060: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 2026 Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 2061: ...nal users and 500 2500 set users can initiate and receive a Voice Over To enable Voice Over a multiline terminal can have a function key programmed for Voice Over In addition to one touch Voice Over operation the key shows the Voice Over status as follows Conditions While active Voice Over uses a Conference circuit on a CD CP00 US Refer to the Conference feature for Conference circuit programming ...

Page 2062: ...old An attempt to Voice Over a station can be denied if the station is in DND Do Not Disturb Mode Automatic Redial is activated during Station Programming during Incoming Ringing during Internal External Paging during a Conference Call during a conference call on hold the terminal is on internal hold or the terminal has a call on internal hold When a single line telephone is on a call and Voice Ov...

Page 2063: ...signed Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 12 41 Service Code Setup for System Access Voice Over Set the service code used for the Voice Over feature To use Service Code 690 for Voice Over Program 11 16 08 Single Digit Service Code Setup Voice Over must be undefined MLT default 690 11 16 08 Single Digit Service Code Setup Voice Over Set the Service code us...

Page 2064: ...ode 6 To return to your original call 1 Press the Voice Over key 2 Press the Voice Over key again Your Voice Over key flashes red when you are talking to your original call To switch between your original call and the interrupting party just keep pressing the Voice Over key 20 13 06 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Automatic Off Hook Signaling Automatic Override Allow a busy extensio...

Page 2065: ...e Date and Station Number Check lets a multiline terminal extension user quickly hear a recording for the time date or the extension number Enhancements With Version 3000 or higher system software if an outside caller dials an invalid extension number when connected to the VRS Automated Attendant or calling in on a DISA trunk the following new options are available to route these calls Extension N...

Page 2066: ...yee The Message Waiting LED at each telephone flashes when a new General Message is recorded After the extension user listens to the message the Message Waiting LED goes out Park and Page When an extension user is away from their telephone Park and Page can let them know when they have a call waiting to be answered The Personal Greeting and Park Page options can have up to 200 total messages note ...

Page 2067: ...digits are used as the direct dial destination The timer Program 25 16 01 works only when destination is set in Program 25 06 02 If Program 25 06 01 is used other than 0 single digit attendant works If the timer Program 25 16 01 is set 0 this feature is deactivated If the timer value is longer than inter digit timer Program 21 01 03 the setting of Program 25 16 01 has no effect Simultaneous Call A...

Page 2068: ... and all terminals in the group are busy the call is put in a queue and VRS Waiting Message is also initiated The waiting message is played until other no answer program e g transfer to another incoming ring group or disconnect takes affect or a terminal becomes available to receive the department call Manual Mode This mode can be programmed by pressing the VRS Waiting Message function key from a ...

Page 2069: ...the system with Voice Prompting Messages These Voice Prompting Messages tell the extension user the status or progress of their call For example if a user calls extension 300 when it is busy they hear Station 300 is unavailable please dial a new station or dial 750 to wait The following table shows the available Voice Prompting Messages Table 2 155 Voice Prompting Messages Message No Message This ...

Page 2070: ...d the extension is busy 1 14 Please dial a new station 1 15 Or dial 1 16 To wait 1 17 To leave your number 1 18 Dial to call you back at 1 19 Enter your area code and telephone number An outside caller dials an extension through the Automated Attendant and the extension is busy 1 20 Please enter your password 1 21 Please enter an account code A user tries to place a trunk call and Forced Account C...

Page 2071: ...n number or 8 for the time 2 01 Dial 2 02 Star 2 03 Pound 2 04 Zero 2 05 One A user dials 6 for the extension number 8 for the time and date or as part of a spoken code e g 714 2 06 Two 2 07 Three 2 08 Four 2 09 Five 2 10 Six 2 11 Seven 2 12 Eight 2 13 Nine 2 14 Ten 2 15 Eleven 2 16 Twelve Table 2 155 Voice Prompting Messages Continued Message No Message This message will play when ...

Page 2072: ...eteen 2 24 Twenty 2 25 Thirty 2 26 Forty 2 27 Fifty 2 28 Sixty 2 29 Seventy 2 30 Eighty 2 31 Ninety 2 32 Hundred 2 33 Thousand 2 43 Message 2 44 Messages 2 64 January 2 65 February 2 66 March 2 67 April 2 68 May 2 69 June 2 70 July 2 71 August 2 72 September Table 2 155 Voice Prompting Messages Continued Message No Message This message will play when ...

Page 2073: ...ilable VRS ports If a 900 calls comes in when all VRS ports are busy the call does not appear on an extension until a VRS port is available You can also use the 900 Preamble message to set up an Auto Answer with Greeting application When a receptionist answers a call the VRS can play a preamble message such as Welcome to ABC Company How can I help you When the caller replies the receptionist answe...

Page 2074: ...wo minutes and cannot be changed The Automated Attendant VRS can answer up to 16 calls simultaneously If Synchronous Ringing is enabled the Preamble message cannot be used The maximum number of VRS ports is 16 when the PZ ME50 US is installed on the CP00 If the PZ ME50 US is not installed the maximum number of VRS ports is eight When the DISA VRS Ring Group Transfer Programs 25 03 and 25 04 is set...

Page 2075: ...The VRS dialing enhancement requires Version 9000 or higher system software Default Setting Disabled System Availability Terminals None Required Component s CP00 with PZ VM21 Daughter Board VM8000 InMail CompactFlash CPU License for VRS Related Features Transfer ...

Page 2076: ...nistrator VRS General Message Playback Define the service code to playback the general message MLT SLT default 611 11 10 22 Service Code Setup for System Administrator VRS Record or Erase General Message Define the service code to record or erase a general message on the VRS MLT SLT default 612 11 12 54 Service Code Setup for Service Access VRS Routing for ANI DNIS Define the service code to use w...

Page 2077: ... to or erase a Personal Greeting This option also affects Park and Page 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 23 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Display the Reason for Transfer Select whether or not an extension should display the reason a call is being transferred to their extension Call Forward Busy Call Forward No Answer DND 0 Off 1 On default 0 for COS 1 15 20 15 11 Ring Cycle...

Page 2078: ... VRS Waiting Message 0 64800 seconds default 0 22 14 02 VRS Delayed Message for IRG 1st Delayed Message Number For each Ring Group select the message number to be played as the first message 0 101 This program is also used for VRS Waiting Message 0 101 0 No Message 101 Fixed Message default 0 22 14 03 VRS Delayed Message for IRG 1st Delayed Message Sending Count For each Ring Group set the number ...

Page 2079: ...sage number to be played as the first message 0 101 This program is also used for VRS Waiting Message 0 101 0 No Message 101 Fixed Message default 0 22 15 03 VRS Delayed Message for Department Group 1st Delayed Message Sending Count For each Department Group set the number of times the first message is played This program is also used for VRS Waiting Message 0 255 times default 0 22 15 04 VRS Dela...

Page 2080: ...d 0 Off 1 On default 1 25 02 01 DID DISA VRS Message For each Night Service mode enter 1 at the Talkie prompt if trunk should be automatically answered by VRS and the message number the caller should hear 1 101 0 No Message 1 VRS 01 100 VRS Message Number 2 ACI 01 04 ACI Group Number 3 Department Groups 01 64 Extension Group Number default 0 25 03 01 VRS DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dia...

Page 2081: ... one entry for each Night Service mode 0 100 0 No Setting default 0 25 06 01 VRS DISA One Digit Code Attendant Setup Next Attendant Message Number Set up single digit dialing for Automated Attendant callers For each VRS Message programmed to answer outside calls see Program 25 02 01 specify the digit the Automated Attendant caller dials 1 9 0 Keep in mind that if you assign destinations to digits ...

Page 2082: ...Used to assign a speed dial number when the wrong number is received Speed Dial bin number 0 1999 default 1999 Version 3000 software or higher is required 25 15 02 DISA Transfer Target Setup DISA Transfer Target Area at No Answer or Busy Used to assign a speed dial number when a dial tone times out and the target extension does not answer or is busy Speed Dial bin number 0 1999 default 1999 Versio...

Page 2083: ... Group Paging Group Number Assign each External Paging zone to an External Paging group 0 8 0 No Setting Default Speaker 1 PGD 2 U10 1 Group 1 Speaker 2 PGD 2 U10 2 Group 2 Speaker 3 PGD 2 U10 3 Group 3 Speaker 4 PGD 2 U10 4 Group 4 Speaker 5 PGD 2 U10 5 Group 5 Speaker 6 PGD 2 U10 6 Group 6 Speaker 7 PGD 2 U10 7 Group 7 Speaker 8 PGD 2 U10 8 Group 8 Speaker 9 CD CP00 USII 1 Group 1 31 07 01 Combi...

Page 2084: ...fault 0 40 10 02 Voice Announcement Service Option General Message Number Enter the number of the VRS message you want to use for the General Message 01 100 The message you select should not be used as a VRS message 0 100 0 No General Message Service default 0 40 10 03 Voice Announcement Service Option VRS No Answer Destination Assign the transferred Ring Group when the VRS is unanswered after Cal...

Page 2085: ...n Set VRS Message for Caller ID Refuse VRS Msg CID Assign the VRS Message number used as Caller ID Refuse When Fixed Message is set VRS message guidance is Service finished Disconnect the line please 0 101 0 No message 101 Fixed message default 0 40 11 01 Preamble Message Assignment Assign the VRS Message number used as the Preamble Message for each trunk When the extension user answers the incomi...

Page 2086: ... previously recorded message If you hear a beep instead no previous message is recorded 5 Press to hear the message again OR To hear another message dial 5 and then enter the message number 01 100 OR Hang up To erase a previously recorded VRS message 1 Press Speaker or lift the handset OR At a single line telephone lift the handset 2 Dial 616 3 Dial 3 Erase 4 Dial the number of the VRS message you...

Page 2087: ...isten you can dial 5 and the message number to hear it again or if you want to Record listen to or erase another message go back to step 4 General Message To listen to the General Message Multiline Terminal Only Your Message Waiting LED flashes when there is a new General Message A voice message periodically reminds you 1 Do not lift the handset or press Speaker 2 Dial 4 General OR 1 Lift the hand...

Page 2088: ...ss HOLD instead and go back to step 1 4 Hang up when you are done Time Date and Station Number Check To check the extension number of any multiline terminal 1 Do not lift the handset or press Speaker 2 Dial 6 for extension number To check the system time and date from any multiline terminal extension 1 Do not lift the handset or press Speaker 2 Dial 8 for time and date 900 Preamble To answer a 900...

Page 2089: ... Mexican Spanish and Canadian French only When an outside caller leaves a message the operators extension will show VOICE MESSAGE and the number of messages in the lower left of the LCD display The message waiting LED does not light for these messages Conditions Two embedded VRS channels are supported with SV8100 Version 8000 or higher software and the Version 8000 Enhancement License 0037 A singl...

Page 2090: ... VRS message locations 091 100 For greetings and other menu options VRS message locations 001 004 are available When the InMail CF is installed on the system this feature is not available The Voice Response System VRS Upload Download Audio feature is not available for Embedded VRS One of the supported embedded VRS language prompt sets must be loaded onto the CCPU for this feature to work The langu...

Page 2091: ...r approximately 10 seconds or until Status LED5 begins flashing red 9 Release the Load button 10 Wait until the Status LEDs on the CD CP00 US have the following indications approximately two minutes LED 2 Flashing Red LED 3 Flashing Red LED 4 Flashing Red LED 5 Steady Red 11 Turn the system power Off and remove the USB memory 12 Turn the system power back On Embedded VRS Programming Example For th...

Page 2092: ...office hours and direction information in the Night Mode 4 Allows callers to leave a message Message 3 Day Informational Greeting and has the following dial options 3 Replays Message 3 4 Allows callers to leave a message 0 Routes callers to the Operator s extension 101 You can only enter valid extension numbers in this field and cannot use 0 as the routing destination Routes callers back to the Da...

Page 2093: ...RS Embedded VRS 2 2059 1 Set Program 22 02 01 to 1 VRS for Trunks 1 8 in Mode 1 and 2 2 Set Program 40 10 01 VRS Fixed Messaging to 1 Enable Figure 2 96 Program 22 02 Incoming Call Trunk Setup Figure 2 97 Program 40 10 Voice Announcement Service Option ...

Page 2094: ...1 to Message 1 Day and Mode 2 to Message 2 Night Make sure this is set this for all trunks that were set to VRS in Program 22 02 01 4 Set the dial options for Message 1 Day Main Greeting as shown below Figure 2 98 Program 25 02 VRS DISA Message Figure 2 99 Program 25 06 VRS DISA 1 digit Code Attendant Setup Example 1 ...

Page 2095: ...l options for Message 2 Night Main Greeting as shown below 6 Set the dial options for Message 3 Day Informational Greeting as shown below Figure 2 100 Program 25 06 VRS DISA 1 digit Code Attendant Setup Example 2 Figure 2 101 Program 25 06 VRS DISA 1 digit Code Attendant Setup Example 3 ...

Page 2096: ...ings 1 4 making sure to record the dialing options as listed for each greeting See Operation section below for message recording instructions Default Setting None System Availability Terminals All Terminals Required Component s CD CP00 US Related Features Account Code Forced Verified Unverified Figure 2 102 Program 25 06 VRS DISA 1 digit Code Attendant Setup Example 4 ...

Page 2097: ...Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 11 10 20 Service Code Setup for System Administrator VRS Record Erase Message Define the service code to record or erase a VRS message MLT SLT default 616 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assign a Class of Service 1 15 to extensions Day Night Mode 1 8 Class of Service of Extensions 1 15 Default Extension port 101 Cl...

Page 2098: ...VRS Message Number 2 ACI 01 04 ACI Group Number 3 Department Groups 01 64 Extension Group Number default 0 25 06 01 VRS DISA One Digit Code Attendant Setup Next Attendant Message Number Set up single digit dialing for Automated Attendant callers For each VRS Message programmed to answer outside calls see Program 25 02 01 specify the digit the Automated Attendant caller dials 1 9 0 If the dialed di...

Page 2099: ...single digit code If the dialed digit is an option to be routed to a valid extension this should be set to the extension number Up to eight digits default not assigned 40 07 01 Voice Prompt Language Assignment for VRS Select the language prompt set that has been uploaded for Embedded VRS Although the system allows this option to be changed in programming the language changes only if the appropriat...

Page 2100: ...e VRS message number to which you want to listen 001 004 You hear the previously recorded message If you hear a beep instead no previous message is recorded 5 Press to hear the message again OR To hear another message dial 5 and then enter the message number 001 004 OR Hang up To erase a previously recorded VRS message 1 Press Speaker or lift the handset OR At a Single Line Telephone lift the hand...

Page 2101: ...w can I listen to this The number you have dialed is not in service Dial a service code for a feature that is not allowed by the station Class of Service Vacant number Dial an extension number which does not exist Your call cannot go through please call the operator Dial an outgoing number which is not allowed by Toll Restriction Please do not disturb Dial an extension number which is in DND Pleas...

Page 2102: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 2068 Voice Response System VRS Embedded VRS THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 2103: ...er for uploaded greetings to properly play on the VRS InMail CF they must be in the proper format Audio files not recorded in the proper format may not playback on the VRS InMail CF The proper format is Bit Rate 64kbps Sampling Size 8 bits Channel 1 Mono Sampling Rate 8 KHz Audio Format CCiTT u law User Pro Access There are two different User Pro logins available to make changes to audio files on ...

Page 2104: ...and the password is 1111 The following details the page layout diagram of the two different User Pro login IDs Message Name Format Downloaded messages are automatically assigned a name by the SV8100 This name includes the mailbox number the message was left in type of message the message number and the date and time to the second the message was left Table 2 157 Default Incoming Ringing Tone on pa...

Page 2105: ...e to upload download delete multiple files simultaneously The mailbox will be inaccessible from the telephone under these conditions Mailbox XXX will not be accessible when opening the telephone setup screen of extension XXX by UA or UB mode in User Pro Mailbox XXX will not be accessible when selecting the extension XXX on the file upload download screen of UA mode User Pro Mailbox XXX will be ina...

Page 2106: ... when the file is written in the CF The actual file name of the messages is not displayed in User Pro The message number modified date and file size are displayed instead If there is no message file will be displayed and the download delete icon will not be displayed The User Pro message page does not refresh automatically to see new messages the page must be refreshed For instance if a new messag...

Page 2107: ...commonly used These levels are used with PCPro and WebPro wizards for feature programming Level 1 these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Descr...

Page 2108: ... Programming Password Setup User Level Set the system password user levels 0 Prohibited User 1 MF Manufacturer Level 2 IN Installer Level 3 SA System Administrator Level 1 4 SB System Administrator Level 2 5 UA User Programming Level 1 Refer to the SV8100 Programming Manual for default settings Table 2 158 Error Messages and Causes Error Message Cause VMDB is not attached The PZ VM21 is not attach...

Page 2109: ...11 3 You will then see the main menu click on the VRS Audio Up Download icon 4 There can be up to 100 VRS messages and you may need to scroll through several pages or jump to get to the desired message number The message numbers correspond to the same message number when accessed via the telephone Message 1 is 001 message 2 is 002 and message 3 is 003 etc 5 To delete a message click on the red X t...

Page 2110: ...ssage No enter the message number to be replaced Browse to find the location where the greeting file is stored Click on the upload icon to the right of the selected file name Depending on file size and LAN speed it may take a minute to upload the greeting The uploaded message will appear in the assigned location ...

Page 2111: ...m my phone right now but please hold on while I am automatically paged The recorded Paging announcement could say John Smith you have a call waiting on your line The incoming caller hears the first message and listens to Music on Hold while the system broadcasts the second message John Smith could then walk to any phone and pick up his call If John doesn t pick up the call the Page periodically re...

Page 2112: ... processed Subsequent callers hear a busy tone This feature is not supported for CO transferred calls Default Setting VRS Park and Page is available at default for internal paging access code 701 zone 1 Use access code 713 See feature Operation Set Program 40 10 01 for VRS guidance message System Availability Terminals None Required Component s CD CP00 US Blade with PZ VM21 Daughter Board VM8000 I...

Page 2113: ...or Service Access Internal Group Paging Service code setup MLT SLT default 701 11 12 20 Service Code Setup for Service Access External Paging External paging access code Service code setup MLT SLT default 703 11 12 24 Service Code Setup for Service Access Combined Paging Combined paging internal external access code Service code setup MLT SLT default 1 20 06 01 Class of Service for Extensions Assi...

Page 2114: ...ternal zone If enabled the system broadcasts a splash tone before the External Paging announcement 0 No Tone None 1 Splash Tone 2 Chime Tone default 2 31 06 02 External Speaker Control Broadcast Splash Tone After Paging Paging End Time Enable Disable splash tone after Paging over an external zone If enabled the system broadcasts a splash tone at the end of an External Paging announcement 0 No Tone...

Page 2115: ...e and dial when the announcement is complete A paging chime overrides the first four seconds of an announcement Allow a delay in announcement recording for chime time 5 Dial the Page Zone that should broadcast your announcement For example for Internal Zone 1 dial 701 1 or for Combined Paging Zone 1 dial 1 1 6 Dial the Park and Page type 2 All Calls 3 Outside Calls Only 7 Press Speaker to hang up ...

Page 2116: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 2082 Voice Response System VRS Call Forwarding Park and Page THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 2117: ...st is not adjustable when the telephone has background music enabled Multiline terminal users can press the Speaker key and dial Code 729 to further increase station ring volume Headset volume off hook ringing volume station ringing volume and speaker volume adjustments are determined by Program 15 02 27 The LCD of the Electra Elite IPK and SV8100 terminals provide a volume bar indication while ad...

Page 2118: ...SV8100 2 2084 Volume Controls Default Setting Enabled System Availability Terminals All Multiline Terminals Required Component s None Related Features Electra Elite IPK Terminals SV8100 SV8300 Terminals Off Hook Signaling ...

Page 2119: ...incoming ringing and splash tone 1 If the telephone is idle press Speaker and dial 729 If the telephone is ringing skip to Step 2 2 Press VOLUME or VOLUME To adjust the volume of ringing incoming Paging announcements Handsfree the handset or Background Music 1 Press VOLUME or VOLUME The feature must be active to change the volume Press the volume keys when the telephone is idle to adjust the displ...

Page 2120: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 2 2086 Volume Controls THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 2121: ...ing or outgoing central office calls can also be disconnected Warning Tone for DISA Callers For DISA callers with this feature enabled the warning tone timer begins when an incoming DISA call places an outgoing call and either the inter digit timer expires or the outgoing call is answered If an outside call is transferred to forwarded off premise using an outside trunk the warning tone timer begin...

Page 2122: ... commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 2 these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 14 01 17 Basic Trunk Data Setup Trunk to Trunk Warning Tone for Long Conve...

Page 2123: ...onversation Conversation Continue Code Enter a single digit Continue Code for the DISA call to use to immediately disconnect or continue their outside call 0 9 default not assigned 20 28 02 Trunk to Trunk Conversation Conversation Disconnect Code Enter a single digit Disconnect for the DISA call to use to immediately disconnect or continue their outside call 0 9 default not assigned 20 28 03 Trunk...

Page 2124: ...ogrammed Disconnect Code 25 07 07 System Timers for VRS DISA Long Conversation Warning Tone Time Determine the time a DISA caller or any trunk to trunk Such as Tandem Trunking conversation can talk before the Long Conversation tone is heard 0 64800 seconds default 3600 25 07 08 System Timers for VRS DISA Long Conversation Disconnect Time Determine the time the system waits before disconnecting a D...

Page 2125: ...o longer used With Version 5000 5 00 or higher software Off hook signaling and Caller ID display after a call transfer has been added With SV8100 Version 5000 5 00 or higher software and PZ IPLB daughter board installed half duplex connections are not supported For troubleshooting purposes a managed switch capable of port mirroring is required to capture packet data from the SV8100 IPLB Ethernet p...

Page 2126: ...ll Forwarding Centrex Yes Call Forwarding Yes Must be programmed in 24 09 or through feature code in handset Call Forwarding with Follow Me No Call Forwarding Off Premise Yes Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override Yes Call Monitoring No Call Redirect No Call Waiting Camp On Yes Can only set Camp On to IP DECT handset from softkey menu of multiline terminal not with access codes Callback No Caller...

Page 2127: ...al Pad Confirmation Tone No Dial Tone Detection No Dialing Number Preview Yes Direct Inward Dialing DID Yes Direct Inward Line DIL Yes Direct Inward System Access DISA Yes Direct Station Selection DSS Console No Directed Call Pickup Yes Directory Dialing No Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns No Do Not Disturb No Do Not Disturb Call Forward Override Yes Door Box Yes Door Box will not ring...

Page 2128: ...Listen No Handset Mute Yes Handsfree and Monitor Yes Handsfree is supported by handset Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing No Headset Operation Yes Hold Yes Hotel Motel No Hotline Yes Handset can be a hotline destination but cannot originate a hotline call Howler Tone Service No Intercom Yes Intercom Off Hook Signaling Yes IP Multiline Station SIP No IP Trunk SIP Session Initiation Protoc...

Page 2129: ...Yes R5 Enhancement license required One Touch Calling No Operator Yes Off Hook Signaling Override Yes OPX Off Premise Extension No Paging External Yes IP DECT handset can only initiate a page it cannot receive a page or display page information Paging Internal Yes IP DECT handset can only initiate a page it cannot receive a page or display page information Park No PBX Compatibility Yes PC Programm...

Page 2130: ...ll Buzzer No Secretary Call Pickup No Selectable Display Messaging No Selectable Ring Tones Yes Ring tones are selectable at the handset level specific to the type of call Serial Call No Single Line Telephones Analog 500 2500 Sets No SLT Adapter No SMB8000 Communications Analyst Yes SMB8000 Conference Bridge Yes SMB8000 Interactive Voice Response No Softkeys No All keys are fixed in C124 handset S...

Page 2131: ...s Trunk Queuing Camp On No UM8000 Mail No Uniform Call Distribution UCD No Uniform Numbering Network Yes Universal Slots N A User Programming Ability Yes Limited user customization available Virtual Extensions No VM8000 InMail Yes Voice Call Signal Switching Yes Can only send voice signal switch not receive Voice Mail Integration Analog Yes Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys No Voice Over ...

Page 2132: ...bers Press and continue to press to scroll through the numbers Press Hook key to dial a number Programming Pause A long press on adds a pause to pre dial or phone book numbers Adjustable Volume Ring volume can be adjusted using and on the handset Key Lock Press OK and to lock the dial pad Ten Different Ring Tones Ring tones can be selected in the tone setup menu and press OK Microphone Mute Press ...

Page 2133: ...ginating standard SIP caller 4 Extension number If calling from an SLT DT300 including virtual extensions or a DT700 1 Program 15 01 01 Extension name 2 Extension number If calling from a trunk i e SIP trunk ISDN Analog C O 1 Calling party name of incoming trunk Caller ID information 2 Program13 04 02 abbreviated dial Name with matching caller ID 3 Calling party number For trunks new Program 15 05...

Page 2134: ...ion and keypad keys 24 keys with 12 keypad keys 0 9 with text mode support Recall or enquiry key Menu navigation keys programmable short keys up down left right Power On Off key On and off hook key 2 separate keys Increase and decrease volume OK confirm key Programmable softkeys 2 keys menu dependent function Keypad lock Localization Multiple supported languages 13 Triple frequency band Menu Easy ...

Page 2135: ...hones Version 4000 V4 01 or lower Off hook signaling is supported with Wireless DECT SIP telephones Version 5000 V5 00 or higher When replacing the batteries in a C124 G355 or G955 handset it is necessary to place the handset on the charger for 10 seconds in order to update the battery status indicator NAT or NAPT is only supported on the DT700 series phones NAT or NAPT is not supported on the ML4...

Page 2136: ... the 2nd caller hears a busy tone If the override code is dialed Program 11 12 03 SC 709 and overrides SC Program 11 12 03 then the IP DECT receives off hook signals manually Off hook signaling is supported from an extension voicemail and trunk call If a SIP DECT extension is talking to a voice mail port the system does not send an off hook signal Once the SIP DECT disconnects from voice mail SIP ...

Page 2137: ...CT In case of an unscreened transfer the calling party number from where the call was transferred is displayed on the IP DECT This feature enables the IP DECT terminal to display the calling party number of the original caller Transferee when making a screened or unscreened transfer to an IP DECT terminal Conditions Calling party name is not supported in this feature In case of a screened transfer...

Page 2138: ...Out of Range notice is displayed on the originators LCD Conditions When a call comes into an idle SIP terminal which has not been recognized as out of range the system waits for the timer in Program24 02 15 default 4 sec to expire to determine if the terminal is Out of Range state or not Out of Range transfer works against the SIP terminal in an Out of Range state when Program 24 09 01 is set to a...

Page 2139: ...led System Availability Terminals NEC C124 SIP DECT Handset NEC G955 SIP DECT Handset IP DECT Standard SIP terminals have not been evaluated with this feature Required Component s NEC DECT Access Point AP200S NEC SIP DECT Handset NEC C124 G955 Standard SIP Clients for each handset Version 5000 or higher software Related Features Caller ID Off Hook Signaling Transfer Wireless DECT SIP ...

Page 2140: ...assigned programs for this feature Level 3 these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned VoIP Settings Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 10 12 03 CD CP00 US Network Setup Default Gateway Assign the default gateway IP address for the CD CP00 US 0 0 0 0 126 255 255 254 128 0 0 1 191 2...

Page 2141: ...28 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 254 255 255 255 255 default 255 255 0 0 10 19 01 VoIP DSP Resource Selection Select type of VoIP ETU DSP Resource This program setting has no affect on the terminal trunk port assignment or usage 0 Common use for both IP extensions and trunks 1 IP Extension 2 SIP Trunk 3 CCIS 4 Use for NetLink 5 Blocked ...

Page 2142: ... value exceeds the defined value 0 100 default 0 84 06 05 PVA Data Setting Packets Lost Threshold Define the packets lost threshold This data is sent to the CD CP00 US when the value exceeds the defined value 0 16777215 default 0 84 06 07 PVA Data Setting Jitter Threshold Define the Jitter Threshold This data is sent to the CD CP00 US when the value exceeds the defined value 0 4294967295 seconds d...

Page 2143: ... Basic Setup Number of G 711 Audio Frames Define the G 711 audio Frame Size 1 4 1 10ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 4 40ms default 2 84 19 02 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup G 711 Voice Activity Detection Mode Enable Disable Voice Activity Detection for G 711 0 Disable 1 Enable default 0 84 19 03 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup G 711 Type Define the G 711 Type law is recommended when in U...

Page 2144: ...tion Basic Setup G729 Jitter Buffer max Define G 729 Jitter Buffer maximum accepted value 0 270ms default 80 84 19 17 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup Jitter Buffer Mode Define the Jitter Buffer mode 1 Static 2 Adaptive during Silence 3 Adaptive Immediately default 3 84 19 18 SIP Extension CODEC Information Basic Setup VAD Threshold Define the VAD Threshold Consult the UNIVERGE SV8100 P...

Page 2145: ... Mode Select the DTMF Relay Mode 0 Disable 1 RFC2833 default 0 84 19 33 SIP Extension IP CODEC Information Basic Setup Number of G 722 Audio Frames Define the number of Audio Frames for G 722 CODEC 1 4 1 10ms 2 20ms 3 30ms 4 40ms default 3 84 19 34 SIP Extension IP CODEC Information Basic Setup G 722 Voice Activity Detection Mode Enable Disable the G 722 Voice Activity Detection Mode 0 Disable 1 E...

Page 2146: ...Define the maximum setting for the G 726 Jitter Buffer 0 160ms default 120 Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 84 20 01 SIP Extension Basic Information Setup Registrar Proxy Port Define SIP station Proxy Port 1 65535 default 5070 84 20 02 SIP Extension Basic Information Setup Session Timer Value Define the periodic refresh time that allows both user agents an...

Page 2147: ...ber to be used for each DSP on the IPLA 0 65534 Defaults VoIP GW1 10021 VoIP GW2 10053 VoIP GW3 10085 VoIP GW4 10117 VoIP GW5 10149 VoIP GW6 10181 VoIP GW7 10213 VoIP GW8 10245 Program Number Program Name Description Comments Assigned Data Level 1 2 3 15 01 01 Basic Extension Data Setup Extension Name Define the extension virtual extension name Up to 12 characters Default STA 101 Ext 101 STA 102 E...

Page 2148: ... but multiple extensions going out of it assign all the extensions to a group so the CPU knows that the one IP address is assigned to multiple extensions 0 Not Used 1 Group 1 2 Group 2 3 Group 3 4 Group 4 5 Group 5 6 Group 6 7 Group 7 8 Group 8 9 Group 9 10 Group 10 default 0 15 05 40 IP Telephone Terminal Basic Data Setup Calling Name Display Info via Trunk for Standard SIP Sets the incoming call...

Page 2149: ... 20 09 07 Class of Service Options Incoming Call Service Call Queuing Turn Off or On an extension user ability to have calls queued if a call rings the extension when it is busy 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 05 Class of Service Options Supplementary Service Intercom Off Hook Signaling Turn Off or On an extension ability to receive off hook signals 0 Off 1 On default 1 for COS 1 15 20 13 ...

Page 2150: ...timer setting system determines SIP terminal is out of range When set to 0 timer is invalid 0 30 sec default 4 24 09 01 Call Forward Split Settings Call Forwarding Type Type of Call Forwarding 0 Call Forwarding Off 1 Call Forwarding with both ring 2 Call Forwarding when no answer 3 Call Forwarding all calls 4 Call Forwarding busy or no answer 5 Call Forwarding when busy default 0 24 09 02 Call For...

Page 2151: ...gned Data Level 1 2 3 24 02 15 System Options for Transfer SIP Out of Range Timer When not receiving any response within this timer setting system determines SIP terminal is out of range When set to 0 timer is invalid 0 30 sec default 4 24 09 01 Call Forward Split Settings Call Forwarding Type Type of Call Forwarding 0 Call Forwarding Off 1 Call Forwarding with both ring 2 Call Forwarding when no ...

Page 2152: ...erim Call Forwarding Destination for Both Ring All Call No Answer Assign Intercom Call Forwarding Destination for ring all call and no answer 0 9 P R Up to 24 digits P Pause R Hookflash Wildcard default not assigned 24 09 04 Call Forward Split Settings CO Call Forwarding Busy Destination Assign CO Call Forwarding for busy destinations 0 9 P R Up to 24 digits P Pause R Hookflash Wildcard default no...

Page 2153: ...t 100 call IP DECT 200 1st call 2 Answer on IP DECT 200 and talk with ext 100 3 From ext 101 Call IP DECT 2nd call 4 IP DECT receives off hook signal 5 Press the button on the IP DECT Hold the 1st call and answer the 2nd call 6 Talk with ext 101 7 Press the button on the IP DECT Hold the 2nd call and retrieve the 1st call On hold 8 Talk with ext 100 To answer off hook signaling 2nd call and 2nd ca...

Page 2154: ...nswer incoming call at ext 100 and press the Transfer button 3 Dial 200 to call an IP DECT 4 Announce the call and press the Transfer button or hang up ext 100 5 Calling party number 297XXXYYY is displayed on the IP DECT To make unscreened transfer to IP DECT of trunk call Transferee Caller ID 297XXXYYY Transferrer Multi line Ext 100 Transfer target IP DECT Ext 200 1 Place a call to ext 100 from o...

Page 2155: ...ccess many features through Service Codes e g Service Code 9 to access a specific trunk To streamline the operation of their telephone a multiline terminal user can store these codes under One Touch Keys This provides one button operation for almost any feature To find out more turn to the One Touch Calling feature When reading an instruction using programmable keys you will see a notation similar...

Page 2156: ...you are 1 Handsfree Answerback Forced intercom Ringing Changing the signaling mode of your outgoing Intercom call 2 Department Step Calling Cycling to the next member of a Department Calling Group 3 5 Not used 6 Voice Over Sending a Voice Over to a busy extension after hearing Busy Ring tone 7 Barge In Barge into another station s active call 8 Voice Mail Leaving a message in a co worker s mailbox...

Page 2157: ...each trunk line Transfer 07 Cancel the Automatic Transfer for each trunk line Transfer 08 Set the Destination for Automatic Trunk Transfer Transfer 1 Paging Group Number Make a Combined Page Paging 0 Cancel Call Forwarding Call Forwarding 16 2 1 Type 2 4 Activate Personal Answering Machine Emulation Voice Mail Personal Answering Machine Emulation 16 2 2 Destination Type 2 4 Activate Call Forwardin...

Page 2158: ...all parked in a system Park orbit 01 64 Park 04 orbit 8 Call your mailbox Voice Mail 67 Enter system programming mode System Programming Password Protection 9 Back up system data Maintenance Hookflash Enter Account Code Hookflash Enter an Account Code at a single line telephone Account Codes 0 Use Universal Answer Code to pick up a call ringing over the paging system Central Office Calls Answering...

Page 2159: ...ed Intercom Ringing 4 On Hook Listen to the General Message Voice Response System VRS 6 On Hook Check an extension number Voice Response System VRS 8 On Hook Listen for the time Voice Response System VRS 9 Place a call using ARS or Trunk Group Routing Automatic Route Selection Trunk Group Routing 02 600 code 0 Use Dial Block Toll Restriction Dial Block 601 code 0 Aa a supervisor use Dial Block Tol...

Page 2160: ... General Message Voice Response System VRS 616 3 to erase 5 to listen or 7 to record Record listen to or erase a VRS Message Voice Response System VRS 618 Use Night Mode Switch for other group Night Answer 620 Use Common Cancel Service Code TBD 621 Print the SMDR Extension Accumulated printout Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 622 Print the SMDR Group Accumulated printout Station Message Detai...

Page 2161: ...ne Hotel Motel Wake Up Call 635 Enable Room to Room Call Restriction for a guest room telephone Hotel Motel Room to Room Call Restriction 636 Disable Room to Room Call Restriction for a guest room telephone Hotel Motel Room to Room Call Restriction 637 Change a room telephone Toll Restriction When Checked In level Hotel Motel Toll Restriction When Checked In 638 Set a room as checked in Hotel Mote...

Page 2162: ...ode from an SLT Automatic Call Distribution ACD 13 Hookflash 160 ACD Record for an SLT Automatic Call Distribution ACD 663 6 digit code line telephone number Override Toll Restriction Toll Restriction 667 Log an agent into their ACD Group Automatic Call Distribution ACD 668 Log an agent out of their ACD Group Automatic Call Distribution ACD 669 Are a supervisor assigning an agent into another ACD ...

Page 2163: ...or 1 8 Place a call to a Door Box Door Box 703 zone 1 4 or 1 8 803 zone 0 Make an External Zone page Make an External All Call page External Paging 19 zone 20 704 trunk group 1 8 or 1 9 or 001 200 Place an outside call over a trunk group Central Office Calls Placing 02 group 707 Override Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb 37 708 Step through a Department Group Departm...

Page 2164: ... premise with a Door Box Call Forwarding Off Premise Door Box 54 723 Enable Forced Ringing for incoming Intercom calls Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom ringing 724 Enable disable Dial Pad Confirmation Tone Dialing Pad Confirmation tone 725 Turn Background Music on and off Background Music 04 727 1 or 2 time or 727 1 or 2 9999 to cancel Check set or cancel an alarm Alarm 728 hour minutes Set th...

Page 2165: ...ld to store Store Common Abbreviated Dialing numbers Abbreviated Dialing 754 bin number Hold Name Hold to store Store Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers Abbreviated Dialing 755 One Touch key code Program a One Touch Key or Personal Speed Dial One Touch Dialing 756 Answer a call ringing a telephone in your pickup group except Ring Group calls Group Call Pickup 757 Park a call or pick up a parked cal...

Page 2166: ... another pickup group if you do not know the group number except Ring Group Calls Group Call Pickup 25 770 Cancel a Callback request Callback 771 ext Cancel Messages Waiting you left at a specific extension Message Waiting 773 Cancel all Messages Waiting you have left at other extensions Message Waiting 775 pswd 0000 place outside call Temporarily override an extension Toll Restriction Toll Restri...

Page 2167: ...ce Response Service VRS 785 Clear the number saved by Save Number Redial Save Number Redial 790 Use Voice Over after calling a busy extension Voice Over 48 794 Split between two calls on an SLT Call Waiting 799 Test Callback operation for an SLT Callback Table 3 2 Service Codes by Number Continued Dial this Service Code 1 When you For this feature Also see Function Key 1 Except where indicated dia...

Page 2168: ...umber Hold Name Hold to store Store Group Speed Dialing numbers 2 bin Dial a System Speed Dialing number 27 4 bin Dial a Group Speed Dialing number 28 7 bin Use Personal Speed Dialing Account Codes Enter Account code Enter an Account Code Hookflash Enter account code Hookflash Enter an Account Code at an SLT Alarm 727 1 or 2 time or 727 1 or 2 9999 to cancel Check set or cancel an alarm Alphanumer...

Page 2169: ...SLT 667 Allow an ACD Agent to log into a group 668 Allow an ACD Agent to log out of a group 669 Allow a supervisor to change agent s status 670 ACD Group Change your ACD Group assignment Automatic Route Selection or Trunk Group Routing 9 Place a call using Trunk Group Route an Automatic Route Selection 02 Background Music 725 Turn Background Music on or off 04 Table 3 3 Service Codes by Feature Co...

Page 2170: ...ll Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override 707 Override an extension Call Forward or DND setting 37 Call Waiting Camp On 794 Split switch between calls on an SLT 770 Cancel a Callback request 799 Test Callback operation for an SLT Callback Camp On Trunk Queuing Camp On or leave a Callback for a busy extension or trunk 35 770 Cancel a Callback request 799 Test Callback operation for an SLT Table 3 3 Ser...

Page 2171: ...e the COS of another extension Must be allowed in Program 20 13 28 Conference Hookflash 1 extension hookflash twice Activate Conference from a Single Line 500 2500 Telephone 1016 Data Communications 783 Enable the data connection auto answer mode 784 Disconnect an active data call Department Calling 650 0 install or 1 remove Log in 0 or log out 1 for your Department Calling Group 46 Department Ste...

Page 2172: ...kup group except Ring Group calls 24 768 pickup group 1 8 or 1 9 or 01 64 Answer a call ringing a telephone in another pickup group 26 group 769 Answer a call ringing a telephone in another pickup group if you do not know the group number except Ring Group calls 25 Handsfree Answerback Forced Intercom Ringing 1 Off Hook Change the signaling mode of your outgoing Intercom call 721 Enable Handsfree ...

Page 2173: ...for your room telephone Hotel Motel Wake Up Call 632 Cancel a Wake Up Call for your room telephone Hotel Motel Wake Up Call 633 Set a Wake Up Call for another guest room telephone Hotel Motel Wake Up Call 634 Cancel a wake Up Call for another guest room telephone Hotel Motel Room to Room Call Restriction 635 Enable Room to Room Call Restriction for a guest room telephone Hotel Motel Room to Room C...

Page 2174: ...ng Zone if your extension is in the group called 23 Meet Me Paging or 32 Meet Me Conference 764 zone paged 0 9 or 00 64 Join a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Page if your extension is not in the group paged 765 zone 0 8 Join a Meet Me conference or Meet Me Page on an External Paging Zone Message Waiting 0 Off Hook Leave a Message Waiting at a co worker s busy or unanswered extension 38 0 Answer a M...

Page 2175: ...ouch Key or Personal Speed Dial Paging Combined 1 Zone 1 8 1 Zone 0 Make a combined zone page Make a combined All Call page 19 zone 20 Paging External 703 zone 1 8 703 zone 0 Make an external zone page Make an external All Call page 19 zone 20 Paging External Night Service 780 relay number 0 8 Activate the general purpose relay 51 Paging Internal 701 zone 1 8 1 9 or 01 64 701 zone 0 or 00 Make an ...

Page 2176: ...ne 1 8 Listen to the incoming ring choices 720 1 ICM 2 Trk tone 1 8 Change your extension incoming ring tones System Programming Password Protection Enter system programming mode Station Message Detail Recording 621 Print the SMDR Extension Accumulated printout 622 Print the SMDR Group Accumulated printout 623 Print the SMDR Account Code Accumulated printout Tandem Trunking Unsupervised Conference...

Page 2177: ...r 1 8 or 01 64 Cancel Automatic Transfer Setup 604 Group number 1 8 or 01 64 mode extension Set the destination for Automatic Transfer Setup for each extension group 605 Group number 1 8 or 01 64 Set Delayed Transfer for each extension group Transfer continued 606 Group number 1 8 or 01 64 Cancel Delayed Transfer 607 Group number 1 8 or 01 64 Set up DND for each extension group 608 Group number 1 ...

Page 2178: ...sy trunk 35 Voice Mail 8 Off Hook Leave a message in a co worker s mailbox after callback their busy or unanswered extension 8 Call your mailbox 67 654 Enable Conversation Record at an SLT Voice Over 6 Off Hook Send a Voice Over to a busy extension after hearing Busy Ring tone 48 Table 3 3 Service Codes by Feature Continued For this feature Dial this Service Code 1 When you Also see Function Key 1...

Page 2179: ...eral Message 612 3 to erase 5 to listen or 7 to record Record listen to or erase the General Message 616 3 to erase 5 to listen or 7 to record Record listen to or erase a VRS Message 750 Camp On to an extension when calling into the system through the VRS 782 Transfer a call to the VRS This can be used also to route ANI DNIS to the VRS 784 Access the VRS Volume Control 729 Check or change ring vol...

Page 2180: ...e g 48 for Voice Over For this feature Use this key When you Key Lamp Status Also See Srvc Code Speed Dialing Code 27 Operation Press key bin Line or Speaker key Dial a stored System Speed Dialing number None 2 bin Code 28 Operation Press key bin Line or Speaker key Dial a stored Group Speed Dialing number None 4 bin Account Codes Code 50 Operation Press key Dial Account Code Enter Account Codes N...

Page 2181: ...able Rest Mode On red when Rest Mode enabled Off when Rest Mode disabled Code 14 Operation Press key Press 1 Yes or 2 No Out of Service Take an ACD Group out of Service for Group Supervisors only or Take all ACD Groups out of service for System Supervisors only On red when the group is out of service Code 15 Operation Call busy ACD agent Press key Terminal Monitor Monitor an ACD Agent s conversati...

Page 2182: ...und Music Code 04 Operation Press key Turn Background Music on or off None 725 Barge In Code 34 Operation Call ext Press key Barge In on a co worker s conversation None 710 Call Arrival CAR Key Code 03 ext Operation Press key Place or answer a call to your co worker s extension Slow Flash red when ringing On red when busy Call Forwarding Both Ring Code 14 Operation Press key Dest Extension Call Fo...

Page 2183: ...key Leave a Call back request at a busy extension Camp On to a busy extension or Queue for a busy trunk On red when activated Call Redirect Code 49 extension or voice mail Operation Press key Redirect a ringing call to the predefined destination On red when activated Central Office Calls Code 01 Trunk number 001 200 Operation Press key Press a line key to place or answer a trunk call where trunks ...

Page 2184: ...Pickup Code 24 Operation Speaker key Press key Answer a call ringing another telephone in your Pickup Group None Code 25 Operation Speaker key Press key Answer a call ringing a telephone in another Pickup Group if you do not know the group number None 769 Code 26 Pickup Group 1 8 or 1 9 or 01 64 Operation Speaker key Press key Pkup Group Answer a call ringing a telephone in a specific Pickup Group...

Page 2185: ... use or check a Memo dial number None Message Waiting Code 38 Operation Leave message Call ext Press key OR Answer message Press key Answer Leave a Message Waiting None 0 Microphone Cutoff Code 02 Operation Set up call Press key Use Microphone Cutoff On red when activated Call Arrival CAR Keys Code 03 ext or dept group Operation Press key Place or answer a call to your virtual phantom extension Sl...

Page 2186: ...dcast to all Internal Paging zones On red when activated 701 0 or 00 Park Code 04 orbit 1 9 or 01 64 Operation Place or answer call Press key Place a call into or retrieve a call from a Park Orbit Fast flash when orbit is busy green at originator red at others 6 Park 6 pickup Repeat Redial Code 29 Operation Place call and press key Activate Repeat Redial while on a call Fast Flash while system wai...

Page 2187: ...when activated Serial Call Code 43 Operation Trk call Hold ext Press key Place a Serial Call to a co worker None Step Call Code 36 Operation Press key Step through a department group None Transfer Code 06 Operation Establish call Hold Ext Press key Transfer a call None Trunk Group Routing Code 05 Operation Press key Access a trunk using Trunk Group Routing On red when active 9 Trunk Groups Code 02...

Page 2188: ...r Operation Press key Call Voice Mail or leave a message Flashes green on your key for your messages or flashes red for the Message Center 8 or 8 Code 78 0 Operation Set up call Press key Use Voice Mail Record Slow Flash red when active Voice Over Code 48 Operation Hear Off Hook Signaling tone Press key Initiate or respond to Voice Over On red when responding Hold Flash red when listening 6 Table ...

Page 2189: ...Not Disturb Activate DND On red when activated Code 04 Operation Press key Background Music Turn BGM on or off On red when activated 725 Code 05 Operation Press key Headset Operation Enable or disable Headset Operation On red when activated 734 Code 06 Operation Establish call Hold Ext Press key Transfer Transfer a call None Code 07 Operation Set up call Press key set up call to add Press key twic...

Page 2190: ... External Broadcast to an External Paging Zone On red when activated 703 zone Code 20 Operation Press key Paging External Broadcast to all External Paging Zones On red when activated 703 0 Code 21 zone 1 8 1 9 or 01 32 Operation Press Key Paging Internal Broadcast to an Internal Paging Zone On red when activated 701 zone Code 22 Operation Press key Paging Internal Broadcast to all Internal Paging ...

Page 2191: ...ey Dial a stored Group Speed Dialing number None 4 bin Code 29 Operation Place call Press key Repeat Redial Activate repeat redial while on a call Fast Flash while system waits to redial Code 30 Operation Save Place call Press key Redial Line or Speaker key Press key Save Number Dialed Save redial or check a saved number None 715 Code 31 Operation Store While on call Press key number to store Use ...

Page 2192: ...xtension Press key Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Override Override an extension Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb On red when activated 707 Code 38 Operation Leave message Call ext Press key OR Answer message Press key Message Waiting Answer Leave a Message Waiting None 0 or 0 Code 39 Operation Press key at destination and source ext Room Monitor Activate Room Monitor Fast Flash red at destinatio...

Page 2193: ...og in or log out of your Department Calling Group On when removed Off when installed 650 Code 47 dest ext Operation Press and hold key Reverse Voice Over Initiate Reverse Voice Over Full BLF red Code 48 Operation Hear Off Hook Signaling tones Press key Voice Over Initiate or respond to Voice Over On red when responding Hold Flash red when listening 690 Code 49 ext or voice mail number Operation Pr...

Page 2194: ... red for the Message Center 8 or 8 Code 78 Conversation Record Operation Press key Use Conversation Record Flashes red when recording Code 01 Trunk number 001 200 Operation Press key Central Office Calls Press a line key to place or answer a trunk call where trunks are 001 200 On green when seized on red when in use by other party Slow Flash green when ringing Hold flash when on Hold 9 Code 02 TRK...

Page 2195: ...e 04 orbit 01 64 Operation Place or answer call Press key Park Place a call into or retrieve a call from a Park Orbit Fast Flash when orbit is busy green at originator red at others 6 Park 6 pickup Code 06 Network number 1 50 Operation Press key Networking Access a networked trunk None Table 3 5 Function Key Codes by Number Continued To program a key press Speaker dial 751 for 2 digit codes or 752...

Page 2196: ...Take an ACD Group out of service for Group Supervisors only or Take all ACD Groups out of service for System Supervisors only On red when a group is out of service Code 15 Operation Call busy ACD agent Press key Terminal Monitor Monitor an ACD Agent s conversation On red while monitoring Off when not monitoring Code 16 Operation Press key to put agent on hold Press key again 1 to hang up agent or ...

Page 2197: ...mber Operation Press key Enable ACD overflow On red when activated Slowly flashes red when disabled Code 19 Operation Press key while on hook Vol Up or Vol Down to scroll Queue Status Check View the ACD Queue Status of each ACD group None Table 3 5 Function Key Codes by Number Continued To program a key press Speaker dial 751 for 2 digit codes or 752 for 3 digit codes press the key and enter the c...

Page 2198: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 3 44 Codes Tables THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 2199: ...HART This chapter provides an alphabetical listing of the features that are available with each software revision Note the following table provides a breakout of the availability of each feature by revision see Table 4 1 Feature Availability by Software Revision S Supported Feature N A Feature not supported for this software release E Supported and Enhanced ...

Page 2200: ...Key S S S S S S S S S S S S Attendant Call Queuing S S S S S S S S S S S S Automatic Call Distribution ACD S S S S S S E E S E S S Automatic Release S S S S S S S S S S S S Automatic Route Selection S S S S S S S S E S S S Background Music S S S S S S S S S S S S Barge In S S S S S S S S S S S S Battery Backup System Memory S S S S S S S S S S S S Battery Backup System Power S S S S S S S S S S S ...

Page 2201: ...S S S S Conference S S S S S S S S S S S S Conference Voice Call Privacy Release S S S S S S S S S S S S Continued Dialing S S S S S S S S S S S S Cordless DECT Terminals S S S S S S E S S S S S Cordless Telephone Connection S S S S S S S S S S S S Data Line Security S S S S S S S S S S S S Delayed Ringing S S S S S S S S S S S S Department Calling S S S S S S S S S S S S Department Step Calling S...

Page 2202: ...bility S S S S S E S S S S S S Electra Elite IPK Terminals S S S S S S S S S S S S Facsimile CO Branch Connection S S S S S S S S S S S S Flash S S S S S S E S S S S S Flexible System Numbering S S S S S S S S S S S S Flexible Timeouts S S S S S S S S S S S S Forced Trunk Disconnect S S S S S S S S S S S S General Purpose Relay N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A S S S S Group Call Pickup S S S S S S ...

Page 2203: ... E S S E S E S IP Trunk H3 23 S S S S S S S S S S S S IPK IPK II Migration N A N A N A S S S S S S S S S IP Video Doorphone N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A S S IP Digital Call Logging N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A S E S ISDN Compatibility S S S S E E S S S S S S IVR Appointment Reminder Server N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A S S S S IVR Broadcast Server N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N ...

Page 2204: ... S S S S S Off Hook Signaling S S S S S S S S S S S S One Touch Calling S S S S S S S S S S S S Operator S S S S S S S S S S S S OPX Off Premise Extension S S S S S S S S S S S S Paging External S S S S S S S S S S S S Paging External VRS N A N A N A N A N A N A S S S S S S Paging Internal S S S S S S S S S S S S Park S S S S E S E S S S S S PBX Compatibility S S S S S S S S S S S S PC Programming...

Page 2205: ... Selectable Display Messaging S S S S S S S S S S S S Selectable Ring Tones S S S S S S S S S S S S Serial Call S S S S S S S S S S S S Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A S S Single Line Telephones Analog 500 2500 Sets S S S S S S S S S S S S SLT Adapter S S S S S S S S S S S S SMB8000 Communications Analyst S S S S S S E S S S S S SMB8000 Conference Br...

Page 2206: ... S S S S S S S S TAPI Compatibility S S S S S E S S S S S S Tone Override S S S S S S S S S S S S Traffic Reports S S S S S S S S S S S S Transfer S S S S S S S S S S S S Trunk Group Routing S S S S S S S S S S S S Trunk Groups S S S S S S S S S S S S Trunk Queuing Camp On S S S S S S S S S S S S UCB Unified Communications for Business N A S S S S S E S S S S S UM8000 Mail S S S E E S S S S S S S ...

Page 2207: ...Setting N A N A N A N A N A S S S S S S S Voice Call Recording N A N A N A N A S S S E S S S S Voice Mail Integration Analog S S S S S S S S S S S S Voice Mail Message Indication on Line Keys S S S S S S S S S S S S Voice Over S S S S S S S S S S S S Voice Response System VRS S S S S E S S S S S E S Voice Response System VRS Embedded VRS N A N A N A N A N A N A S S S S S S Voice Response System VR...

Page 2208: ...Issue 13 0 UNIVERGE SV8100 4 10 Feature Availability by Software Revision THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ...

Page 2209: ......

Page 2210: ...FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL NEC Corporation of America Issue 13 0 Version 9500 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands